Download Y106-E1-09_4 - Products

SafetySenorsTOC.fm Page 236 Friday, October 31, 2008 1:02 PM
Safety Sensors
NEW PRODUCT
MS4800 Series
Safety Light Curtain
P-246
236
SafetySenorsTOC.fm Page 237 Friday, October 31, 2008 1:02 PM
Safety Sensor Product Selection
238
Precautions for All Safety Sensors
242
Safety Light Curtain
MS4800 Series
246
Safety Light Curtain (Type 4)
F3SJ Ver.2
282
358
Wire-saving Device for F3SJ
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
448
F3SN-A@SS
F3SS
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Single-beam Safety Sensor for Long Distance Detection
F3SP-T01
432
F39-TC5
E3ZS/E3FS
F3SJ Ver.2
Single-beam Safety Sensor
MS4800
410
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
F3SN-A@SS
Product
Selection
Safety Light Curtain/Multi-beam Safety Sensor
Safety
Sensors
378
F3SS
F3SH-A
E3FS
E3ZS
Multi-beam Safety Sensor
F3SN-A@SS
378
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SP-T01
Safety Light Curtain
F39-TC5
368
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SP-T01
MS4800
Safety Terminal Relays (for F3SJ-A@@@@P@@)
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
360
Product
Selection
F39-TC5
Safety
Sensors
Connector Terminal Box (Muting Terminals for F3SJ-A)
Product Discontinuation and Recommended Substitute Products
No information on Product Discontinuation and Recommended Substitute of Safety Sensors available.
237
SafetySensorProduct_Selection.fm Page 238 Friday, October 31, 2008 1:02 PM
Safety Sensor Product Selection
Confirming Worker Safety while Maintaining
Optimum Operability
Narrow
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
• All Safety Sensors conform to international standards
(IEC61496).
• Our complete lineup provide a product for virtually any safety
application, including various sensing distances, smallest
detectable object sizes, and safety categories.
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
For equipment
and machines
Openings
Sensing
Distance:
10 m max.
Wide
Openings
Safety Light Curtain
TYPE4 : MS4800
246
F3SL
F3SL
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
For work cells
and integrated
lines
Sensing
Distance:
10 m min.
Mirrors
F39-MLG
Single-beam Safety Sensor
TYPE4 : F3SS
448
238
SafetySensorProduct_Selection.fm Page 239 Friday, October 31, 2008 1:02 PM
Safety Sensor Product Selection
Finger Protection
Single-beam Safety Sensor
TYPE4: E3ZS
TYPE4:
F3SJ-A@@@@@14
282
TYPE4:
F3SN-A@@@@P14
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
458
F3SL
TYPE3 : OS3101
TYPE4:
F3SN-A@@@@P70
378
TYPE2:
F3SN-B@@@@P70
378
TYPE4:
F3SH-A09P03
F3SN-A@SS
Safety Laser Scanner
Body Protection
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
652
F3SP-T01
Safety Controller
F3SX
F3SJ Ver.2
Safety Light Curtain
F39-TC5
282
F3SJ Ver.2
TYPE4:
F3SJ-A@@@@@55
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Leg/Body Protection
Product
Selection
292, 382, 416
378
F3SJ Ver.2
Safety Light Curtain
Safety
Sensors
Special Controller
F3SP-B1P
TYPE4:
F3SJ-A@@@@@30
282
TYPE4:
F3SN-A@@@@P40
378
TYPE2:
F3SN-B@@@@P40
F3SS
Special Controllers
Hand/Arm/Body Protection
E3FS
E3ZS
Type2 or type4 according to risk
assessment
F3SL
410
Safety Light Curtain
F3SN-A@SS
448
F3SJ Ver.2
Safety Light Curtain
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Note: The sensing
distance is 60 m.
F3SP-T01
TYPE4: F3SS
F39-TC5
432
F3SJ Ver.2
Note: Use in combination
with the Controller.
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
TYPE4:
F3SJ-A@@@@@20
F3SJ-A@@@@@25
282
TYPE4:
F3SN-A@@@@P25
378
TYPE2:
F3SN-B@@@@P25
378
TYPE4:
F3SN-A@@@@P25-SS
TYPE4: E3FS
Product
Selection
Hand Protection
432
Safety
Sensors
F3SJ Ver.2
Safety Light Curtain
378
Note: Use in combination
with the Controller.
378
239
SafetySensorProduct_Selection.fm Page 240 Friday, October 31, 2008 1:02 PM
Safety Sensor Product Selection
Safety Light Curtain Specifications
Application
Model
Finger
Protection
Hand
Protection
Leg/Body
Protection
Fixed
Blanking
●
MSF4800B
●
MS4800A
●
●
MSF4800A
●
●
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
F3SJ-A@14
●
●
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ-A@20
●
●
F3SJ-A@25
●
●
●
F3SJ-A@30
●
●
F3SJ-A@55
F3SN-A@P14-@
●
●
●
●
F3SN-A@P25-@
●
F3SN-A
(Refer to page 378)
●
F3SN-A@P40-@
●
● (5 to 30)
F3SN-A@P70-@
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SN-A@SS
(Refer to page 410)
F3SN-A@P25SS-@
F3SH
(Refer to page 378)
F3SH-A09P03-@
●
●
●
● (4)
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
●
F3SN-B@P25-@
F3SN-B
(Refer to page 378)
For Human
Detection
(No. of Beams)
MS4800B
MS4800 Series
(Refer to page 246)
F3SJ Ver.2
(Refer to page 282)
Hand/Arm/
Body
Protection
●
F3SN-B@P40-@
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
● (5 to 30)
F3SN-B@P70-@
*1. Muting Module MS4800-RM6 (sold separately) is required.
*2. The sensing distance for the F3SJ-A@20 with 110 to 166 beams, the F3JA@25 with 83 to 125 beams, the F3SJ-A@30 with 70 to 100 beams,
and the F3SJ-A@55 with 34 to 50 beams, is 7 meters.
Single-beam Safety Sensor Specifications
Main Unit Material
F3SL
F3SL
Model
E3ZS
(Refer to page 432)
Controller
Plastic
Safety Category
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3ZS-T81A
●
Required
F3SX
2
E3FS-10B4 2M
●
Required
F3SX
2
F3SX
2
E3FS
(Refer to page 432)
F3SS
F3SS
F3SS
(Refer to page 448)
Metal
E3FS-10B4-M1-M
●
Required
F3SS-AT60P
●
Not required
4
Safety Laser Scanner Specifications
Model
OS3101
(Refer to page 458)
240
OS3101-2-PN-S
Detection Capability
Opaque objects : 62-mm dia.
(1.8% min. reflection factor)
Detection Angle
180°
Safety Category
3
SafetySensorProduct_Selection.fm Page 241 Friday, October 31, 2008 1:02 PM
Safety Sensor Product Selection
Application
Floating
Blanking
Sensing Distance
Safety
Category
Muting
5m
●
4
20 m
4
20 m
4
20 m
4
9 m *2
●
4
7m
●
4
10 m
●
4
10 m
●
4
10 m
●
4
3.5 m
4
10 m
2
10 m
2
10 m
2
10 m
F3SS
●
E3FS
E3ZS
●
F3SL
9 m *2
F3SN-A@SS
4
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
●
F3SP-T01
●
F39-TC5
9 m *2
F3SJ Ver.2
4
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
●
Product
Selection
●
Safety
Sensors
9 m *2
F3SS
4
E3FS
E3ZS
●
F3SL
●
F3SN-A@SS
9m
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
4
F3SP-T01
●
F39-TC5
●
F3SJ Ver.2
20 m
60 m
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
4
40 m
Product
Selection
● *1
20 m
Safety
Sensors
●
10 m
Sensing Distance
5m
10 m
20 m
40 m
60 m
40 m
60 m
3m
10 m
10 m
60 m
Sensing Distance
5m
10 m
20 m
Protective Area
4m
Warning Area
15m
241
Safety_Sensors_CN.fm Page 242 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:54 PM
Precautions for All Safety Sensors
Refer to the “Safety Precautions” section for each Sensor for specific precautions applicable to each Sensor.
!WARNING
Installation Conditions
Detection Zone and Intrusion Path
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Install a protective structure so that the hazardous part of
a machine can only be reached by passing through the
sensor's detection zone. Install the sensors so that part
of the person is always present in the detection zone
when working in a machine's hazardous areas.
If a person is able to step into the hazardous area of a
machine and remain behind the Safety Light Curtain's
detection zone, configure the system with an interlock
function that prevents the machine from being restarted.
Otherwise it may result in heavy injury.
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
Correct Installation
Correct Installation
A person can only reach the
hazardous part of the machinery
by passing through the sensor's
detection zone.
A person enters the detection zone
during operation.
Incorrect Installation
Incorrect Installation
A person can reach the hazardous
part of the machinery without
passing through the sensor's
detection zone.
A person is between the sensor's
detection zone and the hazardous
part of the machinery.
Install the interlock reset switch in a location that
provides a clear view of the entire hazardous area and
where it cannot be activated from within the hazardous
area.
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
The Safety Light Curtain cannot protect a person from an
object flying from a hazardous area. Install protective
cover(s) or fence(s).
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
Safety Distance
The safety distance is the distance that must be set between the
Safety Sensor and a machine's hazardous part to stop the
hazardous part before a person or object reaches it. The safety
distance varies according to the standards of each country and the
individual specifications of each machine. In addition, the calculation
of the safety distance differs if the direction of approach is not
perpendicular to the detection zone of the Safety Sensor.
Always refer to relevant standards.
Safety distance (S)
F3SS
F3SS
Hazardous
area
242
Make sure to secure the safety distance (S) between the
Safety Sensor and the hazardous part. Otherwise, the
machine may not stop before a person reaches the
hazardous part, resulting in serious injury.
Note: The response time of a machine is the time period from when
the machine receives a stop signal to when the machine's
hazardous part stops.
Measure the response time on the actual system. Also,
periodically check that the response time of the machine has
not changed.
<Safety Distance for a Safety Light Curtain>
How to calculate the safety distance specified by International
standard ISO13855-2002 (European standard EN999-1999)
(Reference)
If a person approaches the detection zone of the Safety Light Curtain
perpendicularly, calculate the safety distance as shown below.
S = K x T + C . . . Eq. (1)
• S: Safety distance
• K: Approach speed to the detection zone
• T: Total response time of the machine and Safety Light Curtain
• C: Additional distance calculated by the detection capability of the
Safety Light Curtain
<System that has detection capability of 40 mm max.>
Use K = 2,000 mm/s and C = 8 x (d - 14 mm) in equation (1) for the
calculation.
S = 2,000 mm/s x (Tm + Ts) + 8 x (d - 14 mm)
• S = Safety distance (mm)
• Tm = Machine's response time (s)
• Ts = Response time of the Safety Light Curtain from ON to OFF (s) *
• d = Size of Safety Light Curtain‘s detection capability (mm) *
* These values differ depending on the Switch. Refer to the
“Precautions for Correct Use” for the Switch you are using.
[Calculation example]
When Tm = 0.05 s, Ts = 0.01 s, and d = 14 mm:
S = 2,000 mm/s x (0.05 s + 0.01 s) + 8 x (14 mm - 14 mm)
= 120 mm . . . Eq. (2)
If the result is less than 100 mm, use S = 100 mm.
If the result exceeds 500 mm, use the following equation
where K = 1,600 mm/s.
S = 1,600 mm/s x (Tm + Ts) + 8 x (d - 14 mm) . . . Eq. (3)
If the result of this Eq. (3) is less than 500 mm,
use S = 500 mm.
Safety_Sensors_CN.fm Page 243 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:54 PM
Precautions for All Safety Sensors
<Systems with a Smallest Detectable Object Size (Diameter)
Greater than 40 mm or Systems Using Multi-beam Safety Sensors>
Assuming K = 1,600 mm/s and C = 850 mm, the following calculation
is made using Eq. (1).
S = 1,600 mm/s x (Tm + Ts) + 850 … Eq. 4,
• S = Safety distance (mm)
• Tm = Machine's response time (s)
• Ts = Response time of the Safety Light Curtain from ON to OFF (s)
Calculation example:
When Tm = 0.05 s and Ts = 0.01 s,
S = 1,600 mm/s x (0.05 s + 0.01 s) + 850 mm = 946 mm
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
Method for Calculating the Safety Distance as Provided by
ANSI/RIA R15.06 (USA)
(Reference)
<Systems with a Smallest Detectable Object Size (Diameter) Greater
than 64 mm and Less than 600mm>
The safety distance is calculated based on the following concepts
when the human body intrudes perpendicular to the detection zone of
the Safety Light Curtain.
S = K x (Ts + Tc + Tr ) + Dpf
• S: Safety distance
• K = Intrusion speed into detection zone (1,600 mm/s min.
recommended by OSHA)
• Ts = Stop time of machine/equipment (s)
• Tr = Light curtain ON-to-OFF response time (s)
• Tc = Maximum response time of the machine/equipment braking
circuit required to operate the brake (s)
• Dpf = Additional distance (mm)
If the Sensor is installed with the lowest beam height above the floor
at 300 mm or lower and the highest beam height above the floor at
1,200 mm or higher, the Dpf will be 900 mm.
If the Sensor is installed with the lowest beam height above the floor
at 300 mm or lower and the highest beam height above the floor at
900 mm or higher, the Dpf will be 1,200 mm.
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
[Calculation example]
When K = 1,600 mm/s, Ts + Tc = 0.06 s, brake monitor setting time =
0.1 s, Tr = 0.01 s, d = 14 mm:
Tbm = 0.1 - 0.06 = 0.04 s
Dpf = 3.4 x (14 - 7.0) = 23.8 mm
S = 1,600 x (0.06 + 0.01 + 0.04) + 23.8 = 199.8 mm
F3SP-T01
According to ANSI's formula, Dpf is calculated as shown below:
Dpf = 3.4 x (d - 7.0): Where d is the detection capability of the Safety
Light Curtain (unit: mm)
F39-TC5
• Dpf = Additional distance
F3SJ Ver.2
If a machine has a brake monitor, "Tbm = Brake monitor setting time
- (Ts + Tc)". If it has no brake monitor, we recommend using 20% or
more of (Ts + Tc) as additional time.
300
MS4800
• Ts = Machine's stop time (s)
• Tr = Response time of the Safety Light Curtain from ON to OFF (s)
• Tc = Machine control circuit's maximum response time required to
activate its brake (s)
• Tbm = Additional time (s)
900
300
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Approach speed K is not specified in the ANSI B.11.19 standard. To
determine the value of K to apply, consider all factors, including the
operator's physical ability.
1,200
Height of the lowest beam
= 300 mm or less
Height of the highest beam
= 900 mm or greater
Dpf=1,200mm
Product
Selection
• S: Safety distance
• K: Approach speed to the detection zone (the value recommended
by OSHA standard is 1,600 mm/s)
Height of the lowest beam
= 300 mm or less
Height of the highest beam
= 1,200 mm or greater
Dpf=900mm
Safety
Sensors
How to calculate the safety distance specified by
American standard ANSI B11.19
(Reference)
<Systems with a Smallest Detectable Object Size (Diameter) Less
than 64 mm>
If a person approaches the detection zone of the Safety Light Curtain
perpendicularly, calculate the safety distance as shown below.
S = K x (Ts + Tc + Tr + Tbm) + Dpf
[Calculation example]
K = 1,600 mm/s, Ts + Tc = 0.06s,
If Tr = 0.01 s and Dpf = 900 mm:
S = 1,600 x (0.06 + 0.01) + 900 = 1,012 mm
<Safety Distance for a Single-beam Safety Sensor>
How to calculate the safety distance specified by International
standard ISO13855-2002 (European standard EN999-1999)
(Reference)
(With Intrusion Perpendicular to the Detection Zone)
Safety distance (S) = Intrusion speed into the detection zone (K)
x Total response time for the machine and
Sensor (T)
+ Additional distance calculated based on the
detection capability of the Sensor (C)
The safety distance varies with national standards and individual
machine standards. The equation is also different if the direction of
intrusion is not perpendicular to the detection zone of the Sensor. Be
sure to refer to related standards.
Here T = T1 + T2 + T3
Where
T1 = Maximum machine stop time (s)
T2 = Sensor response time (s)
(From ON to OFF: 2.0 ms for the E3FS, 1.0 ms for the E3ZS, 35
ms for the F3SS)
T3 = F3SX response time (s)
(From ON to OFF: Refer to Response Time on page 659.)
The maximum stop time for a machine is the time it takes to actually
stop dangerous parts after the machine receives a stop signal from
the F3SX.
!WARNING
Measure the actual maximum stop time for the machine
and the periodically check it to see if the time changes.
• K and C are as follows for Single-beam Safety Sensors.
1. When a Single-beam Safety Sensor is used alone (when the risk
assessment indicates that a single beam is sufficient)
K = 1,600 mm/s
C = 1,200 mm
Height of the beam from the ground or from a reference surface:
750 mm (EN999 recommendation)
2. When multiple Single-beam Safety Sensors are installed at
different heights.
K = 1,600 mm/s
C = 850 mm
The beam heights in the following table are the EN999
recommendations.
No. of beams
Height from the reference surface
(example: the floor)
2
400 mm, 900 mm
3
300 mm, 700 mm, 1100 mm
4
300 mm, 600 mm, 900 mm, 1200 mm
243
Safety_Sensors_CN.fm Page 244 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:54 PM
Precautions for All Safety Sensors
Installation
Distance from Glossy Surface
Prevention of Mutual Interference
Install the sensor system so that it is not affected by
reflection from a glossy surface. Failure to do so may
hinder detection, resulting in serious injury.
The emitter and the receiver to be set facing each other
should be a pair of the same set. Erroneous combination
may create a zone where objects cannot be detected.
Install the sensor system at distance D or further from
highly reflective surfaces such as metallic walls, floors,
ceilings, or workpieces, as shown below.
<Side View>
Do not use a sensor system in a reflective configuration.
Doing so may hinder detection.
Mirrors can be used change the optical route.
<Top View>
Reflective surface
Reflective ceiling
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
D
Emitter
D
Emitter
Receiver
Receiver
Detection zone
L
L
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
=5° (F3SN-A, F3SN-A@SS,
F3SH-A, F3SJ)
=10° (F3SN-B)
D
Reflective floor
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Distance between
emitter and receiver
(Detection Distance)
Allowable installation distance D
Type 4
Type 2
MS4800
MS4800
For 0.2 to 3 m
0.13 m
0.26 m
For 3 m or more
L/2 x tan5°
= L x 0.044 (m)
L/2 x tan10°
= L x 0.088 (m)
Others
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
To use the Safety Light Curtain in PSDI mode (restart of
cycle operation by the sensor), you must configure an
appropriate circuit between the Safety Light Curtain and
the machine. For details about PSDI, refer to
OSHA1910.217, IEC61496-1, and other relevant
standards and regulations.
Do not try to disassemble, repair, or modify this product.
Doing so may cause the safety functions to stop working
properly.
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
Do not use the Safety Light Curtain in environments
where flammable or explosive gases are present. Doing
so may result in explosion.
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Perform daily and 6-month inspections for the Safety
Light Curtain. Otherwise, the system may fail to work
properly, resulting in serious injury.
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
244
When using more than 1 set of Safety Light Curtain,
install them so that mutual interference does not occur,
such as by configuring series connections or using
physical barriers between adjacent sets.
Safety_Sensors_CN.fm Page 245 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:54 PM
Precautions for All Safety Sensors
Precautions for Safe Use
Do not used the product in atmospheres or environments that exceed
product ratings
(2)Install a light interrupting wall in between sensors.
Correct
Emitter 1
Installation
Receiver 1
Emitter 2
Receiver 2
Prevention of Mutual Interference
For series connection
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
Receiver 2
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Emitter 2
Product
Selection
Receiver 2
Receiver 1
Safety
Sensors
Emitter 2
Emitter 1
F3SS
Receiver 1
D
Emitter 2
θ
Receiver 2
L
D
Incorrect
Receiver 1
E3FS
E3ZS
Incorrect
Emitter 1
F3SN-A@SS
Emitter 1
θ
Receiver 2
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Receiver 1 Emitter 2
F3SP-T01
Correct
Receiver 1
Incorrect
Emitter 1
F39-TC5
L
F3SJ Ver.2
Correct
Emitter 1
MS4800
(3)Install the light curtains facing away from the one another to
eliminate mutual interference.
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
When installing two or more pairs of light curtains independently from
each other due to inconvenience of wiring or other reason, take
proper measures to prevent mutual interference. If mutual
interference occurs, a lockout condition will result for the Safety Light
Curtain.
• Installation which may cause mutual interference
Product
Selection
For no series connection
Light interrupting wall
Safety
Sensors
Refer to the “Precautions for Correct Use” for individual models for
information on preventing mutual interference of linkable Safety Light
Curtains.
Emitter 2
Receiver 2
Distance between
emitter and receiver
(Detection Distance)
Allowable installation distance D
θ = 5° (F3SN-A, F3SN-A@SS,
F3SH-A, F3SJ)
θ= 10° (F3SN-B)
Type 4
Type 2
For 0.2 to 3 m
0.26 m
0.52 m
For 3 m or more
L x tan5°
= L x 0.088 (m)
L x tan10°
= L x 0.18 (m)
Operating range
Chattering may occur in the output when the distance between the
emitter and the receiver is less than 0.2 m. Use only in the rated
operating range.
(4)Use a spatter protection slit cover. (F3SN and F3SH)
(5)Shorten the detection distance by setting with a setting tool. (F3SJ)
• Installation to prevent mutual interference
(1)Install so that the two light curtains emit in the opposite directions
(staggered).
Before changing
Emitter
Receiver
Correct
Receiver 1
Ambient light
Emitter 1 Emitter 2
Receiver 2
Emitter
Receiver
After changing
Emitter
Receiver
Ambient light
Correct
Correct
Receiver 1
Emitter 1
Emitter 2
Receiver 2
Emitter 1
Receiver 1
Emitter
Receiver 2
Receiver
Emitter 2
245
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 246 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
Safety Light Curtain
MS4800 Series
Safety Light Curtains with Durable,
Impact-resistant Body and Long,
20-m Sensing Distance
MS/MSF4800A Advanced Series
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
• Programming and Diagnostics Module (PDM) makes it easy
to set functions.
• Series connection is possible only with the MSF4800A.
• Blanking can be set.
• Muting is possible only with the MSF4800A by using the
MS4800-RM6 Resource Module.
MS/MSF4800B Basic Series
• Features all necessary basic Safety Light Curtain functions.
• Series connection is possible only with the MSF4800B.
• Programming and Diagnostics Module (PDM) makes it easy
to set functions.
Be sure to read the Precautions for Safe
Use on page 273.
Features
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
Durable Housing with a Thickness of 3
mm Min. Withstands Vibration and
Impacts
A Wide Lineup for a Variety of Applications
Two series are available to meet your needs: the Advanced Series
with sophisticated functions and the Basic Series with specialized,
basic functions.
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
Unlike conventional Safety Light Curtains, the MS4800 Series uses a
thick aluminum case (3 mm at its thinnest parts).
This makes it ideal for applications with considerable vibration or
impacts.
3mm
Minimum
detectable Beam gap
object
Advanced Series
MS/MSF4800A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Basic Series
MS/MSF4800B
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
Long Maximum Sensing Distance of 20 m
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
The long, 20-m maximum sensing distance of the MS4800 Series
marks the highest level in the industry.
Even in applications where large, complicated machines are guarded,
the use of mirrors can reduce the number of Safety Light Curtains
required.
Mirror
246
Protective
height
30-mm
diameter
20 mm
280 to 2,120 mm
40-mm
diameter
30 mm
360 to 2,040 mm
30-mm
diameter
20 mm
280 to 2,120 mm
40-mm
diameter
30 mm
360 to 2,040 mm
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 247 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
Series Connection of Up to Four Systems with No Controller Necessary
(Allowing a total of 256 beams max.) (MSF4800 only)
Up to four systems can be connected in series (for a total of 256 beams) without having to connect a controller. Models for which the smallest
detectable object is different can even be connected to respond flexibly to virtually any application.
Series Connection Cables (for Transmitter)
MS4800-CBLTXIC-@M
Transmitter
Total of 256 beams
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
Series Connection Cables (for Receiver)
MS4800-CBLRXIC-@M
Product
Selection
MSF4800A/B Master
Safety
Sensors
Receiver
MSF4800 Slave
Intuitive Operation with the Programming and Diagnostics Module (PDM)
Complete with an LCD that displays in either English or Japanese, the PDM makes it easy and intuitive to program, change settings, and
troubleshoot the MS4800 Series.
• Easy operation with five function buttons.
• Allows setting changes and status monitoring.
• IP65 protection.
• Safety outputs operate while the PDM is connected, making it possible to monitor during operation.
MAIN
LOAD CONFIG
VIEW/EDIT CONFIG
SAVE CONFIG
Connect to the PDM
connection port at the
bottom of the Safety
Light Curtain. Power is
supplied from the
Safety Light Curtain.
PROGRAM BLANKING
SYSTEM
LOGOUT
The interactive menu
simplifies operation.
(The Safety Light Curtain settings
must be loaded in advance.)
Easy-to-understand Individual Beam Indicators (IBI)
Receiver
Receiver
Beams are shifted
The MS4800-series Receiver is equipped with OMRON STI's unique Individual Beam Indicator (IBI) function. When a beam is interrupted, or when
it is out of alignment, an individual LED lights at each corresponding Receiver beam position to notify the operator. This makes it easy to align
beams even from a distance. An error code is also displayed when an error is occurs. (This function is provided only on the Receiver.)
Transmitter
Transmitter
When the beams
are not aligned...
When the beams are aligned,
all IBIs turn OFF.
The IBIs turn ON at the positions
where the beams are shifted.
The IBIs turn ON at the positions where the beams are interrupted.
This notifies the operator that the beams are interrupted.
247
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 248 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
Four Blanking Functions for Disabling Beams (Advanced series only)
When a machine or a workpiece is present inside the sensing area of the Safety Light Curtain, the output
turns OFF and the machine cannot be started.
However, a blanking function can be used to disable the appropriate beams of the Safety Light Curtain
and allow work to continue without stopping the machine. The MS4800 Series provides four blanking
functions to combine both safety and productivity in a wide range of applications.
Fixed Blanking
Fixed Blanking
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
This function is used when a machine or workpiece constantly interrupts beams in a part of the sensing
area. Fixed Blanking allows the Safety Light Curtain to remain in the RUN state while the obstruction is
fixed (as a non-moving object) within the sensing area. The output is turned OFF when a beam other than
the set fixed blanking beams is interrupted, or when light is incident on a fixed blanking beam.
Floating Blanking
This function turns OFF the output when the total number of interrupted beams inside the sensing area
exceeds the number of set beams (1 or 2).
Monitored Blanking
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Floating Blanking
This function is used when a machine or workpiece constantly interrupts beams in a part of the sensing
area and moves within the sensing area. Monitored Blanking allows the Safety Light Curtain to remain in
the RUN state while the obstruction moves within the sensing area. The output is turned OFF when the
machine or workpiece disappears from the monitored blanking area that was set by teaching, or when the
total number of interrupted beams increases due to a different obstruction.
Reduced Resolution Blanking
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
When the resolution of the MS/MSF4800A is reduced, the size of the smallest detectable object is
increased. The output will not turn OFF regardless of how many continuous interrupted beams there are
in the sensing area as long as the beams are fewer than the set number (1, 2, or 3 beams).
When an object whose size exceeds the set number of beams intrudes, the output is turned OFF. For
example, in an application where a conveyor cart approaches a robot work area, the Safety Light Curtain
can be set so that it does not detect only the wheels of the cart, allowing the MS/MSF4800A to be used
as a presence sensing device.
Reduced Resolution Blanking
Muting Functions for Temporarily Disabling the Safety Light Curtain
(MSF4800A only)
In applications where it is necessary for an object to regularly pass through the sensing area, for example to supply
workpieces to a machine, the output will turn OFF each time the object passes through, thus lowering productivity.
The muting function makes it possible to raise productivity in this kind of application by temporarily disabling the
Safety Light Curtain.
Select from among four muting modes to match each application with the appropriate number and placement of
muting sensors.
The MS4800-RM6 Resource
Module is required when
using the muting function.
Complies with the Newest Global Safety Standards
The MS4800-series Safety Light Curtain is a Type 4 safety sensor that can be used to configure a Category 4 safety circuit conforming with IEC
61496-1 and IEC 61496-2 international standards for Safety Light Curtains. It also complies with the IEC 61508 (SIL3) international standard for
function safety. These standards ensure safe, reliable use virtually anywhere.
Applications
Three-sided Guard
Muting
Floating Blanking
Reduced Resolution Blanking
The durable housing of the MS4800
Series makes it ideal for applications
with strong vibration, like metal
processing systems. Its sensing
distance of up to 20 m also lets you
use mirrors to guard three sides with
a single MS4800 system.
(MSF4800A only)
Combining the MSF4800A and the
MS4800-RM6 Muting Module lets
you set muting without having to use
an external controller.
(Advanced series only)
Floating blanking can be set for one
or two beams. When the number of
set beams are interrupted, the output
is turned OFF.
(Advanced series only)
Reducing the detection resolution of
the MS/MSF4800A Safety Light
Curtain increases the size of the
smallest detectable object. This can
improve productivity by allowing
objects such as carts to enter the
sensing area.
248
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 249 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
Ordering Information
Safety Light Curtains
Infrared light
MS/MSF4800-series Safety Light Curtains
Series
Model
MSF4800B-40-@
MSF4800-40-@
-XR2
Note: A 4-digit number indicating the protective height of the Light Curtain must be included in place of the box (@) in the model number.
*1. There is no muting function in Basic-series Safety Light Curtains.
*2. The same Slave Light Curtains are used for both the Advanced Series and Basic Series. These Slaves cannot be used individually.
Slave *2
Functional Comparison of Advanced Series and Basic Series
Series
Advanced Series
Basic Series
Model
MS/MSF4800A
MS/MSF4800B
Scan code for mutual interference reduction
Supported. *1
Supported. *1
External device monitoring (EDM)
Supported. *2
Supported. *2
Operation mode
Supported. *1
Supported. *1
Machine test signal (MTS)
Supported. *1
Supported. *1
Auxiliary output (PNP transistor × 1, or NPN transistor × 1)
Supported. *1
Supported.
(PNP/control output synchronizing only)
Function
Muting via the MS4800-RM6 Resource Module
Supported. *1
(MSF4800A only)
Floating blanking
Supported. *1
Fixed blanking
Supported. *1
Monitored blanking
Supported. *1
Reduced resolution blanking
Supported. *1
Sensing distance setting
Supported. *1
Start input method
Supported. *1
Response time adjustment
Supported. *1
*1. This function can be set by using the Programming and Diagnostics Module (PDM).
*2. This function can be set by using the PDM or a wiring connection.
Supported. *1
F3SS
Master
E3FS
E3ZS
MSF4800-30-@
-XR2
F3SN-A@SS
Slave *2
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
MS4800B-40-@
MSF4800B-30-@
F3SP-T01
360 to
2040
12 to 68
Master
F39-TC5
30 mm
MSF4800-40-@
-XR2
F3SJ Ver.2
40-mmdia.
Basic
Series
Slave *2
MS4800
MS4800B-30-@
14 to 106
MSF4800A-40-@
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
20 mm
Master
Product
Selection
30-mmdia.
MSF4800-30-@
-XR2
Safety
Sensors
280 to
2120
0.3 to
20 m
Slave *2
F3SS
MS4800A-40-@
12 to 68
MSF4800A-30-@
E3FS
E3ZS
360 to
2040
Advanced
Series
Master
F3SN-A@SS
MS4800A-30-@
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
280 to
2120
Series connection
(for muting *1)
F3SP-T01
14 to 106
Individual use
F39-TC5
30 mm
Protective
height
(mm)
F3SJ Ver.2
40-mmdia.
Number
of
beams
MS4800
20 mm
Sensing distance
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
30-mmdia.
Appearance
Product
Selection
Beam
gap
Safety
Sensors
Minimum
detectable
object
249
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 250 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
Safety Light Curtain Model List
Advanced-series Curtains Used Individually
(Minimum detectable object: 30-mm dia., Beam gap:
20 mm)
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
Model
MS4800A-30-0280
MS4800A-30-0320
MS4800A-30-0360
MS4800A-30-0400
MS4800A-30-0440
MS4800A-30-0480
MS4800A-30-0520
MS4800A-30-0560
MS4800A-30-0600
MS4800A-30-0640
MS4800A-30-0680
MS4800A-30-0720
MS4800A-30-0760
MS4800A-30-0800
MS4800A-30-0840
MS4800A-30-0880
MS4800A-30-0920
MS4800A-30-0960
MS4800A-30-1000
MS4800A-30-1040
MS4800A-30-1080
MS4800A-30-1120
MS4800A-30-1160
MS4800A-30-1200
MS4800A-30-1240
MS4800A-30-1280
MS4800A-30-1320
MS4800A-30-1360
MS4800A-30-1400
MS4800A-30-1440
MS4800A-30-1480
MS4800A-30-1520
MS4800A-30-1560
MS4800A-30-1600
MS4800A-30-1640
MS4800A-30-1680
MS4800A-30-1720
MS4800A-30-1760
MS4800A-30-1800
MS4800A-30-1840
MS4800A-30-1880
MS4800A-30-1920
MS4800A-30-1960
MS4800A-30-2000
MS4800A-30-2040
MS4800A-30-2080
MS4800A-30-2120
Number of beams Protective height (mm)
14
280
16
320
18
360
20
400
22
440
24
480
26
520
28
560
30
600
32
640
34
680
36
720
38
760
40
800
42
840
44
880
46
920
48
960
50
1000
52
1040
54
1080
56
1120
58
1160
60
1200
62
1240
64
1280
66
1320
68
1360
70
1400
72
1440
74
1480
76
1520
78
1560
80
1600
82
1640
84
1680
86
1720
88
1760
90
1800
92
1840
94
1880
96
1920
98
1960
100
2000
102
2040
104
2080
106
2120
Advanced-series Curtains Used Individually
(Minimum detectable object: 40-mm dia., Beam gap:
30 mm)
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
250
Model
MS4800A-40-0360
MS4800A-40-0480
MS4800A-40-0600
MS4800A-40-0720
MS4800A-40-0840
MS4800A-40-0960
MS4800A-40-1080
MS4800A-40-1200
MS4800A-40-1320
MS4800A-40-1440
MS4800A-40-1560
MS4800A-40-1680
MS4800A-40-1800
MS4800A-40-1920
MS4800A-40-2040
Number of beams Protective height (mm)
12
360
16
480
20
600
24
720
28
840
32
960
36
1080
40
1200
44
1320
48
1440
52
1560
56
1680
60
1800
64
1920
68
2040
Basic-series Curtains Used Individually
(Minimum detectable object: 30-mm dia., Beam gap:
20 mm)
Model
MS4800B-30-0280
MS4800B-30-0320
MS4800B-30-0360
MS4800B-30-0400
MS4800B-30-0440
MS4800B-30-0480
MS4800B-30-0520
MS4800B-30-0560
MS4800B-30-0600
MS4800B-30-0640
MS4800B-30-0680
MS4800B-30-0720
MS4800B-30-0760
MS4800B-30-0800
MS4800B-30-0840
MS4800B-30-0880
MS4800B-30-0920
MS4800B-30-0960
MS4800B-30-1000
MS4800B-30-1040
MS4800B-30-1080
MS4800B-30-1120
MS4800B-30-1160
MS4800B-30-1200
MS4800B-30-1240
MS4800B-30-1280
MS4800B-30-1320
MS4800B-30-1360
MS4800B-30-1400
MS4800B-30-1440
MS4800B-30-1480
MS4800B-30-1520
MS4800B-30-1560
MS4800B-30-1600
MS4800B-30-1640
MS4800B-30-1680
MS4800B-30-1720
MS4800B-30-1760
MS4800B-30-1800
MS4800B-30-1840
MS4800B-30-1880
MS4800B-30-1920
MS4800B-30-1960
MS4800B-30-2000
MS4800B-30-2040
MS4800B-30-2080
MS4800B-30-2120
Number of beams Protective height (mm)
14
280
16
320
18
360
20
400
22
440
24
480
26
520
28
560
30
600
32
640
34
680
36
720
38
760
40
800
42
840
44
880
46
920
48
960
50
1000
52
1040
54
1080
56
1120
58
1160
60
1200
62
1240
64
1280
66
1320
68
1360
70
1400
72
1440
74
1480
76
1520
78
1560
80
1600
82
1640
84
1680
86
1720
88
1760
90
1800
92
1840
94
1880
96
1920
98
1960
100
2000
102
2040
104
2080
106
2120
Basic-series Curtains Used Individually
(Minimum detectable object: 40-mm dia., Beam gap:
30 mm)
Model
MS4800B-40-0360
MS4800B-40-0480
MS4800B-40-0600
MS4800B-40-0720
MS4800B-40-0840
MS4800B-40-0960
MS4800B-40-1080
MS4800B-40-1200
MS4800B-40-1320
MS4800B-40-1440
MS4800B-40-1560
MS4800B-40-1680
MS4800B-40-1800
MS4800B-40-1920
MS4800B-40-2040
Number of beams Protective height (mm)
12
360
16
480
20
600
24
720
28
840
32
960
36
1080
40
1200
44
1320
48
1440
52
1560
56
1680
60
1800
64
1920
68
2040
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 251 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
Advanced-series Curtains Connected in Series
(Minimum detectable object: 30-mm dia., Beam gap:
20 mm)
Basic-series Curtains Connected in Series
(Minimum detectable object: 30-mm dia., Beam gap:
20 mm)
Masters
Masters
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
Number of beams Protective height (mm)
12
360
16
480
20
600
24
720
28
840
32
960
36
1080
40
1200
44
1320
48
1440
52
1560
56
1680
60
1800
64
1920
68
2040
F3SS
Model
MSF4800B-40-0360
MSF4800B-40-0480
MSF4800B-40-0600
MSF4800B-40-0720
MSF4800B-40-0840
MSF4800B-40-0960
MSF4800B-40-1080
MSF4800B-40-1200
MSF4800B-40-1320
MSF4800B-40-1440
MSF4800B-40-1560
MSF4800B-40-1680
MSF4800B-40-1800
MSF4800B-40-1920
MSF4800B-40-2040
E3FS
E3ZS
Number of beams Protective height (mm)
12
360
16
480
20
600
24
720
28
840
32
960
36
1080
40
1200
44
1320
48
1440
52
1560
56
1680
60
1800
64
1920
68
2040
F3SN-A@SS
Model
MSF4800A-40-0360
MSF4800A-40-0480
MSF4800A-40-0600
MSF4800A-40-0720
MSF4800A-40-0840
MSF4800A-40-0960
MSF4800A-40-1080
MSF4800A-40-1200
MSF4800A-40-1320
MSF4800A-40-1440
MSF4800A-40-1560
MSF4800A-40-1680
MSF4800A-40-1800
MSF4800A-40-1920
MSF4800A-40-2040
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Masters
F3SP-T01
Masters
F39-TC5
Basic-series Curtains Connected in Series
(Minimum detectable object: 40-mm dia., Beam gap: 30 mm)
F3SJ Ver.2
Advanced-series Curtains Connected in Series
(Minimum detectable object: 40-mm dia., Beam gap: 30 mm)
MS4800
Number of beams Protective height (mm)
14
280
16
320
18
360
20
400
22
440
24
480
26
520
28
560
30
600
32
640
34
680
36
720
38
760
40
800
42
840
44
880
46
920
48
960
50
1000
52
1040
54
1080
56
1120
58
1160
60
1200
62
1240
64
1280
66
1320
68
1360
70
1400
72
1440
74
1480
76
1520
78
1560
80
1600
82
1640
84
1680
86
1720
88
1760
90
1800
92
1840
94
1880
96
1920
98
1960
100
2000
102
2040
104
2080
106
2120
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Model
MSF4800B-30-0280
MSF4800B-30-0320
MSF4800B-30-0360
MSF4800B-30-0400
MSF4800B-30-0440
MSF4800B-30-0480
MSF4800B-30-0520
MSF4800B-30-0560
MSF4800B-30-0600
MSF4800B-30-0640
MSF4800B-30-0680
MSF4800B-30-0720
MSF4800B-30-0760
MSF4800B-30-0800
MSF4800B-30-0840
MSF4800B-30-0880
MSF4800B-30-0920
MSF4800B-30-0960
MSF4800B-30-1000
MSF4800B-30-1040
MSF4800B-30-1080
MSF4800B-30-1120
MSF4800B-30-1160
MSF4800B-30-1200
MSF4800B-30-1240
MSF4800B-30-1280
MSF4800B-30-1320
MSF4800B-30-1360
MSF4800B-30-1400
MSF4800B-30-1440
MSF4800B-30-1480
MSF4800B-30-1520
MSF4800B-30-1560
MSF4800B-30-1600
MSF4800B-30-1640
MSF4800B-30-1680
MSF4800B-30-1720
MSF4800B-30-1760
MSF4800B-30-1800
MSF4800B-30-1840
MSF4800B-30-1880
MSF4800B-30-1920
MSF4800B-30-1960
MSF4800B-30-2000
MSF4800B-30-2040
MSF4800B-30-2080
MSF4800B-30-2120
Product
Selection
Number of beams Protective height (mm)
14
280
16
320
18
360
20
400
22
440
24
480
26
520
28
560
30
600
32
640
34
680
36
720
38
760
40
800
42
840
44
880
46
920
48
960
50
1000
52
1040
54
1080
56
1120
58
1160
60
1200
62
1240
64
1280
66
1320
68
1360
70
1400
72
1440
74
1480
76
1520
78
1560
80
1600
82
1640
84
1680
86
1720
88
1760
90
1800
92
1840
94
1880
96
1920
98
1960
100
2000
102
2040
104
2080
106
2120
Safety
Sensors
Model
MSF4800A-30-0280
MSF4800A-30-0320
MSF4800A-30-0360
MSF4800A-30-0400
MSF4800A-30-0440
MSF4800A-30-0480
MSF4800A-30-0520
MSF4800A-30-0560
MSF4800A-30-0600
MSF4800A-30-0640
MSF4800A-30-0680
MSF4800A-30-0720
MSF4800A-30-0760
MSF4800A-30-0800
MSF4800A-30-0840
MSF4800A-30-0880
MSF4800A-30-0920
MSF4800A-30-0960
MSF4800A-30-1000
MSF4800A-30-1040
MSF4800A-30-1080
MSF4800A-30-1120
MSF4800A-30-1160
MSF4800A-30-1200
MSF4800A-30-1240
MSF4800A-30-1280
MSF4800A-30-1320
MSF4800A-30-1360
MSF4800A-30-1400
MSF4800A-30-1440
MSF4800A-30-1480
MSF4800A-30-1520
MSF4800A-30-1560
MSF4800A-30-1600
MSF4800A-30-1640
MSF4800A-30-1680
MSF4800A-30-1720
MSF4800A-30-1760
MSF4800A-30-1800
MSF4800A-30-1840
MSF4800A-30-1880
MSF4800A-30-1920
MSF4800A-30-1960
MSF4800A-30-2000
MSF4800A-30-2040
MSF4800A-30-2080
MSF4800A-30-2120
251
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 252 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
Advanced Series/Basic-series Curtains Connected in
Series
(Minimum detectable object: 30-mm dia., Beam gap:
20 mm)
Advanced Series/Basic-series Curtains Connected in
Series
(Minimum detectable object: 40-mm dia., Beam gap:
30 mm)
Slaves
Slaves
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
252
Model
MSF4800-30-0280-XR2
MSF4800-30-0320-XR2
MSF4800-30-0360-XR2
MSF4800-30-0400-XR2
MSF4800-30-0440-XR2
MSF4800-30-0480-XR2
MSF4800-30-0520-XR2
MSF4800-30-0560-XR2
MSF4800-30-0600-XR2
MSF4800-30-0640-XR2
MSF4800-30-0680-XR2
MSF4800-30-0720-XR2
MSF4800-30-0760-XR2
MSF4800-30-0800-XR2
MSF4800-30-0840-XR2
MSF4800-30-0880-XR2
MSF4800-30-0920-XR2
MSF4800-30-0960-XR2
MSF4800-30-1000-XR2
MSF4800-30-1040-XR2
MSF4800-30-1080-XR2
MSF4800-30-1120-XR2
MSF4800-30-1160-XR2
MSF4800-30-1200-XR2
MSF4800-30-1240-XR2
MSF4800-30-1280-XR2
MSF4800-30-1320-XR2
MSF4800-30-1360-XR2
MSF4800-30-1400-XR2
MSF4800-30-1440-XR2
MSF4800-30-1480-XR2
MSF4800-30-1520-XR2
MSF4800-30-1560-XR2
MSF4800-30-1600-XR2
MSF4800-30-1640-XR2
MSF4800-30-1680-XR2
MSF4800-30-1720-XR2
MSF4800-30-1760-XR2
MSF4800-30-1800-XR2
MSF4800-30-1840-XR2
MSF4800-30-1880-XR2
MSF4800-30-1920-XR2
MSF4800-30-1960-XR2
MSF4800-30-2000-XR2
MSF4800-30-2040-XR2
MSF4800-30-2080-XR2
MSF4800-30-2120-XR2
Number of beams Protective height (mm)
14
280
16
320
18
360
20
400
22
440
24
480
26
520
28
560
30
600
32
640
34
680
36
720
38
760
40
800
42
840
44
880
46
920
48
960
50
1000
52
1040
54
1080
56
1120
58
1160
60
1200
62
1240
64
1280
66
1320
68
1360
70
1400
72
1440
74
1480
76
1520
78
1560
80
1600
82
1640
84
1680
86
1720
88
1760
90
1800
92
1840
94
1880
96
1920
98
1960
100
2000
102
2040
104
2080
106
2120
Model
MSF4800-40-0360-XR2
MSF4800-40-0480-XR2
MSF4800-40-0600-XR2
MSF4800-40-0720-XR2
MSF4800-40-0840-XR2
MSF4800-40-0960-XR2
MSF4800-40-1080-XR2
MSF4800-40-1200-XR2
MSF4800-40-1320-XR2
MSF4800-40-1440-XR2
MSF4800-40-1560-XR2
MSF4800-40-1680-XR2
MSF4800-40-1800-XR2
MSF4800-40-1920-XR2
MSF4800-40-2040-XR2
Number of beams Protective height (mm)
12
360
16
480
20
600
24
720
28
840
32
960
36
1080
40
1200
44
1320
48
1440
52
1560
56
1680
60
1800
64
1920
68
2040
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 253 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
Accessories (Sold Separately)
Connector Cables with a Connector on One End
Type
Appearance
Transmitter
Cables
Specifications
M12 connector
(5-pin)
10 m
MS4800-CBLTXT-10M
15 m
MS4800-CBLTXT-15M
25 m
MS4800-CBLTXT-25M
5m
MS4800-CBLRXT-05M
Receiver
Cables
M12 connector
(8-pin)
10 m
MS4800-CBLRXT-10M
15 m
MS4800-CBLRXT-15M
25 m
MS4800-CBLRXT-25M
Cable
length
Model
0.3 m
MS4800-CBLTXIC-003M
0.5 m
MS4800-CBLTXIC-005M
Application
Extension cables for connector
cables with a connector on one
end.
Series Connection Cables
Type
Transmitter
Cables
Receiver
Cables
Appearance
Specifications
M12 connector
(4-pin)
M12 connector
(4-pin)
1m
MS4800-CBLTXIC-01M
2m
MS4800-CBLTXIC-02M
3m
MS4800-CBLTXIC-03M
5m
MS4800-CBLTXIC-05M
10 m
MS4800-CBLTXIC-10M
0.3 m
MS4800-CBLRXIC-003M
0.5 m
MS4800-CBLRXIC-005M
1m
MS4800-CBLRXIC-01M
2m
MS4800-CBLRXIC-02M
3m
MS4800-CBLRXIC-03M
5m
MS4800-CBLRXIC-05M
10 m
MS4800-CBLRXIC-10M
F3SS
M12 connector
(5-pin)
E3FS
E3ZS
MS4800-CBLTXT-05M
F3SN-A@SS
5m
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Model
F3SP-T01
Transmitter
Cables
Specifications
F39-TC5
Appearance
F3SJ Ver.2
Type
MS4800
Cable
length
Connector Cables with Connectors on Both Ends
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800-CBLRX-30M
Product
Selection
30 m
Safety
Sensors
MS4800-CBLRX-15M
F3SS
15 m
E3FS
E3ZS
MS4800-CBLRX-10M
F3SN-A@SS
10 m
For wiring safety circuits containing individual relays with forcibly
guided contacts, safety relay
units, safety controllers, etc.
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
MS4800-CBLTX-30M
F3SP-T01
30 m
F39-TC5
MS4800-CBLTX-15M
F3SJ Ver.2
15 m
MS4800
MS4800-CBLTX-10M
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
10 m
Application
Product
Selection
M12 connector
(8-pin)
Model
Safety
Sensors
Receiver
Cables
Cable
length
Application
For series connection.
253
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 254 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
Adaptor Cables for Replacement Use
Type
Appearance
Transmitter
Cables
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Receiver
Cables
Specifications
Cable length
Model
M12 connector
(8-pin)
0.22 m
MS4800-ADPT-TXM
For replacing an MS4600 (with
test input) with an MS4800.
M12 connector
(5-pin)
0.22 m
MS4800-ADPT-TXS
For replacing an F3SL or MS4600
(without test input) with an
MS4800.
M12 connector
(8-pin)
0.22 m
MS4800-ADPT-RX
For replacing an F3SL or MS4600
with an MS4800.
Specifications
Cable length
Model
Application
1m
MS4800-PMCTX-01M
5m
MS4800-PMCTX-05M
Application
Loose-wire Connectors for Relays
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
Type
Appearance
Transmitter
Cables
M12 connector
(5-pin)
Loose-wire connectors for mounting in relay boxes.
Receiver
Cables
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
1m
MS4800-PMCRX-01M
5m
MS4800-PMCRX-05M
M12 connector
(8-pin)
Programming and Diagnostics Module (PDM)
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
Appearance
Model
Remarks
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
MS4800-PDM
Cable length: 2 m
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Mirrors (12% Sensing Distance Attenuation)
Appearance
Mirror material
Width (mm)
Thickness (mm)
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
Glass mirror
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
254
145
32
Length (mm)
Model
406
F39-MLG0406
610
F39-MLG0610
711
F39-MLG0711
914
F39-MLG0914
1,067
F39-MLG1067
1,219
F39-MLG1219
1,422
F39-MLG1422
1,626
F39-MLG1626
1,830
F39-MLG1830
2,134
F39-MLG2134
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 255 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
MS4800-RM6 Connection Cables
Appearance
Cable length
Model
10 m
MS4800-CBLMT-10M
15 m
MS4800-CBLMT-15M
30 m
MS4800-CBLMT-30M
Application
For connecting an MSF4800A Receiver
and an MS4800-RM6 Resource Module.
Resource Module
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
MS4800 Cover
F3SN-A@SS
Spatter Protection Covers (for Both Transmitters and Receivers, 2 Covers Per Set) (10% Maximum Sensing Distance
Attenuation Per Cover)
Appearance
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
MSF4800-IP67-@ *
* A 4-digit number indicating the protective height of the Light Curtain must be included in place of the box (@) in the model number.
Type
F3SP-T01
Remarks
Accessories: Two mounting brackets (one
top, one bottom)
Material: Acryl
For series-connection use
F39-TC5
Model
MS4800-IP67-@ *
For individual use
F3SJ Ver.2
Appearance
MS4800
A special terminal module for using muting.
Water-resistant IP67 Cases (for Both Transmitters and Receivers, 2 Cases Per Set) (10% Maximum Sensing Distance
Attenuation Per Case)
Type
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800-RM6
Application
Product
Selection
Model
Safety
Sensors
Appearance
Model
MS4800WS-@ *
Remarks
Material: Acryl
* A 4-digit number indicating the protective height of the Light Curtain must be included in place of the box (@) in the model number.
255
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 256 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
Specifications (For details, refer to the Instruction Manual or User's Manual.)
Safety Light Curtains
MS/MSF4800-series Safety Light Curtains
Series
Model Individual use
Item
Series connection
Advanced Series
Basic Series
MS4800A-30-@
MS4800A-40-@
MS4800B-30-@
MS4800B-40-@
MSF4800A-30-@
MSF4800A-40-@
MSF4800B-30-@
MSF4800B-40-@
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Sensor type
Type 4 Safety Light Curtain
Setting tool connection
Connectable
Applicable safety category
Category 4, 3, 2, 1, or B
Minimum detectable object
Opaque object:
30-mm dia.
Opaque object:
40-mm dia.
Opaque object:
30-mm dia.
Opaque object:
40-mm dia.
Beam gap (P)
20 mm
30 mm
20 mm
30 mm
Number of beams (n)
14 to 106
12 to 68
14 to 106
12 to 68
Protective height (PH)
280 to 2120 mm
360 to 2040 mm
280 to 2120 mm
360 to 2040 mm
Sensing distance *1
0.3 to 20 m (selectable from 0.3 to 8 m with the Programming and Diagnostics Module)
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Lens diameter
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Response time
(under stable light
incident condition)
(Refer to page 257
for details.)
Diameter 7 mm
ON to OFF
Individual: 14 to 32 ms Individual: 14 to 23 ms Individual: 14 to 32 ms Individual: 14 to 23 ms
OFF to ON
320 ms max.
Startup waiting time
3.5 s max. for individual use, 4.5 s max. for series connection
Power supply voltage (Vs)
MS4800
MS4800
Current consumption *2 (no load)
24 VDC ±20% (ripple p-p: 5% max.)
Transmitter
285 mA max.
Receiver
450 mA max.
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Light source (emitted wavelength)
Infrared LEDs (wavelength: 880 nm)
Effective aperture angle (EAA)
Within ±2.5° for the Transmitter and Receiver at a sensing distance of at least 3 m according to
IEC 61496-2.
Control output (OSSD) *3
Output transistor: PNP × 2, Load current: 625 mA max. (at 24 VDC), short-circuit protection
Auxiliary output *3 (non-safety output)
Output transistor:
PNP × 1 or NPN × 1, selectable with the
Programming and Diagnostics Module, Load
current: 100 mA max. (at 24 VDC)
Output mode:
Control output synchronizing or alarm is
selectable with the Programming and
Diagnostics Module
Output operation mode
Control output 1, 2: Light-ON
Auxiliary output:
Control Output Synchronizing Mode: Auxiliary output goes ON when control output goes ON
Alarm Mode: Auxiliary output goes ON when the MS4800 enters alarm (lockout) condition
Input voltage
External device monitoring input ON voltage: 11 to 28.8 V, OFF voltage: 0 to 2.6 V
Start input ON voltage: 11 to 28.8 V, OFF voltage: 0 to 1.2 V
For the MS4800B, use NC contacts for the start input switch.
For the MS4800A, refer to Start Input Methods (MS/MSF4800A Only) on
page 266.
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
Internal indicators
Output transistor:
PNP × 1, Load current: 100 mA max. (at
24 VDC)
Output mode: Control output synchronizing
Transmitter
Transmitter Indicator (Yellow): Indicator is ON when transmitting
Receiver
Blanking Indicator (Orange): Indicator is ON in Blanking Active State
Interlock or Alarm (Lockout) Indicator: Indicator is ON in Interlock State, and indicator flashes in
Alarm (Lockout) State
Machine Run/Stop Indicator (Green/Red): Green indicator is ON when Control Output is ON, and
red indicator is ON when Control Output is OFF
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
The scan code (A/B) can be switched with the Programming and Diagnostics Module
Series connection
MSF4800 only
• Connectable segments: 4 max.
• Total number of beams: 256 max.
• Maximum cable length between segments: 10 m
• Response time when connected: Refer to page 257.
Test functions
• Self test (when power is turned ON and while power is supplied)
• External test (light emission stop function by test input)
F3SS
F3SS
Mutual interference prevention function
*1. Use of the Spatter Protection Cover causes a 10% maximum sensing distance attenuation.
*2. The consumption current must not exceed 1.35 A for both the control outputs and auxiliary output. The rated current is the sum of the
Transmitter (285 mA), Receiver (450 mA), control output 1 (625 mA), control output 2 (625 mA), and auxiliary output (100 mA).
*3. The 24-VDC value is a nominal value. The actual voltage depends on the supply voltage. Actual voltage = Supply voltage − 1 V.
256
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 257 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
Series
Item
Model Individual use
Series connection
Safety functions
71
23
38
60
114
32
53
72
126
32
53
115
168
41
68
127
180
41
68
169
223
50
83
181
235
50
83
224
256
59
99
236
256
59
99
Curtains Used in Series Connection (4-segment System)
Curtains Used in Series Connection (2-segment System)
Minimum number
of beams
Maximum number of beams
Response time (ms)
Normal
Delayed *
Normal
Delayed *
0
53
23
38
65
23
38
54
108
32
53
66
120
32
53
109
162
41
68
121
174
41
68
163
217
50
83
175
229
50
83
218
256
59
99
230
256
59
99
Minimum number
of beams
Maximum number
of beams
0
Response time (ms)
* Refer to Response Time Adjustment (MS/MSF4800A Only) on page 266.
Cable Extension Length
F3SS
38
17
Delayed *
E3FS
E3ZS
23
Normal
F3SN-A@SS
59
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
0
F3SP-T01
23
F39-TC5
14
F3SJ Ver.2
16
MS4800
Maximum number of beams
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Minimum number
of beams
Product
Selection
Delayed *
Safety
Sensors
Response time (ms)
Normal
F3SS
0
Response time (ms)
E3FS
E3ZS
Maximum number
of beams
F3SN-A@SS
Minimum number
of beams
Curtains Used in Series Connection (3-segment System)
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Response Time
Curtains Used Individually (1-segment System)
F3SP-T01
Applicable standards
F39-TC5
Accessories
F3SJ Ver.2
Materials
MS4800
Degree of protection
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Dielectric strength
Product
Selection
Protective circuit
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Insulation resistance
Safety
Sensors
Connection method
Advanced Series
Basic Series
MS4800A-30-@
MS4800A-40-@
MS4800B-30-@
MS4800B-40-@
MSF4800A-30-@
MSF4800A-40-@
MSF4800B-30-@
MSF4800B-40-@
• Selection of auto start mode and interlock
mode
• External device monitoring
• Muting (MSF4800A only)
• Selection of auto start mode and interlock
(MS4800-RM6 (sold separately) is required.)
mode
• Fixed blanking
• External device monitoring
• Floating blanking
• Monitored blanking
• Reduced resolution blanking
Power supply connectors (M12, Transmitter: 5-pin, Receiver: 8-pin)
Series-connection connectors: (M12, Transmitter: 4-pin, Receiver: 4-pin)
Output short-circuit protection, reverse polarity protection
Operating: −10 to 55°C (with no icing), storage: −25 to 70°C
95% max. (with no condensation)
20 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
Transmitter: 350 VAC 60 Hz 1 min
Receiver: 500 VDC 1 min
IP65 (IEC 60529)
Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 0.35-mm double amplitude, 20 sweeps in X, Y, and Z directions
Malfunction: 10G, 1,000 times in X, Y, and Z directions
Case: Aluminum with polyurethane powder coating
Cap: Polycarbonate
Test rod, Instruction Manual, mounting set (2 top, 2 bottom mounting brackets), surge absorber
IEC 61496-1, EN 61496-1, UL 61496-1 Type 4 ESPE (Electro-Sensitive Protective Equipment),
IEC 61496-2, prEN 61496-2, UL 61496-2 Type 4 AOPD (Active Opto-electronic Protective Devices), IEC 61508 SIL3
The maximum length and wire gauge for input and output signals are given in the following table.
Type
Receiver
Transmitter
Signal name
Control outputs 1 and 2
Auxiliary output
Start input
External device monitoring (EDM) input
+24 V, 0 V
+24 V, 0 V
Machine test signal (MTS)
Wire gauge
22 AWG (0.32 mm)
22 AWG (0.32 mm)
24 AWG (0.20 mm)
24 AWG (0.20 mm)
20 AWG (0.52 mm)
22 AWG (0.32 mm)
22 AWG (0.32 mm)
Rated maximum length
300-mA load: 45 m, 625-mA load: 22 m
50 m
50 m
50 m
1.8-A load: 12.5 m, 1-A load: 22 m
0.3-A load: 47 m
50 m
Note: Keep the cable length within the rated length. Failure to do so is dangerous because it may prevent safety functions from operating normally.
257
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 258 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
Accessories
Resource Module
Item
Model
MS4800-RM6
Input power supply
24 VDC ±20%, 30 mA max.
Ambient temperature
0 to 55°C
Ambient humidity
95% max. (with no condensation)
Storage temperature
−25 to 75°C
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Vibration resistance
Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 0.35-mm double amplitude, 20 sweeps in X, Y, and Z directions
Shock resistance
Malfunction: 10G, 1,000 times in X, Y, and Z directions
Degree of protection
IP20 (IEC 60529)
Muting sensor *1
PNP 24-VDC (power consumption: 20 mA) Dark-ON/Light-ON or NO/NC combination
Muting indicator output *2
10 to 100 mA (NPN), 30 VDC max.
Applicable safety category
IEC 61496-1 Type 4
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
*1. For details, refer to Mini Safe 4800 Series Light Curtains Installation and Operating Manual.
*2. The muting indicator output contains a current monitoring circuit to confirm normal operation. Connect an external indicator load that supplies
10 to 100 mA of current.
Programming and Diagnostics Module
Item
Model
MS4800-PDM
Display
LCD multi-line display
Language capability
English, Japanese
Degree of protection
Conforms to IP65
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
258
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 259 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
Connection Circuit Examples
Examples of Safety Circuits
Example When Using the MS/MSF4800 Individually (Category 4)
MS/MSF4800 Settings
• Use Start/Restart Interlock Mode. (Use the PDM to set the operation mode to Start/Restart Interlock Mode.)
• Use the external relay monitor function. (Use the PDM to turn ON the EDM function.)
• Use the test input. (Use the PDM to enable the test input.)
Transmitter
Receiver
Shield (Green)
Surge suppressor
0 V (Blue)
Surge suppressor
Control output 2 (White)
Control output 1 (Black)
Auxiliary output (Pink)
Start input (Yellow)
S2
External device monitoring input (Red)
+24 V (Brown)
+24 V (Brown)
Test input return (Black)
Test input (White)
0 V (Blue)
Shield (Green)
S1
PLC input *
F3SS
KM1, KM2 NC contacts
E3FS
E3ZS
KM1, KM2 NO contacts
F3SN-A@SS
Control output
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Start input switch (S2)
F3SP-T01
External test switch (S1)
*1. Make sure that both external devices have been suitably suppressed.
*2. For the MS/MSF4800B, use an NC contacts for the start input switch.
For the MS/MSF4800A, refer to Start Input Methods (MS/MSF4800A
Only) on page 266. When using Auto Start Mode, use the PDM to
check that the operation mode is set to Auto Start Mode (default), and
connect the start input to 0 V.
*3. With the default setting, the external relay monitor input (EDM) is set
so that the EDM is enabled and disabled with the start input. This will
prevent accessing the normal functionality of the start input.
To use both the start input and the EDM as shown in the example
safety circuits on this page, connect the PDM to the Receiver and use
the PDM to enable the EDM. If the EDM is not necessary, use the
PDM to disable the EDM, and then connect the EDM (red wire) to 0 V.
For details, refer to Mini Safe 4800 Series Light Curtains Installation
and Operating Manual.
*4. Fuse (provided by the customer).
*5. The test input is disabled with the default setting. To use the test
input, connect the PDM to the Receiver and enable the test input, and
use NC contacts for the test input.
F39-TC5
Light incident
Light interrupted
F3SJ Ver.2
PLC
MS4800
Ground
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
OUT
Product
Selection
IN
Safety
Sensors
0V
F3SS
24 VDC
E1
E3FS
E3ZS
M
F3SN-A@SS
*1
*2
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
*1
KM2
F3SP-T01
KM2
F39-TC5
KM1
F3SJ Ver.2
KM2
KM1
MS4800
*4
KM1
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
*5
*3
Product
Selection
KM3
Safety
Sensors
S1: External test switch
S2: Start input
KM1, KM2: Magnetic contactors
KM3: Solid-state contactor (G3J)
M: 3-phase motor
E1: 24-VDC power supply
PLC: Programmable Controller
(Used for monitoring. This is not a part of a safety system.)
PLC output
* The output operation mode of the auxiliary output
is the Dark-ON output mode.
259
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 260 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
Example When Connected to the G9SA-301 Controller (Category 4)
Transmitter
MS/MSF4800 Settings
• Auto start mode
• External device monitoring not used
• Test input used.
(Use the PDM to enable the test input.)
G9SA-301 Settings
• Manual reset mode
• Feedback loop used
• Emergency stop switch used
Receiver
S1: External test switch
S2: Start input
S3: Interlock reset switch
S4: Emergency stop switch (A165E, A22E, etc.)
KM1, KM2: Magnetic contactors
KM3: Solid-state contactor (G3J)
M: 3-phase motor
E1: 24-VDC power supply
PLC: Programmable Controller
(Used for monitoring. This is not a part of a safety system.)
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
11
21
0 V (Blue)
22
Shield (Green)
12
IN1
OUT
KM3
*4
+24 VDC
E1
IN2
KM1
KM2
0V
Ground
S4
KM1
S3
MS4800
MS4800
Control output 2 (White)
*1
Control output 1 (Black)
S2 Start input (Yellow)
+24 V (Brown)
*2
Auxiliary output (Pink)
*3
External device
monitoring input (Red)
+24 V (Brown)
Test input return (Black)
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
S1 Test input (White)
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
0 V (Blue)
Product
Selection
Shield (Green)
PLC
KM2
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
A1
A2
T11
T12
T31
T32
33
M
41
K1
K2
K1
23
3
4
1
a
13
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
K2
K1
b
K2
a
b
Control
circuit
JP
2
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
Wiring for the Auto
Reset Mode
KM1
KM2
6
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
PE
T21
T23 T22
A
B
G9SA-301
14
KM1
24
34
42
T31
T32
KM2
K1
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
K2
Light incident
Control
Circuit
Light interrupted
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
External test switch (S1)
A
Interlock reset switch (S3)
B
Emergency stop switch (S4)
Control output
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
K1, K2 NO contacts
KM1, KM2 NO contacts
F3SS
F3SS
K1, K2 NC contacts
KM1, KM2 NC contacts
PLC input 1
PLC input 2
PLC output
260
Depends on the output operation
mode of the auxiliary output
*1. For the MS/MSF4800B, use NC contacts for the
start input switch.
For the MS/MSF4800A, refer to Start Input Methods
(MS/MSF4800A Only) on page 266.
*2. Fuse (provided by the customer).
*3. The test input is disabled with the default setting. To
use the test input, connect the PDM to the Receiver
and enable the test input, and use NC contacts for
the test input.
*4. If an emergency stop switch is not used, connect
control output 1 to T12 terminal and control output 2
to T23 terminal directly.
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 261 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
Example When Connected to the G9SB-301-D Controller (Category 4)
Transmitter
MS/MSF4800 Settings
• Auto start mode
• External device monitoring not used
• Test input used.
(Use the PDM to enable the test input.)
G9SB-301-D Settings
• Manual reset mode
• Feedback loop used
• Emergency stop switch used
Receiver
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
S1: External test switch
S2: Start input
S3 : Interlock reset switch
S4: Emergency stop switch (A165E, A22E, etc.)
KM1, KM2: Magnetic contactors
KM3: Solid-state contactor (G3J)
M: 3-phase motor
E1: 24-VDC power supply
PLC: Programmable Controller
(Used for monitoring. This is not a part of a safety system.)
PLC
E1
22
11
21
IN2
OUT
Shield (Green)
12
0 V (Blue)
Control output 2 (White)
+24 VDC
Control output 1 (Black)
Start input (Yellow)
*1
Auxiliary output (Pink)
*2
S2
+24 V (Brown)
+24 V (Brown)
External device
monitoring input (Red)
*3
Test input return (Black)
S1 Test input (White)
0 V (Blue)
Shield (Green)
IN1
KM3
KM1
KM2
0V
Ground
S4
S3
KM1
KM2
A1
A2
T21 T11
T12
T22
T31
K1
T32
K2
K2
K1
a
Control
circuit
13
23
33
41
14
24
34
42
M
K1 K1
K2
a K2
G9SB-301-D
Light incident
KM1
Light interrupted
KM2
External test switch (S1)
Interlock reset switch (S3)
*1. For the MS/MSF4800B, use NC contacts for the start input switch.
For the MS/MSF4800A, refer to Start Input Methods (MS/MSF4800A
Only) on page 266.
*2. Fuse (provided by the customer).
*3. The test input is disabled with the default setting. To use the test input,
connect the PDM to the Receiver and enable the test input, and use
NC contacts for the test input.
Emergency stop switch (S4)
Control output
K1, K2 NO contacts
KM1, KM2 NO contacts
K1, K2 NC contacts
KM1, KM2 NC contacts
PLC input 1
Depends on the output operation
mode of the auxiliary output
PLC input 2
PLC output
261
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 262 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
Example When Connected to the G9SX-AD322-T15 Controller (Category 4)
*1
Shield (Green)
0 V (Blue)
Control output 2 (White)
Control output 1 (Black)
Auxiliary output (Pink)
Start input (Yellow)
S1: External test switch
S2: Start input
KM1 to KM4: Magnetic contactors
M1, M2: 3-phase motor
E1: 24-VDC power supply
PLC: Programmable Controller
(Used for monitoring. This is not a part of a safety system.)
S2
+24 V (Brown)
*2
Receiver
External device monitoring input (Red)
*3
+24 V (Brown)
MS4800
Test input return (Black)
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
Test input (White)
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
0 V (Blue)
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
S1
Safety
Sensors
Shield (Green)
MS/MSF4800 Settings
• Auto start mode
• External device monitoring not used
• Test input used. (Use the PDM to enable the test input.)
G9SX-AD322-T15 Settings
• Auto Reset Mode
Transmitter
• Feedback loop used
Feedback loop
S34
Motor controller
KM1
KM2
KM1
KM3
KM2
KM4
KM3
KM4
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
M1
M2
+24 VDC
E1
+24 V
0V
Ground
Open
+24 V
Open
AND
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
A1 T11 T12 T21 T22
T31 T32 T33 Y1
T41 T42
OFF
Open Open
G9SX-AD322-T15
Control circuit
A2
S14 S24 S34 S44 S54
L1
X1
X2
Wiring for the Manual Reset Mode
KM1 KM2
KM3 KM4
PLC, etc.
Feedback loop
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
Motor controller
(operation command)
KM2
S3
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
KM1
KM3
Control output
KM4
KM1, KM2 NC contacts
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
+24 V
KM3, KM4 NC contacts
KM1, KM2 NO contacts
T31 T32 T33 Y1
F3SS
F3SS
KM3, KM4 NO contacts
S3: Reset switch
Motor operation command
Motor rotation
OFF-delay time
262
*1. For the MS/MSF4800B, use NC contacts for the start input switch.
For the MS/MSF4800A, refer to Start Input Methods (MS/MSF4800A Only)
on page 266.
*2. Fuse (provided by the customer).
*3. The test input is disabled with the default setting. To use the test input,
connect the PDM to the Receiver and enable the test input, and use NC
contacts for the test input.
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 263 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
Connection to the MS4800-RM6 Resource Module (MSF4800A Only)
Power supply
Earth
ground
Suppressor
24 VDC
0V
MSF4800 Receiver
*6
Black
OSSD 1
OSSD 2
White
ED2
*4
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
Shield
Lamp
24 VDC
Ground
MSF4800 Transmitter
*10
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
24 VDC
Green Ground
F3SP-T01
Light operate
0V
F39-TC5
S-In 4
Blue
F3SJ Ver.2
Ground
Orange −RS485
Light operate
24 VDC
Brown 24 VDC
MS4800
Dark operate
Black
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
S-In 3
MTS
return
Product
Selection
0V
White +RS485
24 VDC
White
Safety
Sensors
S-In 2
MTS
F3SS
Blue Return
M12 connector
E3FS
E3ZS
S-In 1
Green
F3SN-A@SS
+VDC
Blue
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
24 VDC
*8
Dark operate
ED2
Brown 24 VDC
F3SP-T01
*11
F39-TC5
ED1
Brown
EDM
Muting inputs
Sensors with PNP outputs
F3SJ Ver.2
*2
MS4800-RM6 Resource Module
MS4800
*1
Red
Start
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
output
Start
Product
Selection
Pink Auxiliary
Yellow
*9
ED1 ED2
*6
Safety
Sensors
*3
*5
To machine control
ED1
MTS/Test
*7
*1. When using relays with forcibly guided contacts as the final control
devices, they must be monitored. Connect the red wire to 0 V via the
NC contacts. (Do not use both external devices simultaneously.)
*2. The user can use the Programming and Diagnostics Module to turn
OFF the external device monitoring (EDM) function for pre-installation
testing. When doing this, the EDM wire (red wire) must be connected
to 0 V.
*3. Auxiliary Output PNP: 100 mA max. (default)
*4. Fuse (provided by the customer).
*5. The start connection is shown with NC contacts (connected to 0 V).
*6. Insert suppressors in parallel with the final control devices.
*7. The MTS (test input) is disabled with the default setting. To use the
test input, connect the PDM to the Receiver and enable the test input,
and use NC contacts for the test input.
*8. For details, refer to the Mini Safe 4800 Series Safety Light Curtains
Installation and Operating Manual.
*9. Connect the yellow wire to 24 VDC to enable external device
monitoring (EDM), and to 0 V to disable EDM.
*10.Not used.
*11.There is no need to connect sensor inputs that are not used.
263
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 264 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
Nomenclature
Receiver LED Indicators
Transmitter
Transmitter LED Indicators
Machine Run/stop Indicator (Green/Red)
Interlock or Alarm (Lockout)
Indicator (Yellow)
Blanking Active (Amber)
Detection zone
Receiver
Status Indicator
(Yellow)
Transmitter
Receiver
Sealing
Cap
(M8)
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Sealing
Cap
(M8)
Programming
Port for PDM
Programming
Port for PDM
T-SLOT
mounting
example
PDM Cable
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Individual Beam Indicators
(one per beam)
(Red)
Receiver Connections M-12 (male 8-pin)
Transmitter Connections M-12 (male 5-pin)
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
(1) 24 VDC (Brown) (6) External device
(2) 0 V (Blue)
monitoring
7
8
3
(3) Ground (Green)
(EDM) (Red)
6 (4) Control output 2 (7) Auxiliary output
4
5
(White)
(Pink)
(5) Start or external (8) Control output
1 (Black)
device monitoring
(mode selection)
(Yellow)
2
1
(1) 0 V (Blue)
(2) 24 VDC (Brown)
(3) Test input (MTS) (White)
(4) Test input (MTS) return
(Black)
(5) Ground (Green)
1
2
5
3
4
Note: Remove the sealing cap (M8) to connect the PDM cable.
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
Individual Beam Indicators (IBI)
Receiver LED Indicators
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
All MS4800 Safety Light Curtains have an Individual Beam Indicator
(IBI) next to each infrared beam on the Receiver. The IBI indicates
whether the beam is interrupted or clear. When the beam is
interrupted, the IBI goes ON; when it is clear, the IBI goes OFF. If
there is less than 10 clear beams, every other IBI will light to indicate
that the MS/MSF4800 is not synchronized.
Example of IBI Indication for an Error (Error Code 34)
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
Front View of the Receiver
Operating
condition
Condition
indication
Machine Run
State
Green
Machine Stop
State
Red
All IBIs starting with the ninth one
from the end cap are OFF.
Interlock State
Yellow Red
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
Four IBIs indicating the "ones digit"
of the error code are ON.
Alarm (Lockout) state
Yellow Red
Fourth IBI from the end cap is OFF.
Three IBIs indicating the "tens digit"
of the error code are ON.
Error code: 3 4
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
End cap
This shows that control output 1
has been shorted to ground.
Interlock indicator flashes.
Blanking Active state
Flashing
ON
Description
Two Receiver control outputs
(safety outputs) are ON, and the
green Machine Run indicator is
ON.
Two Receiver control outputs
(safety outputs) are OFF, and the
red Machine Stop indicator is ON.
Two Receiver control outputs
(safety outputs) are OFF, and the
red Machine Stop indicator and the
yellow Interlock indicator are ON.
Two Receiver control outputs
(safety outputs) are OFF, the red
Machine Stop indicator is ON, the
yellow Interlock indicator is flashing, and the auxiliary output is
OFF.
Operating with blanking enabled.
Amber
Transmitter LED Indicators
Operating
condition
Condition
indication
F3SS
F3SS
Note: For details on error codes, refer to the Mini Safe 4800 Series
Safety Light Curtains Installation and Operating Manual.
Transmitting
state
Yellow
Error state/
PDM Programming
state
264
OFF
Yellow
Flashing
ON
Description
When the Transmitter receives
power and enters the Transmitting
state, the indicator turns ON.
When the Machine Test Signal
(MTS) is enabled, the Transmitter
enters the Transmitting Stop state,
and the indicator turns OFF.
When an error occurs due to the
Transmitter, or when the Programming and Diagnostics Module is
being used to change a setting, the
indicator flashes.
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 265 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
Safety Functions
Operation Modes
Auto Start
If no objects are detected in the sensing area when the power is
turned ON in Auto Start Mode, the system enters the Machine Run
State. If an object is then detected, the system changes from the
Machine Run State to the Machine Stop State, and remains in that
state until the object is removed. When the intrusion into the sensing
area disappears, the system automatically changes from the Machine
Stop State to the Machine Run State.
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
This function turns OFF the output when the total number of
interrupted beams inside the sensing area exceeds the number of set
beams (1 or 2).
MS4800
If no objects are in the sensing area when the power is turned ON in
Start/Restart Interlock Mode and an alarm (lockout) condition does
not occur, the system enters the Interlock State. To shift to the
Machine Run State, an operator must press and release the Start
Button on the Safety Light Curtain. If an object intrudes in the sensing
area during the Machine Run State, the system will change to the
Machine Stop State. When the object is removed from the sensing
area, the system will shift to the Interlock State instead of
automatically shifting to the Machine Run State. To shift to the
Machine Run State, an operator must press and release the Start
Button. When there is an object in the sensing area, the Start Button
is disabled.
Floating Blanking
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Start/Restart Interlock
This function is used when a machine or workpiece constantly
interrupts beams in a part of the sensing area. Fixed blanking allows
the Safety Light Curtain to remain in the Machine Run State while the
obstruction in the sensing area as a non-moving object. The output is
turned OFF when a beam other than the set fixed blanking beams is
interrupted, or when light is incident on a fixed blanking beam.
Product
Selection
If no objects are in the sensing area when the power is turned ON in
Start Interlock Mode and an alarm (lockout) condition does not occur,
the system enters the Interlock State. To shift to the Machine Run
State, an operator must press and release the Start Button on the
Safety Light Curtain. If an object intrudes in the sensing area during
the Machine Run State, the system will change to the Machine Stop
State. When the object is removed from the sensing area, the system
will automatically shift to the Machine Run State.
Fixed Blanking
Safety
Sensors
Start Interlock
Blanking Functions (Advanced Series
Only)
Monitored Blanking
This function is used when a machine or workpiece constantly
interrupts beams in a part of the sensing area and moves within the
sensing area. Monitored blanking allows the Safety Light Curtain to
remain in the Machine Run State while the obstruction moves within
the sensing area. The output is turned OFF when the machine or
workpiece disappears from the monitored blanking area that was set
by teaching, or when the total number of interrupted beams increases
due to a different obstruction.
Reduced Resolution Blanking
When the resolution of the MS/MSF4800A is reduced, the size of the
minimum detectable object is increased. The output will not turn OFF
regardless of how many continuous interrupted beams there are in
the sensing area as long as the beams are fewer than the set number
(1, 2, or 3 beams).
When an object whose size exceeds the set number of beams
intrudes, the output is turned OFF. For example, in an application
where a conveyor cart approaches a robot work area, the Safety Light
Curtain can be set so that it does not detect only the wheels of the
cart, allowing the MS/MSF4800A to be used as a presence sensing
device.
Muting Functions (MSF4800A Only)
Use of the MS4800-RM6 Resource Module (sold separately) makes
it possible to temporarily disable the Safety Light Curtain. Select from
among four muting modes to match each application with the
appropriate number and placement of muting sensors.
Note: For details on blanking and muting, refer to the Mini Safe 4800
Series Safety Light Curtains Installation and Operating Manual.
265
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 266 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
Diagnostic Functions
Start Input Methods (MS/MSF4800A Only)
External Device Monitoring (EDM) (MPCE Monitoring)
For the MS/MSF4800A, select one of the following four combinations
of switch and ON/OFF logic for connection to the Start Input line. (The
default is the 0-V connection with NC contacts.) As the following
timing chart shows, the switch is reset by pressing it once, then
returning it.
This function detects malfunctions, such as welded contacts in
external relays (or contactors) that control the hazardous area of a
machine. This function constantly monitors that a specified voltage is
applied to the Receiver's external device monitoring input line, and
enters LOCKOUT state when an error occurs. The relay's operational
delay can be up to 300 ms without being evaluated as an error.
To utilize this function properly, use relays and contactors that have a
forcibly guided contact structure.
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Enabling/Disabling External Device Monitoring
The external device monitoring can be enabled or disabled with the
Programming and Diagnostics Module. When using the Auto Start
Mode, enabling and disabling can be switched by combining the start
input line with the external device monitoring wiring.
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Note: For details, refer to the Mini Safe 4800 Series Safety Light
Curtains Installation and Operating Manual.
Machine Test Signal (MTS)
The Machine Test Signal (MTS) is used to confirm that the safety
system stops correctly when an MS/MSF4800 beam is interrupted by
purposely halting the emission with an external signal. MTS is
provided by placing a normally closed switch across the MTS and
MTS Return lines of the Transmitter. A close-to-open transition on this
switch will enable the MTS and halt the emission.
NO1: Normally Open (with 0-VDC Connection)
MS4800-NO1
24 VDC
Start
NO
contacts 0 V
Reset
NO2: Normally Open (with 24-VDC Connection)
MS4800-NO2
24 VDC
Start
24 VDC
NO
contacts
0V
Reset
NC1: Normally Closed (with 0-VDC Connection) (Default)
MS4800-NC1
24 VDC
Start
NC
contacts 0 V
Reset
0V
NC2: Normally Closed (with 24-VDC Connection)
(Default)
MS4800-NC2
24 VDC
Start
24 VDC
MS4800
MS4800
NC
contacts
Other Functions
0V
0V
Reset
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
Sensing Distance Selection
Optical Synchronization
The Programming and Diagnostics Module can be used to select the
sensing distance. The Short Range Mode is 8 m, and the Long Range
Mode is 20 m (default). This function is useful when there are many
Safety Light Curtains operating within a small space and the
possibility of mutual interference is likely.
The synchronization between the MS4800-series Transmitter and
Receiver is optical. To establish synchronization, the system needs to
have a certain number of consecutive clear beams.
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
Response Time Adjustment (MS/MSF4800A Only)
The MS4800 allows the user to slow down the scan rate of the Safety
Light Curtain for maximum immunity against environmental
interference. This function may be used in harsh environmental
conditions where electrical noise, ambient smoke, or dust and flying
debris interfere with the Safety Light Curtain. For details, refer to
Response Time on page 257.
WARNING
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Recalculate the safety distance whenever the response time has
been changed.
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
266
Note: For details, refer to the Mini Safe 4800 Series Safety Light
Curtains Installation and Operating Manual.
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 267 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
Dimensions
(Unit: mm)
Safety Light Curtains
Safety Light Curtains Used Individually
MS4800
59.3
Top surface view
30.1
Reversing the
mounting bracket
90.0°
55.6
53.6
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
B
C
D
E
PDM
67.8
18.5
37.2
77.3
Front surface view
195.0
TYP.
Rear surface view with
mounting brackets reversed
49.1
Left side view
with PDM cable
attached
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
A
Left side view
F3SP-T01
38.0
56.0
61.5
F39-TC5
50.0
46.3 57.9
69.5
F3SJ Ver.2
37.2
27.8
Sealing Cap
(M8)
MS4800
40.1
58.8
51.0 39.4
23.2
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
6.8 dia.
49.1
Product
Selection
38.1
Safety
Sensors
52.8
Bottom surface view
Right side view
Rear surface view
267
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 268 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
MS4800-30 Transmitter and Receiver Dimensions
Dimensions
Sensing area
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
268
A
B
C
D
MS4800-40 Transmitter and Receiver Dimensions
E
Dimensions
Sensing area
A
B
C
D
E
280
284.4
420.4
381.7
307.3
371.3
360
364.5
500.5
461.8
387.4
451.4
320
324.8
460.8
422.1
347.7
411.7
480
484.3
620.3
581.6
507.2
571.2
360
364.5
500.5
461.8
387.4
451.4
600
604.1
740.1
701.4
627.0
691.0
400
404.2
540.2
501.5
427.1
491.1
720
724.0
860.0
821.3
746.9
810.9
440
443.9
579.9
541.2
466.8
530.8
840
843.4
979.4
940.7
866.3
930.3
480
484.3
620.3
581.6
507.2
571.2
520
523.4
659.4
620.7
546.3
610.3
960
963.6
1099.6
1060.9
986.5
1050.5
1080
1083.9
1219.9
1181.2
1106.8
1170.8
1200
1203.8
1339.8
1301.1
1226.7
1290.7
730.8
1320
1323.6
1459.6
1420.9
1346.5
1410.5
1443.4
1579.4
1540.7
1466.3
1530.3
560
563.7
699.7
661.0
586.6
650.6
600
604.1
740.1
701.4
627.0
691.0
640
643.9
779.9
741.2
666.8
680
683.6
819.6
780.9
706.5
770.5
1440
720
724.0
860.0
821.3
746.9
810.9
1560
1563.3
1699.3
1660.6
1586.2
1650.2
760
763.0
899.0
860.3
785.9
849.9
1680
1683.1
1819.1
1780.4
1706.0
1770.0
800
803.5
939.5
900.8
826.4
890.4
1800
1802.9
1938.9
1900.2
1825.8
1889.8
840
843.8
979.8
941.1
866.7
930.7
1920
1922.8
2058.8
2020.1
1945.7
2009.7
880
882.8
1018.8
980.1
905.7
969.7
2040
2042.6
2178.6
2139.9
2065.5
2129.5
920
922.5
1058.5
1019.8
945.4
1009.4
960
963.6
1099.6
1060.9
986.5
1050.5
1000
1002.6
1138.6
1099.9
1025.5
1089.5
1040
1042.9
1178.9
1140.2
1065.8
1129.8
1080
1083.9
1219.9
1181.2
1106.8
1170.8
1120
1122.3
1258.3
1219.6
1145.2
1209.2
1160
1162.7
1298.7
1260.0
1185.6
1249.6
1200
1203.8
1339.8
1301.1
1226.7
1290.7
1240
1242.1
1378.1
1339.4
1265.0
1329.0
1280
1281.8
1417.8
1379.1
1304.7
1368.7
1320
1323.6
1459.6
1420.9
1346.5
1410.5
1360
1362.0
1498.0
1459.3
1384.9
1448.9
1400
1401.7
1537.7
1499.0
1424.6
1488.6
1440
1443.4
1579.4
1540.7
1466.3
1530.3
1480
1481.8
1617.8
1579.1
1504.7
1568.7
1520
1521.5
1657.5
1618.8
1544.4
1608.4
1560
1563.3
1699.3
1660.6
1586.2
1650.2
1600
1600.9
1736.9
1698.2
1623.8
1687.8
1640
1641.3
1777.3
1738.6
1664.2
1728.2
1680
1681.3
1817.3
1778.6
1704.2
1768.2
1720
1720.8
1856.8
1818.1
1743.7
1807.7
1760
1760.5
1896.5
1857.8
1783.4
1847.4
1800
1802.9
1938.9
1900.2
1825.8
1889.8
1840
1840.6
1976.6
1937.9
1863.5
1927.5
1880
1880.3
2016.3
1977.6
1903.2
1967.2
1920
1922.8
2058.8
2020.1
1945.7
2009.7
1960
1960.4
2096.4
2057.7
1983.3
2047.3
2000
2000.1
2136.1
2097.4
2023.0
2087.0
2040
2042.6
2178.6
2139.9
2065.5
2129.5
2080
2079.6
2215.6
2176.9
2102.5
2166.5
2120
2120.0
2256.0
2217.3
2142.9
2206.9
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 269 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
Safety Light Curtains in Series Connection
MSF4800
59.3
Top surface view
30.1
Reversing the
mounting bracket
90.0°
55.6
50.0
Sealing Cap
(M12)
55.6
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
E2
B2
C2
E1
18.5
27.8
58.8
113.0
TYP.
58.8
51.0 39.4
F39-TC5
38.0
A
51.0 39.4
F3SJ Ver.2
50.0
MS4800
27.8
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
40.1
58.8
51.0 39.4
23.2
Product
Selection
6.8 dia.
49.1
Safety
Sensors
38.1
37.2
27.8
D
A
B1
C1
PDM
67.8
Sealing Cap
(M8)
46.3 57.9
69.5
37.2
77.3
Front surface view
195.0
TYP.
Right side view
56.0
61.5
Left side view
Rear surface view with
mounting bracket reversed
49.1
Left side view
with PDM cable
attached
Bottom surface view
Rear surface view
269
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 270 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
MSF4800-30 Transmitter and Receiver Dimensions
MSF4800-40 Transmitter and Receiver Dimensions
B2
C1
C2
D
E1
E2
Dimensions
Sensing
area
A
B1
B2
C1
C2
D
E1
E2
240
244.6
380.6
362.1
341.9
323.3
400.2
327.9
381.6
360
364.5
500.5
482.0
461.8
443.2
520.1
447.8
501.5
280
284.4
420.4
401.9
381.7
363.1
440.0
367.7
421.4
480
484.3
620.3
601.8
581.6
563.0
639.9
567.6
621.3
320
324.8
460.8
442.3
422.1
403.5
480.4
408.1
461.8
600
604.1
740.1
721.6
701.4
682.8
759.7
687.4
741.1
360
364.5
500.5
482.0
461.8
443.2
520.1
447.8
501.5
720
724.0
860.0
841.5
821.3
802.7
879.6
807.3
861.0
400
404.2
540.2
521.7
501.5
482.9
559.8
487.5
541.2
840
843.8
979.8
961.3
941.1
922.5
999.4
927.1
980.8
440
443.9
579.9
561.4
541.2
522.6
599.5
527.2
580.9
960
963.6 1099.6 1081.1 1060.9 1042.3 1119.2 1046.9 1100.6
480
484.3
620.3
601.8
581.6
563.0
639.9
567.6
621.3
1080
1083.9 1219.9 1201.4 1181.2 1162.6 1239.5 1167.2 1220.9
520
523.4
659.4
640.9
620.7
602.1
679.0
606.7
660.4
1200
1203.4 1339.4 1320.9 1300.7 1282.1 1359.0 1286.7 1340.4
560
563.7
699.7
681.2
661.0
642.4
719.3
647.0
700.7
1320
1323.6 1459.6 1441.1 1420.9 1402.3 1479.2 1406.9 1460.6
600
604.1
740.1
721.6
701.4
682.8
759.7
687.4
741.1
1440
1443.4 1579.4 1560.9 1540.7 1522.1 1599.0 1526.7 1580.4
640
643.9
779.9
761.4
741.2
722.6
799.5
727.2
780.9
1560
1563.3 1699.3 1680.8 1660.6 1642.0 1718.9 1646.6 1700.3
680
683.6
819.6
801.1
780.9
762.3
839.2
766.9
820.6
1680
1681.3 1817.3 1798.8 1778.6 1760.0 1836.9 1764.6 1818.3
720
724.0
860.0
841.5
821.3
802.7
879.6
807.3
861.0
1800
1802.9 1938.9 1920.4 1900.2 1881.6 1958.5 1886.2 1939.9
760
763.0
899.0
880.5
860.3
841.7
918.6
846.3
900.0
1920
1922.8 2058.8 2040.3 2020.1 2001.5 2078.4 2006.1 2059.8
800
803.5
939.5
921.0
900.8
882.2
959.1
886.8
940.5
2040
2042.6 2178.6 2160.1 2139.9 2121.3 2198.2 2125.9 2179.6
840
843.8
979.8
961.3
941.1
922.5
999.4
927.1
980.8
880
882.8 1018.8 1000.3 980.1
920
922.5 1058.5 1040.0 1019.8 1001.2 1078.1 1005.8 1059.5
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
B1
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
A
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Dimensions
Sensing
area
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
270
961.5 1038.4 966.1 1019.8
960
963.6 1099.6 1081.1 1060.9 1042.3 1119.2 1046.9 1100.6
1000
1002.6 1138.6 1120.1 1099.9 1081.3 1158.2 1085.9 1139.6
1040
1042.9 1178.9 1160.4 1140.2 1121.6 1198.5 1126.2 1179.9
1080
1083.9 1219.9 1201.4 1181.2 1162.6 1239.5 1167.2 1220.9
1120
1122.3 1258.3 1239.8 1219.6 1201.0 1277.9 1205.6 1259.3
1160
1162.7 1298.7 1280.2 1260.0 1241.4 1318.3 1246.0 1299.7
1200
1203.8 1339.8 1321.3 1301.1 1282.5 1359.4 1287.1 1340.8
1240
1242.1 1378.1 1359.6 1339.4 1320.8 1397.7 1325.4 1379.1
1280
1281.8 1417.8 1399.3 1379.1 1360.5 1437.4 1365.1 1418.8
1320
1323.6 1459.6 1441.1 1420.9 1402.3 1479.2 1406.9 1460.6
1360
1362.0 1498.0 1479.5 1459.3 1440.7 1517.6 1445.3 1499.0
1400
1401.7 1537.7 1519.2 1499.0 1480.4 1557.3 1485.0 1538.7
1440
1443.4 1579.4 1560.9 1540.7 1522.1 1599.0 1526.7 1580.4
1480
1481.8 1617.8 1599.3 1579.1 1560.5 1637.4 1565.1 1618.8
1520
1521.5 1657.5 1639.0 1618.8 1600.2 1677.1 1604.8 1658.5
1560
1563.3 1699.3 1680.8 1660.6 1642.0 1718.9 1646.6 1700.3
1600
1600.9 1736.9 1718.4 1698.2 1679.6 1756.5 1684.2 1737.9
1640
1641.3 1777.3 1758.8 1738.6 1720.0 1796.9 1724.6 1778.3
1680
1683.1 1819.1 1800.6 1780.4 1761.8 1838.7 1766.4 1820.1
1720
1720.8 1856.8 1838.3 1818.1 1799.5 1876.4 1804.1 1857.8
1760
1760.5 1896.5 1878.0 1857.8 1839.2 1916.1 1843.8 1897.5
1800
1802.9 1938.9 1920.4 1900.2 1881.6 1958.5 1886.2 1939.9
1840
1840.6 1976.6 1958.1 1937.9 1919.3 1996.2 1923.9 1977.6
1880
1880.3 2016.3 1997.8 1977.6 1959.0 2035.9 1963.6 2017.3
1920
1922.8 2058.8 2040.3 2020.1 2001.5 2078.4 2006.1 2059.8
1960
1960.4 2096.4 2077.9 2057.7 2039.1 2116.0 2043.7 2097.4
2000
2000.1 2136.1 2117.6 2097.4 2078.8 2155.7 2083.4 2137.1
2040
2042.6 2178.6 2160.1 2139.9 2121.3 2198.2 2125.9 2179.6
2080
2079.6 2215.6 2197.1 2176.9 2158.3 2235.2 2162.9 2216.6
2120
2120.0 2256.0 2237.5 2217.3 2198.7 2275.6 2203.3 2257.0
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 271 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
Accessories
Cables with Connector on One End for Transmitter
MS4800-CBLTX-10M (L = 10 m)
42.5
MS4800-CBLTX-15M (L = 15 m)
MS4800-CBLTX-30M (L = 30 m)
L
(40)
14.5 dia.
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
Status
indicator
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
99.1
F3SP-T01
22.5
102.9
F39-TC5
111.3
F3SJ Ver.2
Resource Module
MS4800-RM6
MS4800
7-dia. vinyl-insulated round cable (black) with 4 conductors
(2 twisted pairs)
(Conductor Cross Section: 0.2 mm2),
Standard length L: 0.3, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 m
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
14 dia.
Product
Selection
14 dia.
Safety
Sensors
41.1
F3SS
L
E3FS
E3ZS
50.5
F3SN-A@SS
Series Connection Cables for Receiver
MS4800-CBLRXIC-003M (L = 0.3 m)
MS4800-CBLRXIC-005M (L = 0.5 m)
MS4800-CBLRXIC-01M (L = 1 m)
MS4800-CBLRXIC-02M (L = 2 m)
MS4800-CBLRXIC-03M (L = 3 m)
MS4800-CBLRXIC-05M (L = 5 m)
MS4800-CBLRXIC-10M (L = 10 m)
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Series Connection Cables for Transmitter
MS4800-CBLTXIC-003M (L = 0.3 m)
MS4800-CBLTXIC-005M (L = 0.5 m)
MS4800-CBLTXIC-01M (L = 1 m)
MS4800-CBLTXIC-02M (L = 2 m)
MS4800-CBLTXIC-03M (L = 3 m)
MS4800-CBLTXIC-05M (L = 5 m)
MS4800-CBLTXIC-10M (L = 10 m)
F3SP-T01
7-dia. vinyl-insulated round cable (black) with 8 conductors*
Standard length L: 10, 15, or 30 m)
Brown
Blue
Green
White
Yellow
Red
Pink
Black
F39-TC5
(40)
F3SJ Ver.2
L
MS4800
Wire
color
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
*
Product
Selection
Cables with Connector on One End for Receiver
MS4800-CBLRX-10M (L = 10 m)
42.5
MS4800-CBLRX-15M (L = 15 m)
MS4800-CBLRX-30M (L = 30 m)
14.5 dia.
Safety
Sensors
7-dia. vinyl-insulated round cable (black) with 5 conductors
(Conductor Cross Section: 0.32 mm2, Insulation diameter: 1.3 mm),
Standard length L: 10, 15, or 30 m
Conductor Insulation
cross
outside
sectional diameter
area (mm2)
(mm)
0.52
0.52
0.52
0.32
0.2
0.2
0.32
0.32
1.6 dia.
1.6 dia.
1.6 dia.
1.3 dia.
1.2 dia.
1.2 dia.
1.3 dia.
1.3 dia.
114.3
271
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 272 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
Safety Precautions
This document is intended as a guide for product selection. Be sure
to read the Instruction Manual provided with the product for actual
operation.
Regulations and Standards
1. Application of an MS/MSF4800-series Safety Light Curtain alone
cannot receive type certification provided by Article 44-2 of the
Industrial Safety and Health Law of Japan. It is necessary to apply
the Curtain in a system. Therefore, when using the MS/MSF4800series Safety Light Curtain in Japan as a “safety device for presses
or shearing machines” prescribed in Article 42 of that law, the
system must receive type certification.
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
2. The MS/MSF4800-series Safety Light Curtain is electro-sensitive
protective equipment (ESPE) in accordance with European Union
(EU) Machinery Directive Index Annex IV, B, Safety Components,
Item 1.
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
3. The MS/MSF4800-series Safety Light Curtain complies with the
following legislation and standards:
(1) EU Regulations
Machinery Directive: Directive 98/37/EC
EMC Directive: Directive 89/336/EEC
(2) European standards:
EN 61496-1 (TYPE 4 ESPE)
prEN 61496-2 (TYPE 4 AOPD)
EN 61508-1 to -7 (SIL3)
EN 954-1 (Category B, 1, 2, 3, 4)
(3) International standards:
IEC 61496-1 (TYPE 4 ESPE)
IEC 61496-2 (TYPE 4 AOPD)
EN 61508-1 to -7 (SIL3)
(4) JIS standards:
JIS B9704-1 (TYPE 4 ESPE)
JIS B9704-2 (TYPE 4 AOPD)
(5) North American standards:
UL 61496-1 (Type 4 ESPE)
UL 61496-2 (Type 4 AOPD)
UL 508, UL 1998, CAN/CSA 22.2 No. 14
CAN/CSA 22.2 No. 0.8
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
272
4. The MS/MSF4800 received the following certification from TÜV
Rheinland, an EU-accredited body:
• EC type test based on Machinery Directive
Type 4 ESPE (IEC 61496-1)
Type 4 AOPD (IEC 61496-2)
• TÜV Rheinland type certification
Type 4 ESPE (IEC 61496-1)
Type 4 AOPD (IEC 61496-2)
• SIL3 (IEC 61508)
5. The MS/MSF4800 has received certificates for UL listing for US
and Canadian safety standards from UL, a third party assessment
body.
• Type 4 ESPE (UL 61496-1)
Type 4 AOPD (UL 61496-2)
6. The MS/MSF4800 is designed according to the standards listed
below. To make sure that the final system complies with the
following standards and regulations, you are asked to design and
use it in accordance with all other related standards, laws, and
regulations.
If you have any questions, consult with UL or other specialized
organizations.
• European standards: EN 415-4, EN 692, EN 693
• US Occupational Safety and Health Administration:
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.212
• US Occupational Safety and Health Administration:
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.217
• American National Standard Institute: ANSI B11.1 to B11.19
• American National Standard Institute: ANSI/RIA 15.06
• Canadian Standards Association: CSA Z142, Z432, Z434
• SEMI standard SEMI S2
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 273 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
Precautions for Safe Use
Indications and Meanings for Safe Use
To ensure safe use of the MS/MSF4800, signal words and an alert
symbol are used in this document to indicate safety-related
instructions. These instructions describe details very important to
your safety. It is extremely important that you understand and follow
the instructions. The signal words and alert symbol used in this
document are shown below.
WARNING
WARNING
Do not use this sensor for machines that cannot possibly be
quickly stopped by electrical controls. For example, do not use
it for a pressing machine that uses a full-rotation clutch.
Otherwise, the machine may not stop before a person reaches
the hazardous part, resulting in serious injury.
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
When detection of an area has been disabled by the fixed
blanking function, provide a protective structure around the
entire area that will prevent a person from passing through it and
reaching the hazardous part of the machinery. Failure to do so
may prevent detection of people and result in serious injury.
F3SJ Ver.2
The MS/MSF4800 cannot protect a person from an object flying
from a hazardous area. Install protective cover(s) or fence(s).
MS4800
The MS/MSF4800 must be installed, verified, and maintained by
a qualified person. A qualified person is defined as someone
who holds credentials or certification proving that he or she has
received relevant professional training, or someone whose
ability to solve problems related to the specific matters or
operations at hand has been verified by considerable
knowledge, training or considerable experience. (See ANSI/
PMMI B155.1-2006 for details.)
When using Start/Restart Interlock Mode, install the interlock
reset switch in a location that provides a clear view of the entire
hazardous area and where it cannot be activated from within the
hazardous area.
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
The manager of the system is responsible for the selection and
training of personnel to properly install, operate, and maintain
the machine and its safeguarding systems.
Install a protective structure so that the hazardous part of a
machine can only be reached by passing through the sensor's
detection zone. Install the sensors so that part of the person is
always present in the detection zone when working in a
machine's hazardous areas. If a person is able to step into the
hazardous area of a machine and remain behind the MS/
MSF4800's detection zone, configure the system with an
interlock function that prevents the machine from being
restarted. Otherwise it may result in heavy injury.
Product
Selection
When changing parameters with the Programming and
Diagnostics Module, the change must be made and the contents
of the change must be managed by the person in charge of the
system. Unintentional or mistaken parameter changes may
prevent detection of people and result in serious injury.
Be sure to secure the safety distance between the MS/MSF4800
and the hazardous parts. Otherwise, the machine may not stop
before a person reaches the hazardous part, resulting in serious
injury.
Safety
Sensors
The MS/MSF4800 must be installed, set, and integrated into the
mechanical control system by a qualified technician who has
received the appropriate training. Installation by an unqualified
person may prevent the MS/MSF4800 from operating correctly,
with the result that people may go undetected, and serious
injuries may occur.
Be sure to test the operation of the MS/MSF4800 after installation
with the machine in a non-operating condition to verify that the
MS/MSF4800 operates as intended. Unintended function
settings may cause a person to go undetected, resulting in
serious injury.
F3SS
WARNING
WARNING
E3FS
E3ZS
Precautions for Users
For mounting
F3SN-A@SS
MS/MSF4800 safety levels for specific applications and
installation conditions can be attained only by achieving safe
usage, installation, maintenance, and operation of the MS/
MSF4800. These factors must be thoroughly confirmed by the
customer who purchased the MS/MSF4800, as well as installers
and employers.
Additional guarding may be required for access to dangerous
areas not covered by the MS/MSF4800 system.
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
WARNING
The MS/MSF4800 is a safety area sensor that is designed to
protect operators who work in hazardous environments, such as
those containing operating machinery.
F3SP-T01
Warning Indications
F39-TC5
All safety-related machine control elements must be designed
so that a failure in the control logic or a failure in the control
circuit does not lead to danger.
F3SJ Ver.2
The guarded machine must have a consistent stopping time and
adequate control mechanisms.
MS4800
General Prohibition
Indicates a general prohibition
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
The guarded machine must not present a hazard from flying
parts.
Meaning of Symbol
Product
Selection
Do not use the auxiliary output for safety applications. Failure of
the MS/MSF4800 may cause a person to go undetected, resulting
in serious injury.
Safety
Sensors
Indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, will result
in minor or moderate injury, or may result
in serious injury or death. Additionally,
there may by significant property damage.
Machine Installation
After setting the fixed blanking function, be sure to confirm that
a test rod is detected within all areas that require detection.
Failure to do so may prevent detection of people and result in
serious injury.
273
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 274 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
When the fixed blanking, floating blanking, monitored blanking,
or reduced resolution blanking function is used, the diameter for
the minimum detectable object becomes larger. Be sure to use
the diameter for the minimum detectable object for the fixed
blanking, floating blanking, monitored blanking, or reduced
resolution blanking function when calculating the safety
distance. Failure to do so may prevent the machinery from
stopping before a person reaches the hazardous part of the
machinery, and result in serious injury.
Do not use the sensor system with mirrors in a retro-reflective
configuration as shown in the following diagram. Doing so may
hinder detection. It is possible to use mirrors to “bend” the
detection zone to a 90-degree angle.
Reflector
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
The muting and override functions disable the safety functions
of the device. Additional safety measures must be taken to
ensure safety while these functions are working.
Reflector
Muting lamps that indicate the state of the muting and override
functions must be installed where they are clearly visible to
workers from all the operating positions.
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Install Muting Sensors so that they can distinguish between the
object that is being allowed to be passed through the detection
zone and a person. If the muting function is activated by the
detection of a person, it may result in serious injury.
Muting times must be precisely set according to the application
by qualified personnel who have received appropriate training.
In particular, if the muting time limit is to be set to infinity, the
person who makes the setting must bear responsibility.
MS4800
MS4800
Use two independent input devices for the muting inputs.
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
Install the MS/MSF4800, Muting Sensors, or a protective wall so
that workers cannot enter hazardous areas while muting is in
effect, and set muting times.
Position the switch that is used to activate the override function
in a location where the entire hazardous area can be seen, and
where the switch cannot be operated from inside the hazardous
area. Make sure that nobody is in the hazardous area before
activating the override function.
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Install the MS/MSF4800 so that it is not affected by reflective
surfaces. Failure to do so may hinder detection, resulting in
serious injury.
When using more than one set of MS/MSF4800, install them so
that mutual interference does not occur, such as by configuring
series connections, using physical, light-blocking barriers, or
changing scan codes between adjacent sets.
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
Make sure that the MS/MSF4800 is securely mounted and its
cables and connectors are properly connected.
Make sure that no foreign material, such as water, oil or dust,
enters the MS/MSF4800 or connectors while caps are removed.
F3SS
F3SS
274
Position with retro-reflection
Position with detection
zone bent at 90°
Inspect all MS/MSF4800 systems as instructed in the Mini Safe
4800 Series Light Curtains Installation and Operating Manual.
When using series connections, perform inspection of all
connected MS/MSF4800 Curtains as instructed in the Manual.
Recalculate the safety distance whenever the response time has
been changed.
Conduct all tests and repairs with the procedures given in the
Mini Safe 4800 Series Light Curtains Installation and Operating
Manual.
Conduct the test procedures given in the Mini Safe 4800 Series
Light Curtains Installation and Operating Manual according to
the periodic inspection system established by the employer.
These test procedures must be conducted after performing
maintenance, changing tools, setting up the system, making
adjustments, or otherwise making changes to the MS/MSF4800
or the guarded machine. When more than one operator uses the
guarded machine, or when the guarded machine is used in
shifts, it is recommended that these test procedures be
conducted after each operation change or shift change. It is
necessary to confirm that the MS/MSF4800 and the safety
system of the guarded machine function properly and that the
machine stops as intended. If the test results in failure, there is
a strong possibility that a serious accident could occur involving
an operator.
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 275 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
Wiring Precautions
Other Precautions
WARNING
For an PNP output, connect the load between the output and 0 V
line. Connecting the load between the output and +24 V line
results in a dangerous condition because the operation mode is
reversed to “ON when light is interrupted.”
To use the MS/MSF4800 in PSDI Mode (i.e., restarting cycle
operation by the sensor), you must configure an appropriate
control circuit between the MS/MSF4800 and the machine. For
details about PSDI, refer to ANSI RIA 15.06-1999, OSHA 1910.217
(h), ANSI B11.2-1995 (R2005), and other relevant standards and
regulations.
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
Systems with a Detection Capability of 40 mm Max.
Use the following calculation for a system that detects objects with a
minimum detectable diameter of 40 mm max.
S = (K × T) + C
Where,
S: The shortest distance (in mm) between the hazardous part and the
detection point (edge, surface, or area).
K = 2000 mm/s
T: The time (in seconds) required to stop the entire system.
T = t1 + t2
t1: The response time (in seconds) of the Safety Light Curtain.
This response time is listed in the Response Time on page 257.
t2 = Maximum time (in seconds) required to stop the machine.
C = 8 (d − 14 mm), however, this must be 0 or more.
d: Minimum detectable object (in mm) of the MS/MSF4800.
The following calculation is given as an example:
S = (2000 mm/s × T) + 8 (d − 14 mm)
This calculation applies to all shortest distance S values to 500 mm
max. The S value must be 100 mm min.
If the above-described calculation results in an S value greater than
500 mm, use the following calculation:
For this calculation the S value must be 500 mm min.
S = (1600 mm/s × T) + 8 (d − 14 mm)
Safety
Sensors
The following explanation is based on standard EN 999. This
standard applies to Safety Light Curtains used in an industrial
environment.
F3SS
How to Calculate the Safety Distance Specified by
International Standard ISO 13855-2002 (European
Standard EN 999-1999) (Reference)
E3FS
E3ZS
Note: The response time of a machine is the time period from when
the machine receives a stop signal to when the machine's
hazardous part stops. Measure the response time on the actual
system. Also, periodically check that the response time of the
machine has not changed.
F3SN-A@SS
The cable extension length must be no greater than the specified
length. Otherwise, the safety functions may fail to work properly,
resulting in danger.
WARNING
Be sure to secure the safety distance between the MS/MSF4800
and the hazardous part. Otherwise, the machine may not stop
before a person reaches the hazardous part, resulting in serious
injury.
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Double or enhanced insulation from hazardous voltage must be
applied to all input and output lines. Failure to do so may result
in electric shock.
Safety Distance
F3SP-T01
For the MS/MSF4800 to comply with IEC 61496-1 and UL 508, the
DC power supply unit must satisfy all of the following
conditions:
• Must be within rated power voltage (24 VDC ±20%).
• Must have tolerance against the total rated current of devices
if it is connected to multiple devices.
• Must comply with EMC directives (industrial environment).
• Double or enhanced insulation must be applied between the
primary and secondary circuits.
• Automatic recovery must be possible for overcurrent
protection.
• Output holding time must be 20 ms or longer.
• Must satisfy output characteristic requirements for class 2
circuit or limited voltage current circuit defined by UL508.
• Must comply with the EMC, laws, and regulations of the
country or region where the MS/MSF4800 is used. (For
example, in the EU, the power supply must comply with the
EMC Low Voltage Directive.)
F39-TC5
Perform daily and 6-month inspections for the MS/MSF4800.
Otherwise, the system may fail to work properly, resulting in
serious injury.
F3SJ Ver.2
Do not connect the lines of the MS/MSF4800 to a DC power
supply higher than 24 VDC +20%. Also, do not connect to an AC
power supply. Otherwise, it may result in electric shock.
MS4800
Do not use the MS/MSF4800 in environments where flammable
or explosive gases are present. Doing so may result in
explosion.
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Configure the system by using the optimal number of control
outputs that satisfy the requirements of the necessary safety
category.
Product
Selection
Do not try to disassemble, repair, or modify this product. Doing
so may cause the safety functions to stop working properly.
Safety
Sensors
Do not interconnect an output line with the +24-V line. Otherwise,
the output is always ON, creating a dangerous situation. Also, 0
V of the power supply must be grounded so that output does not
turn ON due to grounding of the output line.
WARNING
275
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 276 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
Systems with a Detection Capability Greater Than 40 mm
Use the following calculation for a system that detects objects with a
minimum detectable diameter greater than 40 mm.
S = (K × T) + C
Where,
S: The shortest distance (in mm) between the hazardous part and the
detection point (edge, surface, or area).
K = 1600 mm/s
T: The time (in seconds) required to stop the entire system.
T = t 1 + t2
t1: The response time (in seconds) of the Safety Light Curtain.
This is given in the Response Time on page 257.
t2: Maximum time (in seconds) required to stop the machine.
C = 850 mm
The following calculation is given as an example:
S = (1600 mm/s × T) + 850 mm
How to Calculate the Safety Distance Specified by
American Standard ANSI B11.19 (Reference)
If a person approaches the detection zone of the MS/MSF4800
perpendicularly, calculate the safety distance as shown below.
Ds = K × (Ts + Tc + Tr + Tbm) + Dpf
Where,
Ds: Safety distance (in inches)
K: Approach speed to the detection zone (in inches)
Assuming that the operator is beginning to perform a manual task, the
ANSI standard value for K is 63 inches/second. ANSI B11.19-2003
requires that the following factors be considered in determining the K
value.
a. Movement of hands or arms
b. Twisting of the body or shoulder, or bending of the waist
c. Walking or running
Use the above-described factors to determine the approach speed for
the actual application.
Ts: The time (in seconds) required to stop the machine.
Tc: The maximum response time (in seconds) of the machine's
control circuit required to activate the braking device of the
machine.
Note: Ts + Tc are normally measured simultaneously by a device for
measuring the time required for stopping.
Tr: The response time (in seconds) for the MS/MSF4800.
This is given in the Response Time on page 257.
Tbm: The stopping time (in seconds) added by a brake monitor before
determining degradation in the machine stopping time.
If a machine has a brake monitor, “Tbm = Brake monitor setting time
− (Ts + Tc).” If it has no brake monitor, it is necessary to increase the
value added to the machine's stopping time somewhat to account for
brake wear. For details, consult the manufacturer of the machine.
The depth penetration factor (Dpf) is related to the minimum
detectable object diameter of the MS/MSF4800. Determine the
minimum detectable object diameter (S) and the model number of the
MS/MSF4800 that is being used, then obtain the Dpf directly from the
following table, Examples of Minimum Detectable Object (S),
Additional Safety Distance (C), and Dpf.
Examples of Minimum Detectable Object (S), Additional Safety Distance (C), and Dpf
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
Model
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
MS/MSF4800-30
MS/MSF4800-40
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
276
Total number of beams
disabled by fixed or floating blanking
Additional safety distance obMinimum detect- tained by ISO 13855-2002
Depth penetration factor usable object diame- (European standard EN 999- ing the ANSI calculation (Dpf)
ter: S (mm)
Dpf = 3.4 (S − 0.276) inches
1999) calculation: C (mm)
C = 8 (S − 14)
None
30
1
50
2 or more
Greater than 64
None
40
1 or more
Greater than 64
128
850 (for S = 40 mm min.)
850 (for S = 40 mm min.)
3.1 inches (78 mm)
5.76 inches (146 mm)
36 inches (900 mm)
4.4 inches (112 mm)
36 inches (900 mm)
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 277 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
Installation
Reflective Surface Interference
Fig. 4 Worst Placement Example
This example shows the minimum distance d from the reflective
surface to one of the beam centerlines.
WARNING
Sensing distance R
Install the MS/MSF4800 where it will not be affected by reflective
surfaces. Failure to do so may prevent detection and result in
serious injury.
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
Minimum distance d (mm)
300
100
0
Fig. 2 Example of Unsafe Installation
Reflection prevents the obstacle from being detected. The reflective
object is inside the beam angle.
F3SS
700
Interrupted beam
Hazardous area zone
E3FS
E3ZS
900
d
Reflective
surface
F3SN-A@SS
1,100
500
Receiver
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Beam centerline
F3SP-T01
1,300
Light interruption
Transmitter
F39-TC5
Fig. 5 Sensing Distance vs. Minimum Distance from the
Reflective Surface
Beam angle a
a
F3SJ Ver.2
Hazardous area borderline
MS4800
Approaching direction
Reflective surface
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Sensing distance R
Directional angle a
d
Product
Selection
Fig. 1 Example of Correct Installation with Proper Placement
The interruption of the beam due to the obstacle is accurately
detected. The reflective object is outside the directional angle.
Receiver
a
Safety
Sensors
There is a possibility that reflective surfaces next to the sensing area
may reflect light and prevent the detection of beam interruption due to
obstacles within the area (refer to Figs. 1 to 5). Reflective surfaces
may exist on parts of machinery, mechanical protective devices, or
products. The minimum distance (d) must be set between the
reflective object and the beam centerline of the MS/MSF4800 sensing
area.
For information on how to test this condition, refer to the Mini Safe
4800 Series Light Curtains Installation and Operating Manual.
a
Transmitter
0.3
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
Sensing distance (m)
Prevention of Mutual Interference
Approaching direction
WARNING
Directional angle a
Obstacle
a
Interrupted beam
Beam centerline
Do not use the sensor system with mirrors in a retro-reflective
configuration. Doing so may hinder detection. It is possible to
use mirrors to change the route of the light.
Receiver
Transmitter
When using more than 1 set of MS/MSF4800, install them so that
mutual interference does not occur, such as by configuring a
series connection or using physical barriers between adjacent
sets.
d
Reflection
Reflective surface
Hazardous area borderline
Fig. 3 Example of Unsafe Installation
The interruption of the beam due to the obstacle is not detected
because of reflection. Reflective surface interference can occur from
either above or below the sensing area.
Sensing area
The MS/ MSF4800 is equipped with two scan codes, A and B, to
reduce mutual interference from other Safety Light Curtains. The
Transmitter and Receiver must both be set to the same scan code to
enable the Receiver to change to Machine Run State.
Obstacle
a
Transmitter
Reflection
Receiver
Reflective surface
Hazardous area borderline
277
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 278 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
WARNING
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Install a protective structure so that the hazardous part of a
machine can only be reached by passing through the sensor's
detection zone. Install the sensors so that part of the person is
always present in the detection zone when working in a
machine's hazardous areas. If a person is able to step into the
hazardous area of a machine and remain behind the MS/
MSF4800's detection zone, configure the system with an
interlock function that prevents the machine from being
restarted. Otherwise it may result in heavy injury.
Additional Protection
It is necessary to use an appropriate means, such as a fixed barrier
guard, interlock guard, or safety mat, to protect areas that provide
access to any hazardous areas of a machine that are not protected by
the MS/MSF4800. See the examples in the following diagram.
Correct Safety Light Curtain Installation Examples
Ds
Auxiliary
protection
Safety Light Curtain
Basic Installation Precautions
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
Do not use this sensor for machines that cannot possibly be
quickly stopped by electrical controls. For example, do not use
it for a pressing machine that uses a full-rotation clutch.
Otherwise, the machine may not stop before a person reaches
the hazardous part, resulting in serious injury.
Hazardous
area
Example of auxiliary protection
Using the MS/MSF4800 in Presence Sensing Device Initiation
(PSDI) Mode, which is used to restart machine cycle operation,
requires that an appropriate control circuit be configured
between the MS/MSF4800 and the guarded machine. For details
on PSDI, refer to related standards and regulations, including
ANSI RIA 15.06-1999, OSHA 1910.217(h), and ANSI B11.2-1995
(R2005).
Mechanical protection
Auxiliary
protection
Adding Mechanical Protection to
the MS4800
Three-directional MSF4800
Protection
Auxiliary protection
When using the Start/Restart Interlock Mode, install the interlock
reset switch in a location that provides a clear view of the entire
hazardous area and where it cannot be activated from within the
hazardous area.
Do not use the MS/MSF4800 in environments where flammable
or explosive gases are present. Doing so may result in
explosion.
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
The MS/MSF4800 cannot protect a person from an object flying
from a hazardous area. Install protective cover(s) or fence(s).
Auxiliary
protection
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Make sure that the MS/MSF4800 is securely mounted and its
cables and connectors are properly connected.
Be sure to test the operation of the MS/MSF4800 after installation
with the machine in a non-operating condition to verify that the
MS/MSF4800 operates as intended. Unintended function
settings may cause a person to go undetected, resulting in
serious injury.
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
278
Two-axis MSF4800 Protection
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 279 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
Receiver
Transmitter
Setting the Scan Codes When Installing Multiple Safety
Light Curtains
Receiver
To increase rigidity, it is recommended that mounting brackets be
added when installing an MS/MSF4800 system that has a length of
1,000 mm or more. Use the T-slot groove on the back of the MS/
MSF4800 to install the mounting brackets to the rear surfaces of both
the Transmitter and Receiver.
Transmitter
Strengthening Rigidity during Installation
Machine 1
Machine 2
Code A
Code B
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
Alternative
T-slot mounting
MS4800
The installation adjustment for the Transmitter and Receiver is
easiest when the system is in Auto Start Mode with the fixed blanking
function disabled. Install the Transmitter and Receiver at the same
height, on the same flat surface. The individual beam indicators (IBI)
will turn ON when the beams are not aligned. For details, refer to
Individual Beam Indicators (IBI) on page 264.
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Installation Adjustment
Product
Selection
The sensing area of the MS/MSF4800 can be delineated by drawing
lines from the inside edges of the End Caps on the Transmitter and
Receiver. The area outside these lines is not sensed. Install the MS/
MSF4800 so that it is not possible to enter the hazardous area without
passing through the sensing area.
Safety
Sensors
Sensing Area
Alternative
T-slot mounting
Input Power Supply Requirements
Note: When the alternate T-slot mounting is used to secure the MS/
MSF4800, the mounting bracket can no longer be used to
adjust the beams.
Installing Multiple Systems
When installing two or more MS/MSF4800 systems with the same
scan code in a line in close proximity, measures must be taken to
prevent mutual interference between the systems. This problem can
be solved by positioning Transmitters and Receivers back-to-back, or
by stacking the systems.
Staggering Positions When Installing Multiple Safety
Light Curtains
Transmitter
Receiver
Receiver
Transmitter
Machine 2
Code A
Code A
Peripheral Protection Requirements
For peripheral protection, install the MS/MSF4800 so that its sensing
area is outside the periphery of the guarded machine or robot. This
installation method can be used to provide space for the operator to
stand between the sensing area and the hazardous area. In this
configuration, the guarded machine must be restartable only by using
a key switch, and the key switch must be outside the hazardous
operation area, in a location where the entire hazardous area is
visible. Start/Restart Interlock Mode is well suited to peripheral
protection applications.
Minimum Detectable Object Diameter Indication
Recommended Installation
Machine 1
The MS/MSF4800 operates at 24 VDC ±20%. The power supply for
the MS/MSF4800 must satisfy the momentary power interruption and
voltage drop requirements of IEC 61496-1 (4.3.2.2, 5.4.3.2) and IEC
60204-1 (4.3.3). Use the OMRON power supply with STI Parts No.
42992 or equivalent.
The serial number labels on the Transmitter and Receiver have marks
for four minimum detectable object diameters. When installing the
MS/MSF4800, use an oil-based marking pen to cross out the
minimum detectable object diameters that were not set. The minimum
detectable object diameter differs when floating blanking is not used
and when floating blanking is set for one or two beams. For details,
refer to the Mini Safe 4800 Series Light Curtains Installation and
Operating Manual.
Receiver
Transmitter
Receiver
Transmitter
Non-recommended Installation
Machine 1
Machine 2
Code A
Code A
The MS/MSF4800 scan code function can also be used to install
multiple systems in a line in close proximity. Special coding for the
light beams allows unique system operation, and can be used with
other systems possessing different scan codes. The MS/MSF4800 is
equipped with two scan codes.
279
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 280 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MS4800 Series
Sensor Restart of Machine Cycle Operation (PSDI)
Using the Safety Light Curtain to initiate a machine cycle after an
object is removed from the sensing area is called Presence Sensing
Device Initiation (PSDI). Use of PSDI places additional requirements
on the guarding and safety controls. It can restrict advanced Safety
Light Curtain features such as floating blanking and fixed blanking.
Details on PSDI can be found in ANSI RIA 15.06-1999, OSHA
1910.217(h), and ANSI B11.2-1995 (R2005).
For wiring
WARNING
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
For PNP output, connect the load between the output and 0 V
line. Connecting the load between the output and +24 V line
results in a dangerous condition because the operation mode is
reversed to “ON when light is interrupted.”
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Do not interconnect an output line with a +24-V line. Otherwise,
the output is always ON, creating a dangerous situation. Also, 0
V of the power supply must be grounded so that output does not
turn ON due to grounding of the output line.
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
Configure the system by using the optimal number of control
outputs that satisfy the requirements of the necessary safety
category.
Do not connect the lines of the MS/MSF4800 to a DC power
supply higher than 24 V +20%. Also, do not connect to an AC
power supply. Otherwise, it may result in electric shock.
For the MS/MSF4800 to comply with IEC 61496-1 and UL 508, the
DC power supply unit must satisfy all of the following
conditions:
• Must be within rated power voltage (24 VDC ±20%).
• Must have tolerance against the total rated current of devices
if it is connected to multiple devices.
• Must comply with EMC directives (industrial environment).
• Double or enhanced insulation must be applied between the
primary and secondary circuits.
• Automatic recovery must be possible for overcurrent
protection.
• Output holding time must be 20 ms or longer.
• Must satisfy output characteristic requirements for class 2
circuit or limited voltage current circuit defined by UL508.
• Must comply with the EMC, laws, and regulations of the
country or region where the MS/MSF4800 is used. (For
example, in the EU, the power supply must comply with the
EMC Low Voltage Directive.)
Double or enhanced insulation from hazardous voltage must be
applied to all input and output lines. Failure to do so may result
in electric shock.
The cable extension length must be no greater than the specified
length. Otherwise, the safety functions may fail to work properly,
resulting in danger.
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
Programming and Diagnostics Module
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
The MS/MSF4800-series Safety Light Curtains require the use of a
Programming and Diagnostics Module (PDM) to program the
operating parameters of the Light Curtain. In addition to Safety Light
Curtain configuration, this Module also serves as a diagnostics
device, allowing the user to retrieve fault information.
• Displays programming and diagnostics information on a multi-line
LCD display.
• Supports English and Japanese languages. To switch between
English and Japanese, continue to press the right Forward/
Backward Scroll Button more than ten times at the log-in screen
that appears after the PDM is connected to the MS/MSF4800.
• The housing is rated IP65, allowing permanent mounting near the
Safety Light Curtain.
Note: The light curtain does not require the PDM to operate. The
factory default settings allow for basic guarding operation.
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
Up/Down Scroll Buttons
Enter Button
PDM Navigation Buttons
Name
Shape
Description
Forward/
Backward
Scroll Buttons
Scroll forward and backward to
review the previous and next
menu, or to move within the
same screen.
Up/Down
Scroll Buttons
Scroll up and down to review the
selection of the current menu.
Enter Button
When pressed the selected function will be accessed.
Note: For information on the operating method, refer to the Mini Safe
4800 Series Safety Light Curtains Installation and Operating
Manual.
F3SS
F3SS
Forward/Backward
Scroll Buttons
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
280
CSM_MS4800_DS_E_1_1.fm Page 281 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:17 PM
MEMO
281
F3SJ.fm Page 282 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
Safety Light Curtain (Type 4)
F3SJ Ver.2
The updated F3SJ is even easier to use.
• The lineup also includes models with S-mark certification.
• New models for body protection or presence detection.
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Be sure to read the “Safety Precautions” on page 346
and the “Precautions for All Safety Sensors” on page 242.
Features
Choose from two new tools for setting parameters and checking the system status.
"SD Manager" PC Setting Support Software
F3SJ
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
To a USB terminal
F39-JC@A Singleend Connector
Cable or F39-JC@B
Double-end
Connector Cable
Branch
Connector
Connection Cable
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
All parameters can be set and the system status can be checked
with a personal computer. In addition to making it easy to monitor
the beam alignment, the ambient incident light intensity can be
displayed in bar graph form for an easy check of the system status.
F39-GWUM
"SD Manager"
PC Setting
Support Software
The "SD Manager" PC Setting Support Software helps reduce the time required for installing and troubleshooting the Safety Light Curtain.
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
● Beam alignment is easier.
● The ambient incident light
intensity can be checked.
● The error log can be displayed.
The incident light level can be displayed in a bar
graph for each beam.
The incident light level when the light emission of the
Safety Light Curtain is stopped is displayed in a bar
graph.
The cause of the errors and countermeasures are
both displayed.
Setting Console
F3SJ
F3SS
F3SS
F39-JC@A Single-end
Connector Cable or
F39-JC@B Double-end
Connector Cable
Branch
Connector
Connection Cable
When you don't want to carry a personal
computer onto the worksite, the Setting
Console is a handy way to set
parameters and check the system
status.
F39-MC21
Setting Console for the F3SJ
Note: The range of parameter setting and system status checking capabilities is different for the PC Setting Support Software and the Setting
Console.
282
F3SJ.fm Page 283 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
New functions respond to a variety of safety needs.
Two new functions have been added to the muting function.
Partial muting
Position detection muting
Partial muting raises safety by muting only the beams of the Safety
Light Curtain in the area where the workpiece passes through, while
preventing muting in all other areas.
This is used in applications where the workpiece is set in position
each time by an operator, and then a turntable or positioning robot
moves the workpiece to the area where the work is done. A limit
switch or other means is used to detect when the robot is in a safe
position, and muting is then applied.
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
Warning zone
Detection zone
F3SN-A@SS
Detection zone
A single sensor can also be divided
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Dividing the zone between series-connected
sensors
F3SP-T01
A warning zone can be set to alert people before they enter a danger zone.
F39-TC5
In this case, 2-beam floating blanking
is set. If three or more beams are
interrupted, the output goes OFF.
The beam that would otherwise be constantly
interrupted by the workbench is disabled.
F3SJ Ver.2
Floating blanking
MS4800
Fixed blanking
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
The blanking function disables specific beams of the Safety Light Curtain.
Product
Selection
Only the beams of the Safety Light
Curtain that would be interrupted by
the workpiece are muted.
Safety
Sensors
The Safety Light Curtain
beams in all areas other
than where the workpiece
passes through are
constantly ON.
Warning zone
283
F3SJ.fm Page 284 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Selecting a device is as easy as 1-2-3.
The F3SJ Safety Light Curtain is a Type 4 safety sensor that can be used to configure a Category 4 safety circuit.
This means that there is no need to worry about the safety of the resulting circuit. Use the following three easy steps to select the best model for
your system design.
Select the required sensor length.
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
The F3SJ incorporates the "perfect fit" concept that is a feature of
OMRON's other Safety Light Curtains. With a line-up of products in
1-beam increments, you can find the sensor that fits your setup
perfectly. Refer to the list of sensor models on pages 288, 289 and
290 to select the minimum sensor length required to cover the area
you want to protect.
Note: We can also manufacture sensors with lengths not included in
the list of models. For details, please consult your OMRON
sales representative.
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
Sensor length = Protective height
Select the output transistor.
Choose the PNP type when installing in safety system configurations
that comply with the Machinery Directive or when using with a
dedicated controller (F3SP-B1P or F3SX). NPN types are also
available as standard products when replacing existing area sensors.
Select the application.
In addition to finger protection, hand protection, and hand/arm
protection models, new models have been added that detects a leg or
the presence of a person.
For areas where there is only a short distance to the source of danger,
select a finger protection model. For areas where there is some
distance to the hazardous point and where the machinery stops with
sufficient time to spare, choose an economical hand/arm/body
protection model.
2,500 mm
Maximum
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
245 mm
Minimum
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Finger-protection
Detection
Hand-protection
Detection
Hand/arm-protection
Detection
Capability: 14 mm diameter
(Beam gap: 9 mm)
Capability: 20 mm
diameter
(Beam gap: 15 mm)
Capability: 30 mm diameter
(Beam gap: 25 mm)
Capability: 25 mm
diameter
(Beam gap: 20 mm)
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
Leg/body-protection and
Presence Detection
Capability: 55 mm diameter
(Beam gap: 50 mm)
P
PNP output
F3SJ-A
F3SS
F3SS
N
Protective height
(0245 to 2,500 mm)
Output type
NPN output
14
20
25
30
55
Finger
Hand
Hand
Hand/arm
Leg/body-protection and
Presence Detection
Detection type
284
F3SJ.fm Page 285 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Easier to install, easier to use.
The thin sensor saves valuable space.
The sensor is 6 mm thinner than our previous models.
When you include the newly designed mounting brackets, which also
enable beams to be aligned after the sensor is mounted, the total
thickness is 26 mm - a reduction of 19 mm compared to previous
models. The low profile means the sensor will not get in the way when
adding safety applications to existing equipment.
Previous
model
30 mm
F3SJ
24 mm
The included standard mounting brackets are
easier than ever to use.
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
Free-directional
cables can be
routed down,
back, left or right.
Flexible cables
with 5 mm bending
radius can be
adhesively
mounted to the
floor.
F3SP-T01
The F3SJ cables (0.3 m) have M12 connectors and can be routed in
any direction. Problems with connector compatibility have been
eliminated.
F39-TC5
The direction of all screws
can be oriented
perpendicular to the lens
surface. Easy screwdriver
access.
Flexible cable with a 5 mm bending radius makes
wiring a snap.
F3SJ Ver.2
26 mm
MS4800
45 mm
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
F3SJ
2 mm
15 mm
Product
Selection
Previous model
Safety
Sensors
The included mounting brackets, which are suitable for general use,
have been redesigned with ease of use in mind.
The new design allows easy screwdriver access, even when
mounting in tight spaces. Also, after aligning the beams, screws can
be tightened while oriented perpendicular to the lens surface, just like
the panel mounting screws.
On previous models, the carefully adjusted beam angles would
sometimes come out of alignment when tightening the final screws.
This problem has been solved with the F3SJ, because the
screw-tightening direction is different from the angle adjustment
direction. The result is reduced installation time.
The sensor can be rotated
along its axis. Beam
alignment can be finetuned, even when mounted
side by side on a surface.
Side-mounting in tight spaces is simple.
When using standard mounting brackets to mount a sensor on its
side, the bracket protrudes outward in front of the lens surface. When
this protrusion is of concern, use the F39-LJ2 side-mounting brackets
(sold separately).
10 mm
Easy to change from previous models.
When replacing your previous standard multiple-beam area sensor,
use the F39-LJ4 top / bottom mounting bracket B (sold separately),
which features enlarged mounting holes.
Can be used with a pitch of 18 to 20 mm
6 mm
37 mm
285
F3SJ.fm Page 286 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
A variety of features are provided for easier use.
Resistant to mutual interference. No wiring
between sensors and no interference for up to
three sets.
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
OMRON has developed a unique interference light prevention
algorithm that automatically prevents malfunction, even when light
is received from three sets.
This feature is ideal for applications where it is not possible to
perform wiring with an interference sensor, such as between an
AGV and installed equipment.
Also, the Setting Tool can be used to adjust the emitted light
intensity to minimize the effect of light on other devices.
AGV
Maximum protective height of 2,500 mm.
Series connection is more convenient than ever.
Series connection cable up to 15 m long
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
Sensors with protective heights of up to nearly 2.5 meters are available for applications that involve
large-sized workpieces. And if you happen to make changes in the future, you can always extend the
protective height with series connections. Up to four sets, or 400 beams, can be series-connected, and
with series connection cables up to 15 meters in length, applications can cover a wide area.
25 mm
20 mm gap between end beams when
connected side by side
2.5 m (100 beams)
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Total length: Approx. 10 m (400 beams)
No bottlenecks in workflow. Free-location brackets make
vertical installation easy.
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
To create "perfect fit" installations with no dead zones or extra space when
making series connections in L- or U-shaped configurations, use the F39-LJ3
free-location mounting brackets (sold separately) and F39-JJR06L Side-by-side
Series Connection Cable.
In addition to the F39-JJR06L mentioned above, the F39-JJR15L and F39JJR3W etc. can also be used with series connection cables.
Side-by-side Series
Connection Cable
(F39-JJR06L)
F39-LJ3 free-location mounting brackets can
be mounted in any location, without getting
in the way of the adjacent sensor.
25 mm
25 mm
25 mm
F3SS
F3SS
Application example
U-shaped configuration
286
Keep a 25-mm beam gap in L-shaped installations.
The cable (F39-JJR06L) does not get in the way when
used in series connections.
F3SJ.fm Page 287 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
New functions for extra reliability.
Combine safety and productivity with a controller-less muting function.
The muting function temporarily disables the light curtain when an object must pass
through the detection zone, such as when supplying a workpiece to your equipment.
In the past, this function required a dedicated muting controller, but now it is built into
the F3SJ.
To use the muting function, purchase the F39-CN6 Key Cap for Muting (sold
separately). The muting function is enabled simply by replacing the Unit's cap with this
Key Cap. In addition, a muting sensor that determines the muting timing, as well as a
muting lamp that communicates the muting status to other operators, should be
connected to the F3SJ.
Built-in muting function
No controller required. Simply attach the
Key Cap (sold separately) to the sensor.
F39-CN6
Key Cap for Muting
The Safety Light Curtain can be disabled when an
AGV carrying a workpiece passes through.
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
Like previous Type 4 Safety Light Curtains, the F3SJ conforms to the latest required
safety standards and regulations. Since the F3SJ also complies with IEC61508, the
international standard for functional safety, safety is ensured regardless of where it is
used.
F3SJ Ver.2
Complies with the latest international safety standards and
regulations.
MS4800
Does not operate
without the Key Cap.
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Operates as a single
sensor when the Key
Cap is attached.
Product
Selection
The connectors for series connection feature an intelligent design. To connect a series
connection cable to the F3SJ, remove the Key Cap that is required when the sensor is
used by itself.
If you should happen to forget to connect the series connection cable, the sensor will not
operate by itself without the Key Cap.
This solves the problem of sensors operating independently when a series connection
cable is accidentally left unconnected, such as when equipment is moved.
Safety
Sensors
A measure to prevent you from forgetting to connect a series
connection cable.
.
International standards
IEC61496-1, IEC61496-2, IEC61508 1998 (SIL3)
EU legislation EN standards
Machinery Directive, EMC Directive, EN61496-1, prEN61496-2, EN61508 2001 (SIL3)
JIS standards
JIS B9704-1, B9704-2
North American standards
UL61496-1, UL61496-2, UL508, UL1998, CAN/CSA22.2 NO.14,
CAN/CSA22.2 NO.0.8
• Can be used with equipment subject to US OSHA standards (29 CFR 1910.212).
• Satisfies the requirements of the ANSI/RIA R15.06-1999 standards for industrial robots.
• Models are also available which have received S-mark certification from the Korea Occupational Safety and Health Agency (KOSHA).
These models have an “-S” at the end of the model number.
287
F3SJ.fm Page 288 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Ordering Information
Main Units
Safety Light Curtain F3SJ-A (Type 4)
Application
Finger
protection
Detection
capability
14-mm-dia.
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
20-mm-dia.
Beam
gap
Infrared light
Appearance
Operating range
9 mm
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
30-mm-dia.
Leg/body
protection,
Presence
Detection
55 mm-dia.
0.2 to 9 m
26 to 180
245 to 1,631
0.2 to 9 m
16 to 100
245 to 1,505
0.2 to 7 m
110 to 166
1,655 to 2,495
0.2 to 9 m
16 to 100
245 to 1,505
0.2 to 7 m
110 to 166
1,655 to 2,495
0.2 to 9 m
13 to 82
260 to 1,640
0.2 to 7 m
83 to 125
1,660 to 2,500
0.2 to 9 m
13 to 82
260 to 1,640
0.2 to 7 m
83 to 125
1,660 to 2,500
0.2 to 9 m
10 to 65
245 to 1,620
0.2 to 7 m
70 to 100
1,745 to 2,495
0.2 to 9 m
6 to 33
270 to 1,620
0.2 to 7 m
34 to 50
1,670 to 2,470
Model
PNP Output NPN Output
F3SJA@@@@P14
*1
F3SJA@@@@N14
F3SJA@@@@P20
*1
F3SJA@@@@N20
F3SJA@@@@P20
-TS *2
---
F3SJA@@@@P25
*1
F3SJA@@@@N25
20 mm
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Hand/arm
protection
Protective
height (mm)
15 mm
Hand
protection
25 mm-dia.
Number of
beams
25 mm
50 mm
F3SJA@@@@P25
-TS *2
---
F3SJA@@@@P30
*1
F3SJA@@@@N30
F3SJA@@@@P55
*1
F3SJA@@@@N55
Note: Connection cables are not included with the products and are to be purchased separately, as needed. You must purchase optional connector cable.
*1. Models with S-mark certification have an "-S" at the end of the model number. Example: F3SJ-A0245P14-S
*2. Models with fixed auto reset (-TS). Parameters cannot be set using the F39-MC21 Setting Console or F39-GWUM "SD Manager" Setting
Support Software for F3SJ. See the Ratings and Performance data for other differences between this and standard models.
Safety Light Curtain Model List
Products other than those listed below are also available. Please contact your OMRON sales representative for details.
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SJ-A14 Series (9 mm gap)
Model
PNP Output
NPN Output
No. of
Protective
Beams Height (mm) *
Model
PNP Output
NPN Output
No. of
Protective
Beams Height (mm) *
245
F3SJ-A0605P14
F3SJ-A0605N14
66
605
28
263
F3SJ-A0623P14
F3SJ-A0623N14
68
623
F3SJ-A0281P14
F3SJ-A0281N14
30
281
F3SJ-A0659P14
F3SJ-A0659N14
72
659
F3SJ-A0299P14
F3SJ-A0299N14
32
299
F3SJ-A0695P14
F3SJ-A0695N14
76
695
F3SJ-A0317P14
F3SJ-A0317N14
34
317
F3SJ-A0731P14
F3SJ-A0731N14
80
731
F3SJ-A0335P14
F3SJ-A0335N14
36
335
F3SJ-A0767P14
F3SJ-A0767N14
84
767
F3SJ-A0353P14
F3SJ-A0353N14
38
353
F3SJ-A0803P14
F3SJ-A0803N14
88
803
F3SJ-A0371P14
F3SJ-A0371N14
40
371
F3SJ-A0839P14
F3SJ-A0839N14
92
839
F3SJ-A0389P14
F3SJ-A0389N14
42
389
F3SJ-A0875P14
F3SJ-A0875N14
96
875
F3SJ-A0407P14
F3SJ-A0407N14
44
407
F3SJ-A0911P14
F3SJ-A0911N14
100
911
F3SJ-A0425P14
F3SJ-A0425N14
46
425
F3SJ-A0983P14
F3SJ-A0983N14
108
983
F3SJ-A0443P14
F3SJ-A0443N14
48
443
F3SJ-A1055P14
F3SJ-A1055N14
116
1055
F3SJ-A0461P14
F3SJ-A0461N14
50
461
F3SJ-A1127P14
F3SJ-A1127N14
124
1127
F3SJ-A0479P14
F3SJ-A0479N14
52
479
F3SJ-A1199P14
F3SJ-A1199N14
132
1199
F3SJ-A0497P14
F3SJ-A0497N14
54
497
F3SJ-A1271P14
F3SJ-A1271N14
140
1271
F3SJ-A0515P14
F3SJ-A0515N14
56
515
F3SJ-A1343P14
F3SJ-A1343N14
148
1343
F3SJ-A0533P14
F3SJ-A0533N14
58
533
F3SJ-A1415P14
F3SJ-A1415N14
156
1415
F3SJ-A0551P14
F3SJ-A0551N14
60
551
F3SJ-A1487P14
F3SJ-A1487N14
164
1487
F3SJ-A0569P14
F3SJ-A0569N14
62
569
F3SJ-A1559P14
F3SJ-A1559N14
172
1559
F3SJ-A0587P14
F3SJ-A0587N14
64
587
F3SJ-A1631P14
F3SJ-A1631N14
180
* Protective Height (mm) = Total sensor length
1631
F3SS
F3SS
26
F3SJ-A0263N14
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SJ-A0245N14
F3SJ-A0263P14
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SJ-A0245P14
288
F3SJ.fm Page 289 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ-A20 Series (15-mm gap),
F3SJ-A20-TS Series (15-mm gap) *1
Model
PNP Output *1
NPN Output
F3SJ-A25 Series (20-mm gap),
F3SJ-A25-TS Series (20-mm gap) *1
No. of
Protective
Beams Height (mm) *2
F3SJ-A0455N20
30
455
F3SJ-A0485P20
F3SJ-A0485N20
32
485
F3SJ-A0515P20
F3SJ-A0515N20
34
515
F3SJ-A0545P20
F3SJ-A0545N20
36
545
F3SJ-A0575P20
F3SJ-A0575N20
38
575
F3SJ-A0605P20
F3SJ-A0605N20
40
605
F3SJ-A0635P20
F3SJ-A0635N20
42
635
F3SJ-A0665P20
F3SJ-A0665N20
44
665
F3SJ-A0695P20
F3SJ-A0695N20
46
695
F3SJ-A0725P20
F3SJ-A0725N20
48
725
F3SJ-A0755P20
F3SJ-A0755N20
50
755
F3SJ-A0785P20
F3SJ-A0785N20
52
785
F3SJ-A0815P20
F3SJ-A0815N20
54
815
F3SJ-A0845P20
F3SJ-A0845N20
56
845
F3SJ-A0875P20
F3SJ-A0875N20
58
875
F3SJ-A0905P20
F3SJ-A0905N20
60
905
F3SJ-A0935P20
F3SJ-A0935N20
62
935
F3SJ-A0965P20
F3SJ-A0965N20
64
965
F3SJ-A0995P20
F3SJ-A0995N20
66
995
F3SJ-A1025P20
F3SJ-A1025N20
68
1025
F3SJ-A1055P20
F3SJ-A1055N20
70
1055
F3SJ-A1085P20
F3SJ-A1085N20
72
1085
F3SJ-A1115P20
F3SJ-A1115N20
74
1115
F3SJ-A1145P20
F3SJ-A1145N20
76
1145
F3SJ-A1175P20
F3SJ-A1175N20
78
1175
F3SJ-A1205P20
F3SJ-A1205N20
80
1205
F3SJ-A1235P20
F3SJ-A1235N20
82
1235
F3SJ-A1265P20
F3SJ-A1265N20
84
1265
F3SJ-A1325P20
F3SJ-A1325N20
88
1325
F3SJ-A1385P20
F3SJ-A1385N20
92
1385
F3SJ-A1445P20
F3SJ-A1445N20
96
1445
F3SJ-A1505P20
F3SJ-A1505N20
100
1505
F3SJ-A1655P20
F3SJ-A1655N20
110
1655
F3SJ-A1805P20
F3SJ-A1805N20
120
1805
F3SJ-A1955P20
F3SJ-A1955N20
130
1955
F3SJ-A2105P20
F3SJ-A2105N20
140
2105
F3SJ-A2255P20
F3SJ-A2255N20
150
2255
F3SJ-A2405P20
F3SJ-A2405N20
160
2405
F3SJ-A2495P20
F3SJ-A2495N20
166
2495
*1. The suffix "-TS" is attached to the model number of models with
fixed auto reset. (Only for PNP output)
*2. Protective Height (mm) = Total sensor length
F3SS
F3SJ-A0455P20
E3FS
E3ZS
425
F3SN-A@SS
28
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SJ-A0425N20
F3SP-T01
395
F3SJ-A0425P20
F39-TC5
26
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ-A0395N20
MS4800
365
F3SJ-A0395P20
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
24
Product
Selection
F3SJ-A0365N20
Safety
Sensors
335
F3SJ-A0365P20
F3SS
22
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SJ-A0335N20
F3SN-A@SS
305
F3SJ-A0335P20
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
275
20
F3SP-T01
18
F3SJ-A0305N20
F39-TC5
F3SJ-A0275N20
F3SJ-A0305P20
260
300
340
380
420
460
500
540
580
620
660
700
740
780
820
860
900
940
980
1020
1060
1100
1140
1180
1220
1260
1300
1340
1380
1420
1460
1500
1540
1580
1620
1660
1700
1740
1780
1820
1860
1900
1940
1980
2020
2060
2100
2140
2180
2220
2260
2300
2340
2380
2420
2460
2500
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ-A0275P20
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
59
61
63
65
67
69
71
73
75
77
79
81
83
85
87
89
91
93
95
97
99
101
103
105
107
109
111
113
115
117
119
121
123
125
MS4800
245
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
16
No. of
Protective
Beams Height (mm) *2
Product
Selection
F3SJ-A0245N20
NPN Output
F3SJ-A0260N25
F3SJ-A0300N25
F3SJ-A0340N25
F3SJ-A0380N25
F3SJ-A0420N25
F3SJ-A0460N25
F3SJ-A0500N25
F3SJ-A0540N25
F3SJ-A0580N25
F3SJ-A0620N25
F3SJ-A0660N25
F3SJ-A0700N25
F3SJ-A0740N25
F3SJ-A0780N25
F3SJ-A0820N25
F3SJ-A0860N25
F3SJ-A0900N25
F3SJ-A0940N25
F3SJ-A0980N25
F3SJ-A1020N25
F3SJ-A1060N25
F3SJ-A1100N25
F3SJ-A1140N25
F3SJ-A1180N25
F3SJ-A1220N25
F3SJ-A1260N25
F3SJ-A1300N25
F3SJ-A1340N25
F3SJ-A1380N25
F3SJ-A1420N25
F3SJ-A1460N25
F3SJ-A1500N25
F3SJ-A1540N25
F3SJ-A1580N25
F3SJ-A1620N25
F3SJ-A1660N25
F3SJ-A1700N25
F3SJ-A1740N25
F3SJ-A1780N25
F3SJ-A1820N25
F3SJ-A1860N25
F3SJ-A1900N25
F3SJ-A1940N25
F3SJ-A1980N25
F3SJ-A2020N25
F3SJ-A2060N25
F3SJ-A2100N25
F3SJ-A2140N25
F3SJ-A2180N25
F3SJ-A2220N25
F3SJ-A2260N25
F3SJ-A2300N25
F3SJ-A2340N25
F3SJ-A2380N25
F3SJ-A2420N25
F3SJ-A2460N25
F3SJ-A2500N25
Safety
Sensors
F3SJ-A0245P20
Model
PNP output *1
F3SJ-A0260P25
F3SJ-A0300P25
F3SJ-A0340P25
F3SJ-A0380P25
F3SJ-A0420P25
F3SJ-A0460P25
F3SJ-A0500P25
F3SJ-A0540P25
F3SJ-A0580P25
F3SJ-A0620P25
F3SJ-A0660P25
F3SJ-A0700P25
F3SJ-A0740P25
F3SJ-A0780P25
F3SJ-A0820P25
F3SJ-A0860P25
F3SJ-A0900P25
F3SJ-A0940P25
F3SJ-A0980P25
F3SJ-A1020P25
F3SJ-A1060P25
F3SJ-A1100P25
F3SJ-A1140P25
F3SJ-A1180P25
F3SJ-A1220P25
F3SJ-A1260P25
F3SJ-A1300P25
F3SJ-A1340P25
F3SJ-A1380P25
F3SJ-A1420P25
F3SJ-A1460P25
F3SJ-A1500P25
F3SJ-A1540P25
F3SJ-A1580P25
F3SJ-A1620P25
F3SJ-A1660P25
F3SJ-A1700P25
F3SJ-A1740P25
F3SJ-A1780P25
F3SJ-A1820P25
F3SJ-A1860P25
F3SJ-A1900P25
F3SJ-A1940P25
F3SJ-A1980P25
F3SJ-A2020P25
F3SJ-A2060P25
F3SJ-A2100P25
F3SJ-A2140P25
F3SJ-A2180P25
F3SJ-A2220P25
F3SJ-A2260P25
F3SJ-A2300P25
F3SJ-A2340P25
F3SJ-A2380P25
F3SJ-A2420P25
F3SJ-A2460P25
F3SJ-A2500P25
*1. The suffix "-TS" is attached to the model number of models with
fixed auto reset. (Only for PNP output)
*2. Protective Height (mm)= Total sensor length
289
F3SJ.fm Page 290 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ-A30 Series (25-mm gap)
Model
PNP Output
NPN Output
F3SJ-A55 Series (50-mm gap)
No. of
Protective
Beams Height (mm) *
Model
PNP Output
NPN Output
No. of
Beams
Protective
Height (mm) *
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
F3SJ-A0245P30
F3SJ-A0245N30
10
245
F3SJ-A0270P55 F3SJ-A0270N55
6
270
F3SJ-A0270P30
F3SJ-A0270N30
11
270
F3SJ-A0320P55 F3SJ-A0320N55
7
320
F3SJ-A0295P30
F3SJ-A0295N30
12
295
F3SJ-A0370P55 F3SJ-A0370N55
8
370
F3SJ-A0320P30
F3SJ-A0320N30
13
320
F3SJ-A0420P55 F3SJ-A0420N55
9
420
F3SJ-A0345P30
F3SJ-A0345N30
14
345
F3SJ-A0470P55 F3SJ-A0470N55
10
470
F3SJ-A0370P30
F3SJ-A0370N30
15
370
F3SJ-A0520P55 F3SJ-A0520N55
11
520
F3SJ-A0395P30
F3SJ-A0395N30
16
395
F3SJ-A0570P55 F3SJ-A0570N55
12
570
F3SJ-A0420P30
F3SJ-A0420N30
17
420
F3SJ-A0620P55 F3SJ-A0620N55
13
620
F3SJ-A0445P30
F3SJ-A0445N30
18
445
F3SJ-A0670P55 F3SJ-A0670N55
14
670
F3SJ-A0470P30
F3SJ-A0470N30
19
470
F3SJ-A0720P55 F3SJ-A0720N55
15
720
F3SJ-A0495P30
F3SJ-A0495N30
20
495
F3SJ-A0770P55 F3SJ-A0770N55
16
770
F3SJ-A0520P30
F3SJ-A0520N30
21
520
F3SJ-A0820P55 F3SJ-A0820N55
17
820
F3SJ-A0545P30
F3SJ-A0545N30
22
545
F3SJ-A0870P55 F3SJ-A0870N55
18
870
F3SJ-A0570P30
F3SJ-A0570N30
23
570
F3SJ-A0920P55 F3SJ-A0920N55
19
920
F3SJ-A0595P30
F3SJ-A0595N30
24
595
F3SJ-A0970P55 F3SJ-A0970N55
20
970
F3SJ-A0620P30
F3SJ-A0620N30
25
620
F3SJ-A1020P55 F3SJ-A1020N55
21
1020
F3SJ-A0645P30
F3SJ-A0645N30
26
645
F3SJ-A1070P55 F3SJ-A1070N55
22
1070
F3SJ-A0670P30
F3SJ-A0670N30
27
670
F3SJ-A1120P55 F3SJ-A1120N55
23
1120
F3SJ-A0695P30
F3SJ-A0695N30
28
695
F3SJ-A1170P55 F3SJ-A1170N55
24
1170
F3SJ-A0720P30
F3SJ-A0720N30
29
720
F3SJ-A1220P55 F3SJ-A1220N55
25
1220
F3SJ-A0745P30
F3SJ-A0745N30
30
745
F3SJ-A1270P55 F3SJ-A1270N55
26
1270
F3SJ-A0770P30
F3SJ-A0770N30
31
770
F3SJ-A1320P55 F3SJ-A1320N55
27
1320
F3SJ-A0795P30
F3SJ-A0795N30
32
795
F3SJ-A0820P30
F3SJ-A0820N30
33
820
F3SJ-A1370P55 F3SJ-A1370N55
28
1370
F3SJ-A0845P30
F3SJ-A0845N30
34
845
F3SJ-A1420P55 F3SJ-A1420N55
29
1420
F3SJ-A0870P30
F3SJ-A0870N30
35
870
F3SJ-A1470P55 F3SJ-A1470N55
30
1470
F3SJ-A0895P30
F3SJ-A0895N30
36
895
F3SJ-A1520P55 F3SJ-A1520N55
31
1520
F3SJ-A0920P30
F3SJ-A0920N30
37
920
F3SJ-A1570P55 F3SJ-A1570N55
32
1570
F3SJ-A0945P30
F3SJ-A0945N30
38
945
F3SJ-A1620P55 F3SJ-A1620N55
33
1620
F3SJ-A0970P30
F3SJ-A0970N30
39
970
F3SJ-A1670P55 F3SJ-A1670N55
34
1670
F3SJ-A0995P30
F3SJ-A0995N30
40
995
F3SJ-A1720P55 F3SJ-A1720N55
35
1720
F3SJ-A1020P30
F3SJ-A1020N30
41
1020
F3SJ-A1770P55 F3SJ-A1770N55
36
1770
F3SJ-A1045P30
F3SJ-A1045N30
42
1045
F3SJ-A1820P55 F3SJ-A1820N55
37
1820
F3SJ-A1070P30
F3SJ-A1070N30
43
1070
F3SJ-A1870P55 F3SJ-A1870N55
38
1870
F3SJ-A1095P30
F3SJ-A1095N30
44
1095
F3SJ-A1920P55 F3SJ-A1920N55
39
1920
F3SJ-A1970P55 F3SJ-A1970N55
40
1970
F3SJ-A2020P55 F3SJ-A2020N55
41
2020
F3SJ-A2070P55 F3SJ-A2070N55
42
2070
F3SJ-A2120P55 F3SJ-A2120N55
43
2120
F3SJ-A2170P55 F3SJ-A2170N55
44
2170
45
2220
F3SJ-A1120P30
F3SJ-A1145P30
F3SJ-A1170P30
F3SJ-A1195P30
F3SJ-A1220P30
F3SJ-A1120N30
F3SJ-A1145N30
F3SJ-A1170N30
F3SJ-A1195N30
F3SJ-A1220N30
45
46
47
48
49
1120
1145
1170
1195
1220
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SJ-A1245P30
F3SJ-A1245N30
50
1245
F3SJ-A2220P55 F3SJ-A2220N55
F3SJ-A1270P30
F3SJ-A1270N30
51
1270
F3SJ-A2270P55 F3SJ-A2270N55
46
2270
1295
F3SJ-A2320P55 F3SJ-A2320N55
47
2320
1395
F3SJ-A2370P55 F3SJ-A2370N55
48
2370
1495
F3SJ-A2420P55 F3SJ-A2420N55
49
2420
1620
F3SJ-A2470P55 F3SJ-A2470N55
50
2470
F3SJ-A1295P30
F3SJ-A1395P30
F3SJ-A1495P30
F3SJ-A1620P30
F3SJ-A1295N30
F3SJ-A1395N30
F3SJ-A1495N30
F3SJ-A1620N30
52
56
60
65
F3SS
F3SS
F3SJ-A1745P30
F3SJ-A1745N30
70
1745
F3SJ-A1870P30
F3SJ-A1870N30
75
1870
F3SJ-A1995P30
F3SJ-A1995N30
80
1995
F3SJ-A2120P30
F3SJ-A2120N30
85
2120
F3SJ-A2245P30
F3SJ-A2245N30
90
2245
F3SJ-A2370P30
F3SJ-A2370N30
95
2370
F3SJ-A2495P30
F3SJ-A2495N30
100
2495
* Protective Height (mm)= Total sensor length
290
* Protective Height (mm)= Total sensor length
F3SJ.fm Page 291 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Accessories (Optional)
Single-end Connector Cable (2 cables per set, for emitter and receiver)
For wiring with safety circuit such as single safety relay, safety relay unit, and safety controller
Appearance
Cable length
Specifications
Model
0.5 m
F39-JCR5A
3m
F39-JC3A
7m
F39-JC7A
M12 connector (8-pin)
10 m
F39-JC10A
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
Double-end Connector Cable (2 cables per set, for emitter and receiver)
MS4800
F39-JC20A
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
20 m
Product
Selection
F39-JC15A
Safety
Sensors
15 m
For connection with F3SP-B1P control unit, and for extension when series-connected *
Appearance
Cable length
Specifications
Model
0.5 m
F39-JCR5B
1m
F39-JC1B
3m
F39-JC3B
5m
F39-JC5B
7m
F39-JC7B
M12 connector (8-pin)
10 m
F39-JC10B
15 m
F39-JC15B
20 m
F39-JC20B
30 m
F39-JC30B
40 m
F39-JC40B
* To extend the cable length under series connection, use F39-JJR3W and F39-JC@B in combination. Also, the cable length 20 to 40 m cannot
be used.
Power Cable (Included with the main unit) (2 cables per set, for emitter and receiver)
Appearance
Cable length
Model
0.3 m
F39-JJR3K
Series Connection Cable (2 cables per set, for emitter and receiver)
Type
Appearance
Cable length
Model
Application
Series connection cable
0.3 m
F39-JJR3W
For series connection *1
When using the Water-resistant
Case. *2
Extension cable
0.5 to 15 m
F39-JC@B
To change series connection
length in combination with F39JJR3W
0.06 m
F39-JJR06L
0.15 m
F39-JJR15L
Side-by-side Series
connection cable
Dedicated series connection
cable with minimum length,
used in place of the sensor's
cable with connector
*1. Total cable length of series connection is 0.6 m to connect to connector cable of the main sensor unit.
For series connection with minimum length, use the F39-JJR06L or F39-JJR15L.
*2. When using the F39-EJ@@@@-L/D Water-resistant Case in series connection configurations, use the special series connection cables for the
Water-resistant Case. Refer to page 295 for details.
291
F3SJ.fm Page 292 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Relays with Forcibly Guided Contacts
Type
Appearance
Specifications
Model
• No. of contacts: 4
• Contact type: 2NO+2NC
G7SA-2A2B
• Rated switch load: 250 VAC 6 A, 30 VDC 6 A
G7SA Relays with
Forcibly Guided
Contacts
• No. of contacts: 4
• Contact type: 3NO+1NC
G7SA-3A1B
• Rated switch load: 250 VAC 6 A, 30 VDC 6 A
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
• No. of contacts: 6
G7S-4A2B-E
• Contact type: 4NO+2NC
• Rated switch load: 250 VAC 10 A, 30 VDC 10 A
G7S@-E Relays
with Forcibly Guided
Contacts
• No. of contacts: 6
G7S-3A3B-E
• Contact type: 3NO+3NC
• Rated switch load: 250 VAC 10 A, 30 VDC 10 A
Remarks
For other models and
functions, refer to G7SA
on page 538 and Socket
models.
For other models and
functions, refer to
G7S@-E on page 554
and Socket models.
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Control unit (Can not be used as a muting system)
(Dedicated PNP output type) *
Appearance
Output
Model
F3SP-B1P *
Relay, 3NO+1NC
Remarks
For connection with F3SJ-A, use an F39-JC@B double-end
connector cable
* F3SJ for NPN output type cannot be connected.
MS4800
MS4800
Wire-saving Devices
Type
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
Connector Terminal
Box/Muting
Terminals *1
Safety Terminal
Relays *2
Appearance
Specifications
Model with PNP Muting Sensor Output
F39-TC5P01
Model with PNP Override Input
F39-TC5P02
Model with NPN Muting Sensor Output
F39-TC5N01
Model with NPN Override Input
F39-TC5N02
PNP output relay, SPDT-NO
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
*1. For the F3SJ-A.
*2. For the F3SJ-A@P@.
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
OMRON offers many Safety Application Controllers to help you build safety circuits.
Refer to page 568 for available models. Refer to page 574 for specifications.
F3SS
F3SS
292
Model
Remarks
Significantly reduces
amount of wiring
between Safety Light
Curtains and Muting
Sensors
IP67 model for mounting
at Sensor installation site
Refer to F39-TC5 on
page 360
Significantly reduces
amount of wiring
between Safety Light
Curtains and Muting
Sensors
Refer to F3SP-T01 on
page 368
F3SJ.fm Page 293 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Dedicated External Indicator Set (Can be connected to either an emitter or a receiver)
Appearance
Color
Model
Remarks
Red
F39-A01PR-PAC
Indicator (red), mounting bracket (1 set), and dedicated
connection cable (0.1 m)
Green
F39-A01PG-PAC
Indicator (green), mounting bracket (1 set), and dedicated
connection cable (0.1 m)
Yellow
F39-A01PY-PAC
Indicator (yellow), mounting bracket (1 set), and dedicated
connection cable (0.1 m)
F39-MLG1219
1,422
F39-MLG1422
1,626
F39-MLG1626
1,830
F39-MLG1830
2,134
F39-MLG2134
F3SS
F39-MLG1067
1,219
E3FS
E3ZS
F39-MLG0914
F3SN-A@SS
914
1,067
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F39-MLG0711
F3SP-T01
F39-MLG0610
711
F39-TC5
F39-MLG0406
610
F3SJ Ver.2
406
MS4800
Model
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
32
Length (mm)
Product
Selection
145
Thickness (mm)
Safety
Sensors
Glass mirror
Width (mm)
F3SS
* The same 4-digit numbers as the protective heights (@@@@ in the light curtain type names) are substituted by @@@@ in the model names.
Mirror material
E3FS
E3ZS
Model
Mirrors (12% Sensing Distance Attenuation)
F3SN-A@SS
F39-JJ3N
F39-HJ@@@@ *
F3SJ-A series
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Applicable sensor
F3SP-T01
Model
Spatter Protection Cover (Includes two pieces for emitter and receiver)
(Each unit reduces the operating range by 10%)
Appearance
F39-TC5
Cable to connect top of the main unit and an off-the shelf external
indicator (2-wire)
3m
F3SJ Ver.2
Specifications
MS4800
Cable length
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Appearance
Product
Selection
General External Indicator Cable
Safety
Sensors
Note: For indication timing (operation mode) see "Specifications" on page 296.
293
F3SJ.fm Page 294 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Sensor Mounting Bracket (Sold separately)
Appearance
Specifications
Model
Application
Remarks
(included in the main unit)
2 for emitter,
2 for receiver
(total of 4 per set)
Use these small-sized brackets when
performing side mounting with standard
mounting brackets, so that they do not
protrude from the detection surface.
2 for emitter,
2 for receiver
(total of 4 per set)
F39-LJ3
Use these brackets for mounting on any
place without using standard bracket.
1 set with 2 pieces
(For details about the
number of required
brackets, refer to page
320.)
F39-LJ3-SN
When replacing the F3SN with the F3SJ,
the mounting hole pitches in the
Intermediate Brackets are not the same.
This Spacer is placed between the
mounting holes to mount the F3SJ.
1 set with 2 pieces
Top/bottom mounting
bracket B (mounting hole
pitch 19 mm)
F39-LJ4
Mounting bracket used when replacing
existing area sensors (other than F3SN or
2 for emitter,
F3WN) with the F3SJ.
2 for receiver
For front mounting.
(total of 4 per set)
Suitable for mounting hole pitch of 18 to
20 mm.
Bracket for replacing
short-length F3SN
F39-LJ5
Mounting bracket used when an F3SN
with protective height of 300 mm or less is
replaced by an F3SJ.
F39-LJ8
Use these brackets to mount facing
2 for emitter,
inward.
2 for receiver
Length is 12 mm shorter than the standard
(total of 4 per set)
F39-LJ1 bracket.
Mounting bracket used
when replacing an
F3W-C.
F39-LJ9
Mounting bracket used when replacing
existing F3W-C series area sensors with
the F3SJ.
For front mounting or side mounting.
Mounting hole pitch 16 mm.
2 for emitter,
2 for receiver
(total of 4 per set)
Top/bottom mounting
bracket C (mounting hole
pitch 13 mm)
F39-LJ11
Mounting bracket used when replacing
existing area sensors having a mounting
pitch of 13 mm with the F3SJ.
2 for emitter,
2 for receiver
(total of 4 per set)
Standard mounting
bracket (for top/bottom)
F39-LJ1
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Flat side mounting bracket F39-LJ2
Free-location mounting
bracket (also used as
standard intermediate
bracket)
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SN Intermediate
Bracket Replacement
Spacers
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Space-saving mounting
bracket
2 for emitter,
2 for receiver
(total of 4 per set)
Key cap for muting
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
294
Appearance
Model
F39-CN6
Remarks
Cap attaches to the main unit to enable muting function.
Attach it to either an emitter or a receiver. (Case: orange)
F3SJ.fm Page 295 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Setting Tools *1
Type
Appearance
Model
Remarks
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
Model
F3SP-T01
---
Specifications
F39-TC5
Appearance
F3SJ Ver.2
Water-resistant Case (Set of 1 tube, packing, and dedicated connector cable) *1 *2
MS4800
*1. When using for both emitter and receiver, order two sets.
*2. The same four digits indicating protective height that are used in the Sensor model number (@@@@) are used in the @@@@ part of the Protector
model number.
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
F39-PJ-MS
For side mounting, order to suit the
desired protective height.
Protective height of up to 1,000 mm: 0
intermediate brackets
Protective height of 1,001 to 2,000 mm: 1
intermediate bracket
Protective height of 2,001 mm or more: 2
intermediate brackets
Product
Selection
Rear Mounting Brackets (2), including
intermediate brackets to match protective
height (0 to 2).
Safety
Sensors
F39-PJ@@@@-S *2
F3SS
Intermediate brackets for
side mounting
Remarks
E3FS
E3ZS
Protective Bar Set
Model
F3SN-A@SS
Appearance
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Type
F3SP-T01
Protective Bar (Main unit mounting bracket (1) and a rear mounting bracket set) *1
F39-TC5
*1. The setting tools described above can be connected only to F3SJ-A models with built-in software of Ver. 2 or later.
Note that the setting tools cannot be used with products shipped prior to December 2005. The setting tools cannot be used for setting
parameters on the F3SJ-A@-TS series, but the monitoring function can be used.
*2. This product is for use only with the F3SJ-A. It cannot be connected to conventional models of the F3SN-A series.
Similarly, the F39-MC11 and F39-MT11 Dedicated Consoles for the F3SN-A cannot be connected to the F3SJ-A series.
F3SJ Ver.2
Accessories: F39-CN1 Branch Connector
(1), Connector Cap (1), 2-m Dedicated
Cable (1), 0.3-m Dedicated Cable with
Plug (1), Instruction Manual
MS4800
F39-MC21 *2
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Setting Console
Product
Selection
F39-GWUM
Accessories: SD Manager CD-ROM (1),
F39-CN1 Branch Connector (1),
Connector Cap (1), 2-m Dedicated Cable
(1), 0.3-m Dedicated Cable with Plug (1),
Instruction Manual
Safety
Sensors
"SD Manager" Setting
Support Software for the
F3SJ
Remarks
For emitter
F39-EJ@@@@-L *3
Includes gray cable for emitter.
For receiver
F39-EJ@@@@-D *3
Includes black cable for receiver.
Rear Mounting Brackets
F39-EJ-R *4
Top/bottom 1 each, total of 2
Side Mounting Brackets
F39-EJ-S *4
Top/bottom 1 each, total of 2
Series connection cable
(for emitter)
F39-JJR3WE-L
Series connection cable
(for receiver)
F39-JJR3WE-D
Purchase additionally for series
connection when using the
Water-resistant Case.
*1. When using for both emitter and receiver, order two sets.
*2. There are restrictions to the application conditions depending on the protective height of the Curtain. Refer to the Water-resistant Case on page 303.
*3. The same four digits indicating protective height that are used in the Sensor model number (@@@@) are used in the @@@@ part of the Case
model number.
*4. Be sure to purchase brackets with the Case to match the mounting direction (rear or side).
295
F3SJ.fm Page 296 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Specifications (For details, refer to the instruction manual or User’s manual.)
Main Units
F3SJ-A@@@@P14/P20/P25/P30/P55/N14/N20/N25/N30/N55
Model
PNP
outputs
F3SJ-A@@@@P14
F3SJ-A@@@@P20
F3SJ-A@@@@P25
F3SJ-A@@@@P30
F3SJ-A@@@@P55
NPN
outputs
F3SJ-A@@@@N14
F3SJ-A@@@@N20
F3SJ-A@@@@N25
F3SJ-A@@@@N30
F3SJ-A@@@@N55
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Sensor type
Type 4 safety light curtain
Version
Ver. 2
Setting tool connection
Connectable
Applicable safety category
Category 4, 3, 2, 1, or B
Detection capability
Opaque objects
14 mm in diameter
Opaque objects
20 mm in diameter
Opaque objects
25 mm in diameter
Opaque objects
30 mm in diameter
Opaque objects
55 mm in diameter
50 mm
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
Beam gap (P)
9 mm
15 mm
20 mm
25 mm
Number of beams (n)
26 to 180
16 to 166
13 to 125
10 to 100
Protective height (PH)
245 to 1,631 mm
245 to 2,495 mm
260 to 2,500 mm
Lens diameter
Diameter 5 mm
Operating range *
0.2 to 9 m (protective height 1,640 mm max.),
0.2 to 7 m (protective height 1,655 mm min.)
(Depending on the setting tool, the detection distance can be shortened to 0.5 m.)
Response time
(under stable light
incident
condition) (For
details, see
"Response Time"
on page 301.)
ON to
OFF
1 set, 0245 to 983: 11 ms
to 17.5 ms max.
1,055 or higher: 20 ms to
25 ms max.
1 set, 0245 to 1,205: 10 ms
to 15 ms max.
1,235 or higher: 17.5 ms to
22.5 ms max.
1 set, 0260 to 1,600: 10 ms
to 15 ms max.
1,620 or higher: 17.5 ms to
20.0 ms max.
1 set: 10 ms to 17.5 ms
max.
1 set: 10 ms to 13 ms
max.
OFF to
ON
1 set, 0245 to 983: 44 ms
to 70 ms max.
1,055 or higher: 80 ms to
100 ms max.
1 set, 0245 to 1,205: 40 ms
to 60 ms max.
1,235 or higher: 70 ms to
90 ms max.
1 set, 0260 to 1,600: 40 ms
to 60 ms max.
1,620 or higher: 70 ms to
80 ms max.
1 set: 40 ms to 70 ms
max.
1 set: 40 ms to 52 ms
max.
Startup waiting time
Power supply voltage (Vs)
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
Current
consumption (no
load)
6 to 50
270 to 2,470 mm
2 s max. (2.2 s max. for series connection)
24 VDC ±20% (ripple p-p10% max.)
Emitter
Up to 50 beams: 76 mA max., 51 to 100 beams: 106 mA max., 101 to 150 beams: 130 mA max.,
151 to 180 beams: 153 mA max., 201 to 234 beams: 165 mA max.
Receiver
Up to 50 beams: 68 mA max., 51 to 100 beams: 90 mA max., 101 to 150 beams: 111 mA max.,
151 to 180 beams: 128 mA max., 201 to 234 beams: 142 mA max.
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
Light source
(emitted wavelength)
Infrared LED (870 nm)
Effective aperture angle
(EAA)
Based on IEC61496-2. Within ±2.5° for both emitter and receiver when the detection distance is 3 m or over
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
Control outputs
(OSSD)
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
Auxiliary output 1
(non-safety
output)
Auxiliary output 2
(non-safety
output, basic
system functions)
PNP
outputs
Two PNP transistor outputs, load current 300 mA max., residual voltage 2 V max. (except for voltage drop due to cable extension),
allowable capacity load 2.2 μF, leak current 1 mA max.
(This can be different from traditional logic (ON/OFF) because safety circuit is used.)
NPN
outputs
Two NPN transistor outputs, load current 300 mA max., residual voltage 2 V max. (except for voltage drop due to cable extension),
allowable capacity load 2.2 μF, leak current 2 mA max.
(This can be different from traditional logic (ON/OFF) because safety circuit is used.)
PNP
output
One PNP transistor output, load current 300 mA max., residual voltage 2 V max. (except for voltage drop due to cable extension),
leak current 1 mA max.
NPN
output
One NPN transistor output, load current 300 mA max., residual voltage 2 V max. (except for voltage drop due to cable extension),
leak current 1 mA max.
PNP
output
One PNP transistor output, load current 50 mA max., residual voltage 2 V max. (except for voltage drop due to cable extension),
leak current 1 mA max.
NPN
output
One NPN transistor output, load current 50 mA max., residual voltage 2 V max. (except for voltage drop due to cable extension),
leak current 1 mA max.
External indicator output
(non-safety output)
F3SS
F3SS
Output operation
mode
Available indicators
• Incandescent lamp: 24 VDC, 3 to 7 W
• LED lamp: Load current 10 mA to 300 mA max., leak current 1 mA max.
(To use an external indicator, an F39-JJ3N universal indicator cable or an F39-A01P@-PAC dedicated external indicator kit is
required.)
Control outputs 1, 2:ON when receiving light
Auxiliary output 1:Inverse of control output signals (Operating mode can be changed with the setting tool.)
Receiver External indicator output 1:Inverse of control output signals for a basic system (Operating mode can be changed with the setting
tool.)
ON when muting/override for a muting system (Operating mode can be changed with the setting tool.)
Emitter
Auxiliary output 2: Turns ON when the point of 30,000 operating hours is reached
(Operating mode can be changed with the setting tool.)
External indicator output 2:ON when lock-out for a basic system (Operating mode can be changed with the setting tool.)
ON when muting/override for a muting system (Operating mode can be changed with the setting tool.)
* Use of the Spatter Protection Cover causes a 10% maximum sensing distance attenuation.
296
F3SJ.fm Page 297 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Model
PNP
outputs
NPN
outputs
F3SJ-A@@@@P20
F3SJ-A@@@@P25
F3SJ-A@@@@P30
F3SJ-A@@@@P55
F3SJ-A@@@@N14
F3SJ-A@@@@N20
F3SJ-A@@@@N25
F3SJ-A@@@@N30
F3SJ-A@@@@N55
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
Start interlock, restart interlock (Must be set with a setting tool when the muting function is used.)
External device monitor
Muting (Lamp burnout detection, override function included. F39-CN6 key cap for muting is required.)
Fixed blanking (must be set by a setting tool)
Floating blanking (must be set by a setting tool)
E3FS
E3ZS
Safety functions
•
•
•
•
•
F3SN-A@SS
• Self test (when power is turned ON and while power is supplied)
• External test (emission stop function by test input)
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Test functions
F3SP-T01
Series connection
Time division emission by series connection
• Number of connections: up to 4 sets
• Total number of beams: up to 400 beams
• Maximum cable length for 2 sets: no longer than 15 m
• Response time under connection: See page 301
F39-TC5
Interference light prevention algorithm, detection distance change function
F3SJ Ver.2
Mutual interference
prevention function
MS4800
Light intensity level indicators (green LED × 2, orange LED × 3): ON based on the light intensity
Error mode indicators (red LED × 3): Blink to indicate error details
Receiver OFF output indicator (red LED × 1): ON when safety output is OFF, blinks at lockout.
ON output indicator (green LED × 1): ON while safety output is ON muting error indicator, Blanking /test indicator (green LED × 2):
ON/flash according to function
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Emitter
Light intensity level indicators (green LED × 2, orange LED × 3): ON based on the light intensity
Error mode indicators (red LED × 3): Blink to indicate error details
Power indicator (green LED × 1): ON while power is on
Interlock indicator (yellow LED × 1): ON while under interlock, blinks at lockout.
External device monitoring indicator (muting input 1 indicator), Blanking/test indicator (muting input 2 indicator) (green LED × 2):
ON/flash according to function
---
Product
Selection
NPN
output
Test input, interlock selection input, reset input, and muting input are all
ON voltage:0 to 1.5 V (short-circuit current 3 mA max.)
OFF voltage:9 to 24 V, or open
External device monitoring input
ON voltage:0 to 1.5 V (short-circuit current 5 mA max.)
OFF voltage:9 to 24 V, or open
Safety
Sensors
PNP
output
Test input, interlock selection input, reset input, and muting input are all
ON voltage:9 to 24 V (Vs) (sink current: 3 mA max.)
OFF voltage:0 to 1.5 V, or open
External device monitoring input
ON voltage:9 to 24 V (Vs) (sink current: 5 mA max.)
OFF voltage:0 to 1.5 V, or open
Input voltage
Indicators
F3SJ-A@@@@P14
297
F3SJ.fm Page 298 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Model
PNP
outputs
NPN
outputs
F3SJ-A@@@@P14
F3SJ-A@@@@P20
F3SJ-A@@@@P25
F3SJ-A@@@@P30
F3SJ-A@@@@P55
F3SJ-A@@@@N14
F3SJ-A@@@@N20
F3SJ-A@@@@N25
F3SJ-A@@@@N30
F3SJ-A@@@@N55
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Connection type
Connectors (M12, 8-pin)
Protective circuits
Output short-circuit protection, and power supply reverse polarity protection
Ambient temperature
Operating: −10 to 55°C (no icing), Storage: −30 to 70°C
Ambient humidity
Operating: 35% to 85% (no condensation), Storage: 35% to 95%
Ambient operating light
intensity
Incandescent lamp: 3,000 lx max. (light intensity on the receiver surface), Sunlight: 10,000 lx max. (light intensity on the receiver
surface)
Insulation resistance
20 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC 50/60 Hz, 1 min
Degree of protection
IP65 (IEC60529)
Vibration resistance
Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 0.7-mm double amplitude, 20 sweeps in X, Y, and Z directions
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Test rod (*1), instruction manual, mounting brackets (top and bottom), mounting brackets (intermediate) (*2), error mode label,
User's Manual (CD-ROM)
*1. The F3SJ-A@@@@@55 is not included.
*2. Number of intermediate mounting brackets depends on protective height of F3SJ.
• For protective height from 600 to 1,130 mm: 1 set for each of the emitter and receiver is included
• For protective height from 1,136 to 1,658 mm: 2 sets for each of the emitter and receiver are included
• For protective height from 1,660 to 2,180 mm: 3 sets for each of the emitter and receiver are included
• For protective height from 2,195 to 2,500 mm: 4 sets for each of the emitter and receiver are included
IEC61496-1, EN61496-1 UL61496-1, Type 4 ESPE (Electro-Sensitive Protective Equipment)
IEC61496-2, prEN61496-2, UL61496-2, Type 4 AOPD (Active Opto-electronic Protective Devices)
IEC61508, EN61508 SIL3
Accessories
F3SJ Ver.2
Weight (packed state)
Calculate using the following equations:
(1) For F3SJ-A@@@@@14, weight (g)=(protective height) × 1.7 + α
(2) For F3SJ-A@@@@@20/F3SJ-A@@@@@25/F3SJ-A@@@@@30, weight (g)=(protective height) × 1.5 + α
(3) For F3SJ-A@@@@@55, weight (g)=(protective height) × 1.4 + α
The values for α are as follows:
Protected height 245 to 596 mm: α = 1,100 protected height 1,660 to 2,180 mm: α = 2,400
Protected height 600 to 1,130 mm: α = 1,500 protected height 2,195 to 2,500 mm: α = 2,600
Protected height 1,136 to 1,658 mm: α = 2,000
MS4800
Materials
F3SJ Ver.2
Malfunction: 100 m/s2, 1,000 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Casing (including metal parts on both ends): Aluminum, zinc die-cast
Cap: ABS resin
Optical cover: PMMA resin (acrylic)
Cable: Oil resistant PVC
MS4800
Shock resistance
Applicable standards
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
298
F3SJ.fm Page 299 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ-A@@@@P20-TS/P25-TS
Model
F3SJ-A@@@@P20-TS
Sensor type
F3SJ-A@@@@P25-TS
Type 4 safety light curtain
Version
Ver. 2
Setting tool connection
Parameter setting: Not possible
Monitoring: Possible
Applicable safety category
Category 4, 3, 2, 1, or B
Detection capability
Opaque objects
20 mm in diameter
Opaque objects
25 mm in diameter
Light source
(emitted wavelength)
Infrared LED (870 nm)
Effective aperture angle (EAA) Based on IEC61496-2. Within ±2.5° for both emitter and receiver when the detection distance is 3 m or over
Control outputs (OSSD)
Two PNP transistor outputs, load current 300 mA max., residual voltage 2 V max. (except for voltage drop due to cable extension),
allowable capacity load 2.2 μF, leak current 1 mA max.
(This can be different from traditional logic (ON/OFF) because safety circuit is used.)
Auxiliary output 1
(non-safety output)
One PNP transistor output, load current 300 mA max., residual voltage 2 V max. (except for voltage drop due to cable extension),
leak current 1 mA max.
External indicator output
(non-safety output)
Available indicators
• Incandescent lamp: 24 VDC, 3 to 7 W
• LED lamp: Load current 10 mA to 300 mA max., leak current 1 mA max.
(To use an external indicator, an F39-JJ3N universal indicator cable or an F39-A01P@-PAC dedicated external indicator kit is
required.)
Output operation
mode
Receiver
Control outputs 1, 2:
ON when receiving light
Auxiliary output 1:
Inverse of control output signals
External indicator output 1: Inverse of control output signals for a basic system
ON when muting/override for a muting system
Emitter
External indicator output 2: ON when lock-out for a basic system
ON when muting/override for a muting system
Test input, reset input, and muting input are all
ON voltage:9 to 24 V (Vs) (sink current: 3 mA max.)
OFF voltage:0 to 1.5 V, or open
External device monitoring input
ON voltage:9 to 24 V (Vs) (sink current: 5 mA max.)
OFF voltage:0 to 1.5 V, or open
Input voltage
Emitter
Light intensity level indicators (green LED × 2, orange LED × 3): ON based on the light intensity
Error mode indicators (red LED × 3): Blink to indicate error details
Power indicator (green LED × 1): ON while power is on
Lockout indicator (yellow LED × 1): Blinks to indicate lockout.
External device monitoring indicator (muting input 1 indicator), Test indicator (muting input 2 indicator) (green LED × 2):
ON/flash according to function
Receiver
Light intensity level indicators (green LED × 2, orange LED × 3): ON based on the light intensity
Error mode indicators (red LED × 3): Blink to indicate error details
OFF output indicator (red LED × 1): ON when safety output is OFF, blinks at lockout.
ON output indicator (green LED × 1): ON while safety output is ON muting error indicator, Test indicator (green LED × 2): ON/flash
according to function
Indicators
F3SS
Up to 50 beams: 68 mA max., 51 to 100 beams: 90 mA max., 101 to 150 beams: 111 mA max.,
151 to 166 beams: 128 mA max.
E3FS
E3ZS
Receiver
F3SN-A@SS
Up to 50 beams: 76 mA max., 51 to 100 beams: 106 mA max., 101 to 150 beams: 130 mA max.,
151 to 166 beams: 153 mA max
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Emitter
F3SP-T01
Current
consumption
(no load)
F39-TC5
24 VDC ±20% (ripple p-p10% max.)
F3SJ Ver.2
2 s max. (2.2 s max. for series connection)
Power supply voltage (Vs)
MS4800
Startup waiting time
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
1 set, 0260 to 1,600: 40 ms to 60 ms max.
1,620 or higher: 70 ms to 80 ms max.
3 sets (240 beams): 200 ms
Product
Selection
1 set, 0245 to 1,205: 40 ms to 60 ms max.
1,220 or higher: 70 ms to 90 ms max.
3 sets (240 beams): 200 ms
Safety
Sensors
OFF to
ON
F3SS
1 set, 0260 to 1,600: 10 ms to 15 ms max.
1,620 or higher: 17.5 ms to 20.0 ms max.
3 sets (240 beams): 45.5 ms
E3FS
E3ZS
ON to
OFF
1 set, 0245 to 1,205: 10 ms to 15 ms max.
1,220 or higher: 17.5 ms to 22.5 ms max.
3 sets (240 beams): 45.5 ms
F3SN-A@SS
0.2 to 9 m (protective height 1,640 mm max.), 0.2 to 7 m (protective height 1,655 mm max.)
Response time
(under stable light
incident condition)
(For details, see
"Response Time"
on page 301.)
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Operating range
F3SP-T01
260 to 2,500 mm
Diameter 5 mm
F39-TC5
245 to 2,495 mm
Lens diameter
F3SJ Ver.2
Protective height (PH)
MS4800
13 to 125
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
20 mm
16 to 166
Product
Selection
15 mm
Number of beams (n)
Safety
Sensors
Beam gap (P)
299
F3SJ.fm Page 300 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Model
F3SJ-A@@@@P20-TS
Mutual interference
prevention function
Interference light prevention algorithm
Series connection
Time division emission by series connection
• Number of connections: up to 3 sets
• Total number of beams: up to 240 beams
• Maximum cable length for 2 sets: no longer than 15 m
• Response time under connection: See page 301
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Test functions
• Self test (when power is turned ON and while power is supplied)
• External test (emission stop function by test input)
Safety functions
• External device monitor
• Muting (Override function included. F39-CN6 Key Cap for muting is required.)
Lockout occurs under either of the following conditions:
• When more than 3 Units are connected in series.
• When the total number of beams connected in series exceeds 240.
• When any model other than a "-TS" model is included in a series connection.
Connection type
F3SJ-A@@@@P25-TS
Connectors (M12, 8-pin)
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Protective circuits
Output short-circuit protection, and power supply reverse polarity protection
Ambient temperature
Operating: −10 to 55°C (no icing), Storage: −30 to 70°C
Ambient humidity
Operating: 35% to 85% (no condensation), Storage: 35% to 95%
Ambient operating light
intensity
Incandescent lamp: 3,000 lx max. (light intensity on the receiver surface), Sunlight: 10,000 lx max. (light intensity on the receiver
surface)
Insulation resistance
20 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC 50/60 Hz, 1 min
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Degree of protection
IP65 (IEC60529)
Vibration resistance
Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 0.7-mm double amplitude, 20 sweeps in X, Y, and Z directions
Shock resistance
Malfunction: 100 m/s2, 1,000 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Materials
Casing (including metal parts on both ends): Aluminum, zinc die-cast
Cap: ABS resin
Optical cover: PMMA resin (acrylic)
Cable: Oil resistant PVC
Weight (packed state)
Calculate using the following equations:
For F3SJ-A@@@@P@@-TS, weight (g)=(protective height) × 1.5 + α
The values for α are as follows:
Protected height 245 to 590 mm: α = 1,100 protected height 1,660 to 2,180 mm: α = 2,400
Protected height 600 to 1,130 mm: α = 1,500 protected height 2,195 to 2,500 mm: α = 2,600
Protected height 1,140 to 1,655 mm: α = 2,000
Accessories
Test rod, instruction manual, mounting brackets (top and bottom), mounting brackets (intermediate) (*), error mode label, User's
Manual (CD-ROM)
* Number of intermediate mounting brackets depends on protective height of F3SJ.
• For protective height from 600 to 1,130 mm: 1 set for each of the emitter and receiver is included
• For protective height from 1,140 to 1,655 mm: 2 sets for each of the emitter and receiver are included
• For protective height from 1,660 to 2,180 mm: 3 sets for each of the emitter and receiver are included
• For protective height from 2,195 to 2,500 mm: 4 sets for each of the emitter and receiver are included
Applicable standards
IEC61496-1, EN61496-1 UL61496-1, Type 4 ESPE (Electro-Sensitive Protective Equipment)
IEC61496-2, prEN61496-2, UL61496-2, Type 4 AOPD (Active Opto-electronic Protective Devices)
IEC61508, EN61508 SIL3
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
300
F3SJ.fm Page 301 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Response Time
Model
F3SJ-A@14
series
30 to 42
12
44
48
407 to 497
44 to 54
13
52
515 to 605
56 to 66
14
56
623 to 731
68 to 80
15
60
70
13
52
56
845 to 995
56 to 66
14
1,025 to 1,205
68 to 80
15
60
1,235 to 1,655
82 to 110
17.5
70
1,805 to 2,105
120 to 140
20
80
2,255 to 2,495
150 to 166
22.5
90
260 to 320
13 to 16
10
40
340 to 580
17 to 29
11
44
600 to 840
30 to 42
12
48
860 to 1100
43 to 55
13
52
1120 to 1340
56 to 67
14
56
60
1360 to 1600
68 to 80
15
1620 to 2240
81 to 112
17.5
70
2260 to 2500
113 to 125
20.0
80
245 to 395
10 to 16
10
40
420 to 720
17 to 29
11
44
745 to 1,045
30 to 42
12
48
1,070 to 1,295
43 to 52
13
52
1,395 to 1,620
56 to 65
14
56
60
1,745 to 1,995
70 to 80
15
2,120 to 2,495
85 to 100
17.5
70
270 to 770
6 to 16
10
40
820 to 1420
17 to 29
11
44
1470 to 2070
30 to 42
12
48
2120 to 2470
43 to 50
13
52
Note: Use the following expressions for series connection.
For 2-set series connection:
Response time (ON to OFF): Response time of the 1st unit + Response time of the 2nd unit - 1 (ms)
Response time (OFF to ON): Response time calculated by the above x 4 (ms)
For 3-set series connection:
Response time (ON to OFF): Response time of the 1st unit + Response time of the 2nd unit + Response time of 3rd unit - 5 (ms)
Response time (OFF to ON): Response time calculated by the above x 5 (ms)
(For models with the "-TS" suffix, multiply the response time obtained by the above x 5 (ms),
or use 200 ms, whichever is less.)
For 4-set series connection:
Response time (ON to OFF): Response time of the 1st unit + Response time of the 2nd unit + Response time of the 3rd unit +
Response time of the 4th unit - 8 (ms)
Response time (OFF to ON): Response time calculated by the above x 5 (ms)
F3SS
44 to 54
E3FS
E3ZS
665 to 815
F3SN-A@SS
44
48
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
11
12
F3SP-T01
18 to 28
30 to 42
F39-TC5
275 to 425
455 to 635
F3SJ Ver.2
100
40
MS4800
25
10
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
180
16
Product
Selection
1,631
245
Safety
Sensors
90
F3SS
22.5
E3FS
E3ZS
148 to 172
F3SN-A@SS
80
1,343 to 1,559
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
20
F3SP-T01
17.5
116 to 140
F39-TC5
84 to 108
F3SJ Ver.2
767 to 983
1,055 to 1,271
MS4800
F3SJ-A@55
series
281 to 389
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
F3SJ-A@30
series
Response time ms (ON to OFF) Response time ms (OFF to ON)
11
Product
Selection
F3SJ-A@25
series
F3SJ-A@P25-TS
series
Number of Beams
26 to 28
Safety
Sensors
F3SJ-A@20
series
F3SJ-A@P20-TS
series
Protective Height (mm)
245 to 263
301
F3SJ.fm Page 302 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Cable Extension Length
Total cable extension length must be no greater than the lengths described below.
When the F3SJ and an external power supply are directly connected, or when the F3SJ is connected to a G9SA-300-SC.
Condition
1 set
2 sets
3 sets
4 sets
Using incandescent lamp for auxiliary output
and external indicator output
45 m
40 m
30 m
20 m
Not using incandescent lamp
100 m
60 m
45 m
30 m
When connected to the F3SP-B1P.
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Condition
1 set
2 sets
3 sets
4 sets
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Using incandescent lamp for external indicator
40 m
output 2
30 m
25 m
20 m
Using incandescent lamp for external indicator
output 1
60 m
Using incandescent lamp for auxiliary output 1
45 m
30 m
20 m
Not using incandescent lamp
60 m
45 m
30 m
100 m
Note: Keep the cable length within the rated length. Failure to do so is dangerous as it may prevent safety functions from operating normally.
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
302
F3SJ.fm Page 303 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Accessories
Control Unit
Item
Model
F3SP-B1P
Applicable sensor
F3SJ-A (Only for PNP output type) *
Power supply voltage
24 VDC±10%
Power consumption
DC1.7 W max. (not including sensor’s current consumption)
Operation time
100 ms max. (not including sensor’s response time)
Response time
10 ms max. (not including sensor’s response time)
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
Instruction manual
E3FS
E3ZS
Accessories
Terminal block
F3SN-A@SS
Approx. 280 g
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Weight (packed state)
F3SP-T01
M12 connector (8-pin)
F39-TC5
5A
Connection Between sensors
type
Others
F3SJ Ver.2
Rated current
MS4800
25 VAC 5 A (cosφ= 1),
30 VDC 5 A L/R = 0 ms
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Rated load
Product
Selection
Relay
output
3NO+1NC
Safety
Sensors
Number of
contacts
* NPN output type cannot be connected. Also, the system cannot be used as a muting system.
Dedicated External Indicator Set
Item
Model
F39-A01PR-PAC
F39-A01PG-PAC
F39-A01PY-PAC
Applicable sensor
F3SJ-A
(Common for PNP/NPN output type. Can be attached to emitters and/or receivers)
Light source
Red LED
Power supply voltage
24 VDC±10% (supplied by sensor)
Consumption current
50 mA max. (supplied by sensor)
Connection type
Dedicated accessory connector cable
(Sensor side: Dedicated 10-pin connector, Indicator side: M12 8-pin connector)
Set contents
Indicator (red), Dedicated
Indicator (green), Dedicated
Indicator (yellow), Dedicated
connector cable (0.1 m), Dedicated connector cable (0.1 m), Dedicated connector cable (0.1 m), Dedicated
mounting brackets (1 for each)
mounting brackets (1 for each)
mounting brackets (1 for each)
Green LED
Yellow LED
Water-resistant Case
Item
Model
F39-EJ@@@@-L, F39-EJ@@@@-D
Applicable sensor
F3SJ-series Curtains with a protective height of 600
mm max.
F3SJ-series Curtains with a protective height of 605
mm min.
Ambient temperature
-10 to 55°C (operation and storage)
13 to 33°C (operation and storage)
Mounting direction
No restrictions
Vertical direction only (see following diagram)
Operating range
0.2 to 7 m (for a protective height of 1,631 mm max.), 0.2 to 5 m (for a protective height of 1,655 mm min.)
Degree of protection
IP67 (IEC60529) (When assembled according to the application precautions)
Materials
Case: Acrylic resin, Rubber: Nitrile rubber, M5 bolt: SUSXM7, M4 bolt: SUS316L,
Cable: Oil-resistant PVC, Plate: SUS304, Mounting Bracket (optional): SUS304
Weight (packed state)
Calculation formula: Weight (g) = 1.5 x @@@@ + 300 (@@@@ stands for the four digits of the model number
(protective height))
(The optional Mounting Brackets come in a set of two, and weigh 120 g. This weight is not included in the
above formula.)
Note: 1. Vibration
When using Curtains with a protective height of 605 mm or more, the vibration performance of the applicable sensor is reduced.
Do not use these Curtains in locations that are subject to vibration.
2. Protective height
When using these cases, the protective height of the applicable sensor is reduced.
Check the rating and performance prior to use.
3. Mounting direction
When using Curtains with a protective height of 605 mm or more,
Mounting direction
some slackness occurs due to the weight of the Curtain.
(the cable end and terminating end can be positioned in either direction)
For this reason, mount these Curtains only in the vertical direction.
Horizontal direction
Vertical direction
Terminating end
Cable end
Terminating end
Cable end
303
F3SJ.fm Page 304 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Connections
Basic Connection for Basic System
"Basic system" refers to the F3SJ with its default factory settings. The basic system provides basic safety light curtain functions.
Most functions can be used without performing additional configuration.
For PNP output (See page 305 for NPN output wiring.)
Wiring when using manual reset mode, external device monitoring
Safety
Sensors
*1
*1
K3
K2
K1
0 V (Blue)
Control output 2 (White)
Control output 1 (Green)
K1
Auxiliary output 1 (Yellow)
24 V (Brown)
24 V (Brown)
Reset input (Yellow)
S2
External device monitoring input (Red)
S1
K2
*2
24 VDC
Power
0 V supply
Wiring for auto reset mode
Wiring when the external device monitoring function will not
be used
24 V (Brown)
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
24 VDC
Power
0 V supply
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
S1: External test switch (connect to 0 V if the switch is not
necessary.)
S3: Lockout reset switch (connect to 24 V if the switch is
not necessary)
K4: Load or PLC, etc. (for monitoring)
F3SS
F3SS
*1. Use a switch for micro loads (Input
specifications: 24 V, 1.8 mA).
*2. F3SJ operates even when K4 is not connected.
*
K3
K1
Shield
*1
0 V (Blue)
S3
Control output 2 (White)
(Pink) Communication line (−)
External device monitoring input (Red)
*1
Reset input (Yellow)
Test input (Green)
S1
(Gray) Communication line (+)
24 V (Brown)
K4
*2
Interlock selection input (White)
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Auxiliary output 2 (Red)
0 V (Blue)
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
Shield
Communication line (−) (Pink)
Control output 1 (Green)
F39-TC5
Communication line (+) (Gray)
Receiver
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
• Use a setting tool to set the external device monitoring function to
"Disabled."
• When using an auxiliary output 1 that has not been changed (output
operation mode is "control output data," and inverse of control output
signals is "Enabled), the external device monitoring function will be
disabled when auxiliary output 1 and the external device monitoring input
are connected as shown below.
Auxiliary output 1
(Yellow)
F3SJ Ver.2
• The auto reset mode will be enabled when the emitter is
wired as shown below.
Emitter
MS4800
*2
Test input (Green)
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
K4
Interlock selection input (White)
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Auxiliary output 2 (Red)
Product
Selection
0 V (Blue)
Shield
Safety
Sensors
*1. Use a switch for micro loads (Input specifications: 24 V, 1.8 mA).
*2. F3SJ operates even when K3 and K4 are not connected.
(Gray) Communication line (+)
(Pink)
Communication
line (−)
External test switch (connect to 0 V if the switch is not necessary.)
Interlock/lockout reset switch
Relay or other device that controls hazardous parts of the machine
Load or PLC, etc. (for monitoring)
Shield
Emitter
Receiver
S1:
S2:
K1, K2:
K3, K4:
K2
Power
0 V supply
K1, K2: Relay or other device that controls hazardous
parts of the machine
K3:
Load or PLC, etc. (for monitoring)
* The F3SJ operates even when K3 is not connected.
When K3 is not necessary, connect auxiliary output 1
only to the external device monitoring input.
304
24 VDC
F3SJ.fm Page 305 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
For NPN output (See page 304 for PNP output wiring.)
Wiring when using manual reset mode, external device monitoring
Emitter
Receiver
S1:
S2:
K1, K2:
K3, K4:
0 V (Blue)
Control output 2 (White)
Control output 1 (Green)
Auxiliary output 1 (Yellow)
External device monitoring input (Red)
24 V (Brown)
24 V (Brown)
Reset input (Yellow)
Test input (Green)
Interlock selection input (White)
Auxiliary output 2 (Red)
0 V (Blue)
Emitter
Receiver
24 V (Brown)
External test switch (connect to 24 V if the switch is
not necessary.)
Lockout reset switch (connect to 0 V if the switch is
not necessary)
Load or PLC, etc. (for monitoring)
*1. Use a switch for micro loads (Input
specifications: 5 V, 1 mA).
*2. F3SJ operates even when K4 is not connected.
*
K3
K1
Shield
0 V (Blue)
Control output 2 (White)
Control output 1 (Green)
Auxiliary output 1
(Yellow)
S3
*1
External device monitoring input (Red)
(Pink) Communication line (−)
24 V (Brown)
Reset input (Yellow)
Test input (Green)
Interlock selection input (White)
Auxiliary output 2 (Red)
0 V (Blue)
F3SS
Shield
E3FS
E3ZS
Shield
F3SN-A@SS
K4:
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
S3:
F3SP-T01
(Gray) Communication line (+)
24 VDC
Power
0 V supply
S1:
F39-TC5
S1
*1
F3SJ Ver.2
K4
*2
MS4800
Communication line (−) (Pink)
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Communication line (+) (Gray)
Product
Selection
• Use a setting tool to set the external device monitoring function to
"Disabled."
• When using an auxiliary output 1 that has not been changed (output
operation mode is "control output data," and inverse of control output
signals is "Enabled), the external device monitoring function will be
disabled when auxiliary output 1 and the external device monitoring input
are connected as shown below.
Safety
Sensors
Wiring when the external device monitoring function will not
be used
F3SS
• The auto reset mode will be enabled when the emitter is
wired as shown below.
E3FS
E3ZS
Wiring for auto reset mode
F3SN-A@SS
Power
0 V supply
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
24 VDC
F3SP-T01
K2
F39-TC5
K1
*2
F3SJ Ver.2
K3
K2
MS4800
K1
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
S2
*1
Product
Selection
S1
*1
Safety
Sensors
K4
*2
Shield
*1. Use a switch for micro loads (Input specifications: 5 V, 1 mA).
*2. F3SJ operates even when K3 and K4 are not connected.
(Gray) Communication line (+)
(Pink)
Communication
line (−)
External test switch (connect to 24 V if the switch is not necessary.)
Interlock/lockout reset switch
Relay or other device that controls hazardous parts of the machine
Load or PLC, etc. (for monitoring)
K2
24 VDC
Power
0 V supply
K1, K2: Relay or other device that controls hazardous
parts of the machine
K3:
Load or PLC, etc. (for monitoring)
* The F3SJ operates even when K3 is not connected.
When K3 is not necessary, connect auxiliary output 1
only to the external device monitoring input.
305
F3SJ.fm Page 306 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Basic Connection for Muting System
For PNP output (See page 307 for NPN output wiring.)
Wiring when using muting and external device monitoring functions
*4
M1
Emitter
Receiver
*4
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
S1
*5
*5
*1 *1
Shield
0 V (Blue)
(Pink)
Communication line (−)
24 V (Brown)
External device
monitoring input (Red)
Auxiliary output 1
(Yellow)
Control output 1
(Green)
Control output 2
(White)
A1
K1
S2
K3
*2
K2
K1
K2
*3
24 VDC
*4
Power
0 V supply
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
• Use a setting tool to set the external device monitoring function to "Disabled."
• When using an auxiliary output 1 that has not been changed (output operation mode is "control output data," and inverse of control output signals
is "Enabled), the external device monitoring function will be disabled when auxiliary output 1 and the external device monitoring input are
connected as shown below.
(Gray) Communication line (+)
(Pink) Communication line (−)
F3SS
F3SS
*
K3
K1
K2
Shield
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
Wiring when the external device monitoring function will not be used
0 V (Blue)
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
*1. Use a switch for small loads (input specifications: 24 V, 1.8 mA)
*2. When using the interlock function, this also functions as an interlock reset switch. (Must be set with a setting tool.)
*3. The F3SJ will operate even if K3 is not connected.
*4. Connect the muting lamp to either the external indicator output or auxiliary output 1 for the emitter or the receiver. When
connecting the muting lamp to auxiliary output 1, the parameter must be changed with a setting tool.
*5. Two-wire sensors cannot be used.
Receiver
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
External test switch (connect to 0 V if the switch is not necessary.)
Lockout reset switch (connect to 24 V if the switch is not necessary.)
Contact by muting sensor A1
Contact by muting sensor B1
Relay or other device that controls hazardous parts of the machine
Load or PLC, etc. (for monitoring)
Muting lamp
External device
monitoring input (Red)
Auxiliary
output 1 (Yellow)
Control output 1
(Green)
Control output 2
(White)
MS4800
S1:
S2:
A1:
B1:
K1, K2:
K3:
M1:
24 V (Brown)
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
B1
24 V (Brown)
Reset input (Yellow)
Test input (Green)
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
0 V (Blue)
Muting input 2
(Red)
Muting input 1
(White)
Shield
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
(Gray)
Communication line (+)
K1, K2: Relay or other device that controls
hazardous parts of the machine
K3:
Load, PLC, etc. (for monitoring)
* The F3SJ operates even when K3 is not
connected.
When K3 is not necessary, connect auxiliary output
1 only to the external device monitoring input.
24 VDC
Power
0 V supply
306
F3SJ.fm Page 307 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
For NPN output (See page 306 for PNP output wiring.)
Wiring when using muting and external device monitoring functions
*4
M1
Emitter
Receiver
*4
Shield
0 V (Blue)
External device
monitoring input (Red)
Auxiliary output 1
(Yellow)
Control output 1
(Green)
Control output 2
(White)
24 V (Brown)
24 V (Brown)
Reset input (Yellow)
Receiver
Shield
0 V (Blue)
Control output 1
(Green)
Control output 2
(White)
F3SS
24 V (Brown)
External device
monitoring input (Red)
Auxiliary
output 1 (Yellow)
E3FS
E3ZS
Test input (Green)
F3SN-A@SS
0 V (Blue)
Muting input 2
(Red)
Muting input 1
(White)
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
K2
F3SP-T01
K1
F39-TC5
K3
* The F3SJ operates even when K3 is not
connected.
When K3 is not necessary, connect auxiliary output
1 only to the external device monitoring input.
F3SJ Ver.2
*
K1, K2: Relay or other device that controls
hazardous parts of the machine
K3:
Load, PLC, etc. (for monitoring)
MS4800
(Pink) Communication line (−)
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
(Gray) Communication line (+)
Product
Selection
• Use a setting tool to set the external device monitoring function to "Disabled."
• When using an auxiliary output 1 that has not been changed (output operation mode is "control output data," and inverse of control output signals
is "Enabled), the external device monitoring function will be disabled when auxiliary output 1 and the external device monitoring input are
connected as shown below.
Safety
Sensors
Wiring when the external device monitoring function will not be used
F3SS
*1. Use a switch for small loads (input specifications: 5 V, 1 mA).
*2. When using the interlock function, this also functions as an interlock reset switch. (Must be set with a setting tool.)
*3. The F3SJ operates even when K3 is not connected.
*4. Connect the muting lamp to either the external indicator output or auxiliary output 1 for the emitter or the receiver. When
connecting the muting lamp to auxiliary output 1, the parameter must be changed with a setting tool.
*5. Two-wire sensors cannot be used.
E3FS
E3ZS
External test switch (connect to 24 V if the switch is not necessary.)
Lockout reset switch (connect to 0 V if the switch is not necessary.)
Contact by muting sensor A1
Contact by muting sensor B1
Relay or other device that controls hazardous parts of the machine
Load or PLC, etc. (for monitoring)
Muting lamp
F3SN-A@SS
Power
0 V supply
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
24 VDC
*4
F3SP-T01
K2
F39-TC5
K1
*3
F3SJ Ver.2
*5 *1 *1 *2
K3
MS4800
*5
K2
S2
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
A1 S1
K1
Product
Selection
S1:
S2:
A1:
B1:
K1, K2:
K3:
M1:
B1
(Pink)
Communication line (−)
Safety
Sensors
Shield
(Gray)
Communication line (+)
24 VDC
0V
Power
supply
307
F3SJ.fm Page 308 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
I/O Circuit Diagrams
PNP Output Type
The numbers in white circles indicate the connector's pin numbers.
The black circles indicate connectors for series connection.
The words in brackets ([ ]) indicate the signal name for muting system.
External indicator output 2
Brown
Indication
2 Brown
+24 VDC
5
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Test input
3 Green
Emitter
Main Circuit
Blue
10
1 White Interlock selection input
[Muting input 1] *1
Yellow Reset input
4
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
8 Red
7
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Pink
Communication line (−)
Communication line (+)
Gray
6
5
Pink
MS4800
MS4800
2
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
External indicator output 1
Brown
5
Blue
Shield
6
5
Gray
Auxiliary output 2
[Muting input 2] *2
8
Receiver
Main Circuit 2
1
Brown
Red External device
monitoring input
White Control output 2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
Blue
10
Load
3
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
Receiver
Main Circuit 1
4
Green Control output 1
Load
Auxiliary output 1
Yellow
Load
Indication
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
7
Blue
Shield
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
*1. Open or muting input 1 for models with the "-TS" suffix.
*2. Open or muting input 2 for models with the "-TS" suffix.
F3SS
F3SS
308
0V
F3SJ.fm Page 309 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
NPN Output Type
The numbers in white circles indicate the connector's pin numbers.
The black circles indicate connectors for series connection.
The words in brackets ([ ]) indicate the signal name for muting system.
External indicator output 2
Brown
Indication
2
Brown
+24 VDC
5
3
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
Pink
6
F3SN-A@SS
5
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Gray
F3SP-T01
Communication line (+)
Auxiliary output 2
[Muting input 2]
Blue
Shield
6
Pink
Communication line (−)
F39-TC5
5
Gray
F3SJ Ver.2
7
MS4800
8 Red
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
4
White Interlock selection input
[Muting input 1]
Yellow Reset input
Product
Selection
1
Safety
Sensors
Emitter
Main Circuit
Blue
10
Green Test input
Brown
2
Load
White
External indicator output 1
Brown
5
1
Control output 2
Load
Receiver
Main Circuit 2
1
Green
3
Blue
10
Control output 1
Load
Yellow
4
Receiver
Main Circuit 1
Auxiliary output 1
8
Red
External device
monitoring input
Indication
7
0V
Blue
Shield
Single-end Connector Cable
Signal Name
Model
Pin Wire
No. color
Internal wiring
Basic system *1
Receiver
F39JCR5A (0.5 m)
F39JC3A (3 m)
F39JC7A (7 m)
1
2
4
3
5
3
6
8
2
7
1
4
5
6
F39JC10A (10 m)
F39JC15A (15 m)
7
8
Wire color
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Gray
Pink
Blue
Red
Muting system *1
Emitter
Receiver
Emitter
(1) White Safety output 2
Interlock
Safety output 2
selection input *2
Muting input 1
(2) Brown +24 VDC
+24 VDC
+24 VDC
+24 VDC
(3) Green Control output 1 Test Input
Control output 1 Test Input
(4) Yellow Auxiliary output 1 Reset input
Auxiliary output 1 Reset input
(5) Gray
Communication Communication Communication Communication
line (+)
line (+)
line (+)
line (+)
(6) Pink
Communication Communication Communication Communication
line (-)
line (-)
line (-)
line (-)
(7) Blue
0V
(8) Red
External device Auxiliary output 2 External device
Muting input 2
monitoring input *2
monitoring input
0V
0V
0V
*1. Basic system indicates a system with default factory settings.
Muting system indicates a system attached with a muting keycap (F39-CN6) to enable muting function.
*2. N.C. for models with the "-TS" suffix.
309
F3SJ.fm Page 310 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Nomenclature
Main Unit and Cables
Beam center-line mark
(A line indicates where the beam is
aligned. This line indicates the
reference line used to measure the
safety distance.)
Cap
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Emitter
Beam
To attach or detach the cap
and power cable, remove
the 4 screws shown above.
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Indicator
Receiver
Power cable
(Gray)
MS4800
MS4800
Power cable (Black)
Extension cable
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
Component
Model
Description
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Select a type name based on the required protective height and
detection capability.
(Cap and power cable are included)
The type name can be understood as follows:
F3SJ-A@@@@P@@-@
Emitter, receiver
F3SJ-A@@@@P@@
or
F3SJ-A@@@@N@@
1
2 3 4
1: Protective height (mm)
2: Output type (P=PNP output type, N=NPN output type)
3: Diameter of detection capability (mm)
4: L is emitter, D is receiver, and a blank is emitter/receiver set.
For models with fixed auto reset, the suffix "-L-TS" is an emitter,
"-D-TS" is a receiver, and "-TS" is an emitter/receiver set.
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
Single-end connector cable
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F39-JC@A
This extension cable is used to connect to a terminal block controller
(e.g. F3SX, G9SA, G9SB, G9SX) or to a safety processing system
(e.g. DeviceNet safety).
F39-JC@B
This extension cable is used when the length of the connection cable
is insufficient, or when connecting to an F3SP-B1P controller. The
length can be specified.
Extension
cable
F3SS
F3SS
310
Double-end connector cable
F3SJ.fm Page 311 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Internal Indicators
Total View
Receiver
Emitter
LEVEL
1. Light intensity
level indicators
ERROR-B (Red)
ERROR-B (Red)
A
ERROR-A (Red)
ERROR-A (Red)
A
ERROR
ERROR
POWER
OFF
INTLK
ON
3. Power indicator (Green)
7. OFF-state indicator (Red)
4. Interlock indicator (Yellow) *1
8. ON-state indicator (Green)
9. Not used (Green)
[Muting error indicator]
BLANKING
(TEST)
BLANKING
(TEST)
30 dia.
*3
RECEIVER
EDM
EMITTER
5. External device monitoring
indicator (Green)
[Muting input 1 indicator]
6. Blanking/Test indicator (Green)
[Muting input 2 indicator] *2
2. Error mode indicators
10. Not used (Green)
[Blanking/Test indicator] *2
30 dia.
F3SS
ERROR-C (Red)
B
E3FS
E3ZS
C
B
F3SN-A@SS
C
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
ERROR-C (Red)
F3SP-T01
LEVEL-1 (Orange)
F39-TC5
1
F3SJ Ver.2
1
MS4800
LEVEL-1 (Orange)
1. Light intensity
level indicators
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
LEVEL-2 (Orange)
Product
Selection
2
Safety
Sensors
2
F3SS
LEVEL-2 (Orange)
E3FS
E3ZS
LEVEL-3 (Orange)
F3SN-A@SS
3
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
3
F3SP-T01
LEVEL-4 (Green)
LEVEL-3 (Orange)
F39-TC5
4
F3SJ Ver.2
4
MS4800
LEVEL-5 (Green)
LEVEL-4 (Green)
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
5
Product
Selection
5
Safety
Sensors
2. Error mode indicators
LEVEL
LEVEL-5 (Green)
The words in brackets ([ ]) represent the
indicator name for the muting system.
No.
1
Light intensity level indicators
(LEVEL-1 to 5) (refer to page 312.)
2
Error mode indicators
(ERROR-A to C) (refer to page
312.)
3
Power indicator (POWER)
4
5
6
Description
Internal Indicators
Interlock indicator (INTLK) *1
For basic system
ON
Indication status of LEVEL-1 to 5 shows the light intensity level status of the F3SJ.
ON/
Blinking
Turns ON or blinks only on the sensor where the error occurred when the F3SJ enters
lockout. The error mode indicators turn OFF on sensors (emitters or receivers) where an
error did not occur, or on other series-connected sensors. The indication status of
ERROR-A to C shows the cause of the error. Affix the error mode label (included) near
the F3SJ to allow for quick troubleshooting when errors occur.
ON
Turns ON while the power is ON.
Blinking
Blinks when in maintenance mode.
ON
Turns ON when F3SJ is in interlock state.
Blinking
External device monitoring indicator ON
(EDM)
Muting input 1 indicator (MUTE1)
Blinking
Blanking/Test indicator
(BLANKING/TEST) *2
Muting input 2 indicator (MUTE2)
7
OFF output indicator (OFF)
8
ON output indicator (ON)
9
Muting error indicator
(MUTING ERROR)
10
Blanking/Test indicator
(BLANKING/TEST) *2
For muting system
Blinks when under lockout.
Turns ON when an input is given to external Turns ON when an input is given to muting
device monitoring input.
input 1.
Not used
Blinks during muting override.
ON
Turns ON when the blanking function and
warning zone function are enabled.
Turns ON when an input is given to muting
input 2.
Blinking
Blinks when external test is being
performed.
Blinks during muting override.
ON
Turns ON when control output is OFF.
Blinking
Blinks in the following states:
• Lockout state
• One or more beams are blocked in maintenance mode
ON
Turns ON when safety output is ON.
Blinking
Blinks when no beams are blocked in maintenance mode
ON
Not used
Turns ON when a muting error occurs.
ON
Not used
Turns ON when the blanking function is
enabled.
Blinking
Not used
Blinks when external test is being
performed.
*1. Lockout indicator (LOCKOUT) for models with the "-TS" suffix.
*2. In the TS model, this is a test indicator labeled TEST.
*3. This label is included with the F39-CN6 key cap for muting. Affix the label when the muting function is used.
311
F3SJ.fm Page 312 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Indication Patterns and Intensity Levels of the Light Intensity Level
Indicators (LEVEL-1 to 5)
ON
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
Light intensity level
170% or higher of control output ON level
From 130 to 170% of control output ON level
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
From 100 to 130% of control output ON level
From 75 to 100% of control output ON level
From 50 to 75% of control output ON level
Less than 50% of control output ON level
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Note: Operation is possible with light intensity level of 100% or more, but to ensure stability, operate when at least 5 of the
indication lamps are ON.
Error Mode Indication Patterns and Cause of Errors (ERROR-A to C)
OFF Blinking ON
A
B
C
Cause of error
MS4800
MS4800
Mutual interference or ambient incident light.
Power supply voltage of F3SJ is out of the rated range. Insufficient current capacity of
power supply.
Incident light to blanking beams.
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
Failure in communication line.
Emitter and receiver have different F3SJ type names or number of series connections.
Outside the effective range of parameters set by setting tool.
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
Cap is not attached.
External device monitor failure.
Failure in interlock selection input line or reset input line.
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
Muting wiring failure.
Failure in control output wiring.
Failure in series connection cable wiring.
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
312
Failure in wiring of external display lamp output.
Failure in wiring of auxiliary output.
Broken series connection cable.
Wiring error or broken communications wire.
Influence of electrical noise, or failure in a series-connected F3SJ.
F3SJ.fm Page 313 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Safety-related Functions
Interlock Function
Manual Reset Wiring Procedure:
The F3SJ turns the safety outputs OFF when the power is turned ON
or when a beam is interrupted, and maintains this state until a reset
signal is applied. This state is called "interlock".
You can reset this interlock by 2 methods; “auto reset that
automatically turns safety output ON when an interrupting object is
removed” and “manual reset mode that keeps safety output OFF until
a reset signal is provided if the interrupting object is removed”.
Auto Reset Mode
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
Because the interlock selection input line is used as muting input 1
when using the muting function, the default setting is auto reset. Use
a setting tool for manual reset.
F3SP-T01
Interlock Function in a Muting System
F39-TC5
Note: Install the reset switch outside the hazardous area, where the
operator can clearly see the hazardous area.
F3SJ Ver.2
For NPN output
For NPN output
Apply voltage of 0 to 1.5 V for
250 ms or longer to the reset
input line, and set it open or to
9 to 24 V.
MS4800
For PNP output
1. Open the interlock selection
1. Open the interlock selection
input line, or short-circuit it to
input line, or short-circuit it to
0 to 1.5 V (pin 1/white).
9 to 24 V (pin 1/white).
2. Short-circuit the reset input
2. Short-circuit the reset input
line to 0 to 1.5 V (pin 4/yellow).
line to 9 to 24 V (pin 4/yellow).
3. Turn ON the power of F3SJ. 3. Turn ON the power of F3SJ.
For PNP output
Apply voltage of 9 to 24 V for
250 ms or longer to the reset
input line, and set it open or to
0 to 1.5 V.
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Auto reset wiring procedure:
To reset:
Product
Selection
Note: Auto reset is always used in the F3SJ-A@-TS series.
For NPN output
Safety
Sensors
When an interrupting object is removed, safety output automatically
turns ON. Auto reset is used on machines where a worker is not able
to enter the area between the detection zone and the hazardous part
of the machine.
For PNP output
1. Connect the interlock
1. Connect the interlock
selection input line to 9 to 24 V
selection input line to 0 to 1.5
(pin 1/white).
V (pin 1/white).
2. Connect the reset input line to 2. Connect the reset input line to
9 to 24 V via the reset switch
0 to 1.5 V via the reset switch
(NO-contact) (pin 4/yellow).
(NO-contact) (pin 4/yellow).
3. Keep the reset switch contact 3. Keep the reset switch contact
open, and turn the power of
open, and turn the power of
F3SJ ON.
F3SJ ON.
Manual Reset Mode
When a reset input is given while no interrupting object exists in a
detection zone, the safety outputs turn ON. This allows the machine
to be manually reset using a reset switch after ensuring safety,
preventing unexpected startup.
Light
incident
Light incident/
Light interrupted Light
interrupted
Reset Input
Control output
ON
250 ms min.
OFF
ON
OFF
Sensor status
Interlock state
Normal operation
A sensor enters interlock state when:
• The power is turned ON (start interlock). This is useful if you want
to keep the machine stopped until start inspection is completed
after the power is turned ON.
• F3SJ is interrupted (restart interlock). After F3SJ is interrupted and
the machine stops, the machine can be restarted after safety is
ensured.
313
F3SJ.fm Page 314 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Diagnostic Functions
Self-test
External Device Monitoring Function
A self-test is performed to check for errors when the power is turned
ON (within 2 seconds / within 2.2 seconds when series connected).
Also, the self-test is regularly performed (within the response time)
while operating.
This function detects malfunctions, such as welded contacts in
external relays (or contactors) that control the hazardous area of a
machine.
This function constantly monitors that a specified voltage is applied to
the receiver's external device monitoring input line, and enters lockout
state when an error occurs. The relay's operational delay can be up
to 300 ms without being evaluated as an error.
For example, if a specified voltage is not applied to the external device
monitoring line because the normally closed (NC) contact is not
closed within 300 ms after the control outputs turn from ON to OFF, it
is evaluated as an error and enters a lockout state.
To utilize this function properly, use safety relays and contactors that
have forcibly guided or mechanically linked contact structure.
Waveform of Control Outputs
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
When the F3SJ is receiving light, the control outputs cyclically turn
OFF as shown below to test the output circuit. When this OFF signal
is fed back, the output circuit is diagnosed as normal. If the output
signal does not include an OFF pulse signal, the receiver determines
that a failure has occurred with the output circuit or wiring, and enters
lockout state. (Refer to the following illustration.)
Approx. 15 ms
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
Other Functions
ON
Control output 1,2
Auxiliary Output (Non-safety output)
The auxiliary output is used to monitor the status of the F3SJ.
This output can be connected to a device such as a relay, indication
lamp, programmable controller, etc.
There are two auxiliary outputs: Auxiliary output 1 and auxiliary output 2.
• Auxiliary output 1: Control output inversion signal
• Auxiliary output 2: Turns ON when the point of 30,000 operating
hours is reached
The auxiliary output modes can be changed with a setting tool. See
the User's Manual for details on the modes that can be set.
OFF
OFF signal
!WARNING
Approx. 65 µs
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
Approx. 140 µs
External Test
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
This function performs a test to ensure that the safety system stops
properly when the F3SJ is interrupted, by using an external signal to
forcibly stop emission.
To stop emission, apply 9 to 24 V for PNP output types or 0 to 1.5 V
for NPN output types to the test input line of the emitter. Apply the
voltage for a minimum of 4 x the safety output response time.
Lockout
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
If an error is found in the self-test, the sensor enters lockout state,
keeps the safety output in the OFF state, and indicates the error at the
same time.
Resetting Lockout
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
When a cause of lockout is removed, you can release the lockout by
using either of the following methods.
• Cycle the power back ON
• Reset input
[For PNP output]
After manual reset, apply voltage of 9 to 24 V for 100 ms or longer to
the reset input line, and set it open or apply 0 to 1.5 V.
After auto reset, apply voltage of 0 to 1.5 V for 100 ms or longer to the
reset input line, and set it open or apply 9 to 24 V.
F3SS
F3SS
[For NPN output]
After manual reset, apply voltage of 0 to 1.5 V for 100 ms or longer to
the reset input line, and set it open or apply 9 to 24 V.
After auto reset, apply voltage of 9 to 24 V for 100 ms or longer to the
reset input line, and set it open or apply 0 to 1.5 V.
314
Do not use the auxiliary output or external indicator output for safety
applications.
Failure of these outputs may prevent detection of people and result in
serious injury.
Note: 1. Auxiliary output 1 has a load current of 300 mA max., and
auxiliary output 2 has a load current of 50 mA.
2. The timing when auxiliary output 1 is set as a control output
inversion signal is shown in the diagram below.
Light incident/
Light interrupted
Light
incident
Light
interrupted
Ton
Toff
Control
output
ON
OFF
Toff × 2 or less
Auxiliary
output 1
*
*
Toff × 2 or less
ON
OFF
Toff: Response time of control output's ON to OFF, Ton: Response
time of control output's OFF to ON
* When auxiliary output 2 is set as a control output inversion signal,
the response delay for control output becomes Toff x 3 max.
F3SJ.fm Page 315 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Selecting the System Configuration
Selection Flowchart
The necessary system configuration varies depending on the functions to be used.
Use the following flowchart to decide what kind of system is required.
Will the muting function be NO
used?
YES
Will the fixed blanking function be used?
Will the floating blanking function be used?
Will the detection distance be changed?
Will other functions be used or changed?
NO
YES
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
NO
Product
Selection
YES
Basic system plus a setting tool
for setting or changing parameters
Safety
Sensors
Will the fixed blanking function be used?
Will the floating blanking function be used?
Will the detection distance be changed?
Will other functions be used or changed?
Basic system
Muting system *
Muting system *
plus a setting tool for setting or
changing parameters
* F39-CN6 Key Cap for muting is required.
Note: Refer to the User's Manual to determine whether the functions can be used in combination or not.
315
F3SJ.fm Page 316 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Dimensions
(Unit: mm)
Main Units
When Using Standard Mounting Brackets
Backside mounting
Top/bottom mounting bracket
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Intermediate mounting bracket
2-Top/bottom mounting brackets
5.5
2-Mounting holes
Mounting screw holes
30
20
(13.75)
4-M5
20
16.5
MS4800
MS4800
1
3.75
6.25
30
24
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
31
22
7
Intermediate mounting
bracket
22
2-M5
5.5
B
D
53
B
C (Protective
height)
2-Mounting holes
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
Beam
10
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
6 dia.
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
15 dia.
E
E
4-Mounting holes
37
300
13.75
6.5 dia.
2-Mounting holes
43
9 dia.
C (protective height): 4-digit number in the table
A = C + 74, B = C + 46.5
D = C - 20, E = See table below.
Protective
height
M12 Waterproof connector
26
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
316
A
42
42
46
Number of intermediate
brackets
E*
0245 to 0596
0
0600 to 1130
1
E=B/2
---
1136 to 1658
2
E=B/3
1660 to 2180
3
E=B/4
2195 to 2500
4
E=B/5
* Use E = 530 or less when none of the E values shown above
are used.
F3SJ.fm Page 317 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Side mounting
2-Top/bottom
mounting brackets
Mounting screw holes
30
20
2-Mounting holes
5.5
35
(13.75)
4-M5
20
30
16.5
3.75
6.25
24
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
B
15
A
Product
Selection
31
B
15
Safety
Sensors
5.5
D
53
11
C (Protective height)
36
43
2-M5
31
Beam
E
E
5
10
4-Mounting
holes
10
37
300
6 dia.
13.75
6.5 dia.
2-Mounting holes
43
9 dia.
M12 Waterproof connector
C (protective height): 4-digit number in the table
A = C + 74, B = C + 46.5
D = C - 20, E = See table below.
51
Protective
height
53
Number of intermediate
brackets
E*
0245 to 0596
0
0600 to 1130
1
E=B/2
---
1136 to 1658
2
E=B/3
1660 to 2180
3
E=B/4
2195 to 2500
4
E=B/5
* Use E = 530 or less when none of the E values shown above
are used.
F39-LJ1 Detailed Dimensions of Bracket
13.5
11.5
A
16
10
9 dia.
A
9
19.6
12 dia.
A-A
30
9 dia.
Material: Brass
2
5.5
6.5 dia.
16.5
8
18 36.5
5.6
14.5
2-M3
Through holes
11
21
5.5
30
21
19.6
.
.5
dia
3
2-
10
Material: Stainless steel
Material: Stainless steel
317
F3SJ.fm Page 318 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Using Side Flat Mounting Bracket (F39-LJ2)
F39-LJ2
Material: Stainless steel
Use standard brackets
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
5.5
(17.25)
37.6
20
Mounting screw holes
27
35
4-M5
25.5
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
A
C (Protective height)
B
B
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
5
19
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
0.3
37
9.7
20
17.25 6.5 dia.
9 dia.
Dimensions A to C
A
44
C + 39.5
C
4-digit number of the model
name (protective height)
35
F3SS
F3SS
318
2
C + 74
B
F3SJ.fm Page 319 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Using Free Location Mounting Bracket (F39-LJ3)
Backside mounting
31
22
1
Mounting screw holes
6-M5
F39-LJ3
45
Material: Zinc die-cast
42
7
5.5
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
B
42
Safety
Sensors
B C (Protective
height)
16
F
F
53
42
42
45
24
25
46
Side mounting
43
36
F39-LJ3
Mounting screw holes
Material: Zinc die-cast/stainless
6-M5
45
11
15
5.5
C (Protective
height)
B
B
15
F
16
F
5
15
53
45
51
30
2
24
15
5
43
319
F3SJ.fm Page 320 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Dimensions B, C, and F
Dimension F
B
C - 90
C
4-digit number of the model name (protective height)
F
Depends on the protective height. See the table on the
right.
Protective height
Number of intermediate
mounting brackets
F*
245 to 440
2
443 to 785
3
B/2
---
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
794 to 1140
4
B/3
1145 to 1490
5
B/4
1495 to 1840
6
B/5
1845 to 2180
7
B/6
2195 to 2500
8
B/7
* Use F = 350 or less when none of the F values shown above are
used.
When only F39-LJ3 free-location mounting brackets are used without standard brackets, allow a space of at least 350 mm between the brackets.
The number of brackets required varies according to the protective height. For details about the number of required brackets, refer to the table
below.
The standard included intermediate mounting brackets are the same as the F39-LJ3 free-location mounting brackets. Purchase brackets as
necessary if there are fewer intermediate mounting brackets than required. When intermediate mounting brackets are included, they can be used
as free-location mounting brackets.
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
Required number of F39-LJ3 free-location mounting brackets for 1 F3SJ set (emitter/receiver) (2 pieces are included with
F39-LJ3)
Number of included free location
brackets as intermediate brackets
Protective height
0245 to 0440
0
Number of free location
brackets to mount F3SJ
4
Number of free location
brackets to be purchased
2 sets
0443 to 0596
0
6
3 sets
0600 to 0785
2
6
2 sets
0794 to 1130
2
8
3 sets
1136 to 1140
4
8
2 sets
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
1145 to 1490
4
10
3 sets
1495 to 1658
4
12
4 sets
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
1660 to 1840
6
12
3 sets
1845 to 2180
6
14
4 sets
2195 to 2500
8
16
4 sets
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
320
F3SJ.fm Page 321 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Guide to Replacing F3SN Models with F3SJ Models
F3SN replacement correspondence table (F3SN mounting holes can be used without modification)
When replacing F3SN-@@@@P(N)14 with F3SJ-A@@@@P(N)14
(1) For F3SN models with a protective height of 225 mm max.
F3SN
Model
Replacement F3SJ
Protective height
Model
Replacement method using
F39-LJ5
Protective height
---
225
F3SJ-A0245P(N)14
245
Outward-facing mounting
(2) For F3SN models with a protective height of 234 mm min.
Add 11 to the F3SN's 4-digit number and apply it as the F3SJ's 4-digit number, and then replace with the standard brackets included with the product.
[Selection example] F3SN-A0315P(N)14 becomes F3SJ-A0326P(N)14 (replace with standard brackets)
Note: 1. The protective height becomes 11 mm longer.
2. Replace with outward-facing mounting of F39-LJ5 when you want to set the detection surface height to be same as the F3SN.
However, the F39-LJ5 and intermediate mounting brackets cannot be mounted simultaneously, so set the protective height to 600 mm or less.
When replacing F3SN-@@@@P (N)25 with F3SJ-A@@@@P (N)20
(1) For F3SN models with a protective height of 247 mm max.
F3SN
Model
Replacement F3SJ
Protective height
Model
Replacement method using
F39-LJ5
Protective height
F3SN-@0187P(N)25
187
---
---
---
F3SN-@0217P(N)25
217
F3SJ-A0260P(N)20
260
Inward-facing mounting
F3SN-@0232P(N)25
232
F3SJ-A0260P(N)20
260
Inward + outward-facing mounting
F3SN-@0247P(N)25
247
F3SJ-A0245P(N)20
245
Outward-facing mounting
(2) For F3SN models with a protective height of 262 mm min.
Subtract 17 from the F3SN's 4-digit number and apply it as the F3SJ's 4-digit number, and then replace with the standard brackets included with
the product.
[Selection example] F3SN-A0322P(N)25 becomes F3SJ-A0305P(N)20 (replace with standard brackets)
Note: 1. The protective height gets 17 mm shorter.
2. Replace with outward-facing mounting of F39-LJ5 when you want to set the detection surface height to be same as the F3SN.
However, the F39-LJ5 and intermediate mounting brackets cannot be mounted simultaneously, so set the protective height to 600 mm or less.
When using intermediate mounting brackets to replace a rear mounted F3SN with an F3SJ
Because the pitch of the mounting holes for the intermediate mounting brackets are different (F3SN: 15 mm, F3SJ: 42 mm), use F39-LJ3-SN
Spacers for F3SN intermediate mounting bracket replacement.
F39-LJ3-SN
Material: Stainless steel
4-2.75R
F3SS
F3SN-@0225P(N)14
E3FS
E3ZS
Outward-facing mounting
F3SN-A@SS
Inward + outward-facing mounting
245
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
245
F3SJ-A0245P(N)14
F3SP-T01
F3SJ-A0245P(N)14
216
F39-TC5
207
F3SN-@0216P(N)14
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SN-@0207P(N)14
MS4800
Inward + outward-facing mounting
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
245
Product
Selection
F3SJ-A0245P(N)14
Safety
Sensors
198
F3SS
F3SN-@0198P(N)14
E3FS
E3ZS
Inward-facing mounting
F3SN-A@SS
245
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SJ-A0245P(N)14
F3SP-T01
189
F39-TC5
Inward-facing mounting
F3SN-@0189P(N)14
F3SJ Ver.2
245
MS4800
---
F3SJ-A0245P(N)14
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
---
180
Product
Selection
153
F3SN-@0180P(N)14
Safety
Sensors
F3SN-@0153P(N)14
9
F39-LJ3
5.5
11
59
70.5
F39-LJ3-SN
15
2-2R
15
97
3-2R
2-M5 through-holes
20
13
9.5
(3R)
42
2R
321
F3SJ.fm Page 322 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Using Top/Bottom Mounting Bracket B (F39-LJ4)
30
19
Backside mounting
F39-LJ4
Material: Stainless steel
Mounting screw holes
6
6
2
4-M5
(21.5)
37
Use standard
brackets
1
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
A B
C (Protective height)
B
45
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
19 *
21.5
Dimensions A to C
* Using M5 bolt, available range for
mounting is 18 to 20.
30
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
A
C + 109
B
C + 66
C
4-digit number of the model name (protective height)
26
Note: Refer to the User's Manual (Cat. No. SCHG-718 and SCHG-719) for the dimensions for side mounting.
Using Mounting Bracket for Short-length F3SN (F39-LJ5)
30
20
Inward-facing mounting
Use standard
brackets
5.5
F39-LJ5
Material: Stainless steel
Mounting screw holes
5.5
4-M5
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
(16.5)
2
6.5 dia.
9 dia.
B A
C (Protective height)
19.9
32
11.5
21
16.5
20
Dimensions A to C
A
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
44.9
30
F3SS
F3SS
322
B
C + 23
B
C − 10
C
4-digit number of the model
name (protective height)
F3SJ.fm Page 323 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
30
20
Outward-facing mounting
2
Mounting screw holes
5.5
5.5
4-M5
Use standard
brackets
F39-LJ5
Material: Stainless steel
(15.5)
21
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
21
(16.5)
2
C (Protective height)
B
B A
6.5 dia.
32.5
32
5.8
4.2
15.5
9 dia.
20
19.9
Dimensions A to C
A
30
F39-TC5
4-M5
(11.5)
44
F3SJ Ver.2
Use standard F39-LJ5
Material: Stainless steel
brackets
Mounting screw holes
5.5
MS4800
30
20
5.5
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
30
Inward + outward-facing mounting
Product
Selection
4-digit number of the model
name (protective height)
Safety
Sensors
C
F3SS
C + 34
44
E3FS
E3ZS
C + 65
B
F3SN-A@SS
A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Dimensions A to C
F3SP-T01
19.9
F39-TC5
20
F3SJ Ver.2
15.5
9 dia.
4.2
MS4800
32
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
6.5 dia.
5.8
Product
Selection
B
Safety
Sensors
B A
C (Protective height)
C + 44
B
C + 12
C
4-digit number of the model
name (protective height)
323
F3SJ.fm Page 324 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SN replacement correspondence table (F3SN mounting holes can be used without modification)
When replacing F3SN-@@@@P(N)14 with F3SJ-A@@@@P(N)14
F3SN
Replacement F3SJ
Protective
height
Model
Model
Replacement method
Protective
using F39-LJ5
height
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
F3SN-@0153P(N)14
153
---
---
---
F3SN-@0180P(N)14
180
F3SJ-A0245P(N)14
245
Inward-facing
mounting
F3SN-@0189P(N)14
189
F3SJ-A0245P(N)14
245
Inward-facing
mounting
F3SN-@0198P(N)14
198
F3SJ-A0245P(N)14
245
Inward + Outwardfacing mounting
F3SN-@0207P(N)14
207
F3SJ-A0245P(N)14
245
Inward + Outwardfacing mounting
F3SN-@0216P(N)14
216
F3SJ-A0245P(N)14
245
Outward-facing
mounting
F3SN-@0225P(N)14
225
F3SJ-A0245P(N)14
245
Outward-facing
mounting
For F3SN models with a protective height
of 234 mm min.
Add 11 to the F3SN's 4-digit number and
apply it as the F3SJ's 4-digit number, and
then replace with the standard brackets
included with the product.
[Selection example] F3SN-A0315P(N)14
becomes F3SJ-A0326P(N)14 (replace with
standard brackets)
Note: 1. The protective height becomes
11 mm longer.
2. Replace with outward-facing
mounting of F39-LJ5 when you
want to set the detection surface
height to be same as the F3SN.
However, the F39-LJ5 and
intermediate mounting brackets
cannot be mounted
simultaneously, so set the
protective height to 600 mm or
less.
When replacing F3SN-@@@@P(N)25 with F3SJ-A@@@@P(N)20
F3SN
MS4800
MS4800
Model
F3SN-@0187P(N)25
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SN-@0217P(N)25
F3SN-@0232P(N)25
F3SN-@0247P(N)25
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
324
Replacement F3SJ
Replacement method
Protective
Protective
using F39-LJ5
Model
height
height
187
------Inward-facing
217
F3SJ-A0260P(N)20
260
mounting
Inward + Outward232
F3SJ-A0260P(N)20
260
facing mounting
Outward-facing
247
F3SJ-A0245P(N)20
245
mounting
For F3SN models with a protective height
of 262 mm min.
Subtract 17 from the F3SN's 4-digit number
and apply it as the F3SJ's 4-digit number,
and then replace with the standard brackets
included with the product.
[Selection example] F3SN-A0322P(N)25
becomes F3SJ-A0305P(N)20 (replace with
standard brackets)
Note: 1. The protective height becomes
17 mm shorter.
2. Replace with outward-facing
mounting of F39-LJ5 when you
want to set the detection surface
height to be same as the F3SN.
However, the F39-LJ5 and
intermediate mounting brackets
cannot be mounted
simultaneously, so set the
protective height to 600 mm or
less.
F3SJ.fm Page 325 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Using Space-saving Mounting Bracket (F39-LJ8)
Backside mounting
30
20
F39-LJ8
Material: Stainless steel
5.5
Use standard brackets
Mounting screw holes
5.5
4-M5
(16.65)
7
2
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
C
4-digit number of the model
name (protective height)
F3SN-A@SS
C + 77.3
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
C
(Protective
B
height)
B
F3SP-T01
1
C + 102.3
F39-TC5
4-M5
8
33
A
F3SJ Ver.2
Mounting screw holes
2
6
10
Dimensions A to C
MS4800
6
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
3
Use standard brackets
Product
Selection
Backside mounting
30
16
Safety
Sensors
Mounting Bracket (F39-LJ9) Used when Replacing an F3W-C.
F39-LJ9
Material: Stainless steel
F3SS
20
Note: Because the F39-LJ8 cannot be mounted together with an
intermediate bracket, keep the protective height at 600 mm max.
33
E3FS
E3ZS
4-digit number of the model
name (protective height)
F3SN-A@SS
C
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
C − 10.3
F3SP-T01
C + 23
B
F39-TC5
16.65
Dimensions A to C
A
F3SJ Ver.2
25.65
MS4800
B
8
11.5
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
A
Product
Selection
B
Safety
Sensors
C (Protective height)
B
A
69.3
28
(17)
16
3
26
Note: Refer to the User's Manual (Cat. No. SCHG-718 and SCHG719) for the dimensions for side mounting.
325
F3SJ.fm Page 326 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
F3W-C replacement correspondence table (F3W-C mounting holes can be used without modification)
When replacing F3W-C@@@ with F3SJ-A@@@@@30
F3W-C
Model
Replacement F3SJ
Protective height
F3W-C044
120
Model
Protective height
---
---
F3W-C084
280
F3SJ-A0320@30
320
F3W-C124
440
F3SJ-A0470@30
470
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
F3W-C164
600
F3SJ-A0620@30 *
620
F3W-C204
760
F3SJ-A0795@30 *
795
F3W-C244
920
F3SJ-A0945@30 *
945
* New holes must be drilled for the intermediate bracket.
Using Top/Bottom Mounting Bracket C (F39-LJ11)
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
F39-LJ11
Material: Stainless steel
30
13
26
2
Use standard brackets
Mounting screw holes
6
3
4-M5
(20)
34
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
(54.5)
1
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
B
C (Protective height)
A
B
54.5
20
Dimensions A to C
A
13
4-Mounting holes
C + 109
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
B
C + 69
C
4-digit number of the model
name (protective height)
Accessories
Single-end Connector Cable
F39-JCR5A (L=0.5 m)
F39-JC3A (L = 3 m)
F39-JC7A (L = 7 m)
F39-JC10A (L = 10 m)
F39-JC15A (L = 15 m)
F39-JC20A (L = 20 m)
39.5
L*
15 dia.
F3SS
F3SS
Waterproof connector
Color: Emitter (gray)
Receiver (black)
326
Insulated vinyl round cable 6.6 dia. with braided shield
8-wire (4-pair) (Cross section of conductor: 0.3 mm2/insulator diameter: 1.15 mm)
Standard length L
* Cables with L=3, 7, 10, 15, and 20 m are available.
F3SJ.fm Page 327 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Cables with Connectors on Both Ends
F39-JCR5B (L = 0.5 m)
F39-JC1B (L = 1 m)
F39-JC3B (L = 3 m)
F39-JC5B (L = 5 m)
F39-JC7B (L = 7 m)
F39-JC10B (L = 10 m)
F39-JC15B (L = 15 m)
F39-JC20B (L = 20 m)
F39-JC30B (L = 30 m)
F39-JC40B (L = 40 m)
39.5
L
43
15 dia.
15 dia.
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
Emitter
F3SP-B1P
MS4800
Control Unit
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Color: Emitter (gray)
Receiver (black)
Product
Selection
Vinyl-insulated round cable: 6.6 dia. with braided shield
8-wire (4-pair) (Cross section of conductor: 0.3 mm2/ Insulator diameter: 1.15 mm)
Standard length L
Safety
Sensors
Waterproof connector
Waterproof connector
Receiver
91
24-M3
10.5
Mounting screw holes
5.9
7 × 5=35
2-4.2 dia. or M4
4.6 dia.
13 max.
9
76 max. 63
84±0.3
43
5.6
9
45 max.
5
2.3R
111 max.
Dedicated External Indicator Set
54
30 dia.
F39-A01@-PAC
35±0.3
20
173
90
9 dia.
6.5 dia.
18
16
2
6
6
19
34
32
Material: Stainless steel
327
F3SJ.fm Page 328 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Spatter Protection Cover
F39-HJ@@@@
Assembled dimensions
32
32
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
10
Four digits in the model number (protective height) − 10
29.5
Material: polycarbonate (for the protective cover)
Setting Support Software for the F3SJ
F39-GWUM
(625.7)
(46)
67.9
(11.8)
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
(12) (16)
35.8
Insulated vinyl round cable 4.6 dia.
Standard length: 0.5 m
3.6
17.8
(8)
0.7
(4.5)
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
Setting Console
Communications jack
F39-MC21
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
52.8
22
Connection indicator
Function selection indicator
Channel indicator
Channel key
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
Mode indicator
Up cursor key
136
Right cursor key
F3SS
F3SS
Down cursor key
Left cursor key
Enter key
Delete key
50
328
F3SJ.fm Page 329 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Protective Bar
F39-PJ@@@@-S
Backside mounting
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
6.25
2-M6
D
Sensor
D
D
10
23
39
43
B C (Protective
height)
39
B
A
B
M5
Mounting hole
M5
Intermediate
brackets
(3)
(37)
3.75
20
2-Mounting holes
2-Mounting holes
F3SN-A@SS
1
5.5 dia.
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
3.75
(37)
16
8
F3SP-T01
4-M5
(6)
F39-TC5
When using M6, M8
When using M5
20
2-M8
16.5
F3SJ Ver.2
(13.75)
MS4800
Mounting bracket (2)
5.5
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
6.5 dia.
3-M5 bolts with
hexagonal holes and
attached washers
Product
Selection
9 dia.
30
20
Safety
Sensors
Mounting screw holes
24
(13.75)
(6)
4-Mounting holes
Mounting
bracket (1)
4-M3 bolts with
hexagonal holes
and attached
washers
C (protective height): 4-digit number in the table
A = C + 74, B = C + 46.5
15
64
Number of intermediate
brackets used (3)
Protective height
20
69
6.25
20
Protective support
D
0245 to 0995
0
---
1001 to 2000
1
B/2
2009 to 2500
2
B/3
Note: For reference, D is the dimension that will not interfere with
the intermediate bracket on the Safety Light Curtain body.
329
F3SJ.fm Page 330 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Side mounting
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Mounting screw holes
30
20
5.5
9 dia.
6.5 dia.
24
4
Mounting bracket (2)
3-M5 bolts with
hexagonal holes and
attached washers
When using M6, M8
When using M5
20
(13.75)
16.5
2-M8
4-M5
(6)
3.75
6.25
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
(37)
5
2-M6
D
23
D
D
Intermediate
brackets (4)
for side
mounting *
8
10 20
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
B
C (Protective
height)
39
B
M5
5.5 dia.
36
39
B
A
M5
Mounting hole
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
Sensor
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
(37)
(6)
2-Mounting holes
2-Mounting holes
20
(13.75)
4-Mounting holes
3.75
20
Protective support
4-M3 bolts with
hexagonal holes
and attached
washers
Mounting bracket (1)
* The four intermediate brackets (F39-PJ-MS) for
side mounting are not provided.
69
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
20
32
15
64
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
C (protective height): 4-digit number in the table
A = C + 74, B = C + 46.5
Protective height
Number of protective
brackets used (4)
D
F3SS
F3SS
0245 to 0995
0
---
1001 to 2000
1
B/2
2009 to 2500
2
B/3
Note: For reference, D is the dimension that will not interfere with
the intermediate bracket on the Safety Light Curtain body.
330
6.25
F3SJ.fm Page 331 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Water-resistant Case
F39-EJ@@@@-L(D)
Backside mounting
32
Mounting screw holes
60.5 dia.
9 dia.
6.5 dia.
8
When using M5
20
When using M6, M8
2-M8
5.5
8
4-M5
(16)
13.5
2
2
2-M6
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
B
C
D
(Protective
height)
B
22
2
Dimensions A to D
32
16
A
Safety
Sensors
B
A
C + 108
20
8
20
2-Mounting Brackets *
B
C + 76
C
4-digit number of the model name
(protective height)
D
C + 44
* The Mounting Brackets (F39-EJ-R) are
sold separately.
Side mounting
32
Mounting screw holes
60.5 dia.
9 dia.
6.5 dia.
8
When using M5
20
When using M6, M8
2-M8
5.5
8
4-M5
(16)
13.5
2
2
2-M6
B
A
B
C
D
(Protective
height)
B
22
2
32
16
20
Dimensions A to D
A
C + 108
B
C + 76
C
4-digit number of the model
name (protective height)
D
C + 44
8
20
2-Mounting Brackets *
* The Mounting Brackets (F39-EJ-S) are
sold separately.
331
F3SJ.fm Page 332 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Connection Circuit Examples
Examples of Safety Circuits
For PNP output (See page 337 for NPN output wiring.)
Wiring for single F3SJ application (category 4)
• Use of welded relay contact detection and interlock is possible without a controller or relay unit.
Emitter
Receiver
KM2
Shield
Control output 2 (White)
KM1
0 V (Blue)
Control output 1 (Green)
KM1
Auxiliary output 1 (Yellow)
External device monitoring input (Red)
Communication
line (−) (Pink)
KM4
+24 V (Brown)
+24 V (Brown)
Interlock selection input (White)
Reset input (Yellow)
Test input (Green)
F3SJ Ver.2
S2
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
S1
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
Auxiliary output 2 (Red)
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
0 V (Blue)
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
F39-JC@A-D
Communication
line (+) (Gray)
Shield
Safety
Sensors
F39-JC@A-L
KM1
KM2
KM2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
KM3
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
+24 VDC
OUT
IN
M
E1
0V
Timing Chart
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
Light incident
Light interrupted
External test switch (S1)
Reset switch (S2)
Control output
KM1,KM2 N.O. contact
PLC
S1:
External test switch (connect to 0 V if the
switch is not necessary.)
S2:
Interlock/lockout reset switch
KM1, KM2: Safety relay with forcibly-guided contacts
(G7SA) or magnetic contactor
KM3:
Load, PLC (for monitor)
KM4:
Solid state contactor (G3J)
M:
3-phase motor
E1:
24 VDC power supply (S82K)
PLC:
Programmable controller
(Used for monitoring -- not related to safety
system)
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
KM1,KM2 N.C. contact
PLC input *
F3SS
F3SS
PLC output
* The output operation mode for auxiliary output 1 is control output
data/inverse of control output signals enabled (default setting).
332
• Manual reset mode
• Using external device monitoring
function
F3SJ.fm Page 333 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Wiring for connection with a controller F3SP-B1P (category 4) (PNP models only)
• Reduced wiring due to connector connection
• Safety relay included
Emitter
• Manual reset mode
• Using external device monitoring
function
Receiver
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
PLC
IN1
F39-JC@B-L
IN2
OUT
F39-JC@B-D
KM3
S1
S2
A1
H1
L1
Interlock
selection
OSSD1
K1
A2
+24 VDC
PE
J1
H1
X1
Test
Timing Chart
23
33
41
OSSD2 K1
KM1
K2
KM2
K2
External device
monitoring
T32
14
24
34
42
M
KM1
E1
KM2
0V
13
Reset Auxiliary
output 1
T31
F3SP-B1P
P1
KM1
KM2
S1:
External test switch
S2:
Interlock/lockout reset switch
KM1, KM2:Magnetic contactor
KM3:
Solid state contactor (G3J)
M:
3-phase motor
E1:
24 VDC power supply (S82K)
PLC:
Programmable controller
(Used for monitoring -- not related
to safety system)
Light incident
Light interrupted
External test switch (S1)
Reset switch (S2)
Wiring for auto reset mode
Control output
S1
K1,K2 N.O. contact
S2
KM1,KM2 N.O. contact
H1
L1
J1
H1
X1
K1,K2 N.C. contact
KM1,KM2 N.C. contact
PLC input 1 *
PLC input 2
Interlock
selection
Test
Wiring when the external device
monitoring function will not be used
External device
monitoring
PLC output
* The output operation mode for auxiliary output 1 is control output
data/inverse of control output signals enabled (default setting).
Note: When the F3SP-B1P is used, the system cannot be used as a
muting system.
Reset
T31
T32
Included short bar
333
F3SJ.fm Page 334 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Wiring for connection with a controller F3SX-E-L2R (category 4) (PNP models only)
• Emergency stop switch can be connected.
• Door switch, two hand control, single beam, or relay unit can be used in combination with F3SX.
• Various settings can be changed and input/output terminals can be monitored using the setting support software for F3SX.
L2 Module
F3SJ settings
• Auto reset mode
• External device monitoring
function disabled
F3SX-E-L2R settings
• Manual reset mode
• Using feedback time
monitoring function
F3SJ (1st unit)
2
8
6
1
3
4
5
7
12
10
Emitter
Receiver
Wiring when safety light curtain
F3SJ is not used
15
9
11
16
14
13
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Model F39-JC@A-L
cable for emitter
Wiring for auto reset mode
Model F39-JC@A-D
cable for receiver
0 V (Blue)
Shield
24 VDC (Brown)
Control output 1 (White)
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Main Module
Control output 1 (Green)
Y3
Communication
line (−) (Pink)
External device
monitoring input (Red)
(See note 2.)
Auxiliary output 1 (Yellow)
Y2
24 VDC (Brown)
E1
Y1
Reset input (Yellow)
Shield
24 VDC
Interlock selection input (White)
0 V (Blue)
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
S2
Auxiliary output 2 (Red)
Open
Test input (Green)
Communication
line (+) (Gray)
Relay Output Module
(R Module)
S2
MS4800
MS4800
11
21
12
22
S1
Fuse
24 VDC
E1
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
A1
T11
T12
T21
T22
Y1
Y2
Y3
2
8
6
1
3
4
5
11
7
Control Circuit
23
33
K1
24 VDC
24 VDC
AC
COM
E1
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
24 VDC
K2
0V
A2
SSC
AS3
AS2
AS1
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
SS1
SS2
RY1
RY2
FB
15
9
11
16
14
13
12
10
12
24
34
KM1
KM2
E1
24 VDC
24 VDC
E1
(operation command)
Motor controller
RY1
KM1
F3SN-A@SS
334
Shield
0 V (Blue)
Control output 2 (White)
Control output 1 (Green)
Emitter
Receiver
F3SJ (2nd unit)
24 VDC (Brown)
Open (Red)
Shield
Test SW
Reset input (Yellow)
Model F39-JC@A-D
cable for receiver
Model F39-JC@A-L
cable for emitter
Interlock selection input (White)
24 VDC (Brown)
External device monitoring
input (Red) (See note 2.)
(See note 2.)
Auxiliary output 1 (Yellow)
Wiring when F3SJ's
testing function is used
0 V (Blue)
F3SS
F3SS
Note: 1. This wiring example is for category 4.
2. This example shows the connection when
auxiliary output 1 is in the standard setting (ON when
light is interrupted).
3. When the F3SJ is series-connected, or 5 or more sets
are connected to the total system of F3SX, power
must be supplied to F3SJ from external source.
For details, see instruction manual of F3SX.
Communication
line (−) (Pink)
Communication
line (+) (Gray)
Test input (Green)
S1:
24 VDC (Brown)
Reset input (Yellow)
Shield
Interlock selection input
(White)
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
Emergency stop switch
(direct opening contacts)(A165E, A22E)
S2:
Reset switch
KM1, KM2: Magnetic contactor (LC1D)
RY1, RY2: Relay
M:
3-phase motor
E1:
24 VDC power supply (S82K)
Auxiliary output 2 (Red)
Open
Test input (Green)
M
0 V (Blue)
F3SN-A@SS
RY2
KM2
F3SJ.fm Page 335 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Wiring for connection with a controller G9SA-301 (category 4) (PNP models only)
Emitter
Receiver
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
IN1
IN2
OUT
Shield
0 V (Blue)
Control output 2 (White)
Control output 1 (Green)
Auxiliary output 1
(Yellow)
+24 V (Brown)
PLC
External device monitoring
input (Red)
+24 V (Brown)
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SN-A@SS
Interlock selection input (White)
MS4800
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
0 V (Blue)
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
F3SP-T01
Auxiliary output 2 (Red)
Open
S1
Test input (Green)
S4
Reset input (Yellow)
Product
Selection
F39-TC5
Shield
Safety
Sensors
F3SJ Ver.2
Communication
line (−) (Pink)
MS4800
Communication
line (+) (Gray)
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
F39-JC@A-D
Product
Selection
F39-JC@A-L
Safety
Sensors
F3SJ settings
• Auto reset mode
• External device monitoring function disabled
G9SA-301 settings
• Manual reset mode
• Using feedback loop
Using emergency stop switch
KM3
*1
+24 VDC
E1
0V
12
22
11
21
KM1
KM2
S3
S2
KM1
KM2
A1
A2
T11
T12
T31
33
M
41
K1
K2
K1
23
3
4
1
N.O.
13
T32
K2
K1
N.C.
K2
a
b
Control
Circuit
JP
2
5
6
PE
T21
T23 T22
A
B
14
24
34
G9SA-301
KM1
Timing Chart
Light incident
Light interrupted
KM2
42
1
2
3
4
5
6
*1. If an emergency stop switch is not used, connect control
output 1 to T12 terminal and control output 2 to T23
directly.
S1:
External test switch (connect to 0 V if the switch is
not necessary.)
S2:
Interlock reset switch
S3:
Emergency stop switch (direct opening contacts)
(A165E, A22E)
S4:
Lockout reset switch (connect to 24 V if the switch
is not necessary.)
KM1, KM2: Magnetic contactor
KM3:
Solid state contactor (G3J)
M:
3-phase motor
E1:
24 VDC power supply (S82K)
PLC:
Programmable controller
(Used for monitoring -- not related to safety
system)
External test switch
(S1)
Wiring for auto reset mode
Interlock reset switch
(S2)
Emergency stop switch
(S3)
KM1
Control output
KM2
K1,K2 N.O. contact
T31 T32
KM1,KM2 N.O. contact
K1
K1,K2 N.C. contact
K2
KM1,KM2 N.C. contact
PLC input 1 *2
Control
Circuit
PLC input 2
PLC output
A
B
*2. The output operation mode for auxiliary output 1 is control output
data/inverse of control output signals enabled (default setting).
335
F3SJ.fm Page 336 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Wiring for connection with a controller G9SX-AD322-T15 (category 4) (PNP models only)
• Can be configured for partial control and total control.
• Can be extended to connect a door switch or a relay unit.
Emitter
Receiver
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
F3SJ settings
• Auto reset mode
• External device monitoring function disabled
G9SX-AD322-T15 settings
• Auto reset mode
• Using feedback loop
F39-JC@A-L
F39-JC@A-D
0 V (Blue)
Feedback loop
Shield
Control output 2 (White)
Control output 1 (Green)
Auxiliary output 1 (Yellow)
Communication
line (−) (Pink)
+24 V (Brown)
External device monitoring
input (Red)
+24 V (Brown)
Reset input (Yellow)
Interlock selection input (White)
S2
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Auxiliary output 2 (Red)
Open
S1
Test input (Green)
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
0 V (Blue)
Product
Selection
Shield
Communication
line (+) (Gray)
KM1
KM2
Motor controller
KM3
MS4800
MS4800
KM4
+24 V
A1
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
+24 VDC
E1
0V
T11 T12 T21 T22
Open
Open
+24 V
KM1
KM3
KM2
KM4
S34
AND
T31 T32 T33 Y1
M1
T41 T42
Open Open
M2
OFF
Control circuit
A2
S14 S24 S34 S44 S54 L1
KM1 KM2
KM3 KM4
Motor controller
(operation command)
Timing Chart
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Control output
KM1,KM2 N.C. contact
X1 X2
PLC, etc.
G9SX-AD322-T15
S1:
External test switch (connect to 0 V if the switch
is not necessary.)
S2:
Lockout reset switch (connect to 24 V if the
switch is not necessary.)
KM1 to KM4: Magnetic contactor
M1, M2:
3-phase motor
E1:
24 VDC power supply (S82K)
PLC:
Programmable controller
(Used for monitoring -- not related to safety
system)
Wiring for manual reset mode
KM3,KM4 N.C. contact
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
KM1,KM2 N.O. contact
Feedback loop
KM3,KM4 N.O. contact
Motor operation command
KM1
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
Motor rotation
OFF-delay time
KM2
S3
KM3
F3SS
F3SS
KM4
+24 V
T31 T32 T33 Y1
S3: Reset switch
336
F3SJ.fm Page 337 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
For NPN output (See page 332 for PNP output wiring.)
Wiring for single F3SJ application (category 4)
• Use of relay welded relay contact detection and interlock is possible without a controller or relay unit.
• Manual reset mode
• Using external device monitoring
function
Receiver
Emitter
Shield
0 V (Blue)
External device monitoring
input (Red)
Auxiliary output 1 (Yellow)
Control output 2 (White)
Control output 1 (Green)
+24 V (Brown)
+24 V (Brown)
Auxiliary output 2 (Red)
Interlock selection input (White)
Reset input (Yellow)
Test input (Green)
S2
S1
F3SS
0 V (Blue)
E3FS
E3ZS
Shield
F3SN-A@SS
KM1,KM2 N.O. contact
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Control output
F3SP-T01
Reset switch (S2)
External test switch (connect to 24 V if the
switch is not necessary.)
S2:
Interlock/lockout reset switch
KM1, KM2: Safety relay with forcibly-guided contacts
(G7SA) or magnetic contactor
KM3:
Load, PLC (for monitor)
KM4:
Solid state contactor (G3J)
M:
3-phase motor
E1:
24 VDC power supply (S82K)
PLC:
Programmable controller
(Used for monitoring -- not related to safety
system)
F39-TC5
External test switch (S1)
S1:
F3SJ Ver.2
Light incident
Light interrupted
MS4800
Timing Chart
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
PLC
Product
Selection
0V
Safety
Sensors
E1
F3SS
OUT
E3FS
E3ZS
IN
F3SN-A@SS
+24 VDC
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
M
F3SP-T01
KM2
KM2
F39-TC5
KM1
F3SJ Ver.2
KM1 KM2
KM1
MS4800
KM3
Communication
line (−) (Pink)
KM4
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Communication
line (+) (Gray)
Product
Selection
F39-JC@A-D
Safety
Sensors
F39-JC@A-L
KM1,KM2 N.C.contact
PLC input *
PLC output
* The output operation mode for auxiliary output 1 is control output
data/inverse of control output signals enabled (default setting).
337
F3SJ.fm Page 338 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Wiring for connection with a controller G9SA-301-P (category 4) (NPN models only)
Emitter
F3SJ settings
• Auto reset mode
• External device monitoring function disabled
G9SA-301-P settings
• Manual reset mode
• Using feedback loop
Using emergency stop switch
Receiver
Safety
Sensors
F39-JC@A-D
0 V (Blue)
IN2
KM3
*1
+24 VDC
E1
0V
OUT
Shield
IN1
Control output 2 (White)
Control output 1 (Green)
+24 V (Brown)
PLC
External device monitoring
input (Red)
Auxiliary output 1
(Yellow)
Communication
line (−) (Pink)
+24 V (Brown)
Interlock selection input (White)
Test input (Green)
S4
12
22
11
21
KM1
KM2
S3
KM1
S2
MS4800
S1
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
Auxiliary output 2 (Red)
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Open
0 V (Blue)
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Reset input (Yellow)
Communication
line (+) (Gray)
Shield
Safety
Sensors
F39-JC@A-L
KM2
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
A1
A2
T11
T12
33
M
41
K1
K2
K1
23
3
4
6
a
13
T31 T32
K2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
K1
b
K2
a
b
Control
Circuit
JP
2
5
1
PE T21
T23 T22
A
B
14
24
34
42
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
G9SA-301-P
KM1
Timing Chart
KM2
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Light incident
Light interrupted
External test switch
(S1)
Interlock reset switch
(S2)
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
Emergency stop switch
(S3)
1
2
3
4
5
6
*1. If an emergency stop switch is not used, connect
control output 1 to T12 terminal and control
output 2 to T23 directly.
S1:
External test switch (connect to 24 V if the
switch is not necessary.)
S2:
Interlock reset switch
S3:
Emergency stop switch (direct opening
contacts) (A165E, A22E)
S4:
Lockout reset switch (connect to 0 V if the
switch is not necessary.)
KM1, KM2: Magnetic contactor
KM3:
Solid state contactor (G3J)
M:
3-phase motor
E1:
24 VDC power supply (S82K)
PLC:
Programmable controller
(Used for monitoring -- not related to safety
system)
Wiring for auto reset mode
Control output
K1,K2 N.O. contact
KM1,KM2 N.O. contact
KM1
K1,K2 N.C. contact
KM2
KM1,KM2 N.C. contact
T31 T32
PLC input 1 *2
F3SS
F3SS
PLC input 2
K1
PLC output
K2
*2. The output operation mode for auxiliary output 1 is
control output data/inverse of control output signals
enabled (default setting).
Control
Circuit
A
338
B
F3SJ.fm Page 339 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
System Configuration and Connection (Muting system)
Muting System
Muting Sensor
The muting function temporarily disables the safety function of the
F3SJ, keeping the control outputs ON even if beams are interrupted.
This makes it possible to install safety light curtains for AGV passage,
enabling both safety and productivity.
When muting, the muting lamp (external indicator) blinks to notify
people in the surrounding area that the safety functions are disabled.
For each operation modes, refer to page 354.
A muting sensor is the sensor that is the trigger for temporarily
disabling the safety functions of F3SJ. You can use a through-beam
or retro-reflective photoelectric switch, a proximity sensor, or a limit
switch as the muting sensor. (OMRON's E3Z-series, E2E-series
(3-wire), E2VX-series, and D4N-series Sensors are recommended.)
For an F3SJ model with PNP output, use a sensor with a 3-wire PNP
transistor output or a NO contact output. For an F3SJ model with NPN
output, use a sensor with a 3-wire NPN transistor output or a NO
contact output.
Two-wire sensors cannot be used.
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
Muting lamp (external indicator)
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
1. Remove the caps of the emitter and receiver.
(A screwdriver is included with the key cap for muting.)
2. Install a muting lamp (external indicator) on either the emitter or
receiver.
3. Attach the key cap for muting to the emitter/receiver on which the
muting lamp (external indicator) was not installed.
Receiver
Internal
indicator labels
F3SP-T01
Upgrading F3SJ for Muting System
Emitter
F39-TC5
Muting lamps (external indicators) that indicate the state of the muting
and override functions must be installed where they are clearly visible
to workers from all the operating positions.
Internal indicator labels are included with the F39-CN6 Key Cap for
Muting. When using a muting system, attach the internal indicator
labels so the arrows will be in line with the positions of the indicators,
as shown by the shading below.
F3SJ Ver.2
Install muting sensors so that they can distinguish between the object
that is being allowed to be pass through the detection zone and a
person.
If the muting function is activated by the detection of a person, it may
result in serious injury.
Attachment Positions for Included Labels
MS4800
!WARNING
The muting and override functions disable the safety functions of the
device. Additional safety measures must be taken to ensure safety
while these functions are working.
• The muting input 1 indicator turns ON when input is applied to
muting input 1.
• The muting input 2 indicator turns ON when input is applied to
muting input 2.
• The muting input 1 indicator and muting input 2 indicator blink
under muting override.
• The muting error indicator on the receiver side turns ON when
there is a muting error.
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
F3SJ Internal Indicators
Product
Selection
To notify workers that the muting function is working, external lamp(s)
must be installed. Use the F39-A01P@-PAC external indicator set or
an F39-JJ3N universal indicator cable with a commercially available
external indicator.
Safety
Sensors
Muting Lamp (External indicator)
External indicator set
Model F39-A01P@-PAC
Commercially
available
external
indicator
2.
Universal indicator
cable
Model F39-JJ3N
Brown: +, Blue: −
Cap
3.
Key Cap for Muting
F39-CN6
(Case: orange)
1.
(Case: black)
1.
Cap
(Case: black)
339
F3SJ.fm Page 340 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Standard Muting Mode
The F3SJ is set to this operation mode when it is shipped from the
factory. The muting function is enabled by providing a time lag
between muting inputs 1 and 2. Use a separately purchased setting
tool to change parameters related to muting time, or to select other
muting operation modes.
Note: The muting status can be released even when the system
enters lockout.
Start Conditions
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
If both of the following 2 conditions are present, muting is activated.
1. No interrupting object is found in the F3SJ's detection zone, and
control output is ON.
2. After muting input 1 is turned ON (connected to 9 to 24 V for PNP
types, or to 0 to 1.5 V for NPN types), muting input 2 is turned ON
(connected to 9 to 24 V for PNP types, or to 0 to 1.5 V for NPN
types) within the muting input time limit T1 min. to T1 max. (0.03 to
3 s).
Once the conditions in item 2 above are met, the muting function will
be enabled in 0.15 s max.
When condition 1 is satisfied but time condition of 2 is not, a muting
sequence error occurs and receiver’s muting error indicator turns ON.
However, the F3SJ safety functions will continue operating and the
F3SJ will operate normally even during a muting error.
A muting error is released when either of the following occurs:
• When muting is started using a proper procedure
• When power is turned on while muting inputs 1 and 2 are OFF
End Conditions
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
If either of the following conditions are satisfied, the muting state is
released.
1. Muting input 1 or 2 turns OFF for T3 (0.1 s) or longer.
2. When the muting continuation time exceeds the muting time limit
of T2 (60 s) (a setting tool can be used to change the limit in the
range of 1 to 600 s, or to eliminate the time limit)
T3 (0.1 s) max.
ON
Muting input 1
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
Muting lamp
(external
indicator)
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
F39-TC5
Muting input 2
OFF
T1 min. to T1 max.
T3 (0.1 s) max.
ON
OFF
T2 max.
0.15 s max. *
Muting status
0.25 s max.
Enabled
Disabled
Blink
OFF
Light
incident
F3SJ
Light incident/
Light
Light interrupted
interrupted
Control output
ON
OFF
* This value is the time when the F3SJ is used singly. When used in
a series, this time is as shown in the table below.
* Time (s)
Number of Connected Units
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
1
0.15
Series of 2
0.26
Series of 3
0.29
Series of 4
0.32
F3SS
F3SS
• T1 min: Muting input time limit (min.)
This is the minimum input time lag between muting inputs 1 and 2,
and is set to 0.03 s. If the time lag between muting inputs 1 and 2
are shorter than this value, a muting error is generated.
• T1 max: Muting input time limit (max.)
This is the maximum input time lag between muting inputs 1 and 2,
and is set to 3 s. The minimum value must be less than the
maximum value (min. < max.).
340
• T2: Muting time limit
This is the continuous time of the muting function, and is set to
60 s. If the muting status exceeds this time, muting is cancelled.
• T3: Allowable pulse-change time for muting input signals
This is the maximum time allowed for a change in the waveform
pulse of muting inputs 1 and 2 while in the muting status.
The following values can be changed using the Setting Support
Software for the F3SJ:
• T1 min: Muting input time limit (min.)
• T1 max: Muting input time limit (max.)
• T2: Muting time limit
The following values can be changed using the Setting Console:
• T2: Muting time limit
Installation Standard for Muting Sensors
• Set the muting sensors so that they can detect all of the passing
detection objects (palettes, automobiles, etc.). Do not install in a
position so that only the front or rear end of the detection object is
detected.
• Set the muting sensors so that they detect the objects even when
they are loaded on palettes or other transport devices.
• Install the F3SJ and muting sensors so that each object passes
through all muting sensors before the next object arrives at the first
muting sensor. Also, install all F3SJ and muting sensors so that no
person is able to accidentally enter the hazardous area while the
muting function is enabled.
• When objects pass through the muting area at different speeds,
consider limiting the muting time.
• For a muting sensor installation example, see the instruction
manual.
• For details about the override function, see the instruction manual.
F3SJ.fm Page 341 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Example of a Safety Circuit with the Muting System
For PNP output
Wiring for muting function with single F3SJ application (category 4)
When two muting sensors are connected
• Attaching a keycap for muting (F39-CN6) enables the muting function to be used.
Muting lamp
(external indicator)
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
KM3
KM1
Shield
0 V (Blue)
Control output 2 (White)
KM2
Control output 1 (Green)
KM1
Auxiliary output 1 (Yellow)
24 V (Brown)
External device
monitoring input (Red)
(Pink)
Communication line (−)
24 V (Brown)
Muting input 1
(White)
S2
Reset input
(Yellow)
MS4800
F39-TC5
S1 Test input
(Green)
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
F3SJ Ver.2
0 V (Blue)
Muting input 2
(Red)
Product
Selection
MS4800
F39-JC@A-D
(Gray)
Communication line (+)
Shield
Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Receiver
F39-JC@A-L
KM1
KM2
KM2
M
Muting sensor
(PNP output)
IN
+24 VDC
OUT
E1
0V
PLC
Reflector
Timing Chart
Product
Selection
Emitter
Safety
Sensors
• Auto reset mode
• Using external device monitoring
function
Light incident
Light interrupted
Muting input 1
Muting input 2
Control output
KM1, KM2 N.O. contact
S1:
External test switch (connect to 0 V if the switch is not
necessary.)
S2:
Lockout reset switch (connect to 24 V if the switch is not
necessary.)
KM1, KM2: Safety relay with forcibly-guided contacts (G7SA) or
magnetic contactor
KM3:
Solid state contactor (G3J)
M:
3-phase motor
E1:
24 VDC power supply (S82K)
PLC:
Programmable controller (Used for monitoring -- not
related to safety system)
Muting sensor: Retro-reflective photoelectric sensor (E3Z-R81)
KM1, KM2 N.C. contact
PLC input *
PLC output
* The output operation mode for auxiliary output 1 is control output data/inverse of control output signals enabled (default setting).
Note: Start interlock and restart interlock can be used with a setting tool.
341
F3SJ.fm Page 342 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
When four muting sensors are connected
• The muting function can be used by attaching the F39-CN6 Key Cap.
Muting lamp
(external indicator)
• Auto reset mode
• Using external device monitoring function
S1:
KM3
Shield
0 V (Blue)
24 V (Brown)
External device
monitoring input (Red)
Auxiliary
output 1
(Yellow)
Control
output 1 (Green)
Control output
2 (White)
S1
F3SJ Ver.2
24 V (Brown)
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
Muting input 1
(White)
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
(Pink)
Communication line (−)
KM1
KM2
KM1
S2
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
F39-JC@A-D
(Gray)
Communication
line (+)
0 V (Blue)
Muting input 2
(Red)
Test input
(Green)
Reset input
(Yellow)
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Receiver
F39-JC@A-L
Shield
Safety
Sensors
Emitter
External test switch (connect to 0 V if the
switch is not necessary.)
S2:
Lockout reset switch (connect to 24 V if the
switch is not necessary.)
KM1, KM2: Safety relay with forcibly-guided contacts
(G7SA) or magnetic contactor
KM3:
Solid state contactor (G3J)
M:
3-phase motor
E1:
24 VDC power supply (S82K)
PLC:
Programmable controller
(Used for monitoring -- not related to safety
system)
A1, B1, A2, B2, Muting sensor: Retro-reflective
photoelectric sensor (E3Z-R81)
KM1 KM2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
KM2
M
Timing Chart
IN
OUT
Light incident
Light interrupted
PLC
A1 Control output
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
+24 VDC
E1
0V
Reflector
B1 Control output
A2 Control output
A2
B1
B2 Control output
Muting input 1
Workpiece
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
Muting input 2
A1
Muting sensor
(PNP output)
B2
F3SJ Control output
F3SJ
KM1, KM2 N.O. contact
F3SS
F3SS
KM1, KM2 N.C. contact
PLC input *
PLC output
* The output operation mode for auxiliary output 1 is control output data/inverse of control output signals enabled (default setting).
Note: Start interlock and restart interlock can be used with a setting tool.
342
F3SJ.fm Page 343 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
For NPN output
Wiring for muting function with single F3SJ application (category 4)
When two muting sensors are connected
• Attaching a keycap for muting (F39-CN6) enables the muting function to be used.
Muting lamp
(external indicator)
• Auto reset mode
• Using external device monitoring
function
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
Receiver
Emitter
F39-JC@A-D
F39-JC@A-L
KM1
Shield
0 V (Blue)
External device
monitoring input (Red)
Auxiliary output 1 (Yellow)
Control output 2 (White)
Control output 1 (Green)
KM3
+24 V (Brown)
+24 V (Brown)
Muting input 2 (Red)
Muting input 1 (White)
Reset input (Yellow)
Communication
line (−) (Pink)
S2
Test input (Green)
0 V (Blue)
S1
Shield
Communication
line (+) (Gray)
KM1
KM1 KM2
KM2
KM2
M
Muting sensor
(NPN output)
IN
+24 VDC
OUT
E1
PLC
0V
Reflector
Timing Chart
Light incident
Light interrupted
Muting input 1
Muting input 2
Control output
KM1,KM2 N.O. contact
KM1,KM2 N.C. contact
S1:
External test switch (connect to 24 V if the switch is not
necessary.)
S2:
Lockout reset switch (connect to 0 V if the switch is not
necessary.)
KM1, KM2: Safety relay with forcibly-guided contacts (G7SA) or
magnetic contactor
KM3:
Solid state contactor (G3J)
M:
3-phase motor
E1:
24 VDC power supply (S82K)
PLC:
Programmable controller
(Used for monitoring -- not related to safety system)
Muting sensor: Retro-reflective photoelectric sensor (E3Z-R61)
PLC input *
PLC output
* The output operation mode for auxiliary output 1 is control output data/
inverse of control output signals enabled (default setting).
Note: Start interlock and restart interlock can be used with a setting tool.
343
F3SJ.fm Page 344 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
When four muting sensors are connected
• The muting function can be used by attaching the F39-CN6 Key Cap.
Muting lamp
(external indicator)
• Auto reset mode
• Using external device monitoring function
S1:
S1
KM1
Shield
0 V (Blue)
F3SJ Ver.2
(Pink)
Communication line (−)
24 V (Brown)
Control
output 1 (Green)
Control
output 2
(White)
Auxiliary output 1
(Yellow)
External device
monitoring input (Red)
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
24 V (Brown)
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
KM3
(Gray)
Communication
line (+)
S2
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
F39-JC@A-D
F39-JC@A-L
0 V (Blue)
Muting input 2
(Red)
Test input
(Green)
Reset input
(Yellow)
Muting input 1
(White)
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Emitter
Shield
Safety
Sensors
External test switch (connect to 24 V if the
switch is not necessary.)
S2:
Lockout reset switch (connect to 0 V if the
switch is not necessary.)
KM1, KM2: Safety relay with forcibly-guided contacts
(G7SA) or magnetic contactor
Solid state contactor (G3J)
Receiver KM3:
M:
3-phase motor
E1:
24 VDC power supply (S82K)
PLC:
Programmable controller
(Used for monitoring -- not related to safety
system)
A1, B1, A2, B2, Muting sensor: Retro-reflective
photoelectric sensor (E3Z-R61)
KM1
KM2
KM1
KM2
KM2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
M
IN
Reflector
PLC
Light
incident
Light
interrupted
A1 Control output
+24 VDC
E1
0V
B1 Control output
Timing Chart
A2 Control output
A2
B1
OUT
B2 Control output
Workpiece
Muting input 1
Muting input 2
A1
B2
F3SJ Control output
Muting sensor
(NPN output)
F3SJ
KM1, KM2 N.O. contact
F3SS
F3SS
KM1, KM2 N.C. contact
PLC input *
PLC output
* The output operation mode for auxiliary output 1 is control output data/inverse of control output signals enabled (default setting).
Note: Start interlock and restart interlock can be used with a setting tool.
344
F3SJ.fm Page 345 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Setting Bi-directional Muting
• Connect the outer muting sensors A1 and A2 to muting input 1 and the inner muting sensors B1 and B2 to muting input 2.
• When muting sensors A1 and then B1 (or A2 and then B2) turn ON in that order, the F3SJ will enter the muting state.
Connected to muting input 1
Connected to muting input 2
A1, A2, B1, B2: Retro-reflective
Photoelectric Sensors
B2 A2
A1 B1
Workpiece
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
F3SJ
L
Reflector
D
• Muting from the opposite direction is also possible.
B2 A2
A1 B1
V
Workpiece
F3SJ
Note: 1. This example arrangement uses E3Z-R@@ Retro-reflective Photoelectric Sensors as the muting sensors. Mutual interference must be
taken into account when installing these Sensors.
2. The muting sensors must be installed so that distance D between muting sensors A1 and A2 is smaller than workpiece length L.
3. Through-beam or Retro-reflective Photoelectric Sensors, Proximity Sensors, or Limit Switches can be used as the muting sensors.
Two-wire sensors cannot be used.
345
F3SJ.fm Page 346 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Safety Precautions
This catalog is intended as a guide for product selection. Be sure to use the instruction manual provided with the product for actual operation.
Regulations and Standards
Precautions for Safe Use
1. Application of an F3SJ-A sensor alone cannot receive type
certification provided by Article 44-2 of the Labour Safety and
Health Law of Japan. It is necessary to apply it in a system.
Therefore, when using the F3SJ-A in Japan as a "safety system for
pressing or shearing machines" prescribed in Article 42 of that law,
the system must receive type certification.
Indication and meaning for safe use
Meanings of Signal Words
To ensure safe use of the F3SJ-A, signal words and an alert symbol
are used in this catalog to indicate safety-related instructions.
Because these instructions describe details very important to your
safety, it is extremely important that you understand and follow the
instructions. The signal words and alert symbol used in this catalog
are shown below.
2. The F3SJ-A is electro-sensitive protective equipment (ESPE) in
accordance with European Union (EU) Machinery Directive Index
Annex IV, B, Safety Components, Item 1.
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
3. The F3SJ-A complies with the following legislation and standards:
1. EU Regulations
Machinery Directive: Directive 98/37/EC
EMC Directive: Directive 2004/108/EC
2. European standards:
EN61496-1 (TYPE 4 ESPE),
prEN61496-2 (TYPE 4 AOPD),
EN61508-1 to -7 (SIL3)
3. International standards:
IEC61496-1 (TYPE 4 ESPE),
IEC61496-2 (TYPE 4 AOPD),
EN61508-1 to -7 (SIL3)
4. JIS standards:
JIS B9704-1 (TYPE 4 ESPE),
JIS B9704-2 (TYPE 4 AOPD)
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
4. The F3SJ-A received the following certification from the EUaccredited body, TÜV SÜD:
• EC type test based on machinery directive
Type 4 ESPE (EN61496-1),
Type 4 AOPD(prEN61496-2)
• TÜV SÜD Type Certification
Type 4 ESPE (EN61496-1),
Type 4 AOPD (prEN61496-2),
• SIL1, 2, 3 (EN61508-1 to -7)
Application: EN954-1 categories B, 1, 2, 3, 4
5. The F3SJ-A has received certificates of UL listing for US and
Canadian safety standards from the Third Party Assessment Body
UL.
• Type 4 ESPE (UL61496-1),
Type 4 AOPD (UL61496-2)
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
6. The F3SJ-A is designed according to the standards listed below.
To make sure that the final system complies with the following
standards and regulations, you are asked to design and use it in
accordance with all other related standards, laws, and regulations.
If you have any questions, consult with specialized organizations
such as the body responsible for prescribing and/or enforcing
machinery safety regulations in the location where the equipment
is to be used.
• European Standards: EN415-4, EN692, EN693
• US Occupational Safety and Health Administration: OSHA 29
CFR 1910.212
• US Occupational Safety and Health Administration: OSHA 29
CFR 1910.217
• American National Standard Institute: ANSI B11.1 to B11.19
• American National Standard Institute ANSI/RIA 15.06
• Canadian Standards Association CSA Z142, Z432, Z434
• SEMI standard SEMI S2
F3SS
F3SS
346
!WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
result in minor or moderate injury, or may result in serious injury or
death. Additionally, there may by significant property damage.
!CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may
result in minor or moderate injury or in property damage.
Definition of Symbol
Prohibited
Indicates a prohibited action.
Warning Labels
For users
!WARNING
The FS3J must be installed, set, and integrated into the mechanical
control system by a qualified technician who has received the
appropriate training. Failure to make correct settings may prevent
detection of people and result in serious injury.
When changing parameters with a setting tool (F39-GWUM or F39MC21), the change must be made and the contents of the change
must be managed by the person in charge of the system.
Unintentional or mistaken parameter changes may prevent detection
of people and result in serious injury.
For machines
!WARNING
Do not use this sensor for machines that cannot possibly be stopped
by electrical control. For example, do not use it for a pressing machine
that uses full-rotation clutch. Otherwise, the machine may not stop
before a person reaches the hazardous part, resulting in serious
injury.
Do not use the auxiliary output or external indicator output for safety
applications. Failure of the F3SJ may cause a person to go
undetected, resulting in serious injury.
F3SJ.fm Page 347 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
For mounting
!WARNING
When using more than 1 set of F3SJ, install them so that mutual
interference does not occur, such as by configuring series
connections or using physical barriers between adjacent sets.
Make sure to test the operation of the F3SJ after installation to verify
that the F3SJ operates as intended. Do not operate the machine until
the test has been completed and F3SJ operation has been verified.
Unintended function settings may cause a person to go undetected,
resulting in serious injury.
Make sure that the F3SJ is securely mounted and its cables and
connectors are properly connected.
Make sure to secure the safety distance between the F3SJ and the
hazardous parts. Otherwise, the machine may not stop before a
person reaches the hazardous part, resulting in serious injury.
Do not use the sensor system with mirrors in as retro-reflective
configuration. Doing so may hinder detection. It is possible to use
mirrors to "bend" the detection zone to a 90-degree angle.
Make sure that no foreign material, such as water, oil or dust, enters
the inside of the F3SJ while the cap is removed.
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
Position with detection
zone bent at 90°
Install the sensor system so that it is not affected by reflective
surfaces. Failure to do so may hinder detection, resulting in serious
injury.
E3FS
E3ZS
Install muting sensors so that they can distinguish between the object
that is being allowed to be pass through the detection zone and a
person. If the muting function is activated by the detection of a person,
it may result in serious injury.
Position the switch that is used to activate the override function in a
location where the entire hazardous area can be seen, and where the
switch cannot be operated from inside the hazardous area. Make sure
that nobody is in the hazardous area before activating the override
function.
F3SN-A@SS
Reflector
Install the F3SJ, Muting Sensors, or a protective wall so that workers
cannot enter hazardous areas while muting is in effect, and set muting
times.
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
The muting and override functions disable the safety functions of the
device. Additional safety measures must be taken to ensure safety
while these functions are working.
Use two independent input devices for the muting inputs.
F3SP-T01
When the fixed blanking function or the floating blanking function is
used, the diameter for the smallest detectable object becomes larger.
Be sure to use the diameter for the smallest detectable object for the
fixed blanking function or the floating blanking function when
calculating the safety distance. Failure to do so may prevent the
machinery from stopping before a person reaches the hazardous part
of the machinery, and result in serious injury.
Muting times must be precisely set according to the application by
qualified personnel who have received appropriate training. In
particular, if the muting time limit is to be set to infinity, the person who
makes the setting must bear responsibility.
F39-TC5
Position with retro-reflection
After setting the fixed blanking function, be sure to confirm that a test
rod is detected within all areas that require detection. Failure to do so
may prevent detection of people and result in serious injury.
Muting lamps (external indicators) that indicate the state of the muting
and override functions must be installed where they are clearly visible
to workers from all the operating positions.
F3SJ Ver.2
When detection of an area has been disabled by the fixed blanking
function, provide a protective structure around the entire area that will
prevent a person from passing through it and reaching the hazardous
part of the machinery. Failure to do so may prevent detection of
people and result in serious injury.
MS4800
The F3SJ cannot protect a person from an object flying from a
hazardous area. Install protective cover(s) or fence(s).
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Install the interlock reset switch in a location that provides a clear view
of the entire hazardous area and where it cannot be activated from
within the hazardous area.
Product
Selection
Reflector
Safety
Sensors
Install a protective structure so that the hazardous part of a machine
can only be reached by passing through the sensor's detection zone.
Install the sensors so that part of the person is always present in the
detection zone when working in a machine's hazardous areas. If a
person is able to step into the hazardous area of a machine and
remain behind the F3SJ's detection zone, configure the system with
an interlock function that prevents the machine from being restarted.
Otherwise it may result in heavy injury.
When using series connections, perform inspection of all connected
F3SJs as instructed in the User's Manual.
For wiring
!WARNING
For PNP output, connect the load between the output and 0 V line.
For NPN output, connect the load between the output and +24 V line.
Connecting the load between the +24 V and 0 V lines results in a
dangerous condition because the operation mode is reversed to "ON
when light is interrupted".
[For PNP output]
Do not short-circuit an output line to +24 V line. Otherwise, the output
is always ON, creating a dangerous situation. Also, 0 V of the power
supply must be grounded so that output should not turn ON due to
grounding of the output line.
[For NPN output]
Do not short-circuit an output line to 0 V line. Otherwise, the output is
always ON, creating a dangerous situation. Also, the +24 V line of the
power supply must be grounded so that output does not turn ON due
to grounding of the output line.
347
F3SJ.fm Page 348 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Configure the system by using the optimal number of control outputs
that satisfy the requirements of the necessary safety category.
Do not connect each line of F3SJ to a DC power supply higher than
24 V+20%. Also, do not connect to an AC power supply.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock.
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
For F3SJ to comply with IEC 61496-1 and UL 508, the DC power
supply unit must satisfy all of the following conditions:
• Must be within rated power voltage (24 VDC±20%).
• Must have tolerance against the total rated current of devices if it
is connected to multiple devices.
• Must comply with EMC directives (industrial environment)
• Double or enhanced insulation must be applied between the
primary and secondary circuits.
• Automatic recovery of overcurrent protection characteristics
(reversed L sagging)
• Output holding time must be 20 ms or longer.
• Must satisfy output characteristic requirements for class 2 circuit or
limited voltage current circuit defined by UL508.
• Must comply with EMC, laws, and regulations of a country or a
region where F3SJ is used. (Ex: In EU, the power supply must
comply with EMC Low Voltage Directive.)
For series connection
Series connections can prevent mutual interference when multiple
sensors are used. Up to 4 sets, 400 beams, can be connected
(except for the F3SJ-A@-TS Series, for which up to 3 sets,
240 beams, can be connected). The emission of series-connected
F3SJ is time-divided, so mutual interference does not occur and
safety is ensured.
Emitter 1
Receiver 1
F39-JJR3W,
F39-JJR15L, or
F39-JJR06L
Connecting
Cable
Emitter 2
Receiver 2
Emitter 3
Receiver 3
Emitter 4
Receiver 4
Double or enhanced insulation from hazardous voltage must be
applied to all input and output lines. Failure to do so may result in
electric shock.
The cable extension length must be no greater than the specified
length. Otherwise, the safety functions may fail to work properly,
resulting in danger.
Installation Conditions
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
Refer to “Precautions for All Safety Sensors” on page 242 for
installation conditions.
!WARNING
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
Make sure to secure the safety distance (S) between the F3SJ and
the hazardous part. Otherwise, the machine may not stop before a
person reaches the hazardous part, resulting in serious injury.
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Note: The response time of a machine is the time period from when
the machine receives a stop signal to when the machine's
hazardous part stops.
Measure the response time on the actual system. Also,
periodically check that the response time of the machine has
not changed.
Refer to the “Precautions for All Safety Sensors” on page 242 for
calculating the Safety distance.
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
Prevention of Mutual Interference
Do not use a sensor system in a reflective configuration.
Doing so may hinder detection.
Mirrors can be used change the optical route.
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
When using more than 1 set of F3SJ, install them so that
mutual interference does not occur, such as by
configuring series connections or using physical barriers
between adjacent sets.
Mutual interference from other F3SJ is prevented in up to 3 sets
without series connection.
348
No Series Connections
Refer to “Precautions for All Safety” Sensors on page 242 for
information on preventing mutual interference of Safety Light Curtains
that are not connected in series.
F3SJ.fm Page 349 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Using Setting Tools
The following setting tools (sold separately) can be purchased in
order to change or confirm various F3SJ-series parameters.
• F39-MC21 Setting Console
• F39-GWUM SD Manager Setting Support Software for the F3SJ
The Setting Console cannot be used with the F3SJ-A@-TS Series.
!WARNING
The FS3J must be installed, set, and integrated into the mechanical
control system by a qualified technician who has received the
appropriate training. Failure to make correct settings may prevent
detection of people and result in serious injury.
F3SJ Versions
Setting tools can be used with Version 2 and later versions of the
F3SJ. The setting tools cannot be used with Version 1.
The setting tools cannot be used even if a Version 1 F3SJ is
combined in series with compatible F3SJ Units. (A communications
error lockout will occur.)
Unfortunately, the F3SJ's version cannot be upgraded.
The F3SJ's version number appears on its label, as shown in the
following diagram.
Location of the F3SJ's Version Number (Within Dashed-line Box)
❍
❍
Auxiliary output *2
❍
❍
Specified light beam output function *1
×
❍
External indicator output *2
❍
❍
Interlock function *2
❍
❍
External device monitoring function *2
❍
❍
Changing
Change detection distance function *1
detection distance
❍
❍
Indicator and I/O
settings
Monitoring
operation
Maintenance
information
Recovering
settings
Other functions
Light intensity indicators *1
❍
❍
Ambient light intensity indicators *1
❍
❍
Status indicators *1
×
❍
Error log *1
❍
❍
Power ON time *1
❍
❍
Number of load switching operations *1
❍
❍
Recover settings function *1
❍
❍
Safety distance calculation function *1
×
❍
Power cable length calculation Function *1
×
❍
Rated response time check *1
❍
❍
*1. These functions were newly added in Version 2. A setting tool can be used to enable these functions or read the function settings.
*2. These functions can be used even without a setting tool. A setting tool can be used to make more detailed settings.
F3SS
Override function *2
(when using the muting system)
E3FS
E3ZS
❍
F3SN-A@SS
❍
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
❍
Muting function *2
(when using the muting system)
F3SP-T01
❍
F39-TC5
❍
Warning zone function *1
F3SJ Ver.2
Settings for
individual
applications
MS4800
❍
❍
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
❍
Floating braking function *1
Product
Selection
Fixed blanking function *1
Safety
Sensors
F39-GWUM SD Manager Setting
Support Software for the F3SJ
F3SS
F39-MC21 Setting Console
Function or monitored item
E3FS
E3ZS
❍: Can be used.
×: Cannot be used.
F3SN-A@SS
Functions Editable with Setting Tools
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
: Serial number
: Year of manufacture
: F3SJ's version number (Verify that the version is Version 2 or later.)
F3SP-T01
3
F39-TC5
2
Version : 3
OMRON Corporation Kyoto, JAPAN
F3SJ Ver.2
1
1
2
MS4800
Serial No. :
Year :
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Close-up View of Dashed-line Box
Product
Selection
Receiver
Safety
Sensors
Emitter
349
F3SJ.fm Page 350 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Two Kinds of Setting Tools
The following accessories (sold separately) can be purchased in
order to use various F3SJ-series functions and change settings.
• F39-MC21 Setting Console
A Setting Console can easily make settings onsite.
• F39-GWUM SD Manager Setting Support Software for the F3SJ
With this software, a personal computer can be connected to make
settings. The SD Manager Setting Support Software for the F3SJ
can make more detailed settings than the Setting Console.
Setting Console
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
The following items are included with the F39-MC21 Setting Console.
• Setting Console
• Branch Connector (with Connector Cap)
• Special Cable
• Special Cable with Plug
• Error Mode Label
• Instruction Manual
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
Connecting the Setting Console
Connect the F3SJ to the Setting Console as shown in the following
diagram. The Branch Connector can be used on either the emitter
side or receiver side. After the F3SJ has been wired, turn ON the
power and change parameters as required. If it is not possible to
connect a branch connector because the connector is concealed by
equipment or otherwise inaccessible, use the Special Cable with Plug
to connect to the + and − communications lines. For details, refer to
the F39-MC21 Instruction Manual.
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
350
SD Manager Setting Support Software for the
F3SJ
The following items are included with the F39-GWUM SD Manager
Setting Support Software for the F3SJ.
• CD-ROM (SD Manager Setting Support Software for the F3SJ,
Communications Unit Driver)
• Communications Unit
• Branch Connector (with Connector Cap)
• Special Cable
• Instruction Manual (Installation Guide)
• Special Cable with Plug
The F3SJ's operating status can be checked and its parameters can
be changed in the SD Manager Setting Support Software for the
F3SJ.
Connecting the SD Manager Setting Support Software
Connect the F3SJ, Communications Unit, and personal computer as
shown in the following diagram. The branch connector can be used
on either the emitter side or receiver side. After the F3SJ has been
wired, turn ON the power and start the Setting Support Software. If it
is not possible to connect a branch connector because the connector
is concealed by equipment or otherwise inaccessible, use the Special
Cable with Plug to connect to the + and - communications lines. For
details, refer to the SD Manager's Help function.
F39-GWUM SD Manager Setting
Support Software for the F3SJ
(Accessory, sold separately)
F39-MC21 Setting Console
(Accessory, sold separately)
PC
F3SJ.fm Page 351 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Applications Supported by the Setting Tools
Fixed Blanking Function
Floating Blanking Function
Summary
Summary
Disables specific F3SJ light beams.
Increases the diameter of the F3SJ's smallest detectable object and
turns OFF the control output when multiple objects are detected.
!WARNING
When the fixed blanking function is used to disable detection in an
area, install blocking structures or shielding to prevent passage into
the entire hazardous area where detection has been disabled.
Failure to do so may prevent detection of people and result in serious
injury.
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
Light beam #10
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Floating blanking area
Light beam #5
Product
Selection
Light beam #10
Safety
Sensors
Higher
F3SS
Higher
E3FS
E3ZS
Higher
F3SN-A@SS
Set the area that will be subject to fixed blanking.
An interrupting object can be placed in the detection area to perform
teaching and specify light beams for manual settings.
When the Setting Console is being used, all of the light beams are set
as the floating blanking area. When the SD Manager Setting Support
Software is being used, just one area can be set but the range of the
area can be specified. In the following example, the floating blanking
area is set from the 5th light beam to the 10th light beam (counting
from the bottom). An interrupting object can be placed in the detection
area to perform teaching and specify light beams for manual settings.
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Setting the Fixed Blanking Area
Setting the Floating Blanking Area
F3SP-T01
This function disables part of the F3SJ's detection area and maintains
the control output's ON status even if there is an object in the disabled
area.
The light beams set for fixed blanking must be one area of
consecutive light beams and up to five areas can be set (areas 1 to
5). Fixed blanking cannot be set for all of the light beams.
F39-TC5
Fixed Blanking Function
F3SJ Ver.2
Floating Blanking Function
This function increases the diameter of the smallest detectable object
to allow passage of objects of a certain size or allow interrupting
objects in multiple locations.
Description of Functions
Higher
Description of Functions
MS4800
In this example, there is always an object such as a conveyor belt in
the detection area, and we want to ignore the conveyor belt.
When there is a moving object with a fixed width in the detection area
that we do not want to detect, the detection function can be disabled.
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Example Application
Example Application
Product
Selection
After setting the fixed blanking function, you must verify that the F3SJ
detects a test rod at any position in the entire area where intrusion
must be detected. Failure to do so may prevent detection of people
and result in serious injury.
After setting the floating blanking function, always verify that the F3SJ
system operates as expected. Serious injury may result if an
individual is not detected.
Safety
Sensors
When an allowable range of light beams has been set for fixed
blanking, the size of the smallest detectable object will be larger in the
vicinity of interrupting objects. Calculate the safety distance to match
the settings.
!WARNING
When the floating blanking function is used, it increases the diameter
of the F3SJ's smallest detectable object. Always use the larger
diameter when calculating the safety distance. If the incorrect
diameter is used in the calculation, the machinery may fail to stop
before an operator reaches the hazardous area, resulting in serious
injury.
Fixed blanking area
Light beam #5
Lower
Lower
Lower
Note: 1. When the Setting Console is being used, only one area can
be set as a fixed blanking area.
2. When the SD Manager Setting Support Software is being
used, up to five areas can be set as fixed blanking areas.
Lower
Floating Light Beams
The following charts show the relationship between the number of
floating light beams and the safety output operation (safety output not
going OFF). Measure the size of the interrupting object (maximum
diameter) and set the number of floating light beams so that the
object's size is less than the corresponding dimension shown in the
chart.
351
F3SJ.fm Page 352 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Example Setting
Floating Blanking Mode
When an F3SJ-A@14 is being used with an interrupting object that is
20 mm in diameter, set three light beams as floating light beams. With
this setting, the F3SJ's safety output will not turn OFF even if there is
an interrupting object up to 22-mm wide in the floating blanking area.
The floating blanking function has two operation modes.
1. Continuous Light Beam Mode
The safety output will not go OFF if the interrupting object is smaller
than the set size, although the safety output will go OFF if objects
pass through several areas in the detection area.
The floating blanking monitor function can be set in this mode.
Refer to the User's Manual for details.
2. Discontinuous Light Beam Mode
A light blockage is detected when the number of light beams
blocked in the area is equal to or greater than the preset number of
light beams.
Effective Range vs. Number of Floating Light Beams
F3SJ-A@14 Series
Permitted Floating Range
4
Settable Range
Example Setting Size
With 1 floating light beam
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
13
With 2 floating light beams
22
With 3 floating light beams
31
With 4 floating light beams
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
0
10
20
30
Size of Interrupting Object (mm)
40
F3SJ-A@20 Series
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Permitted Floating Range
10
Settable Range
With 1 floating light beam
25
With 2 floating light beams
40
MS4800
MS4800
With 3 floating light beams
55
With 4 floating light beams
0
10
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
20
30
40
Size of Interrupting Object (mm)
50
60
F3SJ-A@25 Series
Permitted Floating Range
15
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
Settable Range
With 1 floating light beam
35
With 2 floating light beams
55
With 3 floating light beams
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
75
With 4 floating light beams
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
Size of Interrupting Object (mm)
70
80
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SJ-A@30 Series
Permitted Floating Range
20
Settable Range
With 1 floating light beam
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
45
With 2 floating light beams
70
With 3 floating light beams
95
With 4 floating light beams
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
0
20
40
60
Size of Interrupting Object (mm)
80
100
F3SJ-A@55 series
F3SS
F3SS
Permitted Floating Range
45
Settable Range
With 1 floating light beam
95
With 2 floating light beams
145
With 3 floating light beams
195
With 4 floating light beams
0
352
40
80
120
Size of Interrupting Object (mm)
160
200
F3SJ.fm Page 353 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Warning Zone Function
Figure 3
Summary
The detection zone can be divided into the detection zone and a
warning zone.
Upper
!WARNING
The warning zone output is not a safety output. Do not include this
area in the safety distance calculation. Shortening the safety distance
may result in serious injury.
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
Lower
Examples of Unacceptable Warning Zone Settings
(Figures 4 and 5)
All light beams
Warning zone
When an individual enters, a warning lamp lights or buzzer sounds
without stopping the equipment.
Upper
Description of Function
Lower
Figure 5
Warning Zone Function
Use teaching to set the light beams that you want to set as the
warning zone or manually specify the light beams from the lowest or
highest beam. (See figures 1 and 2.)
To indicate that the warning zone is blocked, allocate the auxiliary
output or external indicator output as the warning zone information.
The following settings cannot be made:
• Setting all light beams as the warning zone (figure 4)
• Setting a warning zone that does not include one of the outer light
beams (figure 5)
If Safety Light Curtains are connected in series, and at least one of an
F3SJ's light beams is a normal light beam, all of a Light Curtain's light
beams can be set as a warning zone (figure 3).
Detection zone Warning zone
Detection zone
Upper
Lower
Warning Zone Display Label
When the warning zone is set, affix this label to indicate which areas
belong to the normal detection zone and the warning zone.
Normal light beam
Warning light beam
Example Warning Zone Settings (Figures 1 to 3)
DETECTION
ZONE
Figure 1
WARNING
ZONE
Detection zone
Detection zone
Lower
Figure 2
Upper
F39-TC5
1CH
Upper
Detection zone
Example Application
Detection zone
F3SJ Ver.2
Hazardous
area
Figure 4
Upper
MS4800
Lower
Warning zone
Warning zone
6 upper light beams
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Warning zone
All light beams
Product
Selection
The warning zone function can be
used only when the F3SJ is
installed horizontally. This function
cannot be used when the F3SJ is
installed vertically.
2CH
Safety
Sensors
The warning zone cannot be used for safety purposes. Always install
the system so that the hazard is reached by passing through the
detection zone.
Detection
zone
All light
beams
Warning zone
4 lower light beams
Lower
Warning zone
353
F3SJ.fm Page 354 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Muting Function
Summary
Example Applications
Makes settings related to the muting function.
!WARNING
The muting function disables the safety functions of the device.
Additional safety measures must be taken to ensure safety while this
function is working.
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Install muting sensors so that they can distinguish between the object
that is being allowed to be pass through the detection zone and a
person.
Muting lamps (external indicators) that indicate the status of the
muting function must be installed where they are clearly visible to
workers from all the operating positions.
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Muting times must be precisely set according to the application by
qualified personnel who have received appropriate training. In
particular, if the muting time limit is to be set to infinity, the person who
makes the setting must bear responsibility.
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
Use two independent input devices for the muting inputs. (For the
PNP output-type F3SJ, use a sensor with a PNP transistor output or
N.O. contact. For the NPN output-type F3SJ, use a sensor with an
NPN transistor output or N.O. type contact.)
To prevent a worker from entering the hazardous area while the
muting function is engaged, install the F3SJ, muting sensor, and then
a protective barrier and set a limited muting time.
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
354
• Allowing only work pieces to pass into the conveyor entrance
• Operating the muting function in a specific area only
• Setting a different muting mode when standard muting is not
appropriate for the application
Description of Functions (See User's Manual for details.)
Operation Modes
When the SD Manager Setting Support Software is being used, any
one of the following three operation modes can be selected for the
muting function.
1. Standard Muting Mode
This is the default operation mode, which is set when the F3SJ is
shipped from the factory.
The muting function is enabled by turning ON muting inputs 1 and
2 with a time lag.
Note: Settings such as the muting time limit value can be changed.
2. Specialized Exit Muting Mode (Can be set with the SD Manager
Setting Support Software only.)
The muting function is enabled by turning ON muting inputs 1 and
2 with a time lag.
Installation of the muting input sensors is simpler than standard
mode because the Safety Light Curtain's blocked light status is
used to end muting.
3. Position Detection Muting Mode (Can be set with the SD Manager
Setting Support Software only.)
Sensors such as limit switches are used for the muting inputs and
the muting function is enabled by turning muting input from OFF to
ON and then turning muting input 2 from ON to OFF within time
difference T1 max. Use hybrid redundant inputs such as a
combination of an N.O. contact input and an N.C. contact input.
(When using a PNP-output photoelectric switch, use L/ON
operation on one side and D/ON operation on the other side.)
This mode is useful when you want to disable the F3SJ
temporarily, such as when a person is placing an object at the
conveyor entrance.
Partial Muting (Muting area) Settings
The light beams controlled by the muting function can be specified
with a setting tool. (When the F3SJ is shipped, all light beams are set.)
The light beams can be specified by teaching/recording the blocked
light beams as muting light beams or manually specifying the desired
light beams.
F3SJ.fm Page 355 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Indicator and I/O Settings
Auxiliary Output (Non-safety) and External Indicator Output (Non-safety)
Summary
A setting tool can be used to change the allocation of auxiliary outputs
1 and 2, and external indicator outputs 1 and 2.
!WARNING
Do not use the auxiliary outputs or external indicator outputs for safety
purposes. Serious injury may result if an output fails and a person is
not detected.
❍
Warning zone *4
Light is blocked in the warning zone.
❍
❍
Test input ON
The test input went ON.
❍
❍
Blanking light beam incident light
A fixed or floating light beam is receiving
incident light.
❍
❍
Interlock
The F3SJ is in interlock status.
❍
❍
Muting error
The F3SJ is in muting error status.
❍
❍
Number of load switching operations
exceeded
The number of load switching operations
exceeded the threshold value.
❍
❍
Information trigger
An interlock, lockout, or muting error has
occurred.
×
❍
Individual linked sensor output (channel Channel 1 control output is ON when Units are
1)
linked in series.
❍ (Auxiliary output 1 only) ❍ (Auxiliary output 1 only)
Individual linked sensor output (channel Channel 2 control output is ON when Units are
2)
linked in series.
❍ (Auxiliary output 1 only) ❍ (Auxiliary output 1 only)
Individual linked sensor output (channel Channel 3 control output is ON when Units are
3)
linked in series.
❍ (Auxiliary output 1 only) ❍ (Auxiliary output 1 only)
Individual linked sensor output (channel Channel 4 control output is ON when Units are
4)
linked in series.
❍ (Auxiliary output 1 only) ❍ (Auxiliary output 1 only)
Note: When "specified light beam output" is allocated as the output operation mode for auxiliary output 1 or 2 or external indicator output 1 or 2,
that mode cannot be allocated to the other output operations.
*1. A light blockage was detected even though the output is not turned OFF because the blockage occurred at a light beam subject to fixed
blanking, floating blanking, or muting. Blockages are also not processed during overrides.
*2. The fixed blanking light beams or floating blanking light beams must be set.
*3. The specified light beam must be set.
*4. The warning zone light beams must be set.
F3SS
❍
×
E3FS
E3ZS
Power ON time
The power ON time has exceeded the threshold ❍
value.
F3SN-A@SS
A specified light beam is blocked.
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Specified light beam output *3
F3SP-T01
❍
F39-TC5
Blanking/Warning Zone *2
F3SJ Ver.2
❍
The fixed blanking, floating blanking, or warning ❍
zone function is enabled.
MS4800
❍
❍
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
❍
The F3SJ is in muting or override status.
Product
Selection
The F3SJ is in error or lockout status.
Muting/Override
Safety
Sensors
Error/Lockout
F3SS
The F3SJ is ON and the received light intensity ❍
is 100% to 130% of the threshold value for more
than 10 seconds.
❍
Light intensity diagnosis *1
E3FS
E3ZS
❍
F3SN-A@SS
❍
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
The control output is ON
F3SP-T01
Control output
F39-TC5
SD Manager Setting
Support Software
Setting Console
F3SJ Ver.2
Description of operation
(Output will go ON in the following situation.)
MS4800
Output operation mode
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Output Operation Modes (when allocated to an auxiliary output or external indicator output)
Product
Selection
• Allocating a lockout output or warning zone output to an auxiliary
output
• Connecting an external indicator to an auxiliary output and making
it flash
An auxiliary output or external indicator output can be connected to
an incandescent light to function as a broken-wire or short-circuit
detector. Refer to the User's Manual for details.
Safety
Sensors
Example Applications
355
F3SJ.fm Page 356 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
F3SJ Ver.2
Changing the Detection Distance
Change detection distance function
Summary
The F3SJ's detection distance can be shortened.
Example Application
The F3SJ's detection distance can be shortened to avoid affecting
other photoelectric sensors.
When devices are installed close together, shortening the detection
distance can reduce mutual interference.
Description of Function
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
The detection distance can be set to 0.5 m, 1 m, 2 m, 3 m, 5 m, or
MAX (either 7 m or 9 m).
The most suitable detection distance can be set to match the
installation distance.
Note: MAX represents the rated detection distance.
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Monitoring Operation
Received Light Intensity Indicator
Ambient Light Intensity Indicator
Summary
Summary
It is possible to read the F3SJ's received light intensity.
It is possible to read the intensity of the light received by the F3SJ
from ambient sources, such as other photoelectric sensors.
Example Application
MS4800
MS4800
Adjust the light beams while checking the F3SJ's received light
intensity.
Description of Function
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
Indicates the F3SJ's received light intensity.
The F3SJ's received light intensity level can be checked with a setting
tool.
Other Functions
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
The F3SJ is also equipped with the following functions.
Refer to the User's Manual for details on using these functions.
• Status indicators
• Error log
• Power ON time
• Number of load switching operations
• Safety distance calculation function
• Power cable length calculation function
• Rated response time check function
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
356
Example Application
Display the ambient light level while taking steps to reduce light
interference form sources such as photoelectric switches in the area
and neighboring F3SJ Units.
Description of Function
Indicates the ambient light level at the F3SJ from other light sources
such as photoelectric sensors.
This function can help identify the photoelectric sensors that are the
source of the light interference and identify the light beams being
affected by the ambient light.
F3SJ.fm Page 357 Friday, October 31, 2008 11:48 AM
MEMO
357
F39-TC5_F3SP-T01.fm Page 358 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:57 PM
Wire-saving Device for F3SJ
These new Wire-saving Devices enable ea sily u
To Connect to Muting Sensors: F39-TC5 Connector Terminal Box
P360
Simp
to th
Significantly reduces the number of wires between
the Safety Light Curtain and the Muting Sensors.
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
F3SL
F3SL
Safety Light Curtain and
Muting Sensors can be
easily connected with
wire-saving devices.
Easy to
connect!
● Significantly reduces the number of wires between the Safety Light Curtain and Muting Sensors.
Provides IP67 protection
against water and dust.
To C
The wiring status can
be checked at a glance
with the LED indicators.
● Co
Termin
to make
the term
LED
Indicators
F39-GWUM "SD Manager"
PC Setting Support Software
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SJ Ver. 2
Safety Light Curtain
F3SS
F3SS
Connection using
connectors significantly
reduces the wires.
The Setting Software can be
connected, enabling on-site
adjustment of the Light Curtain.
Screwtermina
need fo
Setting Console
Four Muting Sensors
358
e ea
P360
F39-TC5_F3SP-T01.fm Page 359 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:57 PM
Wire-saving Device for F3SJ
sily using the muting function of the F3SJ.
To Connect to Safety Relays: F3SP-T01 Safety Terminal Relay
Simplifies the wiring from the Safety Light Curtain
to the Safety Relay outputs.
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
F3SL
F3SL
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
Replacement of relays
is easy, improving
maintainability.
F3SJ Ver.2
Terminals are numbered
to make it easy to check
the terminal connections.
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
● Complicated wiring for safety system is made easy.
Product
Selection
nsole
Reduce
internal panel
wiring!
Safety
Sensors
Use the Safety Terminal Relay to
clear up messy wiring and inside
the panel.
Simplifying the connections also
helps prevent incorrect wiring.
to
ct!
sors.
P368
F39-GWUM "SD Manager"
PC Setting Support Software
F3SJ Ver. 2
Safety Light Curtain
Screw-less clamp
terminals eliminate the
need for extra tightening.
The Setting Software can be
connected, enabling on-site
adjustment of the Light Curtain.
Muting Sensor
Setting Console
359
F39-TC5.fm Page 360 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:42 PM
Connector Terminal Box (Muting Terminals for F3SJ-A)
F39-TC5
Significantly reduces amount of wiring
between Safety Light Curtains and
Muting Sensors.
As of August 2008
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
• Provides IP67 protection against water and dust.
• Connection using connectors significantly reduces wiring work.
• The wiring status can be checked at a glance with the LED
indicators.
• The Support Software can be connected, enabling on-site
adjustment of a Light Curtain.
Be sure to read the “Safety Precautions” on page 366 and
the “Precautions for All Safety Sensors” on page 242.
Ordering Information
Connector Terminal Box
MS4800
MS4800
Classification
Applicable models
F3SJ-A@@@@P@@
Specification
PNP
Muting Terminals
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ-A@@@@N@@
NPN
Type
Model with Muting Sensor Output Mode
Model
F39-TC5P01
Model with Override Mode
F39-TC5P02
Model with Muting Sensor Output Mode
F39-TC5N01
Model with Override Mode
F39-TC5N02
Optional Accessories (Sold separately)
Classification
Appearance
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Model
Number per box
Short-circuit Connector
F39-CN8
---
Waterproof Covers
XS2Z-22
50
Note: One short-circuit connector is included with the F39-T@01 for Muting Sensors.
Three waterproof covers are included with a Connector Terminal Box with Muting Sensor Output Mode (F39-TC5@01) and four waterproof
covers with a Connector Terminal Box with Override Mode (F39-TC5@02).
Order the above accessories only as spare parts.
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
Specifications (Refer to Instruction Sheet for details.)
Ratings
Rated voltage
24 VDC ±20% (at ambient temperature of 20°C)
Rated current
Power line: 2.4 A, Signal line: 0.3 A
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
Characteristics
F3SS
F3SS
Contact resistance
40 mΩ max. (connector section)
Insulation resistance
After applying 500 VDC for 60 s: 100 MΩ min.
Vibration resistance
Speed: 10 Hz to 500 Hz to 10 Hz in 20 minutes.
Simple vibration with full amplitude of 1.52 mm or 98 m/s2 (whichever has the smaller amplitude) for two
hours each in three directions X, Y, and Z (total of 6 hours).
Measured while connector is connected.
Shock resistance
490 m/s2 for 11 ms three times each along three axes, six directions X, Y, and Z (total of 18 times).
Measured while connector is connected. (MIL-STD-202F Test 213B, Condition A)
Ambient operating temperature
−25 to 70°C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient operating humidity
25% to 85% (with no icing or condensation)
Degree of protection
IP67
Accessories
Short-circuit connector (models with Muting Sensor outputs only), waterproof cover
360
F39-TC5.fm Page 361 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:42 PM
F39-TC5
Connections
Internal Circuit Diagrams
PNP
Model with Muting Sensor Output Mode F39-TC5P01
CN3 (L)
F3SJ-A Emitter
CN4 (D)
F3SJ-A Receiver
CN2 (COMM)
Setting Console F39-MC21
or
PC Tool for F3SJ F39-GWUM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
Note: When a short-circuit connector is connected to
CN1, terminals 1 and 2, and terminals 3 and 4
will be short-circuited.
This connects the Muting Sensor input to
muting input 1 and muting input 2 of the F3SJ.
CN1
Muting Sensor output
1 2 3 4 5
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
(Pink) Test input
(Purple) Reset input
(White) Safety output 2
(Black) Safety output 1
(Gray) Auxiliary output 1
(Red) External device monitoring input
Safety
Sensors
(Brown) Power supply,
24 VDC
(Blue) Power supply, 0 V
1 2 3 4
CN7 (MSA1) *
Muting Sensor A1
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
CN8 (MSB1) *
Muting Sensor B1
CN5 (MSA2) *
Muting Sensor A2
1 2 3 4
CN6 (MSB2) *
Muting Sensor B2
* Use the following connecting cable to connect the Muting Sensors:
M12, 4-pin connector (Pin 1: +24 V, Pin 2: Not used, Pin 3: 0 V, Pin 4: Output)
When using a Through-beam Photoelectric Sensor, use an XS2R-D426-@11-F Y-joint with Socket and Plug or similar product to connect the
transmitter and receiver.
Model with Override Mode F39-TC5P02
CN3 (L)
F3SJ-A Emitter
CN4 (D)
F3SJ-A Receiver
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CN2 (COMM)
Setting Console F39-MC21
or
CN1
PC Tool for F3SJ F39-GWUM I/O auxiliary terminals
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5
(Brown) Power supply,
24 VDC
(Pink) Test input
(Purple) Reset input
(White) Safety output 2
(Black) Safety output 1
(Gray) Auxiliary output 1
(Red) External device
monitoring input
(Blue) Power supply, 0 V
1 2 3 4
CN7 (MSA1) *
Muting Sensor A1
1 2 3 4
CN8 (MSB1) *
Muting Sensor B1
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
CN5 (MSA2) *
Muting Sensor A2
CN6 (MSB2) *
Muting Sensor B2
* Use the following connecting cable to connect the Muting Sensors:
M12, 4-pin connector (Pin 1: +24 V, Pin 2: Not used, Pin 3: 0 V, Pin 4: Output)
When using a Through-beam Photoelectric Sensor, use an XS2R-D426-@11-F Y-joint with Socket and Plug or similar product to connect the
transmitter and receiver.
361
F39-TC5.fm Page 362 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:42 PM
F39-TC5
NPN
Model with Muting Sensor Output Mode F39-TC5N01
Note: When a short-circuit connector is connected to
CN1, terminals 1 and 2, and terminals 3 and 4
will be short-circuited.
This connects the Muting Sensor input to
muting input 1 and muting input 2 of the F3SJ.
CN3 (L)
F3SJ-A Emitter
CN4 (D)
F3SJ-A Receiver
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CN2 (COMM)
Setting Console F39-MC21
or
CN1
PC Tool for F3SJ F39-GWUM Muting Sensor output
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
(Brown) Power supply,
24 VDC
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
(Pink) Test input
(Purple) Reset input
(White) Safety output 2
(Black) Safety output 1
(Gray) Auxiliary output 1
(Red) External device
monitoring input
(Blue) Power supply, 0 V
1 2 3 4
CN7 (MSA1) *
Muting Sensor A1
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
CN8 (MSB1) *
Muting Sensor B1
CN5 (MSA2) *
Muting Sensor A2
1 2 3 4
CN6 (MSB2) *
Muting Sensor B2
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
* Use the following connecting cable to connect the Muting Sensors:
M12, 4-pin connector (Pin 1: +24 V, Pin 2: Not used, Pin 3: 0 V, Pin 4: Output)
When using a Through-beam Photoelectric Sensor, use an XS2R-D426-@11-F Y-joint with Socket and Plug or similar product to connect the
transmitter and receiver.
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
Model with Override Mode F39-TC5N02
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
CN3 (L)
F3SJ-A Emitter
CN4 (D)
F3SJ-A Receiver
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CN2 (COMM)
Setting Console F39-MC21
or
CN1
PC Tool for F3SJ F39-GWUM I/O auxiliary terminals
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
(Brown) Power supply,
24 VDC
(Pink) Test input
(Purple) Reset input
(White) Safety output 2
(Black) Safety output 1
(Gray) Auxiliary output 1
(Red) External device
monitoring input
(Blue) Power supply, 0 V
F3SS
F3SS
1 2 3 4
CN7 (MSA1) *
Muting Sensor A1
1 2 3 4
CN8 (MSB1) *
Muting Sensor B1
1 2 3 4
CN5 (MSA2) *
Muting Sensor A2
1 2 3 4
CN6 (MSB2) *
Muting Sensor B2
* Use the following connecting cable to connect the Muting Sensors:
M12, 4-pin connector (Pin 1: +24 V, Pin 2: Not used, Pin 3: 0 V, Pin 4: Output)
When using a Through-beam Photoelectric Sensor, use an XS2R-D426-@11-F Y-joint with Socket and Plug or similar product to connect the
transmitter and receiver.
362
F39-TC5.fm Page 363 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:42 PM
F39-TC5
Wiring Diagrams
PNP
Model with Muting Sensor Output Mode F39-TC5P01
Note: The Key Cap for Muting
and the Muting Lamp can
be connected to either the
Emitter or the Receiver.
0 V(Blue)
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
Safety output 1 (Black)
F39-TC5
E3FS
E3ZS
Safety output 2 (White)
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SN-A@SS
Auxiliary output 1 (Gray)
MS4800
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
External device monitoring input (Red)
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
F3SP-T01
Test input (Pink)
Product
Selection
F39-TC5
S1
Safety
Sensors
F3SJ Ver.2
KM2
MS4800
KM1
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
F3SJ
KM1
Product
Selection
Key Cap for Muting
F39-CN6 (orange)
Safety
Sensors
or
PC Tool
for F3SJ
F39-GWUM
S2 Reset input (Purple)
Muting Lamp
+24 V (Brown)
Setting Console
connector
F39-MC21
KM1 KM2
KM2
PC
Emitter
Receiver
+24 VDC
Muting Sensor (PNP)
0V
A2
A1
B1
CN8
CN7
M
OUT
IN
PLC
B2
CN6
CN5
CN4
CN3
CN2
CN1
Short-circuit connector
Model with Override Mode F39-TC5P02
Note: The Key Cap for Muting
and the Muting Lamp can
be connected to either the
Emitter or the Receiver.
Setting Console
F39-MC21
F3SJ
0 V (Blue)
Safety output 2 (White)
KM1
Safety output 1 (Black)
Auxiliary output 1 (Gray)
Reset input (Purple)
Key Cap for Muting
F39-CN6 (orange)
External device monitoring input (Red)
or
PC Tool for
F3SJ
F39-GWUM
Test input (Pink)
Muting Lamp
+24 V (Brown)
KM1
KM2
M
KM1 KM2
KM2
A1
B1
CN8
CN7
B2
CN6
CN5
CN4
CN3
CN2
CN1
I/O Auxiliary Connector
Recommended:
XS2H-D521-@G0-A (5-pin, DC)
K3
(1) +24 V
A2
S2 (2) Reset input
0V
(4) Test input
+24 VDC
Muting Sensor (PNP)
(3) 0 V
Receiver
S1
Emitter
(5) Auxiliary output 1
PC
363
F39-TC5.fm Page 364 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:42 PM
F39-TC5
NPN
Model with Muting Sensor Output Mode F39-TC5N01
Note: The Key Cap for Muting
and the Muting Lamp can
be connected to either the
Emitter or the Receiver.
S1
0 V (Blue)
Safety output 2 (White)
KM1
Safety output 1 (Black)
Auxiliary output 1 (Gray)
External device monitoring input (Red)
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
F3SJ
Test input (Pink)
or
PC Tool for
F3SJ
F39-GWUM
Key Cap for Muting
F39-CN6 (orange)
S2 Reset input (Purple)
Muting Lamp
+24 V (Brown)
Setting Console
F39-MC21
KM1
KM2
KM1 KM2
KM2
M
PC
OUT
A1
B1
CN8
CN7
B2
CN6
CN5
CN4
CN3
CN2
CN1
Short-circuit connector
Model with Override Mode F39-TC5N02
Setting Console
F39-MC21
F3SJ
KM1
0 V (Blue)
Key Cap for Muting
F39-CN6 (orange)
F3SP-T01
KM2
M
KM1 KM2
+24 VDC
0V
A2
A1
B1
CN8
CN7
B2
CN6
CN5
CN4
CN3
CN2
CN1
F3SS
F3SS
I/O Auxiliary Connector
Recommended:
XS2H-D521-@G0-A (5-pin, DC)
K3
(3) 0 V
E3FS
E3ZS
Receiver
Muting Sensor (NPN)
S2 (2) Reset input
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
Emitter
(4) Test input
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
PC
(1) +24 V
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
KM2
S1
F3SP-T01
364
or
PC Tool for
F3SJ
F39-GWUM
Safety output 1 (Black)
Muting Lamp
Safety output 2 (White)
KM1
Auxiliary output 1 (Gray)
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
Note: The Key Cap for Muting
and the Muting Lamp
can be connected to
either the Emitter or the
Receiver.
(5) Auxiliary output 1
F3SJ Ver.2
0V
A2
External device monitoring input (Red)
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
+24 VDC
Muting Sensor (NPN)
Test input (Pink)
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
Receiver
Reset input (Purple)
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Emitter
+24 V (Brown)
Product
Selection
IN
PLC
F39-TC5.fm Page 365 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:42 PM
F39-TC5
Dimensions
F39-TC5P01
F39-TC5P02
F39-TC5N01
F39-TC5N02
(Unit: mm)
14 dia.
Operation Indicator (green LED)
Power Indicator (green LED)
Three, 4.5-dia. holes
9 dia.
54
27
33
100
120
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
127
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
4.5
30.5
Product
Selection
73
27
27
Safety
Sensors
27
10
5000
6.5
21
• Case material: PBT
• Cable conductor cross-section: 0.34 mm2
Insulator diameter: 1.76 mm
F39-TC5P01
9
365
F39-TC5.fm Page 366 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:42 PM
F39-TC5
Safety Precautions
!WARNING
The muting and override functions disable equipment safety
functions. Use separate procedures to ensure safety when the muting
and override functions are operating.
Position the Muting Sensors so that a distinction can be made
between the entry of an object or a human. If the muting function were
to operate when a human passed through, it may cause serious
injury.
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Install a Muting Lamp where it can be seen from all work locations, so
that workers can check the status of the muting and override
functions.
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Muting times must be precisely set according to the application by
qualified personnel who have received appropriate training. In
particular, if the muting time limit is to be set to infinity, the person who
makes the setting must bear responsibility.
Use two independent input devices for the muting inputs.
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
Install the F3SJ, Muting Sensors, or a protective wall so that workers
cannot enter hazardous areas while muting is in effect, and set muting
times.
Install override switches where they can be seen from the hazardous
area, and where they cannot be operated from within the hazardous
area. Before starting an override, check to make sure that nobody is
within the hazardous area.
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
366
Precautions for Safe Use
Installation Conditions
• Connector tightening torque: 0.39 to 0.49 N·m
• Panel mounting tightening torque: 0.6 to 0.8 N·m
(use metric 4 screws)
Handling
• Make sure that the power is turned OFF before connecting or
disconnecting the connector.
• Make sure that fasteners are tightened properly by hand.
(0.39 to 0.49 N·m)
The use of pliers may cause damage. If the screws are not
tightened properly, the degree of protection may not be obtained,
and the screws may come loose from vibration.
• If the cables are connected with the polarity reversed, the load will
not operate, or the operation indicator will not light.
• Make sure that signal lines are always connected through a load.
• Use Sensors that meet the specifications.
• Do not pull on the connectors and cables. Doing so may damage
the connector or break the cable.
• To avoid breaking the cable and damaging the connector, install
them in a location where there is no danger of stepping on them. If
you must install them in a location where they might be stepped on,
place a protective cover on them.
• When installing the product, do not bend the cable where it is
connected to the product.
• If you must bend the cable, make sure that the bend radius is
greater than 60 mm.
• If you are not going to install Sensors and switches, place
waterproof covers (XS2Z-22) on the connectors to protect the
contact surface.
Storage
Observe the following points when storing the product for an
extended period of time.
1. Make sure that the storage location is well protected against dust
and humidity.
2. Do not store the product close to areas where ammonia or
sulfurization gas is generated.
F39-TC5.fm Page 367 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:42 PM
MEMO
367
F3SP-T01.fm Page 368 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:14 PM
Safety Terminal Relays (for F3SJ-A@@@@P@@)
F3SP-T01
Simplifies wiring from Safety Light
Curtains to the Safety Relay outputs.
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
• Simplifies wiring inside the panel and helps prevent incorrect
wiring.
• Terminals are numbered to make it easy to check terminal
connections.
• Replacement of relays is easy, improving maintainability.
• Screw-less clamp terminals eliminate the need for extra
tightening.
• The Support Software can be connected, enabling on-site
adjustment of Light Curtains.
Be sure to read the “Safety Precautions” on page 375 and
the “Precautions for All Safety Sensors” on page 242.
Ordering Information
MS4800
MS4800
Safety Terminal Relays
Type
Applicable models
Model
Safety Terminal Relay
F3SJ-A@@@@P@@
F3SP-T01
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
Optional Accessories (Sold Separately)
Type
Model
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
Cable for connecting Support Software (cable length: 1.5 m)
E39-Z12-1
Replacement Relay
G7SA-3A1B
Specifications (Refer to Instruction Manual for details.)
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
Ratings
Characteristics
Power supply
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Rated voltage
24 VDC+10%/−15%
Rated power
consumption
DC 1.7 W max. (not including sensor's power
consumption)
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
Contacts
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
Rated load
250 VAC 3 A, resistive load
30 VDC 3 A, resistive load
Rated current
3A
Applicable Relays
G7SA-3A1B: 24 VDC
Operation time
100 ms max.
(not including sensor's response time)
Response time
10 ms max.
(not including sensor's response time)
Vibration
resistance
10 to 55 to 10 Hz
Single amplitude: 0.35 mm
(Double amplitude: 0.7 mm)
Shock resistance
Destruction: 300 m/s2, Malfunction: 100 m/s2
Ambient operating
temperature
−10 to 55°C
Ambient operating
humidity
35 to 85%
Weight
Approx. 215 g
Durability
F3SS
F3SS
368
Electrical
durability
100,000 operations min.
Rated load
Switching frequency: 1,800 operations/h
Mechanical
durability
5,000,000 operations min.
Switching frequency: 7,200 operations/h
G: Shield
D8: External device monitoring input (Red)
D7: 0 V (Blue)
D6: Communications line − (Pink)
Receiver
NC
D5: Communications line + (Gray)
NC
D4: Auxiliary output (Yellow)
24
D3: Control output 1 (Green)
23
D2: 24 V (Brown)
34
D1: Control output 2 (White)
33
44
G: Shield
AUX
V
V
NC
V
FB1
V
V
V
V
L2
L8
L5
D2
D8
D5
V
V
V
G
G
NC
G
FB2
G
G
G
G
L7
G
L6
D7
G
D6
G
G
G
Relay contact output terminal
Wiring Diagrams
F3SS
RST
E3FS
E3ZS
TST
F3SN-A@SS
D4
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
D3
F3SP-T01
D1
F39-TC5
L4
F3SJ Ver.2
L3
MS4800
L1
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MB2
Product
Selection
MB1
Safety
Sensors
MA2
F3SS
MA1
E3FS
E3ZS
MB0
F3SN-A@SS
L8
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
MA0
F3SP-T01
L1
F39-TC5
NC
F3SJ Ver.2
I/O terminals
MS4800
43
12
3
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
11
K1
2
Product
Selection
24
K2
1
Safety
Sensors
23
44
L8:: Muting input 2 (Red)
K2
43
12
L7: 0 V (Blue)
Emitter
K1
11
L6: Communications line − (Pink)
14
L5:: Communications line + (Gray)
13
L4: Reset input (Yellow)
L3: Test input (Green)
L2: 24 V (Brown)
L1: Muting input 1 (White)
F3SP-T01.fm Page 369 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:14 PM
F3SP-T01
Connections
Internal Circuit Diagrams
Modular Connector
4
369
F3SP-T01.fm Page 370 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:14 PM
F3SP-T01
Wiring Example
Product
Selection
L4
D1
D3
D4
TST
RST
AUX
L8
L5
D2
D8
D5
V
V
V
G
G
NC
G
FB2
G
G
G
G
L7
G
L6
D7
G
D6
G
G
G
L1
24 V DC
L1
(R)
24
NC
F1
S1: External test switch
KM1, KM2: Magnet contactor
M: 3-phase motor
F1, F2: Fuse
KM1
NC
MB0
Muting Sensor 4
Muting Sensor 3
MA1
MA2
MB1
V
V
V
MB2
V
G
G
G
G
Note: If you are connecting four muting
sensors, connect the sensor outputs to
MA1, MA2, MB1, and MB2. Also
short-circuit MA0 to L1, and MB0 to L8.
KM1
Note: 1. To use the muting function, a
Muting Keycap (F39-CN6)
must be mounted to the F3SJ.
2. If a lockout reset is required,
connect a switch between RST
and V.
KM2
F2
KM2
M
MB1
MB2
L1
L3
L4
D1
D3
D4
TST
RST
AUX
V
V
V
L2
L8
L5
D2
D8
D5
V
V
V
G
G
NC
G
FB2
G
G
G
G
L7
G
L6
D7
G
D6
G
G
G
L1
L1
(R)
L2
(S)
L3
(T)
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
S1: External test switch
KM1, KM2: Magnet contactor
M: 3-phase motor
F1, F2: Fuse
13
14
23
24
NC
F3SS
F3SS
F1
KM1
KM2
F2
NC
KM1
Note: 1. To use the muting function, a
Muting Keycap (F39-CN6)
must be mounted to the F3SJ.
2. If a lockout reset is required,
connect a switch between RST
and V.
KM2
M
MA0
L8
MB0
Muting Sensor 4
Muting Sensor 3
Muting Sensor 2
MA1
MA2
MB1
V
V
V
V
G
G
G
G
0V
MA2
V
24 V
Muting output
MA1
FB1
0V
MB0
V
24 V
Muting output
L8
NC
0V
MA0
V
24 V
Muting output
Communications line – (Pink)
Auxiliary output (Yellow)
Communications line + (Gray)
Control output 1 (Green)
Shield
External device monitoring input (Red)
0 V (Blue)
Control output 2 (White)
Communications line – (Pink)
24 V (Brown)
Reset input (Yellow)
Communications line + (Gray)
L1
V
24 V
Muting output
Muting Sensor 1
Connecting Four Muting Sensors
0V
Receiver
Emitter
Shield
Test input (Green)
Muting input 2 (Red)
0 V (Blue)
24 V (Brown)
F3SN-A@SS
0V
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
Muting Sensor 2
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Muting output
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
NC
24 V DC
370
PLC
S1
24 V
F39-TC5
The following example is for when two muting sensors are connected in auto reset mode, and the
external device monitoring function is disabled.
0V
F3SJ Ver.2
23
Muting Sensor 1
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
14
Muting output
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
13
L8
L3
(T)
KM2
24 V
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
KM1
L2
(S)
MA0
0V
L3
L2
Muting output
L1
V
24 V
MB2
V
0V
MB1
V
Muting output
MA2
V
24 V
MA1
FB1
0V
MB0
V
Muting output
L8
NC
24 V
MA0
V
0V
L1
V
Muting input 1 (White)
Product
Selection
NC
24 V
Auxiliary output (Yellow)
Communications line – (Pink)
Communications line + (Gray)
Control output 1 (Green)
Shield
External device monitoring input (Red)
Control output 2 (White)
0 V (Blue)
24 V (Brown)
Communications line – (Pink)
Reset input (Yellow)
Communications line + (Gray)
Shield
Test input (Green)
Muting input 2 (Red)
0 V (Blue)
Muting input 1 (White)
24 V (Brown)
0V
Muting output
24 V
0V
24 V
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Muting output
S1
Muting Sensor 2
Connecting Four Muting Sensors
Muting Sensor 1
PLC
Muting output
Receiver
Emitter
Muting Sensor 2
Muting Sensor 1
The following example is for when two muting sensors are connected in the auto reset mode, and the
external device monitoring function is enabled.
MB2
Note: If you are connecting four muting
sensors, connect the sensor outputs to
MA1, MA2, MB1, and MB2. Also
short-circuit MA0 to L1, and MB0 to L8.
F3SP-T01.fm Page 371 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:14 PM
F3SP-T01
Emitter
Receiver
The following example is for when no muting sensors are connected in the auto reset mode, and the
external device monitoring function is enabled.
PLC
Auxiliary output (Yellow)
Communications line – (Pink)
Communications line + (Gray)
Control output 1 (Green)
Shield
External device monitoring input (Red)
Control output 2 (White)
0 V (Blue)
24 V (Brown)
Reset input (Yellow)
Communications line – (Pink)
Shield
Communications line + (Gray)
Test input (Green)
Muting input 2 (Red)
0 V (Blue)
Muting input 1 (White)
V
FB1
V
V
V
V
L2
L8
L5
D2
D8
D5
V
V
V
G
FB2
G
G
G
G
L7
G
L6
D7
G
D6
G
G
G
L1
(R)
L2
(S)
14
23
24
NC
L3
(T)
S1: External test switch
KM1, KM2: Magnet contactor
M: 3-phase motor
F1, F2: Fuse
NC
F3SS
NC
NC
13
E3FS
E3ZS
V
G
KM2
F3SN-A@SS
V
KM1
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
AUX
G
24 V DC
F3SP-T01
RST
F39-TC5
TST
F3SJ Ver.2
D4
MS4800
D3
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
D1
Product
Selection
L4
Safety
Sensors
L3
F3SS
L1
E3FS
E3ZS
MB2
F3SN-A@SS
MB1
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
MA2
F3SP-T01
MA1
F39-TC5
MB0
F3SJ Ver.2
L8
MS4800
MA0
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
L1
Product
Selection
NC
Safety
Sensors
24 V (Brown)
S1
KM1
Note: If a lockout reset is required, connect a switch between RST and V.
F1
KM1
KM2
F2
KM2
M
Emitter
Receiver
The following example is for when no muting sensors are connected in the auto rest mode, and the
external device monitoring function is disabled.
PLC
NC
L1
MA0
L8
MB0
MA1
MA2
MB1
Auxiliary output (Yellow)
Communications line – (Pink)
Communications line + (Gray)
Control output 1 (Green)
Shield
External device monitoring input (Red)
0 V (Blue)
Control output 2 (White)
24 V (Brown)
Reset input (Yellow)
Communications line – (Pink)
Communications line + (Gray)
Shield
Test input (Green)
Muting input 2 (Red)
0 V (Blue)
Muting input 1 (White)
24 V (Brown)
S1
MB2
L1
L3
L4
D1
D3
D4
TST
RST
AUX
V
V
NC
V
FB1
V
V
V
V
L2
L8
L5
D2
D8
D5
V
V
V
G
G
NC
G
FB2
G
G
G
G
L7
G
L6
D7
G
D6
G
G
G
L1
(R)
L2
(S)
24 V DC
L3
(T)
S1: External test switch
KM1, KM2: Magnet contactor
M: 3-phase motor
F1, F2: Fuse
13
14
23
24
NC
NC
KM1
Note: If a lockout reset is required, connect a switch between RST and V.
F1
KM1
KM2
F2
KM2
M
371
F3SP-T01.fm Page 372 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:14 PM
F3SP-T01
Receiver
Emitter
Muting Sensor 2
Muting Sensor 1
The following example is for when two muting sensors are connected in the manual reset mode, and
the external device monitoring function is enabled.
PLC
Communications line – (Pink)
Auxiliary output (Yellow)
Communications line + (Gray)
Shield
External device monitoring input (Red)
Control output 1 (Green)
0 V (Blue)
Control output 2 (White)
Communications line – (Pink)
24 V (Brown)
Reset input (Yellow)
Communications line + (Gray)
Shield
Test input (Green)
Muting input 2 (Red)
0 V (Blue)
Muting input 1 (White)
24 V (Brown)
Muting output
0V
24 V
0V
24 V
Safety
Sensors
S2
L1
MA0
L8
MB0
MA1
MA2
MB1
MB2
L1
L3
L4
D1
D3
D4
TST
RST
AUX
V
V
NC
V
FB1
V
V
V
V
L2
L8
L5
D2
D8
D5
V
V
V
G
G
NC
G
FB2
G
G
G
G
L7
G
L6
D7
G
D6
G
G
G
L1
(R)
L2
(S)
KM2
F2
KM2
M
F3SJ Ver.2
Receiver
Emitter
Muting Sensor 2
Auxiliary output (Yellow)
Muting Sensor 4
Communications line – (Pink)
Communications line + (Gray)
Shield
Control output 1 (Green)
Control output 2 (White)
0 V (Blue)
External device monitoring input (Red)
24 V (Brown)
Shield
Communications line + (Gray)
Test input (Green)
Muting input 2 (Red)
0 V (Blue)
Muting input 1 (White)
24 V (Brown)
Muting output
PLC
S1
0V
24 V
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
0V
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Muting Sensor 1
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
Muting output
F39-TC5
The following example is for when two muting sensors are connected in manual reset mode, and the
external device monitoring function is disabled.
24 V
F3SJ Ver.2
Note: 1. To use the muting function, a
Keycap for Muting (F39-CN6)
must be mounted to the F3SJ.
2. To use the manual reset mode
while using the muting function,
L1
MA0
L8
MB0
MA1
MA2
MB1
MB2
the F3SJ setting must be
V
V
V
V
changed using the Support
Software.
G
G
G
G
3. It is recommended that you use
Note: If you are connecting four muting sensors,
the E39-Z12-1 as the modular
connect the sensor outputs to MA1, MA2,
cable to connect the Support
MB1, and MB2. Also short-circuit MA0 to
Software.
L1, and MB0 to L8.
Reset input (Yellow)
MS4800
MS4800
KM1
KM1
0V
F1
NC
24 V
Muting output
NC
0V
24
24 V
Muting output
23
0V
14
24 V
Muting output
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
13
Muting Sensor 3
S1: External test switch
S2: Interlock/lockout reset switch
KM1, KM2: Magnet contactor
M: 3-phase motor
F1, F2: Fuse
KM2
Muting Sensor 2
Connecting Four Muting Sensors
L3
(T)
Muting Sensor 1
KM1
Computer Tool
for F3SJ
F39-GWUM
24 V
Muting output
24 V DC
Connecting
Cable
E39-Z12-1
0V
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
NC
Communications line – (Pink)
Safety
Sensors
Muting output
S1
S2
L1
MA0
L8
MB0
MA1
MA2
MB1
MB2
L1
L3
L4
D1
D3
D4
TST
RST
AUX
V
V
NC
V
FB1
V
V
V
V
L2
L8
L5
D2
D8
D5
V
V
V
G
G
NC
G
FB2
G
G
G
G
L7
G
L6
D7
G
D6
G
G
G
L1
(R)
L2
(S)
KM1
KM2
M
Muting Sensor 4
Muting Sensor 3
0V
24 V
Note: 1. To use the muting function, a Keycap
for Muting (F39-CN6) must be
mounted to the F3SJ.
2. To use the manual reset mode while
using the muting function, the F3SJ
L1
MA0
L8
MB0
MA1
MA2
MB1
MB2
setting must be changed using the
V
V
V
V
Support Software.
3. It is recommended that you use the
G
G
G
G
E39-Z12-1 as the modular cable to Note: If you are connecting four muting
connect the Support Software.
sensors, connect the sensor outputs to
Muting output
KM2
24 V
F2
0V
F3SS
F3SS
F1
Muting output
KM1
Muting Sensor 2
NC
24 V
NC
0V
24
Muting output
23
S1: External test switch
S2: Interlock/lockout reset switch
KM1, KM2: Magnet contactor
M: 3-phase motor
F1, F2: Fuse
Muting Sensor 1
14
Connecting Four Muting Sensors
L3
(T)
24 V
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
13
Computer Tool
for F3SJ
F39-GWUM
0V
24 V DC
Connecting
Cable
E39-Z12-1
Muting output
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
NC
MA1, MA2, MB1, and MB2. Also
short-circuit MA0 to L1, and MB0 to L8.
372
F3SP-T01.fm Page 373 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:14 PM
F3SP-T01
Emitter
Receiver
The following example is for when no muting sensors are connected in the manual reset mode, and the
external device monitoring function is enabled.
PLC
Auxiliary output (Yellow)
Communications line – (Pink)
Communications line + (Gray)
Control output 1 (Green)
Shield
External device monitoring input (Red)
Control output 2 (White)
0 V (Blue)
24 V (Brown)
Reset input (Yellow)
Communications line – (Pink)
Shield
Communications line + (Gray)
Test input (Green)
Muting input 2 (Red)
0 V (Blue)
Muting input 1 (White)
V
FB1
V
V
V
V
L2
L8
L5
D2
D8
D5
V
V
V
G
G
NC
G
FB2
G
G
G
G
L7
G
L6
D7
G
D6
G
G
G
L1
(R)
L2
(S)
24 V DC
KM1
L3
(T)
S1: External test switch
S2: Interlock/lockout reset switch
KM1, KM2: Magnet contactor
M: 3-phase motor
F1, F2: Fuse
KM2
13
14
23
24
F1
KM1
NC
NC
KM1
KM2
F2
KM2
M
Emitter
Receiver
The following example is for when no muting sensors are connected in the manual rest mode, and the
external device monitoring function is disabled.
PLC
Auxiliary output (Yellow)
Communications line – (Pink)
Communications line + (Gray)
Control output 1 (Green)
Shield
External device monitoring input (Red)
0 V (Blue)
Control output 2 (White)
24 V (Brown)
Communications line – (Pink)
Reset input (Yellow)
Communications line + (Gray)
Shield
Test input (Green)
Muting input 2 (Red)
0 V (Blue)
Muting input 1 (White)
24 V (Brown)
S1
F3SS
NC
E3FS
E3ZS
V
F3SN-A@SS
V
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
AUX
F3SP-T01
RST
F39-TC5
TST
F3SJ Ver.2
D4
MS4800
D3
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
D1
Product
Selection
L4
Safety
Sensors
L3
F3SS
L1
E3FS
E3ZS
MB2
F3SN-A@SS
MB1
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
MA2
F3SP-T01
MA1
F39-TC5
MB0
F3SJ Ver.2
L8
MS4800
MA0
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
L1
Product
Selection
S2
NC
Safety
Sensors
24 V (Brown)
S1
S2
NC
L1
MA0
L8
MB0
MA1
MA2
MB1
MB2
L1
L3
L4
D1
D3
D4
TST
RST
AUX
V
V
NC
V
FB1
V
V
V
V
L2
L8
L5
D2
D8
D5
V
V
V
G
G
NC
G
FB2
G
G
G
G
L7
G
L6
D7
G
D6
G
G
G
L1
(R)
L2
(S)
24 V DC
13
14
23
F1
KM1
KM2
24
NC
F2
NC
L3
(T)
S1: External test switch
S2: Interlock/lockout reset switch
KM1, KM2: Magnet contactor
M: 3-phase motor
F1, F2: Fuse
KM1
KM2
M
373
F3SP-T01.fm Page 374 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:14 PM
F3SP-T01
Dimensions
(Unit: mm)
F3SP-T01
Status indicators (LEDs)
From left to right: PWR, RY1 (K1), RY2 (K2), TEST, RESET, and AUX.
G7SA-3A1B (K1)
I/O terminals
Modular Connector
for Light Curtain
Support Software
Two, 4.2 dia. holes
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
51
(40)
G7SA-3A1B (K2)
(169)
180
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
374
Relay contact output terminals
55
F3SP-T01.fm Page 375 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:14 PM
F3SP-T01
Safety Precautions
!WARNING
Do not operate the product in atmospheres containing
flammable or explosive gas. Arcs or heating of relays
during switching may cause fire or explosion.
Do not use a load that exceeds the contact ratings or
switching capacity. Doing so may cause the product to fail
to perform its specified functions, causing insulation failure,
contact welding, or contact failure. It may also cause
damage to the F3SP-T01 or burning.
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
B
Do not allow solvents, such as alcohol, thinner, trichloroethane, or
gasoline, to come into contact with the product. Such solvents may
make the markings illegible and cause deterioration of parts.
C dia.
A
Installation Location
Do not install or store the product in the following locations. Doing so
may result in product failure or malfunction.
• Locations subject to direct sunlight
• Locations subject to temperatures outside the range −10 to 55°C
• Locations subject to humidity levels outside the range 35% to 85%
• Locations subject to condensation due to extreme temperature
changes
• Locations subject to atmospheric pressures outside the range 86
to 106 kPa
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases
• Locations subject to shock or vibration in excess of the product
ratings
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals
• Locations subject to dust (including iron dust) or salts
Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when using the
product in the following locations.
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity
• Locations close to power supply lines
Safety
Sensors
Adhesion of Solvent
Cylindrical Ferrules
F3SS
Square Ferrules
E3FS
E3ZS
• Use ferrules that meet the following standards for length and width.
If the standards are not met, connection may fail, or the ferrules
may not be able to be plugged in and out of the terminals.
• Ferrule Dimensions (for Power Supply Terminal of F3SP-T01)
F3SN-A@SS
Compatible Ferrules
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
0.34 to 1.5 mm2, AWG22 to 16
If flexible wires are used, terminate the wires with
insulated ferrules (DIN 46228-4 compatible type)
before connecting them.
F3SP-T01
Flexible
wires
F39-TC5
0.2 to 2.5 mm2 AWG24 to 12
F3SJ Ver.2
Solid wire
MS4800
Do not drop the product or expose it to excessive vibration or shock.
Doing so may prevent it from functioning properly.
• Use the following electrical wiring for external I/O devices.
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Handle with Care
Installation and Wiring
Product
Selection
Precautions for Safe Use
• Do not use products that have been dropped or have its internal
parts disassembled. Specified characteristics may not be
achieved, and may cause damage to the product or burning.
• If the products are installed side-by-side, the rated current is 1 A.
Do not exceed 1 A.
• Use the F3SP-T01 in an enclosure that provides at least IP54
degree of protection.
Safety
Sensors
The service life will depend on the switching conditions. Be
sure to check the actual operating conditions using the
actual devices, and make sure that the number of switching
operations will not cause performance problems. If you
continue to use the device with deteriorated performance, it may
result in breakdown of insulation between circuits, or cause burning of
the product.
Installation
Square
Ferrules
Cylindrical
Ferrules
The cross-sectional
area after crimping
must be less than
4.8 mm2.
Dimension A
1.0 to 2.3
Dimension B
0.8 to 2.65
Dimension C
0.8 dia. to 2.3 dia.
• Recommended Ferrule and Crimping Tool
Type of
Manufacturer
ferrule
Size
Model
Recommended
crimping tool
AWG24 AI0.25-8YE
AWG22 AI0.34-8TQ
Phoenix
Contact
AWG20
AI0.5-10WH
AI0.5-8WH
AWG18
AI0.75-10GY
AI0.75-8GY
UD6
ZA3
AWG16 AI1.5-10BK
Square
Ferrules
AWG24 H0.25/12
AWG22 H0.34/12
Weidmuller
AWG20
H0.5/16
H0.5/14
PZ6 roto
H0.75/16
AWG18
H0.75/14
AWG16 H1.5/16
Cylindrical
Nichifu
Ferrules
AWG22
AWG20 TGV TC-1.25-11T NH11
NH32
AWG18 TGN TC-1.25-11T NH65
AWG16
375
F3SP-T01.fm Page 376 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:14 PM
F3SP-T01
• Apply the specified voltages to the input terminals. Applying an
inappropriate voltage may prevent specified functions from
operating properly, which may cause damage to the product or
burning.
• Disconnect the power supply before wiring.
• Check the condition of the emitter and receiver before connecting
them.
• You cannot use the product if the positive side is connected to
ground.
• NC terminals have no function. Do not connect them.
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Wiring the Terminal Block
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
• Insert the wires using the following procedure.
Flexible wires: (1) Use a flat-blade screwdriver to push in the lever
and (2) insert the wire.
Solid wires or ferrules: Insert the wire into the wire hole and push
all the way to the back. (Operating the lever is not required.)
• Remove the wires using the following procedure (same for flexible
wires, solid wires, and ferrules).
(1) Use a flat-blade screwdriver to push in the lever and (3) pull out
the wire.
(3) (2)
Lever
Insert wire here
• Use a flat-blade screwdriver that has the same thickness from tip
to base and is within the following standards.
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
Front
view
Dimension D
0.3 to 0.8
Dimension E
2.9 to 3.6
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
We recommend the following flat-blade
screwdrivers for inserting wires.
D
E
Recommended Screwdrivers
Model
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
376
• To mount the product to a DIN Track, release the slider lock, place
the product on the DIN track, and then lock the slider.
• After using the slider lock, make sure that the lock is engaged on
the DIN Track.
• To dismount the product from the DIN Track, place the driver in the
slider section, release the lock, and then remove the product from
the DIN Track.
• Secure both ends of the Safety
Terminal Relays with End Plates.
Screwdriver
The following products are sold
separately.
Slider
DIN Tracks
PFP-50N
PFP-100N
End Plate
PFP-M
Selecting the Power Supply
• Use the rated power supply voltage. Do not use power supplies
with large ripple component or intermittent irregular voltages.
• To meet IEC 61496-1 and UL 508 safety standards and to prevent
electrical shock, make sure that the power supply and load satisfy
the requirements outlined in the sensor's user manual.
Periodic Checks and Maintenance
(1)
Side
view
Mounting to and Removing from DIN Track
XW4Z-00B
XW4Z-00C
• Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify the product.
• Make sure that the power supply is turned OFF before replacing
parts.
Disposal
• Exercise caution to prevent injury when disassembling the F3SPT01.
Precautions for Correct Use
Durability of Contact Outputs
The durability of the contact outputs on Safety Terminal Relays varies
considerably depending on switching conditions. Always confirm the
usage conditions by testing the Safety Terminal Relay in an actual
application, and use the Safety Terminal Relay only for the number of
switching operations that its performance allows. Restarting may not
be possible if the switching capacity is exceeded. If this occurs,
replace the relevant relays immediately. If a Safety Terminal Relay is
used after performance has deteriorated, it may result in reduced
safety.
F3SP-T01.fm Page 377 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:14 PM
MEMO
377
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 378 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
Safety Light Curtain/Multi-beam Safety Sensor
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
• Lineup includes Type-4 Sensors (F3SN-A/F3SH-A) and
Type-2 Sensors (F3SN-B) with IEC, EN, and JIS standard
certification.
EC Machine Directive compliance (from DEMKO).
USA UL compliance for applications for the USA or Canada.
• Protective height equals the Sensor length to perfectly
meet user needs.
• Protective height: 189 to 1,822 mm
Operating range: 7 or 10 m
• Setting Console enabling setting parameters for any model.
• LED bar for beam alignment or easy confirmation in error
mode.
• A complete lineup of accessories.
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
Be sure to read the “Safety Precautions” on page 405 and
the “Precautions for All Safety Sensors” on page 242.
Features
Two Forms of Safety from OMRON:
Safety Light Curtains and Multibeam Safety Sensors
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
Safety Light Curtains for
Finger Protection
Safety Light Curtains for
Hand Protection
F3SN-A@@@@P14
F3SN-A@@@@P25
F3SN-B@@@@P25
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
• Operating range: 7 m
• Smallest detectable object:
14 mm dia. (beam gap: 9 mm)
• Protective height: 189 to 1,125 mm
Presence Detection in Danger Zones
(Horizontal Installation)
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@@@@P40/P70
F3SN-B@@@@P40/P70
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
• Operating range: 10 m
• Smallest detectable object: 40 mm dia. (beam gap: 30 mm) or
70 mm dia. (beam gap: 60 mm)
• Protective height:
F3SN-A: 217 to 1,822 mm
F3SN-B: 217 to 1,777 mm
F3SS
F3SS
378
• Operating range: 10 m
• Smallest detectable object:
25 mm dia. (beam gap:15 mm)
• Protective height: 217 to 1,822 mm
Multi-beam Safety Sensor for Body Protection
F3SN-A09P03
• Operating range: 10 m
• Number of beams: 4 (beam gap: 300 mm)
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 379 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
A New Concept to Meet User Needs
Connect Up To Three Sets in Series without
Mutual Interference
Combine Standard Models with Linking Models with Connectors to
connect up to three sets in series. Wiring is required only for one set
instead of wiring all three sets, as would have been required
previously, to enable protecting all sides of hazardous areas. Mutual
interference protection is also provided.
Various Safety Functions Built into the Sensor.
Supports Many Safety Circuit Configurations
● Interlocks
● Auto-reset or manual reset
● External relay monitoring
Select the Safety Circuits for the Required Safety
Standards
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
A built-in external relay monitor function eliminates the need for Safety Relay Units.
Product
Selection
● Reduced Costs and Reduced Space Requirements
Safety
Sensors
Build Circuits for Type 4 (F3SN-A/F3SH-A) or Type 2
(F3SN-B) with No Relay Units (2 Relays with Forcibly
Guided Contacts)
No Safety Relay Units
F39-JC@A
Safety Light
Curtains
F3SN-A
F3SH-A
F3SN-B
G7SA
Welded relay detection
circuit is possible
with two Relays with
Forcibly Guided Contacts.
Contactors
Motor
● Reduced Wiring and Easy Maintenance
One-touch connection with connectors on both end to prevent wiring mistakes.
Connectors
F39-JC@B
Note: Use models with the following
model number suffixes for series
connection: -01, -03, -04, and -05
Safety Light
Curtains
F3SN-A
F3SH-A
F3SN-B
Motor
Contactors
Special Relay Unit
F3SP-B1P
LED Bars for Easier Application
Align Beams with the LED Bar for Easier Installation
● Beam Alignment Indicators (Green Only)
Application not possible.
Sensor ON but not stable.
Dependable application possible.
Many Connector Variations
Select the type of connector that best suits the machine. (Consult your
OMRON representative.)
Easily Discern Error Mode
Displays to Back Up
Safety
● Error Indication Example
(Red Only)
Confirmation from
two directions.
Standard:
No model
No. suffix
Interlock input line or reset input line
wiring mistake or broken line.
Model No.
suffix: -01
Model No.
suffix: -02
Model No.
suffix: -03
Model No.
suffix: -04
Model No.
suffix: -05
Relay welded, return time too long, or external relay
monitor line wiring mistake or broken line.
Communications line (RS-485) wiring mistake,
broken line, or other error.
Control output short, wiring mistake, or control
output circuit fault.
379
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 380 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
Ordering Information
Main Units (Connecting Cables are not included with the Main Units. The connecting cables must be purchased separately.)
F3SN-A Safety Light Curtains (Type 4)
Detection
capability
Beam
gap
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
14 mm-dia.
(for finger
protection)
9 mm
25 mm-dia.
(for hand
protection)
15 mm
40 mm-dia.
(for presence
protection)
30 mm
70 mm-dia.
(for presence
detection)
60 mm
Appearance
Infrared
Operating range
0.2 to 7 m
Number of
beams
189 to 1125
21 to 125
(odd
mm
numbers only) (every 18 mm)
13 to 120
0.2 to
10 m
Protective
height
7 to 60
5 to 30
217 to 1822
mm
(every 15 mm)
217 to 1807
mm
277 to 1777
mm
Connector
for seriesconnection
Model *1 *2
No
F3SN-A@@@@P14
Yes
F3SN-A@@@@P14-01
No
F3SN-A@@@@P25
Yes
F3SN-A@@@@P25-01
No
F3SN-A@@@@P40
Yes
F3SN-A@@@@P40-01
No
F3SN-A@@@@P70
Yes
F3SN-A@@@@P70-01
*1. The @@@@ in the model numbers indicates the protective height (in mm). Refer to “Safety Light Curtain Model List” on page 381 for model
number details.
*2. Safety Light Curtains with model numbers ending in -02 through -05, provided with different connector configurations, are also available as
options. Refer to page 379 for details. Consult with your dealer or OMRON representative when ordering these models.
F3SN-B Safety Light Curtains (Type 2)
MS4800
MS4800
Detection
capability
Beam
gap
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
25 mm-dia.
(for hand
protection)
15 mm
40 mm-dia.
(for presence
detection)
30 mm
70 mm-dia.
(for presence
detection)
60 mm
Appearance
Infrared
Operating range
Number Protective
of beams
height
Output
*1
13 to 119
217 to
(non1807 mm
continuous)
0.2 to
10 m
7 to 60
217 to
(non1807 mm
continuous)
5 to 30
PNP
transistor
output
277 to
1777 mm
Connector
for seriesconnection
Model *2 *3
No
F3SN-B@@@@P25
Yes
F3SN-B@@@@P25-01
No
F3SN-B@@@@P40
Yes
F3SN-B@@@@P40-01
No
F3SN-B@@@@P70
Yes
F3SN-B@@@@P70-01
*1. Models with NPN transistor outputs are also available as options. For details on the method for securing safety by using an NPN transistor for
output, contact your OMRON representative.
*2. The @@@@ in the model numbers indicates the protective height (in mm). Refer to “Safety Light Curtain Model List” on page 381 for model
number details.
*3. Safety Light Curtains with model numbers ending in -02 through -05, provided with different connector configurations, are also available as
options. Refer to page 379 for details. Consult with your dealer or OMRON representative when ordering these models.
F3SH-A Multi-beam Safety Sensors (Type 4)
Beam gap
F3SS
F3SS
300 mm
(for whole body protection)
Appearance
Operating range
0.2 to
10 m
Infrared
Number of
beams
4
Outermost
beam gap
Connector
for seriesconnection
Model *
No
F3SH-A09P03
Yes
F3SH-A09P03-01
900 mm
* Safety Light Curtains of model numbers ending in -02 through -05, provided with different connector configurations, are also available as options.
Refer to page 379 for details. Consult with your dealer or OMRON representative when ordering this model.
380
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 381 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
Safety Light Curtain Model List
: F3SN-B@@@@P@@ safety light curtains are also available.
F3SN-A@@@@P14(-01)
Model
Protective
height
Number
of beams
Model
Protective
height
Number
of beams
Model
Protective
height
Number
of beams
63
F3SN-A0891P14(-01)
891
99
F3SN-A0261P14(-01)
261
29
F3SN-A0585P14(-01)
585
65
F3SN-A0909P14(-01)
909
101
F3SN-A0279P14(-01)
279
31
F3SN-A0603P14(-01)
603
67
F3SN-A0927P14(-01)
927
103
F3SN-A0297P14(-01)
297
33
F3SN-A0621P14(-01)
621
69
F3SN-A0945P14(-01)
945
105
F3SN-A0315P14(-01)
315
35
F3SN-A0639P14(-01)
639
71
F3SN-A0963P14(-01)
963
107
F3SN-A0333P14(-01)
333
37
F3SN-A0657P14(-01)
657
73
F3SN-A0981P14(-01)
981
109
F3SN-A0351P14(-01)
351
39
F3SN-A0675P14(-01)
675
75
F3SN-A0999P14(-01)
999
111
F3SN-A0369P14(-01)
369
41
F3SN-A0693P14(-01)
693
77
F3SN-A1017P14(-01)
1017
113
F3SN-A0387P14(-01)
387
43
F3SN-A0711P14(-01)
711
79
F3SN-A1035P14(-01)
1035
115
F3SN-A0405P14(-01)
405
45
F3SN-A0729P14(-01)
729
81
F3SN-A1053P14(-01)
1053
117
F3SN-A0423P14(-01)
423
47
F3SN-A0747P14(-01)
747
83
F3SN-A1071P14(-01)
1071
119
F3SN-A0441P14(-01)
441
49
F3SN-A0765P14(-01)
765
85
F3SN-A1089P14(-01)
1089
121
F3SN-A0459P14(-01)
459
51
F3SN-A0783P14(-01)
783
87
F3SN-A1107P14(-01)
1107
123
F3SN-A0477P14(-01)
477
53
F3SN-A0801P14(-01)
801
89
F3SN-A1125P14(-01)
1125
125
F3SN-A0495P14(-01)
495
55
F3SN-A0819P14(-01)
819
91
Protective
height
Number
of beams
Protective
height
Number
of beams
F3SN-A@@@@P25(-01), F3SN-B@@@@P25(-01)
Model
Protective
height
Number
of beams
Model
Model
F3SN-A0217P25(-01)
217
13
F3SN-A0757P25(-01)
757
49
F3SN-A1297P25(-01)
1297
F3SN-A0232P25(-01)
232
14
F3SN-A0772P25(-01)
772
50
F3SN-A1312P25(-01)
1312
86
F3SN-A0247P25(-01)
247
15
F3SN-A0787P25(-01)
787
51
F3SN-A1327P25(-01)
1327
87
F3SN-A0262P25(-01)
262
16
F3SN-A0802P25(-01)
802
52
F3SN-A1342P25(-01)
1342
88
F3SN-A0277P25(-01)
277
17
F3SN-A0817P25(-01)
817
53
F3SN-A1357P25(-01)
1357
89
F3SN-A0292P25(-01)
292
18
F3SN-A0832P25(-01)
832
54
F3SN-A1372P25(-01)
1372
90
F3SN-A0307P25(-01)
307
19
F3SN-A0847P25(-01)
847
55
F3SN-A1387P25(-01)
1387
91
F3SN-A0322P25(-01)
322
20
F3SN-A0862P25(-01)
862
56
F3SN-A1402P25(-01)
1402
92
F3SN-A0337P25(-01)
337
21
F3SN-A0877P25(-01)
877
57
F3SN-A1417P25(-01)
1417
93
F3SN-A0352P25(-01)
352
22
F3SN-A0892P25(-01)
892
58
F3SN-A1432P25(-01)
1432
94
F3SN-A0367P25(-01)
367
23
F3SN-A0907P25(-01)
907
59
F3SN-A1447P25(-01)
1447
95
F3SN-A0382P25(-01)
382
24
F3SN-A0922P25(-01)
922
60
F3SN-A1462P25(-01)
1462
96
F3SN-A0397P25(-01)
397
25
F3SN-A0937P25(-01)
937
61
F3SN-A1477P25(-01)
1477
97
F3SN-A0412P25(-01)
412
26
F3SN-A0952P25(-01)
952
62
F3SN-A1492P25(-01)
1492
98
F3SN-A0427P25(-01)
427
27
F3SN-A0967P25(-01)
967
63
F3SN-A1507P25(-01)
1507
99
F3SN-A0442P25(-01)
442
28
F3SN-A0982P25(-01)
982
64
F3SN-A1522P25(-01)
1522
100
F3SN-A0457P25(-01)
457
29
F3SN-A0997P25(-01)
997
65
F3SN-A1537P25(-01)
1537
101
F3SN-A0472P25(-01)
472
30
F3SN-A1012P25(-01)
1012
66
F3SN-A1552P25(-01)
1552
102
F3SN-A0487P25(-01)
487
31
F3SN-A1027P25(-01)
1027
67
F3SN-A1567P25(-01)
1567
103
F3SN-A0502P25(-01)
502
32
F3SN-A1042P25(-01)
1042
68
F3SN-A1582P25(-01)
1582
104
F3SN-A0517P25(-01)
517
33
F3SN-A1057P25(-01)
1057
69
F3SN-A1597P25(-01)
1597
105
F3SN-A0532P25(-01)
532
34
F3SN-A1072P25(-01)
1072
70
F3SN-A1612P25(-01)
1612
106
F3SN-A0547P25(-01)
547
35
F3SN-A1087P25(-01)
1087
71
F3SN-A1627P25(-01)
1627
107
F3SN-A0562P25(-01)
562
36
F3SN-A1102P25(-01)
1102
72
F3SN-A1642P25(-01)
1642
108
F3SN-A0577P25(-01)
577
37
F3SN-A1117P25(-01)
1117
73
F3SN-A1657P25(-01)
1657
109
F3SN-A0592P25(-01)
592
38
F3SN-A1132P25(-01)
1132
74
F3SN-A1672P25(-01)
1672
110
F3SN-A0607P25(-01)
607
39
F3SN-A1147P25(-01)
1147
75
F3SN-A1687P25(-01)
1687
111
F3SN-A0622P25(-01)
622
40
F3SN-A1162P25(-01)
1162
76
F3SN-A1702P25(-01)
1702
112
F3SN-A0637P25(-01)
637
41
F3SN-A1177P25(-01)
1177
77
F3SN-A1717P25(-01)
1717
113
F3SN-A0652P25(-01)
652
42
F3SN-A1192P25(-01)
1192
78
F3SN-A1732P25(-01)
1732
114
F3SN-A0667P25(-01)
667
43
F3SN-A1207P25(-01)
1207
79
F3SN-A1747P25(-01)
1747
115
F3SN-A0682P25(-01)
682
44
F3SN-A1222P25(-01)
1222
80
F3SN-A1762P25(-01)
1762
116
F3SN-A0697P25(-01)
697
45
F3SN-A1237P25(-01)
1237
81
F3SN-A1777P25(-01)
1777
117
F3SN-A0712P25(-01)
712
46
F3SN-A1252P25(-01)
1252
82
F3SN-A1792P25(-01)
1792
118
F3SN-A0727P25(-01)
727
47
F3SN-A1267P25(-01)
1267
83
F3SN-A1807P25(-01)
1807
119
F3SN-A0742P25(-01)
742
48
F3SN-A1282P25(-01)
1282
84
F3SN-A1822P25(-01)
1822
120
85
F3SS
567
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SN-A0567P14(-01)
F3SN-A@SS
27
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
243
F3SP-T01
97
F3SN-A0243P14(-01)
F39-TC5
873
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SN-A0873P14(-01)
MS4800
61
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
549
Product
Selection
F3SN-A0549P14(-01)
Safety
Sensors
25
F3SS
225
E3FS
E3ZS
95
F3SN-A0225P14(-01)
F3SN-A@SS
93
855
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
837
F3SN-A0855P14(-01)
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A0837P14(-01)
59
F39-TC5
57
531
F3SJ Ver.2
513
F3SN-A0531P14(-01)
MS4800
F3SN-A0513P14(-01)
23
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
21
207
Product
Selection
189
F3SN-A0207P14(-01)
Safety
Sensors
F3SN-A0189P14(-01)
381
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 382 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
F3SN-A@@@@P40(-01),
F3SN-B@@@@P40(-01)
Protective
height
Model
F3SN-A@@@@P70(-01),
F3SN-B@@@@P70(-01)
Number
of beams
Protective
height
Model
Number
of beams
Protective
height
Model
Number
of beams
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SN-A0217P40(-01)
217
7
F3SN-A1027P40(-01)
1027
34
F3SN-A0277P70(-01)
277
5
F3SN-A0247P40(-01)
247
8
F3SN-A1057P40(-01)
1057
35
F3SN-A0337P70(-01)
337
6
F3SN-A0277P40(-01)
277
9
F3SN-A1087P40(-01)
1087
36
F3SN-A0397P70(-01)
397
7
F3SN-A0307P40(-01)
307
10
F3SN-A1117P40(-01)
1117
37
F3SN-A0457P70(-01)
457
8
F3SN-A0337P40(-01)
337
11
F3SN-A1147P40(-01)
1147
38
F3SN-A0517P70(-01)
517
9
F3SN-A0367P40(-01)
367
12
F3SN-A1177P40(-01)
1177
39
F3SN-A0577P70(-01)
577
10
F3SN-A0397P40(-01)
397
13
F3SN-A1207P40(-01)
1207
40
F3SN-A0637P70(-01)
637
11
F3SN-A0427P40(-01)
427
14
F3SN-A1237P40(-01)
1237
41
F3SN-A0697P70(-01)
697
12
F3SN-A0457P40(-01)
457
15
F3SN-A1267P40(-01)
1267
42
F3SN-A0757P70(-01)
757
13
F3SN-A0487P40(-01)
487
16
F3SN-A1297P40(-01)
1297
43
F3SN-A0817P70(-01)
817
14
F3SN-A0517P40(-01)
517
17
F3SN-A1327P40(-01)
1327
44
F3SN-A0877P70(-01)
877
15
F3SN-A0547P40(-01)
547
18
F3SN-A1357P40(-01)
1357
45
F3SN-A0937P70(-01)
937
16
F3SN-A0577P40(-01)
577
19
F3SN-A1387P40(-01)
1387
46
F3SN-A0997P70(-01)
997
17
F3SN-A0607P40(-01)
607
20
F3SN-A1417P40(-01)
1417
47
F3SN-A1057P70(-01)
1057
18
F3SN-A0637P40(-01)
637
21
F3SN-A1447P40(-01)
1447
48
F3SN-A1117P70(-01)
1117
19
F3SN-A0667P40(-01)
667
22
F3SN-A1477P40(-01)
1477
49
F3SN-A1177P70(-01)
1177
20
F3SN-A0697P40(-01)
697
23
F3SN-A1507P40(-01)
1507
50
F3SN-A1237P70(-01)
1237
21
F3SN-A0727P40(-01)
727
24
F3SN-A1537P40(-01)
1537
51
F3SN-A1297P70(-01)
1297
22
F3SN-A0757P40(-01)
757
25
F3SN-A1567P40(-01)
1567
52
F3SN-A1357P70(-01)
1357
23
F3SN-A0787P40(-01)
787
26
F3SN-A1597P40(-01)
1597
53
F3SN-A1417P70(-01)
1417
24
F3SN-A0817P40(-01)
817
27
F3SN-A1627P40(-01)
1627
54
F3SN-A1477P70(-01)
1477
25
F3SN-A0847P40(-01)
847
28
F3SN-A1657P40(-01)
1657
55
F3SN-A1537P70(-01)
1537
26
F3SN-A0877P40(-01)
877
29
F3SN-A1687P40(-01)
1687
56
F3SN-A1597P70(-01)
1597
27
F3SN-A0907P40(-01)
907
30
F3SN-A1717P40(-01)
1717
57
F3SN-A1657P70(-01)
1657
28
F3SN-A0937P40(-01)
937
31
F3SN-A1747P40(-01)
1747
58
F3SN-A1717P70(-01)
1717
29
F3SN-A0967P40(-01)
967
32
F3SN-A1777P40(-01)
1777
59
F3SN-A1777P70(-01)
1777
30
F3SN-A0997P40(-01)
997
33
F3SN-A1807P40(-01)
1807
60
Accessories (Optional)
Control Unit
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Appearance
Output
Relay, 3NO + 1NC
Model
F3SP-B1P
Remarks
For connection with the F3SN-A, F3SN-B,
and F3SH-A, use F39-JC@B cables fitted
with connectors at both ends.
OMRON offers many Safety Application Controllers to help you build safety circuits.
Refer to “Safety Application Controller Product Selection” on page 568 and specifications on page 574.
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
382
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 383 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
Setting Console
Appearance
Model
Accessories
Branching Connector (1),
Connector Cap (1),
Special Cable (2 m),
Instruction Manual
F39-MC11
M12 connector (8 pin)
F39-JC7A
10 m
F39-JC10A
15 m
F39-JC15A
Cables with Connectors on Both Ends (for Emitter and Receiver Set)
Appearance
Cable length
Specification
Model
0.2 m
F39-JCR2B
0.5 m
F39-JCR5B
1m
F39-JC1B
3m
F39-JC3B
5m
7m
F39-JC7B
F39-JC10B
15 m
F39-JC15B
20 m
F39-JC20B
30 m
F39-JC30B
40 m
F39-JC40B
0.2 m
F39-JCR2C
1m
F39-JC1C
7m
Series connection or
connection with F3SP-B1P
F39-JC5B
M12 connector
(8 pins)
10 m
3m
Application
M12 connector
(8 pins)
F39-JC3C
F39-JC7C
10 m
F39-JC10C
15 m
F39-JC15C
Connection with F3SP-B1P *1
Connection with G9SA-300-SC *1 *2
F3SS
7m
E3FS
E3ZS
F39-JC3A
F3SN-A@SS
3m
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F39-JCR5A
F3SP-T01
0.5 m
F39-TC5
Model
F3SJ Ver.2
Specification
MS4800
Cable length
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Appearance
Product
Selection
Cable with Connector on One End (for Emitter and Receiver Set)
Safety
Sensors
Purchase this connector when needed additionally for installing the
F39-MC11.
F39-CN1
F3SS
Remarks
E3FS
E3ZS
Model
F3SN-A@SS
Appearance
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Branching Connector
F3SP-T01
* For detail, see the product datasheet (Cat. No. E355).
F39-TC5
F39-MT11
Branching Connector (1),
Connector Cap (1),
Special Cable (2 m),
Special Cable with Plug (0.3 m),
Instruction Manual
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SN-A series
F3SN-B series
F3SH-A series
Accessories
MS4800
Applicable Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Model
Product
Selection
Appearance
Safety
Sensors
Maintenance Tool *
*1. Cannot be used for series-connection purpose.
*2. When two or more cables have to be used for connection with the G9SA-300-SC, connect the necessary number of F39-JC@B cables to one
F39-JC@C cable.
(Example) When a 35 m long cable is required, connect two F39-JC10B cables to one F39-JC15C.
383
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 384 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
External Indicators (Separate Models for Emitters and Receivers)
Appearance
Specification
Indicator
Type
Model
Emitter
F39-A01PR-L
Receiver
F39-A01PR-D
Emitter
F39-A01PG-L
Receiver
F39-A01PG-D
Red
M12 connector for
PNP output
Green
Note: These indicators are used for connecting with series-connection type emitters/receivers (models ending in -01). (The Indicator must be
secured separately for models ending in -04 or -05.) The desired turn-ON timing (type of signal) can be selected on setting console.
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Mirrors (Reduce Operating Range by 12% with Each Unit)
Mirror material
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Glass mirror
Width (mm)
Depth (mm)
145
32
Length (mm)
Model
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
406
F39-MLG0406
610
F39-MLG0610
711
F39-MLG0711
914
F39-MLG0914
1,067
F39-MLG1067
1,219
F39-MLG1219
1,422
F39-MLG1422
1,626
F39-MLG1626
1,830
F39-MLG1830
2,134
F39-MLG2134
MS4800
MS4800
Spatter Protection Covers (Include Two Pieces for Emitter and Receiver)
(Reduces Operating Range by 10% with Each Unit)
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
Appearance
Applicable sensor
Model
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SN-A@@@@P14
F39-HN@@@@-14
F3SN-A@@@@P25(-01)
F3SN-A@@@@P40(-01)
F3SN-A@@@@P70(-01)
F3SN-B@@@@P25
F3SN-B@@@@P40
F3SN-B@@@@P70
F39-HN@@@@-25
F3SH-A09P03(-01)
F39-HH09-03
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
Note: The same 4-digit numbers as the protective heights (@@@@ in the light curtain type names) are substituted by @@@@ in the model names.
Spatter Protection Slit Covers (Include Two Pieces for Emitter and Receiver) *
Appearance
Applicable sensor
Model
Slit width: 1.15 mm
Slit width: 0.6 mm
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@@@@P14(-01)
F39-HS@@@@A-14
F39-HS@@@@B-14
F3SN-A@@@@P25(-01)
F3SN-A@@@@P40(-01)
F3SN-A@@@@P70(-01)
F3SN-B@@@@P25
F3SN-B@@@@P40
F3SN-B@@@@P70
F39-HS@@@@A-25
F39-HS@@@@B-25
F3SH-A09P03(-01)
F39-HSH09A-03
F39-HSH09B-03
* Operating range will decrease substantially. Refer to “Specifications” on page 389 for details.
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
Environment-resistant Enclosures (Package of a Pipe, Gasket, and Bracket) *
Appearance
Applicable sensor
F3SS
F3SS
F39-HP@@@@-14
F3SN-A@@@@P25(-01)
F3SN-A@@@@P40(-01)
F3SN-A@@@@P70(-01)
F3SN-B@@@@P25
F3SN-B@@@@P40
F3SN-B@@@@P70
F39-HP@@@@-25
F3SH-A09P03(-01)
F39-HPH09-03
* Purchase 2 sets when using both an emitter and a receiver.
384
Model
F3SN-A@@@@P14(-01)
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 385 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
Multi-beam Sensor Support Stands/Mirror Stands
Appearance
Specification
Model
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
* Use these brackets for sensors having an operating range where no intermediate bracket is required (with an operating range of less than 640 mm).
F3SJ Ver.2
Note: Provided with an angle deflection
mechanism for beam control
MS4800
Minimum order quantity: 1 pc.
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
F39-L20
Product
Selection
Minimum order quantity: 1 pc.
Safety
Sensors
Free-location bracket
Materials
Sensor fixing element:
Zinc die-cast (zinc plating)
Mounting bracket: Iron (zinc plating)
F39-L19
F3SS
Note: Not provided with an angle deflection
mechanism for beam control.
For emitter: 2 pcs.
For receiver: 2 pcs.
Total: 4pcs./set
E3FS
E3ZS
Free-location bracket
Materials: Zinc die-cast (zinc plating)
F39-L18
F3SN-A@SS
Wall mounting bracket
Material: Iron (zinc plating) *
Remarks
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Model
F3SP-T01
Specification
F39-TC5
Appearance
F3SJ Ver.2
Mounting Brackets for Sensors (Optional)
MS4800
F39-L22
Minimum order quantity: 1 pc.
(In total, 6 brackets are required for each F3SH-A:
3 units each for emitter and receiver. These
brackets are not required for the F39-MLG series
reflection mirrors, since these mirrors are supplied
together with a specially designed adapter.)
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Minimum order quantity: 1 pc.
(In total, 2 stands are required for each F3SH-A:
one for the emitter and the other for the receiver.)
Product
Selection
Mounting bracket
Materials: Aluminum
Weight: 250 g
F39-ST1
Safety
Sensors
Stand unit
Materials
Base:STKM (base)
SUS304 (leaf spring)
Pipe, bolts and nuts: SUS304
Weight: 11.8 kg
Remarks
Test Rods (Optional)
Appearance
Applicable sensor
F3SN-A@@@@P14(-01)
F3SN-A@@@@P25(-01)
Specification
Model
14 mm-dia. (provided with the sensor)
F39-TR14
Used for checking the setting condition of
single-beam floating blanking
F39-TR23
Used for checking the setting condition of
two-beam floating blanking
F39-TR32
25 mm-dia. (provided with the sensor)
F39-TR25 *1
Used for checking the setting condition of
single-beam floating blanking
F39-TR40 *2
*1. Also provided with the F3SN-B@@@@P25.
*2. Also provided with the F3SN-A@@@@P40 and F3SN-B@@@@P40.
385
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 386 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
Specifications (For details, refer to the instruction manual.)
Main Units
F3SN-A/F3SH-A
Model
*8
Standalone
Series
connection
Item
F3SN-A@@@@P14
*1
F3SN-A@@@@P25
*1
F3SN-A@@@@P40
*1
F3SN-A@@@@P70
*1
F3SH-A09P03
F3SN-A@@@@P14-01
*1 *2
F3SN-A@@@@P25-01
*1
F3SN-A@@@@P40-01
*1
F3SN-A@@@@P70-01
*1
F3SH-A09P03-01
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Sensor type
Type 4 Safety Light Curtain
Setting tool connection
Connectable
Safety category
Category 4, 3, 2, 1, or B
Detection capability
Opaque objects:
14 mm in diameter
Opaque objects:
25 mm in diameter
Opaque objects:
40 mm in diameter
Opaque objects:
70 mm in diameter
Beam gap (P)
9 mm
15 mm
30 mm
60 mm
300 mm
Number of beams (n)
21 to 125
(odd numbers only)
13 to 120
7 to 60
5 to 30
4
Protective height (PH)
189 to 1125 mm
PH = n × P
217 to 1822 mm
PH = (n – 1) × P + 37
217 to 1807 mm
PH = (n – 1) × P + 37
277 to 1777 mm
PH = (n – 1) × P + 37
Lens diameter
9 mm × 4.6 mm
Diameter 9 mm
Operating range
0.2 to 7 m
0.2 to 10 m
Response time
(under stable light
incident condition)
ON to OFF: 10 to 15.5 ms max.
OFF to ON: 40 to 62 ms max.
Startup waiting time
1 s max.
Power supply voltage (Vs)
24 VDC ±10% (ripple p-p 10% max.)
Outermost beam gap
MS4800
MS4800
Current
consumption
(no load)
---
---
--900 mm
ON to OFF: 10 ms max.
OFF to ON: 40 ms max.
Emitter
Up to 50 beams: 140 mA max., 51 to 85 beams: 155 mA max., 86 beams and more: 170 mA max.
140 mA max.
Receiver
Up to 50 beams: 100 mA max., 51 to 85 beams: 110 mA max., 86 beams and more: 120 mA max.
100 mA max.
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
Light source
(emitted wavelength)
Infrared LED (870 nm)
Effective aperture angle
(EAA)
Within ±2.5° for the emitter and receiver at a detection distance of at least 3 m according to IEC 61496-2
Control outputs (OSSD)
Two PNP transistor outputs, load current 300 mA max., residual voltage 2 V max.
(except for voltage drop due to cable extension), allowable capacity load 0.075 μ F, leak current 2 mA max.
Auxiliary output
(non-safety output)
One PNP transistor output, load current 50 mA max., residual voltage 2 V max.
(except for voltage drop due to cable extension)
External indicator output
(non-safety output) *3
One PNP transistor output, load current 40 mA max., residual voltage 2 V max.
(except for voltage drop due to cable extension)
Output operation mode
Control output: Light-ON
Auxiliary output: Dark-ON (can be changed by the F39-MC11)
External indicator output: Light-ON (can be changed by the F39-MC11) *3
Input voltage
Test input, interlock selection input, reset input, and external relay monitor input voltages; ON voltage: 9 to 24 V (with a sink current
3 mA max.), OFF voltage: 0 to 1.5 V or open
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Emitter
Power indicator (green), interlock indicator (yellow), lockout indicator (red), test indicator (orange), error mode indicator (3 red), light
intensity level indicator (green: 5 levels)
Receiver
OFF-state indicator (red), ON-state indicator (green), lockout indicator (red), blanking indicator (green: F3SN-A only), Power indicator
(green: F3SH-A only), error mode indicator (3 red), light intensity level indicator (green: 5 levels)
Indicators
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
Mutual interference
prevention function *3
Time-shared beam projection system by series connection
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
Series connections
• Number of series connected light curtains: Up to 3 sets
• Number of beams: Up to 240 beams
• Length of the series connection cable: 3 m max.
Test functions
• Self test (when power is turned ON and while power is supplied, one cycle during response time)
• External test (emission stop function by test input)
Safety functions
•
•
•
•
Auto-reset/manual reset (interlock) *4
EDM (External Device Monitor)
Fixed blanking *5
Floating blanking *5
F3SS
F3SS
Connection method
M12 connector (8 pins)
Protective circuits
Output short-circuit protection, power supply reverse polarity protection
Ambient temperature
Operating: −10 to 55°C, storage: −30 to 70°C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient humidity
Operating/storage: 35% to 95% (with no condensation)
Ambient operating light
intensity
Incandescent lamp: 3000 Ix max. (light intensity on the receiver surface)
Sunlight: 10000 Ix max. (light intensity on the receiver surface)
Insulation resistance
20 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric strength
1000 VAC 50/60 Hz 1 min.
Degree of protection
IEC Standard IP65
Vibration resistance
Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 0.7-mm double amplitude, 20 sweeps in X, Y and Z directions
Shock resistance
Malfunction: 100 m/s2, 1000 times in X, Y and Z directions
386
• Auto-reset/manual
reset (interlock) *4
• EDM
(External Device
Monitor)
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 387 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
Model
*8
Item
Standalone
Series
connection
F3SN-A@@@@P14
*1
F3SN-A@@@@P25
*1
F3SN-A@@@@P40
*1
F3SN-A@@@@P70
*1
F3SH-A09P03
F3SN-A@@@@P14-01
*1 *2
F3SN-A@@@@P25-01
*1
F3SN-A@@@@P40-01
*1
F3SN-A@@@@P70-01
*1
F3SH-A09P03-01
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
*1. The 4 digits in @@@@ in the model number represent the protective height. Use the formula given in the information on protective height
specifications to calculate the height.
For example, if the beam gap is 9 mm, and the No. of beams is 21, the protective height will be 9 × 21 = 189 mm. The model with this protective
height is F3SN-A0189P14.
*2. F3SN-A@@@@P14-01 is a customized model. Consult with your dealer or OMRON representative when ordering this model.
*3. Only models ending in -01, -03, -04, or -05 have this output and functionality.
*4. For the factory setting, the manual reset mode is set to the “start/restart” interlock.
Using the F39-MC11 can select either the start interlock or the restart interlock.
*5. For the factory setting, the function is not set. It can be enabled with the F39-MC11.
*6. Not provided with the F3SN-A@@@@P70 and F3SH-A.
*7. The intermediate mounting bracket is supplied with the following types:
Types which have the total length of the light curtain from 640 mm to 1280 mm: 1 set for each of emitter and receiver.
Types which have the total length of the light curtain over 1280 mm: 2 sets for each of emitter and receiver.
*8. Models with different connector configurations are also available as options. Refer to “Many Connector Variations” on page 379.
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
IEC61496-1, EN61496-1 Type 4 ESPE (Electro-Sensitive Protective Equipment)
IEC61496-2 Type 4 AOPD (Active Opto-electronic Protective Devices)
F3SP-T01
Applicable standards
F39-TC5
Test rod *6, instruction manual, error mode label, mounting brackets (top and bottom),
mounting brackets (intermediate) *7
F3SJ Ver.2
Accessories
MS4800
Weight (g) = (Detection width) × 2.4 + α + β
Detection width of 189 to 639 mm: α = 700, Detection width of 652 to 1,267 mm: α = 800,
Detection width of 1,282 to 1,822 mm: α = 900,
Model with no suffix or −01: β = 0, Model with suffix −02, −03, or −05: β = 100, Model with suffix −04: β = 200
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Weight (packed state)
Product
Selection
Case: Aluminum, end cap: Zinc die-cast, optical cover: PMMA (acrylic resin), Cable: Oil-resistant PVC
Safety
Sensors
Materials
387
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 388 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
F3SN-B (
Different from specifications of F3SN-A)
Model
*6
F3SN-B@@@@P25
F3SN-B@@@@P40
F3SN-B@@@@P70
Item
Sensor type
Setting tool connection
Safety category
Detection capability
Beam gap (P)
Number of beams (n)
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Protective height (PH)
Lens diameter
Operating range
Response time (under stable
light incident condition)
Startup waiting time
Power supply voltage (Vs)
Current
consumption
(no load)
Type 2 Safety Light Curtain
Not connectable
Category 2, 1, or B
Opaque objects:
25 mm in diameter
15 mm
13 to 119 (noncontinuous)
217 to 1807 mm
PH = (n − 1) × P + 37 mm
Diameter 9 mm
0.2 to 10.0 m
ON to OFF: 10 to 15 ms max.
OFF to ON: 40 to 60 ms max.
1 s max.
24 VDC ±10% (ripple p-p 10% max.)
Opaque objects:
40 mm in diameter
30 mm
Opaque objects:
70 mm in diameter
60 mm
7 to 60 (noncontinuous)
217 to 1807 mm
PH = (n − 1) × P + 37 mm
5 to 30
277 to 1777 mm
PH = (n − 1) × P + 37 mm
Emitter
Up to 50 beams: 140 mA max., 51 to 85 beams: 155 mA max., 86 beams and more: 170 mA max.
Receiver
Up to 50 beams: 100 mA max., 51 to 85 beams: 110 mA max., 86 beams and more: 120 mA max.
Light source
(emitted wavelength)
Effective aperture angle (EAA)
Control outputs (OSSD) *1
MS4800
MS4800
Auxiliary output
(non-safety output)
Output operation mode *1
Input voltage
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
Emitter
Indicators
Receiver
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
Mutual interference prevention
function
Series connections
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
Test functions
Safety functions *2 *3
Connection method
Protective circuits
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Ambient operating light
intensity
Insulation resistance
Dielectric strength
Degree of protection
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
Materials
Weight (packed state)
F3SS
F3SS
Accessories
Applicable standards
Infrared LED (870 nm)
Within ±5° for the emitter and receiver at a detection distance of at least 3 m according to IEC 61496-2
Two PNP transistor outputs, load current 300 mA max., residual voltage 2 V max.
(except for voltage drop due to cable extension) , allowable capacity load 0.075 μ F, leak current 2 mA max.
One PNP transistor output, load current 50 mA max., residual voltage 2 V max.
(except for voltage drop due to cable extension)
Control output: Light-ON, Auxiliary output: Dark-ON
For test input, interlock selection input, reset input, and external relay monitor input voltages;
ON voltage: 9 to 24 V (sink current: 3 mA max.), OFF voltage: 0 to 1.5 V or open
Power indicator (green), interlock indicator (yellow), lockout indicator (red), test indicator (orange), error mode indicator (3 red),
light intensity level indicator (green: 5 levels)
OFF-state indicator (red), ON-state indicator (green), lockout indicator (red), Optional function indicator (green), error mode
indicator (3 red), light intensity level indicator (green: 5 levels)
Time-shared beam projection system by series connection
• Number of series connected light curtains: Up to 3 sets
• Number of beams: Up to 240 beams
• Length of the series connection cable: 3 m max.
• Self test (when power is ON and period is 1 s or less)
• External test (light emission stop function by test input)
• Auto-reset/manual reset (start/restart interlock)
• EDM (External Device Monitor)
M12 connector (8 pins)
Output short-circuit protection, reverse polarity protection
Operating: −10 to 55°C, storage: −30 to 70°C (with no icing or condensation)
Operating/storage: 35% to 95% (with no condensation)
Incandescent lamp: 3000 Ix max. (light intensity on the receiver surface)
Sunlight: 10000 Ix max. (light intensity on the receiver surface)
20 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
1000 VAC 50/60 Hz 1 min.
IEC Standard IP65
Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 0.7-mm double amplitude, 20 sweeps in X, Y and Z directions
Malfunction: 100 m/s2, 1000 times in X, Y and Z directions
Case: Aluminum, end cap: Zinc die-cast, optical cover: PMMA (Acrylic resin)
Weight (g) = (Detection width) × 2.4 + α + β
Detection width of 189 to 639 mm: α = 700, Detection width of 652 to 1,267 mm: α = 800,
Detection width of 1,282 to 1,822 mm: α = 900,
Model with no suffix or −01: β = 0, Model with suffix −02, −03, or −05: β = 100, Model with suffix −04: β = 200
Test rod *4, instruction manual, mounting brackets (top and bottom),
mounting brackets (intermediate) *5, error mode label
IEC61496-1, EN61496-1 Type 2 ESPE (Electro-Sensitive Protective Equipment)
IEC61496-2 Type 2 AOPD (Active Opto-electronic Protective Devices)
*1. A safety circuit has been adopted. Please note that the control logic (ON/OFF) may differ from conventionally used logic.
*2. The manual reset mode is set to the “start/restart” interlock. It is impossible to select interlock only or restart interlock only.
*3. No floating blanking or fixed blanking function is provided.
*4. Not provided with the F3SN-B@@@@P70.
*5. The intermediate mounting bracket is supplied with the following types:
Types which have the total length of the light curtain from 640 mm to 1280 mm: 1 set for each of emitter and receiver.
Types which have the total length of the light curtain over 1280 mm: 2 sets for each of emitter and receiver.
*6. Models with different connector configurations are also available as options. Refer to “Many Connector Variations” on page 379.
388
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 389 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
Accessories
Control Units
Item
Model
Applicable sensor
G9SA-300-SC *
F3SP-B1P
F3SN-A, F3SN-B, F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
Accessory
Instruction manual
Approx. 300 g
* For further details on the G9SA-300-SC, refer to the page 557 instruction manual.
Setting Console
External Indicators
Model
F39-MC11
Model
Applicable sensor
F3SN-A, F3SH-A
Supply voltage
24 VDC ±10% (provided from the sensor)
Connection method
Cable (included)
Weight (packed state)
360 g
Accessories
One branching connector, 2-m cable,
one connector cap, instruction manual
F39-A01PR-L
(Emitter)
F39-A01PR-D
(Receiver)
Item
F39-A01PG-L
(Emitter)
F39-A01PG-D
(Receiver)
F3SN-A@@@@P@@-01(-03, -04, -05) *
F3SH-A09P03-01
Applicable sensor
For details on the setting console, refer to the
instruction manual provided with the product.
Light source
Red LED
Supply voltage
24 VDC ±10% (provided from the sensor)
Green LED
Current consumption
50 mA max. (provided from the sensor)
Connection method
M12 connector (8 pins)
Weight (packed state)
Approx. 80 g
* The indicator must be secured separately for models ending in “-04”
or “-05.” For the F3SN-B, only light-ON mode can be used.
Spatter Protection Slit Covers
Model
F39-HS@@@@A-14
F39-HS@@@@B-14
Item
Applicable sensor
Distance that does
not cause mutual
interference
(typical value)
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Approx. 280 g
Operating range
(typical value) *
F3SP-T01
Terminal block
Weight (packed state)
Item
F39-TC5
M12 connector (8 pins)
Other
F3SJ Ver.2
Between sensor’s
Connection
method
MS4800
5A
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
250 VAC, 5 A
Rated carry voltage
Product
Selection
3 NO
25 VAC, 5 A (cos diameter = 1), 30 VDC, 5 A L/R = 0 ms
Safety
Sensors
3 NO + 1 NC
Rated load
F3SS
No. of contact
Relay output
E3FS
E3ZS
10 ms max. (does not include the sensor’s
response time and bounce time)
F3SN-A@SS
10 ms max. (does not include the sensor’s
response time)
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Response time
F3SP-T01
300 ms max. (does not include the sensor’s
response time and bounce time)
F39-TC5
100 ms max. (does not include the sensor’s
response time)
F3SJ Ver.2
Operating time
MS4800
24 VDC: 0.7 W DC max. (does not include the
sensor’s current consumption)
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Power consumption
Product
Selection
24 VDC ±10%
1.7 W DC max. (does not include the sensor’s
current consumption)
Safety
Sensors
Supply voltage
F39-HS@@@@A-25
F39-HSH09A-03
F39-HS@@@@B-25
F39-HSH09B-03
F3SN-A@@@@P@@(-01), F3SN-B@@@@P@@(-01),
F3SH-A09P03(-01)
F3SN-A@@@@P14(-01)
When one cover is
used
3m
2m
5.5 m
3.5 m
When two covers are
used
1m
0.5 m
2m
1m
When one cover is
used
6.5 m
4.8 m
12.2 m
7.8 m
When two covers are
used
2.4 m
1.2 m
4.4 m
2.1 m
* The maximum distance that can turn ON all of the five light intensity level indicators.
Environment-resistant Enclosures
Model
F39-HP@@@@-14
F39-HP@@@@-25
F39-HPH09-03
Item
Applicable sensor
F3SN-A@@@@P14(-01)
F3SN-A@@@@P@@(-01), F3SN-B@@@@P@@(-01),
F3SH-A09P03(-01)
Operating range characteristics
0.2 to 6 m
0.2 to 10 m
Degree of protection *
IP67 (IEC60529)
Materials
Case: Acrylic resin, rubber: NBR60, mounting bracket: SUS316L, screw: SUS316L
* To conform to IP67, tighten the screws according to the “Cautions for Use” as described in the manual packaged together with the product.
389
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 390 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
Connections
Wiring for Sensor Only Configuration
Wiring for the Manual Reset Mode and the EDM Function
Emitter
S1:
S2:
S3:
External test switch
Interlock/lockout reset switch
Lockout reset switch (If the switch is not necessary,
connect between the reset input and +24 VDC.)
K1, K2: Relay that control the dangerous zone, etc.
K3:
Load, PLC, etc. (used for monitoring)
Receiver
Emitter cable
F39-JC@A-L
Receiver cable
F39-JC@A-D
Wiring for the Auto-reset Mode
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Emitter
Receiver
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
K2
K3
K1
K2
OSSD 1 (Green)
EDM input (Red)
+24 V (Brown)
+24 V (Brown)
Auxiliary output (Yellow)
S1 S3
(See (See
note 1.) note 1.)
Open
Reset input (Yellow)
Interlock selection
input (White)
(Red)
Open
Test input (Green)
Shield
0 V (Blue)
Shield
0 V (Blue)
OSSD 2 (White)
K1
OSSD 1 (Green)
EDM input (Red)
+24 V (Brown)
RS-485(B) (Pink)
Auxiliary output (Yellow)
S1 S2
(See (See
note 1.) note 1.)
+24 V (Brown)
Reset input (Yellow)
Interlock selection input
(White)
Test input (Green)
(Red)
Open
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
0 V (Blue)
Shield
RS-485(A) (Gray)
K1
(See note 2.) K3
+24 VDC
Power
supply
0V
When the EDM is Not Used
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
When the EDM is not necessary
(1) Use the F39-MC11 to disable the EDM.
or
(2) Disable the EDM by changing the wiring as shown in the
figure below, when the auxiliary output is Dark ON.
Note: 1. Use very low load type switches.
2. If K3 is not necessary, short-circuit the auxiliary
output with the EDM input.
Series Connection (Up to 3 Sets)
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Note: 1. To maintain sensor performance, please use double-ended
connector cables for series connection which are the length
of F39-JC3B or shorter. Double-ended connector cables
that are longer than F39-JC7B cannot be used for series
connection.
2. The F3SN and F3SH cannot be connected in series.
3. Series connection is possible for model numbers ending in
-04 or -05 (with 0.2 m cable with connectors).
Refer to page 379.
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F39-TC5
Using series connection models (model numbers ending in -01, -03,
-04, -05) enables series connection as shown in the figure at the right.
Either stand-alone models and the series connection models can be
used for the light curtains located at the top end.
F3SS
F3SS
390
Emitter
Cable with Connectors
on Both Ends (for Emitter)
F39-JCR2B-L,
F39-JCR5B-L,
or
F39-JC3B-L
(See notes 1 and 3.)
Emitter
Cable with Connector
on One End
(for Emitter)
F39-JC@A-L
Receiver
F3SN-A@@@@P@@(-@@)*
Cable with Connectors
on Both Ends (for Receiver)
F39-JCR2B-D,
F39-JCR5B-D,
or
F39-JC3B-D
(See notes 1 and 3.)
Receiver
F3SN-A@@@@P@@-01
(or -03, -04, -05) *
Cable with Connector
on One End
(for Receiver)
* Series connection is
F39-JC@A-D
possible for the F3SN-B.
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 391 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
An Example of Safety Circuits Where the F3SP-B1P Controller is Used
For category 4 rating (F3SN-A, F3SH-A)/category 2 rating (F3SN-B)
Emitter
Applicable operation mode
• Manual reset mode
Receiver
S1:
S2:
S3:
PLC
34
KM1
KM1
KM2
KM2
F3SS
S3
H1
L1
J1
Interlock Test
selection
24
E3FS
E3ZS
14
F3SN-A@SS
F3SP-B1P
T32
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
EDM
(External device
monitoring)
T31
F3SP-T01
+24 VDC
E1
0V
PE
F39-TC5
KM2
H1
X1
Reset
M
A2
F3SJ Ver.2
S1
KM1
K1
K2
MS4800
Wiring for the Auto-reset mode
41
Reset Auxiliary
output
K2
K1
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
33
Product
Selection
23
Safety
Sensors
OSSD 2
13
F3SS
OSSD 1
P1
E3FS
E3ZS
X1
F3SN-A@SS
H1
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
J1
F3SP-T01
L1
Interlock Test
selection
F39-TC5
H1
A1
F3SJ Ver.2
S2
MS4800
KM3
S1
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
OUT
Product
Selection
IN2
Safety
Sensors
IN1
External test switch
Interlock/lockout reset switch
Lockout reset switch (If the switch is not necessary,
connect between X1 and H1.)
KM1, KM2: Magnetic contactor
KM3:
Solid-state contactor (G3J)
M:
3-phase motor
E1:
24 VDC power supply (S82K)
PLC:
Programmable controller
(Used for monitoring. This is not a part of a safety
system.)
42
Note: 1. If the EDM is not necessary, short-circuit T31
and T32.
2. For the number and arrangement of all
terminals on the F3SP-B1P, see the
instruction manual packaged together with
the F3SP-B1P.
391
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 392 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
I/O Circuit Diagrams
Internal Circuit Diagram
Display
*3
Brown
+24 V
2
External indicator
output
Green
3
4
Emitter main
circuit
Load
Test input *1
White
1
Interlock selection input *2
Yellow
7
4
0V
Reset input *2
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Blue
0V
7
5
6
Gray
Pink
RS-485(A)
RS-485(B)
Gray
Pink
5
6
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
Brown
2
Red
8
Receiver main
circuit 2
EDM input *2
Green
3
OSSD 1
Load
Connector Pins Arrangement
White
1
OSSD 2
*3
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
External indicator
output
6
7
Receiver main
circuit 1
5
1
Load
4
8
3
2
8
Yellow
4
Load
Display
Auxiliary
output
Load
Blue
7
7
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
0V
Note: The numbers in ❍ indicate pin numbers of the connectors.
The numbers in ● indicate pin numbers of the series connection connectors.
*1. Open: normal light emission, short to the +24 VDC: stops light emission
*2. Refer to “Connections”, “Wiring for Sensor Only Configuration” on page 390.
*3. The section encircled with the dashed line is applied for models ending in -01, -03, -04, or -05 only.
Cables with Connector on One End
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Model
Internal wiring
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
1
F39-JCR5A (0.5 m)
F39-JC3A (3 m)
F39-JC7A (7 m)
F39-JC10A (10 m)
F39-JC15A (15 m)
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
392
2
4
3
5
3
6
8
2
7
1
4
5
6
7
8
Pin No.
Wire color
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Gray
Pink
Blue
Red
Signal name
Wire
color
Receiver
Emitter
1
White
OSSD 2
Interlock selection
input
2
Brown
+24 V
+24 V
3
Green
OSSD 1
Test input
4
Yellow
Auxiliary output
Reset input
5
Gray
RS-485(A)
RS-485(A)
6
Pink
RS-485(B)
RS-485(B)
7
Blue
0V
0V
8
Red
EDM input
N.C.
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 393 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
Output waveform of the OSSD outputs
The OSSD outputs will be OFF as shown in the following figure in
order to perform the OSSD circuit self-test when the light curtain is in
the ON-state.
The OSSD circuit diagnosis is correct when this OFF signal is fed
back. If the output signal does not contain an OFF signal, the receiver
determines that there is an output circuit or wiring failure and goes into
the lockout condition.
The number of OFF signals depends on the number of light curtains
connected in series. (See the chart at left.)
In the same way, the OSSD outputs will be ON as shown in the
following figure, to perform the OSSD circuit self-test when the light
curtain is in the OFF-state. (See the chart below.)
Check the input response time of a machine connected to the
F3SN-A carefully to ensure the machine will not malfunction due to
the OFF signal.
Response time
Response time
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
3
F3SP-T01
3 light curtains
F39-TC5
3
F3SJ Ver.2
2
3 light curtains
MS4800
1
2 light curtains
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
No
2
Product
Selection
1
2 light curtains
Safety
Sensors
No
F3SS
No. of ON signals within the
response time
E3FS
E3ZS
No. of light curtains
connected in series
F3SN-A@SS
No. of OFF signals within the
response time
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
No. of light curtains
connected in series
F3SP-T01
Note: This chart indicates the instance of 2 light curtains series connection.
F39-TC5
160 to 200 µs
F3SJ Ver.2
Approx. 130 µs
Approx. 25 µs
MS4800
OFF signal
OFF signal
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
OFF
OFF
Product
Selection
OSSD1, 2
OSSD1, 2
Safety
Sensors
ON
ON
393
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 394 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
Names and Functions of Parts
Emitter (F3SN-A/ F3SN-B/ F3SH-A)
Test indicator (Orange)
*
Lockout indicator (Red)
Interlock indicator (Yellow)
Power indicator (Green)
Error mode
indicator (Red)
Light intensity level
indicator (Green)
Receiver (F3SN-A)
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
OFF-state indicator (Red)
ON-state indicator (Green)
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
Light intensity
level indicator (Green)
Error mode
indicator (Red)
Light intensity level
indicator (Green)
Error mode
indicator (Red)
Light intensity level
indicator (Green)
Lockout indicator (Red)
Blanking indicator (Green)
Product
Selection
Error mode
indicator (Red)
*
Receiver (F3SN-B)
OFF-state indicator (Red)
ON-state indicator (Green)
Lockout indicator (Red)
Optional function indicator (Green)
*
Receiver (F3SH-A)
OFF-state indicator (Red)
ON-state indicator (Green)
Lockout indicator (Red)
Power indicator (Green)
*
* These indicators flash to indicate the need for preventive maintenance when the total ON time exceeds 30,000 hours. (Models without this
flashing function are also available as options. An “-NT” to the model number. Ask your OMRON representative for details.)
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
394
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 395 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
Function
Power indicator
Lit when power is supplied (always lit):
F3SN-A, F3SH-A Emitter
Lit when power is supplied, flashing when the F39-MC11 is connected: F3SH-A Receiver *
Interlock indicator
Lit during interlock condition
Lockout indicator
Flashing during lockout condition
Test indicator
Lit during external test *
ON-state indicator
Lit when OSSD outputs are in ON-state
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
5
E3FS
E3ZS
4
F3SN-A@SS
3
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
2
F3SP-T01
1
F39-TC5
* These indicators flash to indicate the need for preventive maintenance when the total ON time exceeds 30,000 hours. (Models without this
flashing function are also available as options. An “-NT” to the model number. Ask your OMRON representative for details.)
F3SJ Ver.2
Flashing after a lapse of 30,000 hours
MS4800
Optional function indicator
(F3SN-B only)
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Lit when blanking is set, flashing when the F39-MC11 is connected *
Product
Selection
Lit when OSSD outputs are in OFF-state
Blanking indicator (F3SN-A only)
Safety
Sensors
OFF-state indicator
Light intensity level
200% and above of ON threshold level
150 to 200% of ON threshold level
Light intensity level indicator
100 to 150% of ON threshold level
Lit
Not lit
75 to 100% of ON threshold level
50 to 75% of ON threshold level
Less than 50% of ON threshold level
A
B
C
Cause of error
The Interlock selection input line or the reset input line is not wired correctly or became
open.
Relay contact is welded. Releasing time of the relay takes too long.
The EDM input line is not wired correctly or became open.
Error mode indicator
Communication line (RS-485) is not wired correctly, became open, or causes other errors.
One of the OSSD outputs is shorted or is not wired correctly.
Other failure in OSSD outputs.
Flashing Not lit
Mutual interference. Interference light is received.
Types of the receiver and emitter are not the same.
Numbers of the receiver and emitter connected in series are not the same.
External noise. Internal hardware failure of the receiver or the emitter.
Engineering Data (Typical Examples)
Angular range
(Angle of elevation)
Angular range
(Angle of rotation)
F3SN-A1107P14
F3SN-A1107P14
F3SN-A1107P14
200
Positive vertical
direction
4
3
1
Positive horizontal
direction
2
4
6
8
10
Distance X (m)
Negative
horizontal direction
−100
0
−1
−3
−300
Positive direction
for emitter
2
3
1
4
Negative direction
for emitter
Positive direction
for receiver
6
8
Distance X (m)
0
−1
Positive direction
for emitter
2
4
Negative direction
for emitter
−2
Negative direction
for receiver
−4
Horizontal direction
4
2
−2
Negative vertical
direction
−200
Positive direction
for receiver
2
100
0
Angle θ (°)
300
Angle θ (°)
Distance Y (mm)
Parallel operating range
−3
Negative direction
for receiver
6
8
Distance X (m)
−4
Vertical direction
Y
θ
Y
θ
X
X
X
X
395
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 396 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
Dimensions
Main Units
(Unit: mm)
Refer to the User’s Manual (SCEE-713) for the dimensions of models with different connector configurations (model numbers ending in “-02” to “-05”).
F3SN-A@@@@P@@(-01)
F3SN-B@@@@P@@(-01)
F3SN-A@@@@P@@-01
14
Connector cap
17.3 20.8
Mounting screw holes
2 mounting holes
6. 5 dia.
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
20
2 mounting brackets
8
22
(16)
Four, M5
2
P
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
F
30
28
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
C1 (Protective height)
Intermediate
bracket
Two, M5
22
5.5
C2 (Protective height)
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
27
Two, M5
9.25
(41.8) 38
15
15
E
B
11
A
B
2 mounting holes
M5 up-set
hexagon bolt
F
Beam
1
15
11
D
13.5
32
16
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
45
46.9
4 mounting holes
2 mounting holes
5.5
20
30
9 dia.
Dimensions according to the model can be calculated by using the following equations.
• F3SN-A@@@@P14(-01)
• F3SN-A@@@@P25(-01)/P40(-01)/P70(-01), F3SN-B@@@@P25(-01)/
P40(-01)/P70(-01)
Dimension C2 (protective height): 4 digits in the model name
Dimension C1 (protective height): 4 digits in the model name
Dimension A = C2 + 86
Dimension A = C1 + 64
Dimension B = C2 + 54
Dimension B = C1 + 32
Dimension D = 15.5
Dimension D = 18.5
Dimension E = C2 – 9
Dimension E = C1 – 37
Dimension F: See the table below.
Dimension F: See the table below.
Dimension P = 9
C2 (protective height)
Number of
intermediate
Mounting Bracket
Dimension F
(See note.)
C1 (protective height)
Number of
intermediate
Mounting Bracket
Dimension F
(See note.)
to 0620
0
---
to 0640
0
---
0621 to 1125
1
F = B/2
0641 to 1280
1
F = B/2
1281 to 1822
2
F = B/3
Note: If value F obtained from the above equation is not used, set F
to 670 mm or less.
F3SS
F3SS
396
Dimension P: See the table below.
Detection capability
Dimension P
25
15
40
30
70
60
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 397 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
F3SH-A09P03
F3SH-A09P03-01
F3SH-A09P03-01
14
Connector cap
17.3 20.8
Mounting screw holes
2 mounting brackets
2 mounting holes
6.5 dia.
20
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
15
15
969 1001
11
Intermediate
bracket
F3SS
937 900
E3FS
E3ZS
9.25
(41.8) 38
F3SN-A@SS
Two, M5
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Two, M5
22
5.5
F3SP-T01
27
F39-TC5
28
F3SJ Ver.2
484.5
30
MS4800
2
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
4 beam mark
Product
Selection
Four, M5
Safety
Sensors
8
22
(16)
969
2 mounting holes
M5 up-set
hexagon bolt
484.5
300
4 beams
1
18.5
15
13.5
32
16
45
46.9
4 mounting holes
2 mounting holes
Mounting Precautions
5.5
20
30
9 dia.
Connector cable
1. The intermediate bracket (3) (see Mounting brackets
(intermediate)) is shown on the left-hand side of the sensor as an
example. If the intermediate bracket (3) is on the right-hand side of
the sensor then the mounting holes must also be on the right-hand
side.
2. When using with the cable bent, allow at least the dimensions
shown on the right. (Minimum bending radius of cable: R36 mm.)
R36 mm
80 mm min.
80 mm min.
R36 mm
Connector cable
397
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 398 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
Accessories
Mounting Bracket (Top and Bottom)
5.5
6.5 dia.
24
32
9.25
14
13.5
20
9 dia.
4-30°
14.2 dia.
22 dia.
Four, R2.15
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
45
Material: Iron (zinc plating)
4.3
30
30
Note: Provided with the product.
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Mounting Brackets (Intermediate)
2
25
R2 max.
11
2
16
1
22
17
12
22
30
22
16
Material: Iron (zinc plating)
10
42
20
MS4800
MS4800
M5 × 8 bracket fixing screw
2.3
6.5 dia.
11
13.75 11
18
33
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
Note: Provided with the product.
The number of brackets
required depends on the
total length of the Sensor.
22
Intermediate bracket (3)
38
11
30
Intermediate
bracket (1)
Intermediate
bracket (2)
21.25
15
M4 × 6 sensor fixing screw
5.5
19
5.5
9 dia.
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
Accessories (Optional)
Cables with Connector on One End
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F39-JCR5A (L = 0.5 m)
F39-JC3A (L = 3 m)
F39-JC7A (L = 7 m)
F39-JC10A (L = 10 m)
F39-JC15A (L = 15 m)
L*
39.5
15 dia.
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Waterproof connector
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
Color: Emitter (gray)
Receiver (black)
Vinyl insulated round cable 6.6 mm dia.
8 cores (4 twisted pairs) (conductor cross sectional area: 0.3 mm2/
insulation outside diameter: 1.15 mm dia.)
Standard length: L
* L = 3, 7, 10, 15 m
Cables with Connectors on Both Ends
F39-JCR2B (L = 0.2 m)
F39-JCR5B (L = 0.5 m)
F39-JC1B (L = 1 m)
F39-JC3B (L = 3 m)
F39-JC5B (L = 5 m)
F39-JC7B (L = 7 m)
F39-JC10B (L = 10 m)
F39-JC15B (L = 15 m)
F39-JC20B (L = 20 m)
F39-JC30B (L = 30 m)
F39-JC40B (L = 40 m)
F39-JCR2C (L = 0.2 m)
F39-JC1C (L = 1 m)
F39-JC3C (L = 3 m)
F39-JC7C (L = 7 m)
39.5
15 dia.
398
43
15 dia.
Waterproof connector
Color: Emitter (gray)
Receiver (black)
L
F39-JC10C (L = 10 m)
F39-JC15C (L = 15 m)
Waterproof connector
Vinyl insulated round cable 6.6 mm dia.
8 cores (4 twisted pairs) (conductor cross sectional area: 0.3 mm2/
insulation outside diameter: 1.15 mm dia.)
Standard length: L
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 399 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
Control Unit
F3SP-B1P
Emitter
Terminal Allocations
Receiver
NC NC L1 H1 X1 A1
13 23 33 41 H1 J1
91
Indicators:
PWR (green), K1 (orange), K2 (orange)
NC NC T31 T32 PE A2
24, M3
10.5
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
4.6 dia.
13 max.
9
76 max. 63
Product
Selection
Mounting screw holes
5.9
7 × 5 = 35
Safety
Sensors
14 24 34 42 NC P1
84±0.3
43
5.6
9
45 max.
R2.3
5
35±0.3
111 max.
399
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 400 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
Branching Connector
(supplied with F39-MC11)
Setting Console
F39-MC11
F39-CN1
1
2
3
4
8
M12
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
7 6
Communications
jack
18
13.6
5
32.1
CN1
17.7
4
3
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
52.8
22
Communications
connection indicator
M12
12 24.7 56
CN3
1
2
13.6
CN2
Function indicator
Two, 8 dia.
(spot facing depth: 2 mm)
10
Channel display
3
M12
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Channel keys
15
4
Two, 4.5 dia.
5
8
Mode display
6
2
1
Up key
7
136
Right key
MS4800
MS4800
Down key
Left key
CN1
Connector cable
CN2
Sensor
CN3
Setting console
Enter key
Cancel key
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
50
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
External Indicators
Mirrors
F39-A01PR-L/-D
F39-A01PG-L/-D
F39-MLG@
145
102
Eight, 7 dia.
52
Can be fitted to the F39-ST1 cylindrical
mounting rod (42 dia. ±1) (accessory).
32
L
30 dia.
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
400
24
Lighting part
M
104.3
96
13
9.2
Waterproof connector
34
Model
L (mm)
M (mm)
F39-MLG0406
445
487
F39-MLG0610
648
690
F39-MLG0711
749
792
F39-MLG0914
953
995
F39-MLG1067
1105
1148
F39-MLG1219
1257
1300
F39-MLG1422
1461
1503
F39-MLG1626
1664
1706
F39-MLG1830
1867
1910
F39-MLG2134
2172
2214
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 401 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
Spatter Protection Covers
Protection cover
F39-HN@@@@-14
F39-HN@@@@-25
F39-HH09-03
32
L*
10
* L is as follows.
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
Mounting dimensions
F39-TC5
L = 915 mm
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-HH09-03
F39-HS09A(B)-03
MS4800
L = @@@@ – 22 mm
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
F39-HN@@@@-25
F39-HS@@@@A(B)-25
Product
Selection
F39-HS@@@@A(B)-14
F39-HS@@@@A(B)-25
F39-HS09A(B)-03
L = @@@@ mm
Safety
Sensors
Spatter Protection Slit Covers
Materials: PC (transparent area)
ABS (non-transparent area)
F39-HN@@@@-14
F39-HS@@@@A(B)-14
Fixing bracket
32.6
37.3
37.3
Materials: SUS
9.87
14
Water-resistant Case
Multi-beam Sensor Support Stand/Mirror Stand
F39-HP@@@@-14
F39-HP@@@@-25
F39-HPH09-03
F39-ST1
156
32
156
61 dia.
57.5 dia.
Four, 14-dia. drillings
Mounting bracket
8
M4 × 12 screw
42.7 dia.
1300
110 dia.
Case
180
L
(depends on
the length of
housing of
each model)
180 dia.
12
Mounting Bracket
F39-L22
M8 × 30
Hexagon socket head screw
3
28
32.5 26
3
42.9 dia.
8
2
8
16
24
Two, M5
34
32
20
M6 hexagon socket
head check bolt
74 dia.
Two, R3
16
R2.8
30
9 dia.
401
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 402 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
Wall Mounting Bracket
F39-L18
90°
33
18
15.5 12.25
2
5.5
9 dia.
30°
30
20
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
22 dia.
4.3
14.2 dia.
Eight, R2.15
30
38
Free-location Bracket
Mounting
F39-L19
5
8.5
Emitter cover or receiver cover
30
5
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
18 3.3
11
(6.4)
1.5
30
(40)
5.5 dia.
24
10
5
10.8
M5 up-set
hexagon bolt
15
7
37
M5 up-set
hexagon bolt
(4.7) (15.5)
Free-location Bracket
20
10
(32.3)
25.5
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-L20
10.5
5.5 dia.
24
30.5
43
32.75
17.75
12
12
5
19.3
M4 up-set
hexagon bolt
6.5
6
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
(14)
20 (15.5)
23
15.5
9 dia.
20
(4.7)
M5 up-set
hexagon bolt
6.5 dia.
11
(4.7)
5.5
0.8
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
25.25
10
(15)
Side mounting
(30.5)
(43)
(30)
M4 up-set hexagon bolt
(14)
23
(44)
30
M5 up-set hexagon bolt
(15)
30
Emitter cover or receiver cover
Back mounting
M4 up-set hexagon bolt
(44)
(23)
(15)
Emitter cover or receiver cover
30
30
(44)
(14)
(4.7)
F3SS
F3SS
402
(43)
M5 up-set hexagon bolt
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 403 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
Connection Circuit Examples
An Example of Safety Circuits Where No Controller Is Used
For Category 4 Rating (F3SN-A, F3SH-A)/Category 2 Rating (F3SN-B)
Emitter
Receiver
Applicable operation mode
• Manual reset mode
• Using the EDM function
Shield
0 V (Blue)
OSSD 2 (White)
OSSD 1 (Green)
F3SS
Auxiliary output
(Yellow)
E3FS
E3ZS
EDM input (Red)
F3SN-A@SS
+24 V (Brown)
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
+24 V (Brown)
F3SP-T01
F3SS
Reset input (Yellow)
Interlock selection input
(White)
F39-TC5
E3FS
E3ZS
(Red)
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SN-A@SS
Open
MS4800
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Test input (Green)
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
F3SP-T01
Shield
Product
Selection
F39-TC5
0 V (Blue)
Safety
Sensors
F3SJ Ver.2
Timing Chart
Light incident
Light interrupted
KM1
Reset switch
(S2)
KM1
KM1 KM2
KM2
KM2
OSSD
KM1, KM2
N.O. contact
KM1, KM2
N.C. contact
M
+24 VDC
E1
0V
MS4800
KM3
External test switch
(S1)
S2
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
S1
RS-485(B) (Pink)
Product
Selection
RS-485(A) (Gray)
Safety
Sensors
S1:
External test switch
S2:
Interlock/lockout reset switch
KM1, KM2: Safety relay with forcibly guided contacts (G7SA) or
magnetic contactor
KM3:
Solid-state contactor (G3J)
M:
3-phase motor
E1:
24 VDC power supply (S82K)
PLC:
Programmable controller
(Used for monitoring. This is not a part of a safety system.)
IN
OUT
PLC input *
PLC
PLC output
* The output operation mode of the auxiliary
output is the Dark-ON output mode.
An Example of Safety Circuits Where the G9SA-301 Safety Relay Unit is Connected
For category 4 rating (F3SN-A, F3SH-A)/category 2 rating (F3SN-B)
Emitter
Receiver
Applicable operation mode
• For sensor
• Auto-reset mode
• Disable the EDM monitor function
(by setting on the F39-MC11, *1.)
• For safety relay unit
• Manual reset mode
• Use the feedback loop
• Use the emergency stop switch *2
S1:
S2:
S3:
+24 VDC
E1
0V
OSSD 2 (White)
12
22
*2
KM1
11
21
S3
KM2
Shield
0 V (Blue)
OSSD 1 (Green)
+24 V (Brown)
EDM input (Red)
Open
PLC
Auxiliary output (Yellow)
S1
+24 V (Brown)
Interlock selection input
(White)
Open
Test input (Green)
Reset input (Yellow)
(Red)
0 V (Blue)
Open
Shield
RS-485(A) (Gray)
RS-485(B) (Pink)
IN1
IN2
OUT
KM3
M
KM2
A2
T11
T12
T31
T32
a
K2
K1
13
23
33
41
K1
K1
JP
PE
T21
6
K2
a
b
Control
Circuit
External test switch
(S1)
Emergency stop switch
(S3)
K2
b
Timing Chart
Reset switch
(S2)
3
4
1
External test switch
Reset switch
Emergency stop switch
(direct opening contacts)
(A165E or A22E)
KM1, KM2: Magnetic contactor
KM3:
Solid-state contactor (G3J)
M:
3-phase motor
E1:
24 VDC power supply (S82K)
PLC:
Programmable controller
(Used for monitoring.
This is not a part of a safety system.)
Light incident
Light interrupted
KM1
S2
A1
*1. The F39-MC11 setting console cannot be
connected to the F3SN-B. Therefore, shortcircuit the auxiliary output terminal and the
EDM input.
*2. If emergency stop switch is not necessary,
connect the OSSD 1 directly to T12 terminal
and connect the OSSD 2 directly to T23
terminal.
2
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
OSSD
K1, K2
N.O. contact
KM1, KM2
N.O. contact
K1, K2
N.C. contact
T23
T22
A
B
14
24
34
42
KM1, KM2
N.C. contact
G9SA-301
KM1
KM2
PLC input 1 Depends on the operation mode of the auxiliary output
PLC input 2
PLC output
403
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 404 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
Examples of Safety Circuits Where G9SA-300-SC Safety Relay Unit is Connected
(1) For only safety light curtain in auto-reset mode
For category 4 rating (F3SN-A, F3SH-A)/category 2 rating (F3SN-B)
S1:
KM1, KM2:
M:
E1:
Receiver
Emitter
Note: 1. F3SN-A’s EDM function and auxiliary output cannot be used.
2. Normal operation is performed when the switch S1 is released,
and external diagnosis is performed when it is short-circuited.
3. Do not connect anything to the C1, D1, D2, E1, and E2
terminals.
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
Series
KM1
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
F39-JC@@C-L
F39-JC@@C-D
External test switch
Magnetic contactor
3-phase motor
24 VDC power supply (S82K)
KM2
E1
S1
(See note 2.)
Timing Chart
J1
Vcc
A1
A2
T11
T12
Vcc
H1
Y1
23
33
KM1
OSSD 2
OSSD 1
External diagnosis
13
X1
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
+24 V
E1
0V
Light incident
Light interrupted
F
Receiver connector
K3
Black
K1
K3
K2
K3
K1
KM2
K2
Emitter connector
Gray
External test switch
(S1)
K3
GND
K1
K2
T21
T22
F3SN-A/-B/F3SH-A
OSSD
K3
M
GND
C1
G1
D1
D2
E1
E2
14
24
KM1
G9SA-300-SC
34
K3 N.C. contact
KM2
K3 N.O. contact
K1, K2 N.C. contact
K1, K2 N.O. contact
KM1, KM2 N.C. contact
KM1, KM2 N.O. contact
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
(2) Safety light curtain connected with two channel emergency stop switch inputs in manual reset mode
For category 4 rating (F3SN-A, F3SH-A)/category 2 rating (F3SN-B)
S1:
S2:
S3:
KM1, KM2:
M:
E1:
Receiver
Emitter
Note: 1. F3SN-A’s EDM function and auxiliary output cannot
be used.
2. Normal operation is performed when the switch S3 is
released, and external diagnosis is performed when it
is short-circuited.
3. Do not connect anything to the C1, D1, D2, E1, and E2
terminals.
Emergency stop switch
S1
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
11
21
12
22
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
Series
KM1
F39-JC@@C-L
S2
F39-JC@@C-D
Emergency stop switch
Reset switch (momentary action switch)
External test switch
Magnetic contactor
3-phase motor
24 VDC power supply (S82K)
KM2
E1
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
S3
(See note 2.)
J1
Vcc
A1
A2
T11
T12
Vcc
H1
Y1
23
Timing Chart
33
KM1
OSSD 2
OSSD 1
External diagnosis
13
X1
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
+24 V
E1
0V
Light incident
Light interrupted
F
Receiver connector
K3
Black
K1
K3
K2
K3
K1
KM2
K2
Emitter connector
Gray
Reset switch
(S2)
K3
GND
K1
K2
T21
T22
External test switch
(S3)
K3
M
GND
C1
G1
D1
D2
E1
G9SA-300-SC
E2
14
KM1
24
Limit switch
(S1, S2)
34
KM2
OSSD
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
K3 N.C. contact
K3 N.O. contact
K1, K2 N.C. contact
K1, K2 N.O. contact
F3SS
F3SS
404
KM1, KM2 N.C. contact
KM1, KM2 N.O. contact
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 405 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
Safety Precautions
This catalog is intended as a guide for product selection. Be sure to use the instruction manual provided with the product for actual operation.
Regulations and Standards
F3SS
3. The F3SN-B is designed according to the following standards. To
make sure that the F3SN-B complies with the following standards
and regulations, you are asked to design and use it as provided by
any other related standards, laws, and regulations.
Consult UL or other standardization bodies if you have any
questions.
• EN415-4 (European standard)
• OSHA 29 CFR 1910.212 (US Industrial Safety and Health
Regulation)
• ANSI/RIA 15.06 (US standard)
• Guideline Concerning Failsafe Methods for Control
Mechanisms in Machine Tools, 28 September 1998 (The
Announcement No. 464, Ministry of Health, Labour and
Welfare)
E3FS
E3ZS
3. The F3SN-A/F3SH-A is designed according to the following
standards. To make sure that the F3SN-A/F3SH-A complies with
the following standards and regulations, you are asked to design
and use it as provided by any other related standards, laws, and
regulations. (Underlined regulations are applicable to the F3SN-A
only.)
Consult UL or other standardization bodies if you have any
questions.
• EN415-4, prEN691, EN692, prEN693 (European standards)
• OSHA 29 CFR 1910.212 (US Industrial Safety and Health
Regulation)
• OSHA 29 CFR 1910.217 (US Industrial Safety and Health
Regulation)
• ANSI B11.1 - B11.19 (US standard)
• ANSI/RIA 15.06 (US standard)
• Guideline Concerning Failsafe Methods for Control
Mechanisms in Machine Tools, 28 July 1998
(The Announcement No. 464, Ministry of Health, Labour and
Welfare)
(5) The F3SN-B received the following certification from
BG-PRUFZERT of Germany:
• BG test and certification mark
License
Type 2 ESPE (EN61496-1)
Type 2 AOPD (prEN61496-2)
F3SN-A@SS
(5) The F3SN-A/F3SH-A received the following certification from
BG-PRUFZERT of Germany:
• BG test and certification mark
License
Type 4 ESPE (EN61496-1)
Type 4 AOPD (prEN61496-2)
(4) The F3SN-B received the following certification from the Third
Party Assessment Body UL:
• Certificate of UL listing for US and Canadian safety standards
Both of which are: Type 2 ESPE (UL61496-1),
Type 2 AOPD (UL61496-2)
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
(4) The F3SN-A/F3SH-A received the following certification from
the Third Party Assessment Body UL:
• Certificate of UL listing for US and Canadian safety standards
Both of which are: TYPE 4 ESPE (UL61496-1),
TYPE 4 AOPD (UL61496-2)
(3) The F3SN-B received the following certification from the EU
accredited body DEMKO A/S:
• EC Type-Examination in accordance with the EU
Machinery Directive (TYPE 2 ESPE)
• DEMKO Type Certification
Type 2 ESPE (EN61496-1)
Type 2 AOPD (prEN61496-2)
Use: EN954-1 Category B, 1, 2
F3SP-T01
(3) The F3SN-A/F3SH-A received the following certification from
the EU accredited body DEMKO A/S:
• EC Type-Examination in accordance with the EU
Machinery Directive (TYPE 4 ESPE)
• DEMKO Type Certification
Type 4 ESPE (EN61496-1)
Type 4 AOPD (prEN61496-2)
F39-TC5
JIS B9704-1 (TYPE 2 ESPE),
JIS B9704-2 (TYPE 2 AOPD)
F3SJ Ver.2
5. JIS standards:
MS4800
JIS B9704-1 (TYPE 4 ESPE),
JIS B9704-2 (TYPE 4 AOPD)
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
5. JIS standards:
Product
Selection
UL61496-1 (TYPE 2 ESPE),
UL61496-2 (TYPE 2 AOPD),
UL508, UL1998,
CAN/CSA22.2 No. 14, CAN/
CSA22.2 No. 0.8
Safety
Sensors
4. American standards:
F3SS
UL61496-1 (TYPE 4 ESPE),
UL61496-2 (TYPE 4 AOPD),
UL508, UL1998,
CAN/CSA22.2 No. 14,
CAN/CSA22.2 No. 0.8
E3FS
E3ZS
4. American standards:
F3SN-A@SS
3. International standards: IEC61496-1 (TYPE 2 ESPE),
IEC61496-2 (TYPE 2 AOPD)
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
3. International standards: IEC61496-1 (TYPE 4 ESPE),
IEC61496-2 (TYPE 4 AOPD)
F3SP-T01
EN61496-1 (TYPE 2 ESPE),
prEN61496-2 (TYPE 2 AOPD)
F39-TC5
2. European standards:
F3SJ Ver.2
EN61496-1 (TYPE 4 ESPE),
prEN61496-2 (TYPE 4 AOPD)
MS4800
2. European standards:
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
1. “Type Certification” specified in the Chapter 44. 2 of the Industrial
Safety and Health Law in Japan does not apply to independent
units of the F3SN-B sensor. This law applies to systems
incorporated with the sensors.
When using the F3SN-B sensor in Japan as a “safety device for
presses or shearing machines” as specified in the Chapter 42 of
the same law, apply for certification as a system.
2. (1) The F3SN-B is electro-sensitive protective equipment (ESPE)
in accordance with European Union (EU) Machinery Directive
Annex IV, B, Safety Components, Item 1.
(2) The F3SN-B complies with the following regulations and
standards:
1. EU Regulations
• Machinery Directive: Directive 98/37/EC
• EMC Directive:
Directive 2004/108/EC
Product
Selection
F3SN-B
1. “Type Certification” specified in the Chapter 44. 2 of the Industrial
Safety and Health Law in Japan does not apply to independent
F3SN-A/F3SH-A Sensors. This law applies to systems
incorporating the Sensor. When using the F3SN-A/F3SH-A Sensor
in Japan as a “safety device for presses or shearing machines,” as
specified in the Chapter 42 of the same law, apply for certification
for the overall system.
2. (1) The F3SN-A/F3SH-A is electro-sensitive protective equipment
(ESPE) in accordance with European Union (EU) Machinery
Directive Annex IV, B, Safety Components, Item 1.
(2) The F3SN-A/F3SH-A complies with the following regulations
and standards:
1. EU Regulations
• Machinery Directive: Directive 98/37/EC
• EMC Directive:
Directive 2004/108/EC
Safety
Sensors
F3SN-A/F3SH-A
405
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 406 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
!WARNING
Detection Zone and Intrusion Path
Refer to “Precautions for All Safety Sensors” on page 242 for the
installation conditions of Safety Light Curtains.
F3SH-A Multi-beam Safety Sensor
F3SN-A@@@@
P40(-01)
F3SN-B@@@@
P40
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
Install protective structures around the machine so that
you must pass through the detection zone of the F3SH-A
to reach a hazardous part of the machine.
If it is possible for an operator to get between the sensor’s
detection zone and the hazardous part of the machine,
design the system so that machinery cannot start up
automatically. Make sure that machinery cannot restart
while the operator is in the hazardous area. Position the
switch for restarting machinery in a location from which
the status of the hazardous area can be seen clearly. The
switch position location must be a place where the switch
cannot be operated from within the hazardous area.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury.
Model
F3SN-A@@@@
P70(-01)
F3SN-B@@@@
P70
Use of the Fixed Blanking Function (F3SN-A only)
After setting the fixed blanking, check that the F3SN-A
detects a test rod at any position in the detection zone
through which a person can reach the hazardous part of
the machine. If any positions are found by check above,
install protective structures to prevent intrusion, which the
F3SN-A can not detect.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury.
Safety Distance
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
Use of the floating blanking increases the size of the
detection capability. To calculate a safety distance, be
sure to use the increased size of the detection capability.
Failure to do so causes the machine to fail to stop before
an operator reaches the dangerous area and may result
in serious injury.
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SJ Ver.2
Always maintain a safe distance (S) between the light
curtain and a hazardous part of a machine.
Failure to do so causes the machine to fail to stop before
an operator reaches the dangerous area and may result
in serious injury.
Response Time Table
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
F3SNA@@@@
P14(-01)
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
Model
F3SS
F3SS
F3SN-A@@@@
P25(-01)
F3SN-B@@@@
P25
406
Protective
height
(mm)
Number of
beams
Response time
ON to
OFF
OFF to
ON
180 to 450
20 to 50
10.0
40
459 to 765
51 to 85
12.5
50
774 to 1,080 86 to 120
15.0
60
1,089 to 1,125 121 to 125
15.5
62
Protective
height
(mm)
217 to 772
Number of
beams
Response time
ON to
OFF
Protective
height
(mm)
217 to 757
Number of
beams
OFF to
ON
10.0
40
787 to 1,297 26 to 43
12.5
50
1,327 to 1,807 44 to 60
15.0
60
Protective
height
(mm)
277 to 757
7 to 25
Response time
ON to
OFF
Number of
beams
5 to 13
Response time
ON to
OFF
OFF to
ON
10.0
40
817 to 1,297 14 to 22
12.5
50
1,357 to 1,777 23 to 30
15.0
60
• Response time for series connected types is calculated as follows:
(F3SN-A)
For 2 sets:
Response time (ON to OFF): Response time of Light curtain 1 +
Response time of Light curtain 2 + 3 ms
Response time (OFF to ON): Response time of Light curtain 1 +
Response time of Light curtain 2 + 12 ms
For 3 sets:
Response time (ON to OFF): Response time of Light curtain 1 +
Response time of Light curtain 2 + Response time of Light
curtain 3 + 4 ms
Response time (OFF to ON): Response time of Light curtain 1 +
Response time of Light curtain 2 + Response time of Light
curtain 3 + 16 ms
• Response time of F3SP-B1P is 10 ms, operation time is 100 ms.
Note: When using the F3SP-B1P, determine the safety distance by
adding the response time of the F3SP-B1P to that of the F3SN
given in the table above.
Refer to the “Precautions for All Safety Sensors” on page 242 for
calculating the Safety distance.
Model
Model
OFF to
ON
13 to 50
10.0
40
787 to 1,297 51 to 85
12.5
50
1,312 to 1,822 86 to 120
15.0
60
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 407 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
Precautions for Correct Use
Do not use the product in atmospheres or environments that exceed
product ratings.
Installation
How to Prevent Mutual Interference
Series connection (Up to 3 sets, 240 beams, sensor
models ending in -01, -03, -04, and -05 are required for
series connection)
To fully utilize the performance of
sensors, locate the F39-L19/L20
mounting brackets in the number
satisfying the dimensions “A” and
“B” in the sensor longitudinal
direction.
• For the F39-L19
Spacing “A”: 670 mm max.
• For the F39-L20
Spacing “B”: 400 mm max.
B/2
A/2
B
Emitter 2
Receiver 1
Mounting
bracket (1)
M4 × 8 screw
Toothed washer
(2 pcs.)
Mounting
bracket (3)
Emitter/
receiver-mounted
face
Do not connect the emitter and
receiver in series, or a lockout
condition will result.
Do not combine an emitter with a
receiver of a different pair.
This will cause a lockout condition
and detection of objects will be
disabled.
When not connected
Refer to “Precautions for All Safety Sensors” on page 242 for
information on preventing mutual interference of Safety Light Curtains
that are not connected in series.
M5 × 12
screw
Mounting bracket (2)
Brackets and screws included in one set
• Mounting bracket (1) .....1
• Mounting bracket (2) .....1
• M5 × 12 screw ..............1
F3SS
Emitter 2
F39-L20
E3FS
E3ZS
Receiver 2
Emitter/
receiver-mounted
face
F3SN-A@SS
F39-L19
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
1.2 N·m
F3SP-T01
M4 × 8 screw
F39-TC5
F39-L20
F3SJ Ver.2
2.0 N·m
MS4800
Screw × length (mm) Tightening torque
M5 × 12 screw
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Mounting bracket
F39-L19
Product
Selection
Receiver 2
Safety
Sensors
Incorrect
Emitter 1
F3SS
Receiver 1
E3FS
E3ZS
Incorrect
Emitter 1
A/2
F3SN-A@SS
B/2
Emitter
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Receiver
F3SP-T01
Receiver 2
F39-TC5
Emitter 2
F3SJ Ver.2
B
A
MS4800
Cable for
connection
F39-JCR2B or
F39-JCR5B or
F39-JC3B
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Receiver 1
Product
Selection
A
Note: When installing sensors at
locations susceptible to
vibration and shock, increase
the number of mounting
brackets.
Correct
Emitter 1
How to attach Mounting Bracket (F39-L19/L20)
Safety
Sensors
Two or more pairs of the F3SN-A can be connected in series. When
connected in series, the F3SN-A sensors generate beams in a
time-sharing manner. Thus, they prevent mutual interference and
ensure safety.
Installation
F39-L19
[Brackets (1) and (2), M5 × 12 screw]
Brackets and screws included in one set
• Mounting bracket (1) .....1
• Mounting bracket (2) .....1
• M5 × 12 screw ..............1
• Mounting bracket (3) .....1
• M4 × 8 screw ................1
• Toothed washer ............2
407
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 408 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
Safety-related Functions
Interlock Function
Fixed Blanking Function (F3SN-A only)
The auto-reset mode and the manual reset mode are wire selectable
features of the F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A.
After the power is turned ON and none of the beams are interrupted,
the OSSD (Output Signal Switching Device) outputs will go to their
ON-state.
This function is set with the F39-MC11 setting console.
This is a function provided to disable a specific area of the light
curtain’s detection zone. Fixed blanking can be set for any desired
number of beams. If an object enters the disabled detection zone, the
OSSD outputs status will not change. This function is used when
there is a stationary object in the detection zone that needs to be
ignored.
Manual Reset Mode
Floating Blanking Function (F3SN-A only)
For the factory setting, the start/restart interlock is selected in the
manual reset mode. When the light curtain enters the interlock
condition, it keeps the OSSD outputs in the OFF-state. Even if all
beams become free, the OSSD outputs will not go to the ON-state.
When none of the beams are interrupted in the detection zone,
applying the reset input resets the interlock condition and the OSSD
outputs go to the ON-state.
• Start/restart interlock
After the power is turned ON, or when at least one beam is
interrupted, the light curtain enters the interlock condition.
• Start interlock
Only after power ON, the light curtain enters the interlock condition.
• Restart interlock
Only when at least one beam is interrupted, the light curtain enters
the interlock condition.
This function is set with the F39-MC11 setting console.
During normal operation when floating blanking is disabled, and at
least one beam is interrupted, the light curtain will go to the OFF-state.
However, using this function prevents the light curtain from going to
the OFF-state until multiple beams (*1, *2, and *3) are interrupted.
Auto-reset Mode
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
*1. The number of the floating blanking beams can be selected in the
range of 1 to 3 beams.
*2. This function can be set to be active only if the interrupted beams
are adjacent to each other.
*3. This function can be set so that the top and bottom beams cannot
be set for the function.
Diagnostic Functions
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
Self-test
EDM (External Device Monitoring)
After power ON, the F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A performs a complete
self-test within 1 second. In addition, it performs a self-test (within
response time) periodically during operation.
This function monitors the state of the NC contacts. Connect the NC
contact of the MPCEs to the EDM input line of the receiver. If the
correct logical relationship between the OSSD outputs and the EDM
input is not kept, the light curtain immediately enters the lockout
condition and the OSSD outputs will go to their OFF-state.
The light curtain’s normal operation is up to 300 ms max. (*), this
allows for the delay time caused by the release of the MPCEs.
To ensure the correct usage of this function, the MPCEs must be
safety-certified types with forcibly guided contacts.
External Test
This function stops the emission of light from the light curtain using an
external signal and checks that the light curtain operates properly.
Lockout Condition
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
If an error is detected by the self-test, the light curtain enters the
lockout condition, keeps the OSSD outputs in their OFF state and
displays the error mode. Lockout condition can be cleared either by
resetting the power or by changing the setting of the reset switch from
closed to open (open to closed for auto-reset). (With some errors, the
lockout condition is automatically reset when the light curtain confirms
that the cause of the error has been removed.)
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
408
When the EDM is not used
In the case the EDM input is not used, connect the auxiliary output in
the Dark-ON output mode to the EDM input line, or disable the EDM
with the F39-MC11 setting console.
* The value can be changed by the F39-MC11.
(It is impossible to connect the F39-MC11 to the F3SN-B.)
F3SN-A_F3SN-B_F3SH-A.fm Page 409 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:13 PM
F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A
Non-safety Output
External Indicator Output
(Series-connection type only)
Auxiliary Output
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
The beam center-line is the line going through all of the beams. (See
diagram below.) This position is a reference line for measuring safety
distance. Use the line closer to the hazardous area as a reference line
for the safety distance.
Product
Selection
Beam Center-line
This output can be connected to an external indicator to display one
of the operation modes as selected by the F39-MC11. The default of
this output is Light-ON output. A desired output operation mode can
be selected by using the F39-MC11. (F39-MC11 cannot be
connected to the F3SN-B.)
Safety
Sensors
The default of this output is the reverse signal of the safety outputs
(Dark-ON output). This output can be used for monitoring purposes
by connecting it to a device such as a PLC.
The auxiliary output can be selected to give one of the following
output operation modes by the F39-MC11. (F39-MC11 cannot be
connected to the F3SN-B.)
• Dark-ON output mode (fixed for the F3SN-B)
• Light-ON output mode
• Light diagnosis mode
• Lockout mode
• Outermost-beam monitoring mode
• Specified-beam mode
• Blanking monitoring mode (F3SN-A only)
Safety distance
Beam
center-line
mark
1 mm
409
F3SN-A_SS.fm Page 410 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:53 PM
Short-range Safety Light Curtain (Type 4)
F3SN-A@SS
Greater resistance to external light
interference. Significantly less
interference with other sensors.
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
• Interference reduced both between Sensors of the same
type and Sensors of different types.
• Setting Console Optimizes Light Sensitivity for Specific
Ranges
• Ideal Where Installation Space Is Limited
• Conforms to International Safety Standards
• Korean standard “S-mark” models are also available.
Be sure to read the “Safety Precautions” on page 431 and
the “Precautions for All Safety Sensors” on page 242.
Features
New Emitter Mechanism Eliminates Excessive Light
Removing excessive light is the key to eliminating mutual interference, external light interference, and
other similar causes of unwanted line stoppages.
Conventional Models
F3SN-A@SS Series
Conventional models had an operating
range that was too long. This meant that
they picked up light from sensors in
unexpected locations and they interfered
with other sensors.
The operating range for the F3SN-A@SS Series is limited to 3.5 m as
opposed to 10 m for conventional models. This dramatically reduces
the negative impact on adjacent light curtains and surrounding
photoelectric sensors even in applications where parallel light
curtains are installed for multiple devices. It also eliminates additional
work such as installing special wiring to prevent interference.
Conventional F3SN-A Series
Emitter 1
Receiver 1
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
Excessive light from Emitter 1 is picked up by Receiver
2. This light caused interference in some cases.
3.5 m
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Emitter 2
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS Series
Emitter 1
Receiver 1
The amount of light from the Emitter was reduced and
the rated operating range was shortened to 3.5 m. This
way light from Emitter 1 does not reach Receiver 2.
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
3.5 m
Emitter 2
10 m
F3SS
F3SS
410
Receiver 2
10 m
Receiver 2
F3SN-A_SS.fm Page 411 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:53 PM
F3SN-A@SS
Setting Console Optimizes Light Sensitivity for Specific Ranges
Even Light Reflected from Walls
Emitter 1
Receiver 1
Emitter 2
Receiver 2
Reflected light
3.5 m
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
T h e t h r e sh o l d at w h i c h t h e l i g h t c ur t ai n t ur n e d O N a n d
O F F wa s f i xe d an d c o ul d n o t be a d j u s t e d w i t h
c o nve n t i o n al m o d e l s. W i t h t h e n ew se r i e s h oweve r, t h e
t h r e sh o l d va l ue c a n be ad j u s t e d wi t h a Se t t i n g
C o n so l e. T h i s r e d uc e s t h e e f fe c t s o f ex t e r n al l i g h t
i n t e r fe r e n c e an d s t a b i l i ze s l i g h t c ur t a i n o p e ra t i o n .
F3SJ Ver.2
Threshold
value
OFF
When the
t h r e s h o l d va l u e
jumps from 18 to
8 0 fo r ex a m p l e,
yo u wo n ' t be
caught off guard
b e c a u s e yo u c a n
s e e t h e c h an g e
nu m e r i c a l l y
d i s p l aye d .
Amount of
light incident
from Emitter 1
OFF
MS4800
ON
Threshold
value
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Normally a fixed
threshold value
ON
A Setting Console
can vary the
threshold value.
Product
Selection
Amount of
light incident
from Emitter 1
Amount of light
picked up by
Receiver 2
Safety
Sensors
Amount of light
picked up by
Receiver 2
T h e c u r r e n t am o un t
o f i n c o m i n g l i g h t c an
n ow be d i s p l aye d .
Ideal Where Installation Space Is Limited
Back-mounted Connector Cable Models and Optional Right-angle Cables
Models with connector cables attached at the back (F3SN-A@SS-02/04) can be used for
installation where space is limited and there is no extra room at the bottom of the Light
Curtains. The F3SN-A@SS-04 also equipped with a connector cable at the top for series
connection. When there is no space at the back, traditional Straight Connector Cables or an
optional L-shaped Connector Cable (F39-JC@E@) that extends from the side of the lens
surface are also available.
Emitter
Cable color:
Gray
Receiver
E1
Cable color:
Black
43 mm minimum
E1
Emitter
F39-JC@E1
Receiver
F3SN-A@SS-02
F3SN-A@SS-04
Cable color:
Black
More Compact Machines
The F3SN-A@P14 finger protection model is ideal for the more compact
machines available today. It has a safe distance that can be as short as 88 mm.
Refer to F3SN-A/ F3SN-B, F3SH-A on page 378 for details.
E2
43 mm minimum
E2
Cable color:
Gray
F39-JC@E2
Note: The direction of the cable is fixed.
Conforms to International Safety Standards
The F3SN-A@SS is a Type 4 sensor with a category 4 rating. This means that it conforms to the highest standards of safety for a Safety Light
Curtain. The F3SN-A@SS conforms to all the following standards.
International standard
IEC61496-1, IEC61496-2
EU regulations, EN standard Machinery Directive, EMC Directive, EN61496-1, EN61496-2
JIS standards
JIS B9704-1, B9704-2
North American Standards
UL61496-1, UL61496-2, UL508, UL1998, CAN/CSA22.2 No.14, CAN/CSA22.2 No.0.8
Korean Standard
S-mark certification (only -S Models)
Application is also possible in devices covered by the OSHA standards (29 CFR 1910.212) of the USA. The requirements of the USA Industrial
Robot Standard ANSI/RIA R15.06-1999 have also been satisfied.
411
F3SN-A_SS.fm Page 412 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:53 PM
F3SN-A@SS
Ordering Information
Main Unit
F3SN-A@SS Safety Light Curtains (Type 4)
A Connector Cable is not supplied with the Main Unit, and must be purchased separately.
Connection method
Sensor
bottom
Sensor top
Application
Min.
detectable
object
Beam
gap
Appearance
Operating
range
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A0217P25SS
16
F3SN-A0262P25SS
352
22
F3SN-A0352P25SS
427
27
F3SN-A0427P25SS
502
32
F3SN-A0502P25SS
592
38
F3SN-A0592P25SS
667
43
F3SN-A0667P25SS
742
48
F3SN-A0742P25SS
832
54
F3SN-A0832P25SS
907
59
F3SN-A0907P25SS
982
64
F3SN-A0982P25SS
1072
70
F3SN-A1072P25SS
1147
75
F3SN-A1147P25SS
1222
80
F3SN-A1222P25SS
1312
86
F3SN-A1312P25SS
1462
96
F3SN-A1462P25SS
1627
107
F3SN-A1627P25SS
1792
118
F3SN-A1792P25SS
217
13
F3SN-A0217P25SS-01
262
16
F3SN-A0262P25SS-01
352
22
F3SN-A0352P25SS-01
427
27
F3SN-A0427P25SS-01
502
32
F3SN-A0502P25SS-01
592
38
F3SN-A0592P25SS-01
667
43
F3SN-A0667P25SS-01
742
48
F3SN-A0742P25SS-01
832
54
F3SN-A0832P25SS-01
907
59
F3SN-A0907P25SS-01
982
64
F3SN-A0982P25SS-01
1072
70
F3SN-A1072P25SS-01
1147
75
F3SN-A1147P25SS-01
1222
80
F3SN-A1222P25SS-01
1312
86
F3SN-A1312P25SS-01
1462
96
F3SN-A1462P25SS-01
1627
107
F3SN-A1627P25SS-01
1792
118
F3SN-A1792P25SS-01
217
13
F3SN-A0217P25SS-02
262
16
F3SN-A0262P25SS-02
352
22
F3SN-A0352P25SS-02
427
27
F3SN-A0427P25SS-02
• When
dimensions at
the bottom of
the Sensor are
restricted
502
32
F3SN-A0502P25SS-02
592
38
F3SN-A0592P25SS-02
667
43
F3SN-A0667P25SS-02
742
48
F3SN-A0742P25SS-02
• Last set in a
series
connection
(second of 2
sets connected
in series or third
of 3 sets
connected in
series)
832
54
F3SN-A0832P25SS-02
907
59
F3SN-A0907P25SS-02
982
64
F3SN-A0982P25SS-02
1072
70
F3SN-A1072P25SS-02
1147
75
F3SN-A1147P25SS-02
1222
80
F3SN-A1222P25SS-02
1312
86
F3SN-A1312P25SS-02
1462
96
F3SN-A1462P25SS-02
1627
107
F3SN-A1627P25SS-02
1792
118
F3SN-A1792P25SS-02
• Last set in a
series
connection
(second of 2
sets connected
in series or third
of 3 sets
connected in
series)
• Not the last set
in a series
connection (first
of 2 sets
connected in
series, or first or
second of 3 sets 25 dia.
connected in
series)
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
13
• For external
indicator
installations
• Standalone
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
Back
connector
with 0.4 m
cable
F3SS
F3SS
412
No
connector
Model
262
M12 straight
connector
M12 straight
Connector
Number
of beams
217
• Standalone
No
connector
Protective
height
(mm)
15 mm
0.2 to 3.5 m
F3SN-A_SS.fm Page 413 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:53 PM
F3SN-A@SS
Connection method
Sensor
bottom
Model
54
F3SN-A0832P25SS-04
907
59
F3SN-A0907P25SS-04
982
64
F3SN-A0982P25SS-04
1072
70
F3SN-A1072P25SS-04
1147
75
F3SN-A1147P25SS-04
1222
80
F3SN-A1222P25SS-04
1312
86
F3SN-A1312P25SS-04
1462
96
F3SN-A1462P25SS-04
1627
107
F3SN-A1627P25SS-04
1792
118
F3SN-A1792P25SS-04
F3SN-A@SS-S S-Mark Type 4 Safety Light Curtain
A Connector Cable is not supplied with the Main Unit, and must be purchased separately.
Connection method
Sensor
bottom
M12 straight
connector
Sensor top
No connector
Application
• Standalone
Min.
detectable
object
25 dia.
Beam
gap
15 mm
Appearance
Operating
range
0.2 to 3.5 m
Protective
height
(mm)
Number
of beams
Model
217
13
F3SN-A0217P25SS-S
262
16
F3SN-A0262P25SS-S
352
22
F3SN-A0352P25SS-S
427
27
F3SN-A0427P25SS-S
502
32
F3SN-A0502P25SS-S
592
38
F3SN-A0592P25SS-S
667
43
F3SN-A0667P25SS-S
742
48
F3SN-A0742P25SS-S
832
54
F3SN-A0832P25SS-S
907
59
F3SN-A0907P25SS-S
982
64
F3SN-A0982P25SS-S
1072
70
F3SN-A1072P25SS-S
1147
75
F3SN-A1147P25SS-S
1222
80
F3SN-A1222P25SS-S
1312
86
F3SN-A1312P25SS-S
1462
96
F3SN-A1462P25SS-S
1627
107
F3SN-A1627P25SS-S
1792
118
F3SN-A1792P25SS-S
Note: 1. A Connector Cable is not supplied with the Main Unit, and must be purchased separately. The overall length of the cable connecting a
Safety Light Curtain to the DC power supply must not exceed 10 m.
2. Two ferrite cores are provided with Safety Light Curtains that are S-Mark compliant. Attach one ferrite core to the emitter cable and the
other to the receiver cable when connecting the Light Curtain with the optional Connector Cable.
3. Japanese-, English-, and Korean-language operation manuals are available on the CD-ROM provided with the S-Mark Safety Light
Curtain.
F3SS
F3SN-A0742P25SS-04
832
E3FS
E3ZS
48
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A0667P25SS-04
742
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
43
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A0592P25SS-04
667
F39-TC5
38
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SN-A0502P25SS-04
592
MS4800
32
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
F3SN-A0427P25SS-04
502
Product
Selection
27
Safety
Sensors
F3SN-A0352P25SS-04
427
F3SS
22
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SN-A0262P25SS-04
352
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A0217P25SS-04
16
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
13
262
F3SP-T01
217
F39-TC5
0.2 to 3.5 m
Number
of beams
F3SJ Ver.2
15 mm
Protective
height
(mm)
MS4800
25 dia.
Operating
range
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
• Not the last set
in a series
connection
(first of 2 sets
connected in
series, or first
or second of 3
sets
connected in
series)
Appearance
Product
Selection
Back
connector
with 0.2 m
cable
Application
Beam
gap
Safety
Sensors
Back
connector
with 0.4 m
cable
Sensor top
Min.
detectable
object
413
F3SN-A_SS.fm Page 414 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:53 PM
F3SN-A@SS
Accessories (Sold Separately)
Cable with Connector on One End (For Emitter and Receiver, 1 Set of 2 Cables)
For Connection with Safety Devices such as Relays with Forcibly Guided Contacts, Safety Relay Units, and Safety Controllers
Type
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Straight Connectors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Right-angle Connectors, Emitter
Cable to Right and Receiver
Cable to Left
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Right-angle Connectors, Emitter
Cable to Left and Receiver
Cable to Right
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
414
Appearance
Cable
length
Specification
Model
0.5 m
F39-JCR5A
3m
F39-JC3A
7m
M12 straight connectors (8-pin)
F39-JC7A
10 m
F39-JC10A
15 m
F39-JC15A
3m
F39-JC3E1
7m
10 m
F39-JC7E1
M12 right-angle connectors (8-pin)
Cables go to the back when the Emitter is
mounted on the left side and the Receiver
is mounted on the right side.
F39-JC10E1
15 m
F39-JC15E1
3m
F39-JC3E2
7m
10 m
F39-JC7E2
M12 right-angle connectors (8-pin)
Cables go to the front when the Emitter is
mounted on the left side and the Receiver
is mounted on the right side.
F39-JC10E2
15 m
F39-JC15E2
F3SN-A_SS.fm Page 415 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:53 PM
F3SN-A@SS
Cable with Connectors on Both Ends (For Emitter and Receiver, 1 Set of 2 Cables)
For Series Connection or Connection with the F3SP-B1P Safety Relay Unit
Appearance
Cable length
Specification
Application
0.2 m
Model
F39-JCR2B
0.5 m
F39-JCR5B
Series connection or connection with the
F3SP-B1P Safety Relay Unit *1
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
*1. The F3SN-A@SS-04 Series is equipped with a 0.2-m series connection cable and does not require a Cable with Connectors on Both Ends for
series connections. Purchase additional cables to extend cables that are too short.
*2. The maximum length of series connection cables is 3 m. Longer cables cannot be used for series connections.
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F39-JC40B
F3SP-T01
40 m
F39-TC5
F39-JC30B
F3SJ Ver.2
30 m
MS4800
F39-JC20B
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
20 m
Product
Selection
F39-JC15B
Safety
Sensors
Connection with the F3SP-B1P Safety
Relay Unit *2
F3SS
15 m
F39-JC10B
E3FS
E3ZS
10 m
F3SN-A@SS
F39-JC7B
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
M12 Straight
Connectors (8-pin)
F3SP-T01
7m
F39-TC5
F39-JC5B
F3SJ Ver.2
5m
MS4800
F39-JC3B
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
3m
Product
Selection
F39-JC1B
Safety
Sensors
1m
415
F3SN-A_SS.fm Page 416 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:53 PM
F3SN-A@SS
Relays with Forcibly Guided Contacts and Safety Controllers
Type
Appearance
G7SA
Relays with
Forcibly Guided
Contacts
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
G7S-@-E
Relays with
Forcibly Guided
Contacts
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Dedicated Control
Unit
MS4800
MS4800
Muting Controller
Specification
Model
Remarks
• No. of contacts: 4
• Contact output: 2NO + 2NC
• Rated switch load:
6 A at 250 VAC, 6 A at 30 VDC
G7SA-2A2B
• No. of contacts: 4
• Contact output: 3NO + 1NC
• Rated switch load:
6 A at 250 VAC, 6 A at 30 VDC
G7SA-3A1B
• No. of contacts: 6
• Contact output: 4NO + 2 NC
• Rated switch load:
10 A at 250 VAC, 10 A at 30 VDC
G7S-4A2B-E
• No. of contacts: 6
• Contact output: 3NO + 3NC
• Rated switch load:
10 A at 250 VAC, 10 A at 30 VDC
G7S-3A3B-E
Refer to G7SA on page 538 for other
models, socket models, and other
information.
• Quick connection/disconnection to
the F3SN-A@SS with a Cable with
Connectors on Both Ends.
• Contact output: 3NO + 1NC
• Connects up to two F3SN-A@SS
sets and provides muting
capability.
Refer to G7S-@-E on page 554 for other
models, socket models, and other
information.
F3SP-B1P
Use an F39-JC@B Cable with
Connectors on Both Ends to connect to
the F3SN-A@SS.
F3SP-U2P
Use an F39-JC@A or F39-JC@E@ Cable
with Connector on One End to connect
to the F3SN-A@SS.
Ask your OMRON representative for
functions and other details.
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
OMRON offers many Safety Application Controllers to help you build safety circuits.
Refer to “Safety Application Controller Product Selection” on page 568 and specifications on page 574.
Setting Console
Type
Appearance
Model
Remarks
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Setting Console
F39-MC11 *1, *2
Accessories:
Branching Connector (1),
Connector Cap (1),
Special Cable (2 m),
Instruction Manual
Extra Branching Connector
F39-CN1
One Connector is supplied with the Setting
Console. Order extras if needed.
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
*1. The functions described in this catalog are supported by firmware version 3 or later. They are not supported by products shipped prior to August
2003.
*2. Functions not described in this catalog, such as blanking and output selection, are equivalent to those of the F3SN-A Safety Light Curtain.
Refer to F3SN-A/F3SN-B, F3SH-A on page 378 for details.
F3SS
F3SS
416
F3SN-A_SS.fm Page 417 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:53 PM
F3SN-A@SS
Maintenance Tool *
Appearance
Model
Accessories
Branching Connector (1),
Connector Cap (1),
Special Cable (2 m),
Special Cable with Plug (0.3 m),
Instruction Manual
F39-MT11
* For detail, see the product datasheet (Cat. No. E355).
Mounting Brackets (Optional)
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
Emitter
F39-A01PR-L
Receiver
F39-A01PR-D
Emitter
F39-A01PG-L
Receiver
F39-A01PG-D
Green
Spatter Protection Cover (Includes Two Pieces for Emitter and Receiver)
(Each Unit Reduces the Operating Range by 10%)
Appearance
F3SJ Ver.2
Model
Red
M12 connector for
PNP output
MS4800
Type
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Indicator
Product
Selection
Specification
Safety
Sensors
Appearance
F3SS
External Indicator (Separate Models for Emitters and Receivers)
E3FS
E3ZS
* Use these brackets for Sensors having a protective height where no intermediate bracket is required (with a protective height of less than 640 mm).
F3SN-A@SS
Note: Provided with an angle deflection
mechanism for beam control.
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F39-L20
Minimum order quantity: 1 pc.
Mounting: Both front and back mounting
Distance from the mounting surface: About
15 mm
Recommended pitch: 400 mm max.
Beam adjustment: Available
F3SP-T01
F39-L19
Minimum order quantity: 1 pc.
Mounting: Back-mounting only
Distance from the mounting surface: 7 mm
Recommended pitch: 670 mm max.
Beam adjustment: Not available (rotating
direction)
F39-TC5
Free-location bracket
Materials:
Sensor fixing element:
Zinc die-cast (zinc plating)
Mounting bracket: Iron (zinc plating)
For Emitter: 2 pcs.
For Receiver: 2 pcs.
Total: 4 pcs./set
F3SJ Ver.2
Note: Not provided with an angle deflection
mechanism for beam control.
F39-L18
MS4800
Free-location bracket
Materials: Zinc die-cast (zinc plating)
Remarks
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Wall mounting bracket
Material: Iron (zinc plating) *
Model
Product
Selection
Specification
Safety
Sensors
Appearance
Model
F39-HN@@@@-25 *
* The same 4-digit numbers as protective heights (@@@@ in Light Curtain model numbers) are substituted by @@@@ in the model numbers.
417
F3SN-A_SS.fm Page 418 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:53 PM
F3SN-A@SS
Specifications Refer to the instruction manual for details.
Main Unit Refer to page 414 for details on accessories.
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Item
Sensor type
Setting tool connection
Safety category
Detection capability
Beam gap (P)
Number of beams (n)
Protective height (PH)
Lens diameter
Operating range
Response time (under stable light
incident condition) (See *1 for
series connections.)
Startup waiting time
Power supply voltage (Vs)
Current consumption (no load)
Model
ON→OFF
F3SN-A@@@@P25SS (-@@)
Type 4 Safety Light Curtain
Connectable
Category 4, 3, 2, 1, or B
Opaque objects: 25 mm in diameter
15 mm
13 to 118 (Refer to “Ordering Information” on page 412.)
217 to 1792 mm, PH = (n-1) x P + 37 mm
Diameter 9 mm
0.2 to 3.5 m
Protective height: 217 to 742 mm: 10.0 ms, 832 to 1222 mm: 12.5 ms, 1312 to 1792 mm: 15.0 ms
OFF→ON
Protective height: 217 to 742 mm: 40 ms, 832 to 1222 mm: 50 ms, 1312 to 1792 mm: 60 ms
Emitter
Receiver
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Light source (emitted wavelength)
Effective aperture angle (EAA)
Control output (OSSD)
Auxiliary output (non-safety output)
External indicator output
(non-safety output) *2
Output operation mode
MS4800
MS4800
Input voltage
Emitter
Indicators *3
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
Receiver
Mutual interference prevention function
Series connections
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
Test functions *4
Safety functions *4
Connection method
Protective circuits
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Ambient operating light intensity
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
Insulation resistance
Dielectric strength
Degree of protection
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
Materials
Weight (packed state)
Accessories
Applicable standards
1 s max.
24 VDC±10% (ripple p-p: 10% max.)
Up to 50 beams: 140 mA max., 51 to 85 beams: 155 mA max., 86 beams or more: 170 mA max.
Up to 50 beams: 100 mA max., 51 to 85 beams: 110 mA max., 86 beams or more: 120 mA max.
Infrared LED (870 nm)
Within ±2.5° for the Emitter and Receiver at a detection distance of at least 3 m according to IEC61496-2.
Two PNP transistor outputs, load current: 300 mA max., residual voltage: 2 V max. (except for voltage drop
due to cable extension), allowable capacity load 0.075 μF, leak current 2 mA max.
One PNP transistor output, load current: 50 mA max., residual voltage: 2 V max. (except for voltage drop due
to cable extension)
One PNP transistor output, load current: 40 mA max., residual voltage: 2 V max. (except for voltage drop due
to cable extension)
Control output: Light-ON
Auxiliary output: Dark-ON (can be changed by the F39-MC11)
External indicator output: Light-ON (can be changed by the F39-MC11) *2
Test input, interlock selection input, reset input, and external relay monitor input voltages: ON voltage: 9 to 24
V (sink current: 3 mA max.), OFF voltage: 0 to 1.5 V or open
Power indicator (green), interlock indicator (yellow), lockout indicator (red), test indicator (orange), error mode
indicator (3 red), light intensity level indicator (green: 5 levels)
OFF-state indicator (red), ON-state indicator (green), lockout indicator (red), blanking indicator (green), error
mode indicator (3 red), light intensity level indicator (green: 5 levels)
Time-shared beam projection system by series connection, Sensitivity Automatic sensitivity adjustment
capability supported by the F39-MC11.
• Number of series connected Light Curtains: Up to 3 sets, • Number of beams: Up to 240 beams
• Length of the series connection cable: 3 m max.
• Self test (when power is turned ON and while power is supplied, one cycle during response time)
• External test (light emission stop function by test input)
• Auto-reset/manual reset (interlock) *5, • External relay monitor, • Fixed blanking *6, • Floating blanking *6
M12 Connector (8 pins)
Output short-circuit protection, reverse polarity protection
Operating: −10 to 55°C, storage: −30 to 70°C (with no icing or condensation)
Operating/storage: 35% to 95% (with no condensation)
Incandescent lamp: 3,000 lx max. (light intensity on the receiver surface)
Sunlight: 10,000 lx max. (light intensity on the receiver surface)
20 MΩ min.(at 500 VDC)
1000 VAC 50/60 Hz 1 min
IP65 (IEC60529)
Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 0.7-mm double amplitude, 20 sweeps in X, Y, and Z directions
Malfunction: 100 m/s2, 1000 times in X, Y, and Z directions
Case: Aluminum, end cap: Zinc die-cast, optical cover: PMMA resin (acrylic resin)
Weight (g) = (Protective height) x 2.4 +α+β, α = 700 when the protective height is 217 to 592 mm, α = 800 when
the protective height is 667 to 1222 mm, α = 900 when the protective height is 1312 to 1792 mm, β = 0 for
models with no suffix or ending with -01, β = 100 for models ending with -02, β = 200 for models ending with -04
Test rod, instruction manual, error mode label, mounting brackets (top and bottom),
mounting brackets (intermediate) *7
IEC61496-1, EN61496-1 Type 4 ESPE (Electro-Sensitive Protective Equipment)
IEC61496-2 Type 4 AOPD (Active Opto-electronic Protective Devices)
F3SS
F3SS
*1. Use the following equations to determine series connection response time.
Series connection with two sets
Response time (ON→OFF): Sensor 1 response time + Sensor 2 response time + 3 ms
Response time (OFF→ON): Sensor 1 response time + Sensor 2 response time + 12 ms
Series connection with three sets
Response time (ON→OFF): Sensor 1 response time + Sensor 2 response time + Sensor 3 response time + 4 ms
Response time (OFF→ON): Sensor 1 response time + Sensor 2 response time + Sensor 3 response time + 16 ms
*2. Models ending in -01 and -04 only.
*3. The test indicator (orange) on the Emitter and the blanking indicator (green) on the Receiver will flash to indicate the need for preventive maintenance when the
total ON time exceeds 30,000 hours.
*4. The glossary and functions are the same as those for the F3SN-A Series. Refer to F3SN-A/F3SN-B, F3SH-A on page 378.
*5. The default setting of the manual reset mode is for both “Start” and “Restart” interlocks. Use the F39-MC11 to select start interlock only or restart interlock only.
*6. The function is not factory set. It can be set with the F39-MC11.
*7. Intermediate mounting brackets are supplied with the following models:
When the overall Light Curtain length is 640 to 1280 mm or less: 1 set included
When the overall Light Curtain length is over 1280 mm: 2 sets included
418
F3SN-A_SS.fm Page 419 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:53 PM
F3SN-A@SS
Connections
Basic Connection
Wiring for the manual reset mode and the EDM function
+24 V (Brown)
Control output 1
(Green)
+24 V (Brown)
Reset input (Yellow)
Interlock selection
input (White)
Open
(Red)
Open
Test input (Green)
Shield
Shield
0 V (Blue)
Control output 2
(White)
Control output 1
(Green)
Auxiliary output (Yellow)
+24 V (Brown)
F3SS
External relay monitor input
(Red)
E3FS
E3ZS
+24 V (Brown)
F3SN-A@SS
Reset input (Yellow)
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Interlock selection input
(White)
F3SP-T01
(Red)
Open
Test input (Green)
F39-TC5
Shield
F3SJ Ver.2
0 V (Blue)
MS4800
Cable with Connector on One
End (for Emitter)
F39-JC@A-L or F39-JC@E@-L
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Emitter
Product
Selection
Cable with Connectors on Both
Ends (for Emitter)
F39-JCR2B-L, F39-FCR5B-L,
or F39-JC3B-L
(See notes 1 and 2.)
Safety
Sensors
Note: 1. To maintain sensor performance, please use double-ended
connector cables for series connection which are the length
of F39-JC3B or shorter.
Double-ended connector cables that are longer than F39JC7B cannot be used for series connection.
2. Models ending in -04 can be connected in series without an
optional Cable with Connectors on Both Ends because they
have a Connector with a 0.2-m cable on top.
F3SS
Note: 1. Use a switch suitable for micro
loads.
2. If K3 is not necessary, shortcircuit the auxiliary output with
the EDM input.
Emitter
E3FS
E3ZS
+24 VDC
K1
(See
K3
note 2.)
Series Connection (Up to 3 Sets)
The use of series connection types (models ending in -01 or -04)
enables series connection as shown in the figure at the right. Any type
of Sensor can be used at the top end.
F3SN-A@SS
K2
Power
supply
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Receiver
(See (See
note 1.) note 1.)
0V
F3SP-T01
K1
S3
F39-TC5
K2 K3
S1
F3SJ Ver.2
S2
K1
MS4800
S1
(See
(See
note 1.) note 1.)
RS-485(B) (Pink)
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
RS-485(A) (Gray)
Product
Selection
Emitter
When the EDM is Not Used
When the EDM is not necessary
1. Use the F39-MC11 to disable the
EDM.
or
2. Disable the EDM by changing the
wiring as shown in the figure below
when the auxiliary output is set to
the Dark-ON mode.
Auxiliary output (Yellow)
Wiring for the Auto-reset
Mode
Receiver Cable
F39-JC@A-D or
F39-JC@E@-D
(Cable sheath
color: black)
Safety
Sensors
Emitter Cable
F39-JC@A-L or
F39-JC@E@-L
(Cable sheath
color: gray)
EDM input (Red)
Receiver
0 V (Blue)
Emitter
S1: External test switch
S2: Interlock/lockout reset switch
S3: Lockout reset switch
(If the switch is not necessary, connect between the reset input and +24 VDC.)
K1, K2: Relay that controls the dangerous parts of machines, etc.
K3: Load, PLC, etc. (used for monitoring)
Receiver
F3SN-A@@@@P25SS-@@
Cable with Connectors on Both
Ends (for Receiver)
F39-JCR2B-D, F39-JCR5B-D,
or F39-JC3B-D
(See notes 1 and 2.)
Receiver
F3SN-A@@@@P25SS-01
or
F3SN-A@@@@P25SS-04
Cable with Connector on One
End (for Receiver)
F39-JC@A-D or F39-JC@E@-D
419
F3SN-A_SS.fm Page 420 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:53 PM
F3SN-A@SS
I/O Circuit Diagrams
Circuit
Display
*3
Brown
+24 VDC
2
Green
External
indicator output
3
4
Emitter main
circuit
Load
Test input *1
White
1
Interlock selection input *2
Yellow
7
4
0V
Reset input *2
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Blue
0V
7
5
6
Gray
Pink
RS-485(A)
RS-485(B)
Gray
Pink
5
6
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
Brown
2
Red
8
Receiver main
circuit 2
External relay monitor input *2
Green
3
Control output 1
Load
White
1
Control output 2
*3
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
External
indicator output
Receiver main
circuit 1
Load
8
Yellow
4
Load
Display
Auxiliary
output
Load
Blue
7
7
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F39-JCR5A (0.5 m)
F39-JC3A (3 m)
F39-JC7A (7 m)
F39-JC10A (10 m)
F39-JC15A (15 m)
F39-JC3E@ (3 m)
F39-JC7E@ (7 m)
F39-JC10E@ (10 m)
F39-JC15E@ (15 m)
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
Model
F3SN-A@SS
F39-TC5
0V
Note: The numbers in ❍ indicate pin numbers of the Connector.
The numbers in ● indicate pin numbers of the series connection Connectors.
*1. Open: normal light emission, short: stops light emission
*2. Refer to “Connections: Basic Connection” on page 419.
*3. The section encircled with the dashed line applies to models ending in -01 and -04 only.
Cable with Connector on One End
F3SS
F3SS
420
Cable
Pin No. sheath
color
Internal wiring
1
2
4
3
5
3
6
8
2
7
1
4
5
6
7
8
Cable sheath color
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Gray
Pink
Blue
Red
Signal name
Receiver
Emitter
1
White
Control output 2
Interlock
selection input
2
Brown
+24 V
+24 V
3
Green
Control output 1 Test input
4
Yellow
Auxiliary output
Reset input
5
Gray
RS-485 (A)
RS-485 (A)
6
Pink
RS-485 (B)
RS-485 (B)
7
Blue
0V
0V
8
Red
EDM input
N.C.
F3SN-A_SS.fm Page 421 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:53 PM
F3SN-A@SS
Dimensions
(Unit: mm)
Main Unit
F3SN-A@@@P25SS-@@
Dimensions can be calculated for each model by using the following equations.
Dimension C1 (protective height): 4 digits in the model name
Protective height
Dimension A = C1 + 64
(C1)
Dimension B = C1 + 32
Dimension D = 18.5
Dimension E = C1 - 37
Dimension F = Refer to the table right.
Number of intermediate
mounting brackets
Dimension F
(See note.)
to 0640
0
0641 to 1280
1
--F = B/2
1281 to 1822
2
F = B/3
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
2
Four, M5
30
(16)
MS4800
6.5 dia.
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
20
Product
Selection
Mounting screw holes
Two, mounting brackets
Safety
Sensors
Note: If value F obtained from the above equation is not used, set F to 670 mm or less.
11
8
Two, mounting holes
30
28
27
22
5.5
9.25
22
11
Two, M5
Two, M5
E
15
(41.8) 38
B
B
A
C1
27
(Protective height)
Two, mounting holes
M5 up-set hexagon bolt
with Philips driver slot
Intermediate
bracket
F
F
Beam
1
15
13.5
11
16
D
32
Four, mounting holes
16.9
45
5.5
Two , mounting holes
M12 waterproof connector
20
30
6.5 dia.
Mounting Precautions
Note: 1. The mounting bracket (3) (see Mounting Brackets (Intermediate)) is shown on the left-hand side of the Sensor as an example. If the
mounting bracket (3) is on the right-hand side of the Sensor, then the mounting holes must also be on the right-hand side.
2. When using the cable bent, use a minimum bending radius of R = 36 mm. Fig. A shows an example when using a Cable with a Straight
Connector. Fig. B shows the dimensions when using a Cable with a Right-angle Connector.
Fig. A
Fig. B
Connector Cable
R36mm
80 mm min.
43 mm max.
80 mm min.
R36 mm
Connector Cable
Connector Cable
421
F3SN-A_SS.fm Page 422 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:53 PM
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@@@@P25SS-01
Connector cap
20.8 17.3
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
M12 Waterproof Connector
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A@@@@P25SS-02
44.7
M12 waterproof connector
F3SN-A@@@@P25SS-04
7 dia.
40.7
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
M12 waterproof connector
200
7 dia.
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
44.7
M12 waterproof connector
422
400
400
7 dia.
14
F3SN-A_SS.fm Page 423 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:53 PM
F3SN-A@SS
Accessories
Mounting Brackets (Top and Bottom)
5.5
6.5 dia.
32
24
9.25
14
13.5
9 dia.
14.2 dia.
20
4-30°
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
30
Note: Provided with the main unit.
30
2
R2 max.
Mounting Brackets (Intermediate)
25
11
2
16
1
22
17
12
22
30
22
Material: Iron (zinc plating)
16
10
42
20
M5 × 8 bracket fixing screw
2.3
22
Intermediate bracket (3)
18
Note: Provided with the main unit.
The number of brackets
required depends on the total
length of the Sensor.
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
45
4.3
Product
Selection
Four, R2.15
Material: Iron (zinc plating)
Safety
Sensors
22 dia.
6.5 dia.
11
13.75 11
33
38
15
11
30
Intermediate
bracket (1)
Intermediate
bracket (2)
M4 × 6 sensor fixing screw
5.5
21.25
19
5.5
9 dia.
423
F3SN-A_SS.fm Page 424 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:53 PM
F3SN-A@SS
Accessories (Order Separately)
Wall Mounting Bracket
F39-L18
90°
33
18
15.5 12.25
2
5.5
9 dia.
30°
30
20
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
22 dia.
4.3
14.2 dia.
Eight, R2.15
30
38
Free-location Bracket
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
F39-L19
Mounting
5
8.5
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
11
(6.4)
Emitter Cover or Receiver Cover
30
5
18 3.3
1.5
30
(40)
5.5 dia.
24
10
5
10.8
MS4800
MS4800
M5 up-set
hexagon bolt
with Philips
driver slot
37
M5 up-set hexagon bolt
7
with Philips driver slot
(4.7) (15.5)
15
20
10
(32.3)
Free-location Bracket
F39-L20
25.5
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
10.5
5.5 dia.
24
30.5
5
43
32.75
17.75
12
12
19.3
M4 up-set hexagon bolt
with Philips driver slot
6.5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
6
(14)
20 (15.5)
23
15.5
9 dia.
20
(4.7)
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
6.5 dia.
M5 up-set hexagon bolt
with Philips driver slot (4.7)
11
5.5
0.8
25.25
10
(15)
Side mounting
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
(30.5)
(43)
(30)
M4 up-set hexagon bolt with Philips driver slot
(14)
23
(44)
30
M5 up-set
hexagon bolt with
Philips driver slot
(15)
30
Emitter Cover or Receiver Cover
Back mounting
F3SS
F3SS
M4 up-set hexagon bolt
with Philips driver slot
(44)
(23)
(15)
Emitter Cover or Receiver Cover
30
30
(44)
(14)
(4.7)
424
(43)
M5 up-set hexagon bolt
with Philips driver slot
F3SN-A_SS.fm Page 425 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:53 PM
F3SN-A@SS
Cable with Connector on One End with Straight Connectors
F39-JC3A (L = 3 m)
F39-JC7A (L = 7 m)
F39-JC10A (L = 10 m)
F39-JC15A (L = 15 m)
39.5
L
15 dia.
Waterproof Connector
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
Color: Emitter (gray)
Receiver (black)
Safety
Sensors
Vinyl insulated round cable 6.6 mm dia.
8 cores (4 twisted pairs) (conductor cross sectional area: 0.3 mm2/
insulation outside diameter: 1.15 mm dia.)
Standard length: L
Cable with Connector on One End with Right-angle Connectors
F39-JC1E1 (L = 1 m)
F39-JC3E1 (L = 3 m)
F39-JC7E1 (L = 7 m)
F39-JC10E1 (L = 10 m)
F39-JC15E1 (L = 15 m)
F39-JC1E2 (L = 1 m)
F39-JC3E2 (L = 3 m)
F39-JC7E2 (L = 7 m)
F39-JC10E2 (L = 10 m)
F39-JC15E2 (L = 15 m)
25.3
L
28.3
Waterproof
Connector
Vinyl insulated round cable 6.6 mm dia.
8 cores (4 twisted pairs) (conductor cross sectional area: 0.3 mm2/
insulation outside diameter: 1.15 mm dia.)
Standard length: L
Color: Emitter (gray)
Receiver (black)
Cable with Connectors on Both Ends with Straight Connectors
F39-JCR2B (L = 0.2 m)
F39-JCR5B (L = 0.5 m)
F39-JC3B (L = 3 m)
F39-JC5B (L = 5 m)
F39-JC7B (L = 7 m)
F39-JC10B (L = 10 m)
F39-JC15B (L = 15 m)
F39-JC20B (L = 20 m)
39.5
15 dia.
L
43
15 dia.
Waterproof Connector
Waterproof Connector
Vinyl insulated round cable 6.6 mm dia.
8 cores (4 twisted pairs) (conductor cross sectional area: 0.3 mm2/
insulation outside diameter: 1.15 mm dia.)
Standard length: L
Color: Emitter (gray)
Receiver (black)
Refer to F3SN-A/F3SN-B, F3SH-A on page 378 for information not provided in the model number.
425
F3SN-A_SS.fm Page 426 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:53 PM
F3SN-A@SS
Connection Circuit Examples
An Example of Safety Circuits Where No Controller is Used
For category 4 rating
Emitter
Applicable operation mode
• Manual reset mode
• Using the external relay monitor function
Receiver
F3SN-A@SS
Cable with Connector on
One End (for Receiver)
F39-JC@A-D or
F39-JC@E@-D
Timing Chart
Light incident
Light interrupted
KM3
Shield
0 V (Blue)
Auxiliary output
(Yellow)
Control output 1
(Green)
Control output 2
(White)
+24 V (Brown)
External relay monitor input
(Red)
S2
RS-485(B) (Pink)
+24 V (Brown)
Reset input (Yellow)
S1
Interlock selection input
(White)
Shield
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
(Red)
Open
Test input (Green)
RS-485(A) (Gray)
0 V (Blue)
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Cable with Connector on
One End (for Emitter)
F39-JC@A-L or
F39-JC@E@-L
S1: External test switch
S2: Interlock/lockout reset switch
KM1, KM2: Relay with forcibly guided contacts (G7SA)
KM3: Solid-state contactor (G3J)
M: 3-phase motor
E1: 24 VDC power supply (S82K)
PLC: Programmable Controller
(Used for monitoring. This is not a part of a safety system.)
External test switch
(S1)
Reset switch
(S2)
KM1
Control output
KM1
KM1, KM2
N.O. contact
KM1 KM2
KM2
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
KM2
KM1, KM2
N.C. contact
PLC input *
+24 VDC
E1
0V
IN
M
OUT
PLC output
PLC
MS4800
MS4800
* The output operation mode of the
auxiliary output is the Dark-ON output mode.
An Example of Safety Circuits Where the F3SP-B1P Controller is Used
Applicable operation mode
• Manual reset mode
S1: External test switch
S2: Interlock/lockout reset switch
S3: Lockout reset switch (If the switch is not necessary, connect
between X1 and H1.)
KM1, KM2: Relay with forcibly guided contacts (G7SA)
KM3: Solid-state contactor (G3J)
M: 3-phase motor
E1: 24 VDC power supply (S82K)
PLC: Programmable Controller
(Used for monitoring. This is not a part of a safety system.)
For category 4 rating
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
Emitter
Receiver
F3SN-A@SS
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
Cable with Connectors
on Both Ends
F39-JC@B
PLC
IN1
IN2
OUT
Timing Chart
KM3
S1
S2
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
H1
A1
L1
J1
H1
X1
OSSD2
13
23
33
External test switch
(S1)
41
Reset switch
(S2)
Reset Auxiliary
Interlock Test
selection
OSSD1
P1
output
K1
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
K2
K1
K2
EDM
(External device
monitoring)
PE
T31
F3SP-B1P
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
+24 VDC
E1
0V
T32
14
24
34
KM1
KM1
KM2
KM1
Control output
KM2
K1, K2
N.O. contact
KM1, KM2
N.O. contact
M
A2
Light incident
Light interrupted
KM2
42
K1, K2
N.C. contact
KM1, KM2
N.C. contact
PLC input 1 Depends on the operation mode of the auxiliary output
PLC input 2
PLC output
F3SS
F3SS
Wiring for the auto-reset mode
S1
S3
H1
L1
Interlock
selection
426
J1
Test
H1
X1
Reset
Note: 1. If the EDM is not necessary, short-circuit T31 and T32.
2. For the number and arrangement of all terminals on the
F3SP-B1P, see the instruction manual packaged together
with the F3SP-B1P.
F3SN-A_SS.fm Page 427 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:53 PM
F3SN-A@SS
An Example of Safety Circuits Where the F3SX Safety Controller is Used
(with Two F3SN-A@SS Sets Connected)
F3SX-EL2 (Manual Reset)
For category 4 rating
Emitter
Receiver
F3SN-A@SS
Wiring for use of the test
function of the Light Curtain
Control output 2 (white)
0 V (blue)
Shield
Control output 2 (white)
0 V (blue)
Shield
Auxiliary output (yellow)
(See note 2.)
Control output 1 (green)
Control output 1 (green)
+24 V (brown)
External relay monitor input
(red) (See note 2.)
+24 V (brown)
Open
Reset input (yellow)
Interlock selection input (white)
Open (red)
Test input (green)
Shield
0 V (blue)
+24 V (brown)
Reset input (yellow)
Interlock selection input (white)
Open (red)
Test input (green)
Open
FB
15
9
11
16
14
KM1 KM2
Auxiliary output (yellow)
(See note 2.)
External relay monitor input
(red) (See note 2.)
+24 V (brown)
Open
+24 V (brown)
Reset input (yellow)
Interlock selection input (white)
E1
24 V
Open (red)
Test input (green)
Shield
E1
0 V (blue)
24 V
RS-485(B)
(pink)
S1:
Emergency stop switch (A165E, A22E)
S2:
Reset switch
KM1, KM2: Relay with forcibly guided contacts
M:
Three-phase motor
E1:
24-VDC power supply (S82K)
RS-485(A)
(gray)
KM1
KM2
M
Emitter
F3SN-A@SS
Receiver
Timing Chart
Reset switch (S2)
OFF
ON
F3SN-A@SS
control outputs
1 and 2
F3SX-EL2
SS1, SS2
ON
Motor (M)
Note: 1. The above circuit diagram conforms to Category 4.
2. In this connection example, the auxiliary output is set to the
standard setting (Dark-ON operation).
To operate using non-standard settings, refer to the catalog or
Instruction Manual for the F3SN-A@SS.
Use the optional F39-MC11 Setting Console to disable the EDM.
ON
Emergency stop
switch (S1)
KM1, KM2
F3SS
10
0V
A2 SSC AS3 AS2 AS1 SS1 SS2
E3FS
E3ZS
12
F3SX-EL2
24 VDC
F3SN-A@SS
24 VDC
E1
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
13
Control circuits
24 VDC
F3SP-T01
7
F39-TC5
5
F3SJ Ver.2
4
MS4800
3
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
1
Product
Selection
6
Safety
Sensors
8
F3SS
2
E3FS
E3ZS
Y3
F3SN-A@SS
Y2
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
Y1
F3SP-T01
T11 T12 T21 T22
F39-TC5
E1
A1
F3SJ Ver.2
24 V
MS4800
S2
S1
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
RS-485(A)
(gray)
RS-485(B)
(pink)
Product
Selection
Test
switch
F39-JC@A-D or
F39-JC@E@-D
Cable with
Connector on One
End (for Receiver)
Safety
Sensors
Shield
0 V (blue)
F39-JC@A-L or
F39-JC@E@-L
Cable with
Connector on One
End (for Emitter)
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Rotate
Stop
Reset input
Reset input
Emergency
F3SN
light
stop switch
F3SN
interrupted light
OFF
incident
Note: This timing chart does not allow for I/O device response delays.
Reset input
Emergency
stop switch
ON
427
F3SN-A_SS.fm Page 428 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:53 PM
F3SN-A@SS
F3SX-EL2 (Auto-reset)
For category 4 rating
Emitter
F3SN-A@SS
Receiver
Wiring for use of the test
function of the Light Curtain
F39-JC@A-D or
F39-JC@E@-D
Cable with
Connector on One
End (for Receiver)
Shield
Auxiliary output (yellow)
(See note 2.)
0 V (blue)
2
8
6
1
3
4
5
7
13
12
10
Control circuits
E1
F3SX-EL2
24 VDC
0V
FB
15
9
11
16
14
KM1 KM2
Auxiliary output (yellow)
(See note 2.)
External relay monitor input
(red) (See note 2.)
+24 V (brown)
F3SP-T01
E1
24 V
Open
E1
+24 V (brown)
24 V
Interlock selection input (white)
F39-TC5
Shield
Y3
Shield
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SP-T01
Control output 2 (white)
Y2
24 VDC
MS4800
F39-TC5
0 V (blue)
Y1
A2 SSC AS3 AS2 AS1 SS1 SS2
F3SJ Ver.2
Control output 2 (white)
T11 T12 T21 T22
24 VDC
MS4800
Control output 1 (green)
E1
A1
Reset input (yellow)
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
24 V
Open (red)
Test input (green)
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
S2
S1
0 V (blue)
Product
Selection
Control output 1 (green)
+24 V (brown)
+24 V (brown)
External relay monitor input
(red) (See note 2.)
RS-485(A)
(gray)
RS-485(B)
(pink)
Open
Interlock selection input (white)
Test input (green)
Reset input (yellow)
Shield
0 V (blue)
Open (red)
+24 V (brown)
Open
Reset input (yellow)
Test
switch
Interlock selection input (white)
Open (red)
Test input (green)
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Shield
0 V (blue)
F39-JC@A-L or
F39-JC@E@-L
Cable with
Connector on One
End (for Emitter)
RS-485(B)
(pink)
KM2
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
S1:
Emergency stop switch (A165E, A22E)
S2:
Reset switch
KM1, KM2: Relay with forcibly guided contacts
M:
Three-phase motor
E1:
24-VDC power supply (S82K)
RS-485(A)
(gray)
KM1
M
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
Emitter
F3SN-A@SS
Receiver
Timing Chart
Reset switch (S2)
ON
OFF
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
Emergency stop
switch (S1)
ON
F3SN-A@SS
control outputs
1 and 2
F3SX-EL2
SS1, SS2
ON
F3SS
F3SS
KM1, KM2
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Motor (M)
Rotate
Stop
F3SN
Emergency
light
stop switch Emergency
F3SN
interrupted light
OFF
stop switch
incident
ON
Note: This timing chart does not allow for I/O device response delays.
428
Note: 1. The above circuit diagram conforms to Category 4.
2. In this connection example, the auxiliary output is set to the
standard setting (Dark-ON operation).
To operate using non-standard settings, refer to the catalog or
Instruction Manual for the F3SN-A@SS.
Use the optional F39-MC11 Setting Console to disable the EDM.
F3SN-A_SS.fm Page 429 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:53 PM
F3SN-A@SS
F3SX-N-L2R (Manual Reset)
For category 4 rating
Emitter
+24 V (brown)
Shield
0 V (blue)
Control output 2 (white)
Auxiliary output (yellow)
(See note 2.)
Control output 1 (green)
+24 V (brown)
External relay monitor input
(red) (See note 2.)
+24 V (brown)
Open
Reset input (yellow)
Interlock selection input (white)
Shield
0 V (blue)
Open (red)
Test input (green)
Open
0V
15
9
11
16
14
13
F3SS
K2
A2 SSC AS3 AS2 AS1 EL1 EL2 FB
E3FS
E3ZS
AC
F3SX-N-L2R
24 VDC
F3SN-A@SS
K1
24 VDC
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
33
F3SP-T01
Control circuits
E1
23
F39-TC5
11
7
F3SJ Ver.2
5
MS4800
4
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
3
Product
Selection
1
Safety
Sensors
6
F3SS
8
E3FS
E3ZS
2
F3SN-A@SS
24 VDC
Y3
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
E1
A1 T11 T12 T21 T22 Y1 Y2
F3SP-T01
Fuses
24 V
F39-TC5
S2
S1
F3SJ Ver.2
RS-485(B)
(pink)
MS4800
Reset input (yellow)
RS-485(A)
(gray)
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Interlock selection input (white)
Open (red)
F39-JC@A-D or
F39-JC@E@-D
Cable with
Connector on One
End (for Receiver)
Product
Selection
Test input (green)
Shield
0 V (blue)
F39-JC@A-L or
F39-JC@E@-L
Cable with
Connector on One
End (for Emitter)
Safety
Sensors
Test
switch
Receiver
F3SN-A@SS
Wiring for use of the test
function of the Light Curtain
12
12
10
24
34
E1
KM1 KM2
24V
KM2
RS-485(A)
(gray)
M
Emitter
F3SN-A@SS
Timing Chart
Reset switch (S2)
F3SN-A@SS
control outputs
1 and 2
F3SX-N-L2R
R output
ON
Motor (M)
0 V (blue)
Shield
Note: 1. The above circuit diagram conforms to Category 4.
2. In this connection example, the auxiliary output is set to the
standard setting (Dark-ON operation).
To operate using non-standard settings, refer to the catalog or
Instruction Manual for the F3SN-A@SS.
Use the optional F39-MC11 Setting Console to disable the EDM.
OFF
ON
KM1, KM2
S1:
Emergency stop switch (A165E, A22E)
S2:
Reset switch
KM1, KM2: Relay with forcibly guided contacts or magnetic contactor
M:
Three-phase motor
E1:
24-VDC power supply (S82K)
External indicator: Filament-type indicator
(When an external indicator is not necessary, connect
resistance of 1/4 W, 4.7 kΩ.)
ON
Emergency stop
switch (S1)
External indicator
Receiver
Control output 2 (white)
External relay monitor input
(red) (See note 2.)
Control output 1 (green)
RS-485(B)
(pink)
Auxiliary output (yellow)
(See note 2.)
+24 V (brown)
Open
+24 V (brown)
KM1
Interlock selection input (white)
Shield
E1
24 V
0 V (blue)
Open (red)
Test input (green)
Reset input (yellow)
External indicator
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Rotate
Stop
Emergency
Reset input
stop switch Emergency
OFF
stop switch
ON
Note: This timing chart does not allow for I/O device response delays.
Reset input
F3SN
Reset input
light
F3SN
interrupted light
incident
429
F3SN-A_SS.fm Page 430 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:53 PM
F3SN-A@SS
F3SX-N-L2R (Auto-reset)
For category 4 rating
Emitter
+24 V (brown)
F39-JC@A-L or
F39-JC@E@-L
Cable with
Connector on One
End (for Emitter)
F39-JC@A-D or
F39-JC@E@-D
Cable with
Connector on One
End (for Receiver)
Shield
0 V (blue)
Control output 2 (white)
Auxiliary output (yellow)
(See note 2.)
Control output 1 (green)
+24 V (brown)
External relay monitor input
(red) (See note 2.)
Open
RS-485(B)
(pink)
+24 V (brown)
Test input (green)
Reset input (yellow)
Shield
0 V (blue)
Open (red)
Interlock selection input (white)
RS-485(A)
(gray)
Open
Reset input (yellow)
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Interlock selection input (white)
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Open (red)
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Test input (green)
Shield
0 V (blue)
Safety
Sensors
Test
switch
Receiver
F3SN-A@SS
Wiring for use of the test
function of the Light Curtain
S2
S1
Fuses
24 V
E1
A1 T11 T12 T21 T22 Y1 Y2
24 VDC
Y3
2
8
6
1
3
4
5
11
7
Control circuits
E1
23
33
K1
24 VDC
MS4800
MS4800
AC
F3SX-N-L2R
24 VDC
K2
0V
A2 SSC AS3 AS2 AS1 EL1 EL2 FB
15
9
11
16
14
13
12
12
10
24
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
E1
24 V
34
KM1 KM2
Shield
0 V (blue)
Control output 2 (white)
Control output 1 (green)
External relay monitor input
(red) (See note 2.)
+24 V (brown)
RS-485(B)
(pink)
Auxiliary output (yellow)
(See note 2.)
Open
+24 V (brown)
F3SP-T01
KM2
Interlock selection input (white)
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
KM1
Shield
F39-TC5
E1
24 V
0 V (blue)
Open (red)
Test input (green)
Reset input (yellow)
External indicator
RS-485(A)
(gray)
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
M
Emitter
F3SN-A@SS
Receiver
Timing Chart
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
Emergency stop
switch (S1)
ON
F3SN-A@SS
control outputs
1 and 2
F3SX-N-L2R
R output
ON
External indicator
F3SS
F3SS
KM1, KM2
Motor (M)
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Rotate
Stop
F3SN
Emergency
light
stop switch Emergency
F3SN
interrupted light
OFF
stop switch
incident
ON
Note: This timing chart does not allow for I/O device response delay.
430
S1:
Emergency stop switch (A165E, A22E)
S2:
Reset switch
KM1, KM2: Relay with forcibly guided contacts or magnetic contactor
M:
Three-phase motor
E1:
24-VDC power supply (S82K)
External indicator: Filament-type indicator
(When an external indicator is not necessary, connect
resistance of 1/4 W, 4.7 kΩ.)
Note: 1. The above circuit diagram conforms to Category 4.
2. In this connection example, the auxiliary output is set to the
standard setting (Dark-ON operation).
To operate using non-standard settings, refer to the catalog or
Instruction Manual for the F3SN-A@SS.
Use the optional F39-MC11 Setting Console to disable the EDM.
F3SN-A_SS.fm Page 431 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:53 PM
F3SN-A@SS
Safety Precautions
Refer to “Regulations and Standards” and “Safety Precautions” for F3SN-A/F3SN-B/F3SH-A on page 378.
“Type Certification” specified in the Chapter 44. 2 of the Industrial Safety and Health Law in Japan does not apply to independent F3SS Sensors.
This law applies to systems incorporating the Sensor. When using the F3SL Sensor in Japan as a “safety device for presses or shearing machines,”
as specified in the Chapter 42 of the same law, apply for certification for the overall system.
!WARNING
Detection Zone and Intrusion Path
Refer to “Precautions for All Safety Sensors” on page 242 for the
installation conditions of Safety Light Curtains.
· Use of the Fixed Blanking Function
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
Receiver 2
F3SP-T01
Emitter 2
F39-TC5
Receiver 1
Special
connecting cable
F39-JCR2B or
F39-JCR5B or
F39-JC3B
F3SJ Ver.2
Correct
Emitter 1
MS4800
Floating blanking is used to increase the minimum
detectable object size. Be sure to use the minimum
detectable object size for floating blanking when
calculating safety distance. Failure to do so may prevent
the machine from stopping before an operator reaches
the dangerous area and may result in serious injury.
Two or more pairs of the F3SN-A@SS can be connected in series.
When connected in series, the F3SN-A@SS Sensors generate
beams in a time-sharing manner to prevent mutual interference and
ensure safety.
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Always maintain a safety distance (S) between the Light
Curtain and a hazardous part of a machine.
Failure to do so may prevent the machine from stopping
before an operator reaches the dangerous area and may
result in serious injury.
How to Prevent Mutual Interference
Series Connections (Up to 3 sets, 240 beams, Sensor
models ending in -01 and -04 are required for series
connection)
Product
Selection
Safety Distance
Installation
Safety
Sensors
Install protective structures in all parts of the detection
zone where detection is disabled by the fixed blanking
function so no one can pass through the detection zone
to reach the hazardous part of the machine. Failure to do
so may result in serious injury.
Precautions for Correct Use
Do not used the product in atmospheres or environments that exceed
product ratings.
Receiver
Emitter
Refer to the “Precautions for All Safety Sensors” on page 242 for
calculating the safety distance.
Incorrect
Incorrect
Emitter 1
Receiver 1
Emitter 1
Receiver 2
Receiver 2
Emitter 2
Emitter 2
Receiver 1
Do not connect the Emitter and
Receiver in series, or a lockout
condition will result.
Do not combine an Emitter with a
Receiver of a different pair.
This will cause a lockout condition
and detection of objects will be
disabled.
When Not Connected in Series
Refer to “Precautions for All Safety Sensors” on page 242 for
information on preventing mutual interference of Safety Light Curtains
that are not connected in series.
431
E3ZS_E3FS.fm Page 432 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:01 PM
Single-beam Safety Sensor
E3ZS/E3FS
Detects Intrusions into Hazardous
Areas with a Single Beam and
Complies with International Safety
Standards.
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
E3FS
E3ZS
Be sure to read the “Safety Precautions” on page 446
and the “Precautions for All Safety Sensors” on page 242.
Features
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Connect up to 4 sets of E3ZS/E3FS per B1 Module for F3SX Safety Controller
Connect to a B1 Module for F3SX to Create a Type 2 Safety Sensor
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
Note: The B1 Module is designed specifically for E3ZS/E3FS input of the F3SX. The safety output turns OFF when light is interrupted or when an
error occurs with one or more of the E3ZS/E3FS Sensors connected to the B1 Module.
B1 Module for the F3SX
(F3SX-EB1 shown here)
E3ZS
E3FS
E3FS
Connects simply and easily using a wide range of accessories.
E3FS-10B4 2M
Dummy plug
For unused E3ZS/E3FS Sensor connectors
E3ZS-T81A
F3SX-EB1 shown
● With Right-angle Connectors
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
● With Right-angle Connectors
E3FS-10B4-M1-M
432
E3ZS_E3FS.fm Page 433 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:01 PM
E3ZS/E3FS
Application Examples
For gaps in small-sized equipment
Protect personnel from the hazards of gaps in
small-sized equipment or of semi-automated
machinery.
The E3ZS is a Human Body Detection Sensor (Type 2) for
production equipment. Make sure to use it in combination with an
F3SX Safety Controller.
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
Note: Since the E3FS has not received any safety certification for use by
itself, make sure to connect it with an F3SX for use in safety
applications.
F3SJ Ver.2
The E3FS is a Human Body Detection Sensor (Type 2) for
production equipment. Make sure to use it in combination with a
F3SX Safety Controller. A combination of E3FS and E3ZS
Sensors can be connected to the B1 Module of the F3SX.
MS4800
Use as a safety measure for protection from
hazardous gaps or as guards for medium-sized
equipment.
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
For gaps in small to medium-sized equipment
Product
Selection
Note: Test Input
Use this function to enable the emitter of E3ZS to be turned ON/OFF
from outside. It is possible to detect a number of E3ZS errors by
monitoring the status of the test input and the E3ZS output signal.
Safety
Sensors
When used by itself, the E3ZS conforms to EN954-1 (Category 1).
No particular safety restrictions apply to the E3ZS when used by
itself, except the inability to use in human detection safety
applications. We recommend using it in Light ON mode and using
it with error detection via test input.
433
E3ZS_E3FS.fm Page 434 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:01 PM
E3ZS/E3FS
Ordering Information
Sensors
Red light
Sensor method
Appearance
Case material
Connection
method
Sensing distance
Polybutylene
terephthalate
Output
Infrared light
Model
E3ZS-T81A
0.2 to 3 m
Pre-wired
cable (2 m)
ABS
Through-beam
10 m
E3FS-10B4 2M
PNP
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Brass
M12
connector
E3FS-10B4-M1-M
10 m
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Controller
Instant Breaking Models
F3SX-N-@@@R (with Relay Safety Output)
Input types
E3ZS/E3FS Safety
F3SJ/F3SN/F3SH
Emergency Stop
Sensors
Safety Light Curtains
Switches
MS4800
MS4800
4 sets
---
1 set
Model
Door Switches
---
F3SX-N-B1R
Width (W)
90.0 mm
Weight
Approx. 0.5 kg
4 sets
---
1 set
2 sets
F3SX-N-B1D1R
112.5 mm
Approx. 0.6 kg
4 sets
---
1 set
4 sets
F3SX-N-B1D1D1R
135.0 mm
Approx. 0.7 kg
4 sets
2 sets
1 set
---
F3SX-N-L2B1R
112.5 mm
Approx. 0.6 kg
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
Instant Breaking Models
F3SX-E-@@@ (with DC Solid-state Safety Output)
Input types
E3ZS/E3FS Safety
F3SJ/F3SN/F3SH
Sensors
Safety Light Curtains
Emergency
Stop Switches
Model
Door Switches
Width (W)
Weight
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
4 sets
---
1 set
---
F3SX-EB1
45.0 mm
Approx. 0.3 kg
8 sets
---
1 set
---
F3SX-E-B1B1
67.5 mm
Approx. 0.4 kg
4 sets
---
1 set
2 sets
F3SX-E-B1D1
67.5 mm
Approx. 0.4 kg
4 sets
2 sets
1 set
---
F3SX-E-L2B1
67.5 mm
Approx. 0.4 kg
Instant Breaking Models
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SX-E-@@@R (with Relay Safety Output and DC Solid-state Safety Output)
Input types
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3ZS/E3FS Safety
F3SJ/F3SN/F3SH
Sensors
Safety Light Curtains
4 sets
F3SS
F3SS
434
---
Emergency
Stop Switches
1 set
Door Switches
---
Model
F3SX-E-B1R
Width (W)
90.0 mm
Weight
Approx. 0.5 kg
E3ZS_E3FS.fm Page 435 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:01 PM
E3ZS/E3FS
OFF-delay Time Setting Models (Using Function Setup Software for the F3SX)
F3SX-N-@@@RR2 (with Relay Safety Output and DC Solid-state Safety Output)
Input types
E3ZS/E3FS Safety
F3SJ/F3SN/F3SH
Sensors
Safety Light Curtains
Emergency
Stop Switches
Model
Door Switches
Width (W)
Weight
4 sets
---
1 set
2 sets
F3SX-N-B1D1RR2
157.5 mm
Approx. 0.7 kg
4 sets
2 sets
1 set
---
F3SX-N-L2B1RR2
157.5 mm
Approx. 0.7 kg
OFF-delay Time Setting Models (Using Function Setup Software for the F3SX)
Branch Connector
Sensor Mounting Bracket (for E3FS)
Appearance
Model
Appearance
F39-CN3
Model
Y92E-B18
Dummy Plug
Appearance
Sensor Mounting Bracket (for E3ZS)
Model
Appearance
F39-CN4
Model
E39-L104
Cables with Connectors on Both Ends for Branch
Connector
Appearance
Model
Cable length
F39-JF1S
1m
F39-JF2S
2m
F39-JF5S
5m
F39-JF10S
10 m
Mutual Interference Prevention Filter (for E3ZS)
Dimensions
10.8
7.4
Model
Quantity
Remarks
4.9
1
E39-E11
31.4 11.2
0.2
F3SS
Accessories
E3FS
E3ZS
Approx. 0.6 kg
F3SN-A@SS
112.5 mm
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SX-E-L2B1R2
F3SP-T01
---
F39-TC5
1 set
F3SJ Ver.2
2 sets
MS4800
4 sets
The F3SX-series Safety Controller is a multiple input, single output Controller. This is useful for individual control over the safety output when using
multiple safety input devices. Custom models are also available. Refer to the F3SX on page 652, and consult with your OMRON representative.
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Approx. 0.6 kg
Product
Selection
Approx. 0.5 kg
112.5 mm
Safety
Sensors
90.0 mm
F3SX-E-B1D1R2
F3SS
F3SX-E-B1R2
2 sets
E3FS
E3ZS
---
1 set
F3SN-A@SS
1 set
---
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
---
4 sets
F3SP-T01
4 sets
F39-TC5
Weight
F3SJ Ver.2
Width (W)
MS4800
Model
Door Switches
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Emergency
Stop Switches
Product
Selection
Input types
E3ZS/E3FS Safety
F3SJ/F3SN/F3SH
Sensors
Safety Light Curtains
Safety
Sensors
F3SX-E-@@@R2 (with Relay Safety Output and DC Solid-state Safety Output)
2 per Emitter and
Receiver (4 total)
For use with E3ZS-T81A. This filter prevents mutual interference by
changing the direction of polarized light of the 2 adjacent Emitter/
Receivers. However, when the filter is attached, the maximum
sensing distance of the E3ZS is reduced to 1.5 m.
435
E3ZS_E3FS.fm Page 436 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:01 PM
E3ZS/E3FS
Cables with Connectors (Socket and Plug) on Both Ends
Type
Straight/straight
Standard cable
Right angle/right angle
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Straight/right angle
Right angle/straight
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
Robot cable
(vibration resistant)
Straight/straight
DC
Cable length L
(m)
Cable connection direction
Model
1
XS2W-D421-C81-A
2
XS2W-D421-D81-A
5
XS2W-D421-G81-A
10
XS2W-D421-J81-A
2
XS2W-D422-D81-A
5
XS2W-D422-G81-A
2
XS2W-D423-D81-A
5
XS2W-D423-G81-A
2
XS2W-D424-D81-A
5
XS2W-D424-G81-A
1
XS2W-D421-C81-R
2
XS2W-D421-D81-R
5
XS2W-D421-G81-R
10
XS2W-D421-J81-R
UL standard
●
---
Note: Extend the cable under the following conditions.
• Overall cable length for both an E3FS Receiver connected to an F3SX and the Emitter connected to the F3SX must be within 50 m.
• Overall cable length for both an E3ZS Receiver connected to an F3SX and the Emitter connected to the F3SX must be within 100 m.
Cables with Connector (Socket) on One End
Type
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
Straight
Standard cable
Right angle
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
Straight
Robot cable
(vibration resistant)
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
Right angle
DC
Cable length L
(m)
Cable connection direction
Model
1
XS2F-D421-C80-A
2
XS2F-D421-D80-A
5
XS2F-D421-G80-A
10
XS2F-D421-J80-A
1
XS2F-D422-C80-A
2
XS2F-D422-D80-A
5
XS2F-D422-G80-A
10
XS2F-D422-J80-A
1
XS2F-D421-C80-R
2
XS2F-D421-D80-R
5
XS2F-D421-G80-R
10
XS2F-D421-J80-R
1
XS2F-D422-C80-R
2
XS2F-D422-D80-R
5
XS2F-D422-G80-R
10
XS2F-D422-J80-R
UL standard
●
---
Note: Extend the cable under the following conditions.
• Overall cable length for both an E3FS Receiver connected to an F3SX and the Emitter connected to the F3SX must be within 50 m.
• Overall cable length for both an E3ZS Receiver connected to an F3SX and the Emitter connected to the F3SX must be within 100 m.
Connector Plug Assemblies, Solder Type *
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
Applicable cable diameter
(mm)
3 dia. (3 to 4 dia.)
Cable connection
direction
Straight
Right angle
Connection
method
Solder
Model
XS2G-D425
XS2G-D426
F3SS
F3SS
* Use when connecting an E3ZS-T81A or E3FS-10B4 2M to an F39-CN3 Branch Connector.
Connector Plug Assemblies, Screw-on Type *
Applicable cable diameter
(mm)
3 dia. (3 to 4 dia.)
Cable connection
direction
Straight
Right angle
Connection
method
Screw-on
Model
XS2G-D4S5
XS2G-D4S6
* Use when connecting an E3ZS-T81A or E3FS-10B4 2M to an F39-CN3 Branch Connector.
436
E3ZS_E3FS.fm Page 437 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:01 PM
E3ZS/E3FS
Accessory Connection Example
Emitter
Receiver
(E3FS-10B4-M1-M)
Cable with Connectors on Both Ends
Branch Connector for the E3FS
(XS2W-D42@-@81-@)
(F39-CN3)
(XS2W-D42@-@81-@)
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
First Sensor
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
C
Single-beam Safety Sensor
Product
Selection
B
Safety
Sensors
A
Cable with Connectors on Both Ends
Connector
Cable with Connectors on Both Ends
for Single-beam Safety Sensor Branch
Connection
(F39-JF@S)
Second Sensor
Connector
Safety Controller (F3SX)
B1
Connector Plug Assembly
(XS2G-D4@@)
B
Fourth Sensor
Connector
Note: Cable with Connectors on Both Ends
for Single-beam Safety Sensor Branch
Connection
(F39-JF@S) may also be used.
Cable with Connector (Socket)
on One End
(XS2F-D42@-@80-@)
Connector Plug Assembly
(XS2G-D4@@)
C
Third Sensor
Connector
2: Connect an F39-CN4
Dummy Plug to unused
Single-beam Safety Sensor
Connectors.
A
Note 1: The Connector is supplied
with the F3SX.
Branch Connector for
the E3FS
(F39-CN3)
Receiver
Emitter
(E3FS-10B4 2M)
Receiver
or
Emitter
(E3ZS-T81A)
437
E3ZS_E3FS.fm Page 438 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:01 PM
E3ZS/E3FS
Specifications
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Item
Model
Sensor type
Safety category
Standard sensing object
Lens diameter
Sensing distance
Response time (under
stable light incident
condition)
Startup waiting time
Power supply voltage (Vs)
Current consumption
(no load)
Light source (emitted
wavelength)
Effective aperture angle
(EAA)
Control output (OSSD)
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Output operation mode
Input voltage
MS4800
MS4800
Indicators
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
Test functions
Connection method
Protective circuits
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
Ambient temperature
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
Ambient humidity
Ambient operating light
intensity
Insulation resistance
Dielectric strength
Degree of protection
Operating
Vibration
limit
resistance
Malfunction
Operating
Shock
limit
resistance
Malfunction
Material
Weight (packed state)
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
Accessories
E3ZS-T81A
Through-beam models
See Applicable standards.
Opaque object: 18 mm in diameter or greater
Diameter 6.7 mm / diameter 9 mm
0.2 to 3 m
E3FS-10B4 2M
E3FS-10B4-M1-M
Opaque object: 11 mm in diameter or greater
0 to 10 m
1.0 ms (E3ZS only) *1
2.0 ms (E3FS only) *1
100 ms
12 to 24 VDC±10% (ripple p-p 10% max.) *2
Emitter: 15 mA max.
Receiver: 20 mA max.
24 VDC±10% (ripple p-p 10% max.) *2
Emitter: 50 mA max.
Receiver: 25 mA max.
Red LED (660 nm)
Infrared LED (870 nm)
±5° (at 3 m)
PNP transistor output, load current: 100 mA max.,
Residual voltage: 1 V max., (when load current is PNP transistor output, load current: 100 mA max.,
less than 10 mA), Residual voltage: 2 V max. (when Residual voltage: 2 V max.
load current is between 10 mA and 100 mA)
(except for voltage drop due to cable extension) *2
(except for voltage drop due to cable extension) *2
Light-ON *3
22.5 to 24 VDC: Emitter OFF (source current: 3 mA
21.5 to 24 VDC: Emitter OFF (source current: 3 mA max.)
max.)
Open or 0 to 2.5 V: Emitter ON (leakage current: 0.1 mA
Open or 0 to 2.5 V: Emitter ON (leakage current: 0.1
max.) *2
mA max.) *2
Emitter: Emitting (orange);
Emitter: Emitting (orange);
Receiver: Operation (orange), Stable (green)
Receiver: Output OFF (red), Output ON (green)
External test (light emission stop function by test input)
Pre-wired cable (2 m)
M12 connector
Power supply/output reverse connection
Output reverse connection protection, load short-circuited
protection, load short-circuit protection
protection
Operating: −10 to 55°C
Operating: −20 to 55°C
Storage: −10 to 70°C
Storage: −30 to 70°C
(with no icing or condensation)
(with no icing or condensation)
Operating: 35% to 85%, storage: 35% to 95% (with no icing or condensation)
Incandescent lamp: 3000 lx max (light intensity on the receiver surface).
Sunlight: 10,000 lx max (light intensity on the receiver surface).
20 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
1000 VAC 50/60 Hz 1 min
IP67 (IEC standard)
10 to 55 Hz, double amplitude: 0.7 mm, 50 min each in the X, Y, and Z directions
10 to 55 Hz, double amplitude: 1.5 mm, 2 h each in the X, Y, and Z directions
100 m/s2, 1000 times in the X, Y, and Z directions
500 m/s2, 3 times each in the X, Y, and Z directions
Case: Polybutylene terephthalate
Case: ABS
Case: Brass
Approx. 150 g (for one set
Approx. 125 g (for one set
Approx. 120 g (for one set including 2-m cable)
including 2-m cable)
including only Sensor)
Operation manual *4, nuts for mounting Emitter/Receiver
Operation manual *4
(2 each)
IEC 60947-5-3 (PDF-D) EN954-1 (Category 1)
--IEC (EN) 61496-1 Type 2 ESPE *5,
IEC(EN)61496-1 Type2 ESPE *5
IEC (prEN) 61496-2 Type 2 AOPD *6,
IEC(prEN)61496-2 Type2 AOPD *6
EN 954-1 (Category 2)
Sensor only
Applicable Sensor
standards connected to
F3SX
Switching element category
DC13 (control of electromagnetic load)
(from IEC60947-5-3)
Controller
F3SX Series
---
*1. This may vary according to the F3SX model connected to the Sensor. For details, refer to the F3SX operation manual.
*2. Connect the Sensor to an F3SX to use it as a safety device or as part of a safety system.
*3. Depending on the wiring, this may turn ON when light is interrupted.
For your safety, be sure to connect the pink receiver wire (mode selection input) to 24 VDC to turn ON when light is incident.
*4. F3SX operation manual is not included.
*5. Electro-Sensitive Protective Equipment
*6. Active Opto-electronic Protective Device
438
E3ZS_E3FS.fm Page 439 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:01 PM
E3ZS/E3FS
Connections
Circuit Diagram Example
F3SX-EB1 (Manual Reset)
Single-beam Safety Sensor 1
E3ZS-T81A/E3FS-10B4@@@
Emitter
Receiver
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
24 VDC (brown)
7
0 V (blue)
6
Mode selection input
(pink) *2
5
Control output
(black)
4
Test input (pink)
*1
3
Circuit diagram example without
an E3FS-10B4@@@
Single-beam Safety Sensor installed.
0 V (blue)
2
24 VDC (brown)
1
24 VDC (brown)
0 V (blue)
Mode selection input
(pink) *2
Control output
(black)
Test input (pink)
*1
0 V (blue)
24 VDC (brown)
Control circuits
Test input
Control circuits
Test input
Test input
Control circuits
Control circuits
Test input
14
15
KM1
KM2
16
E1
24 VDC (brown)
Mode selection input
(pink) *2
0 V (blue)
Control output
(black)
24 VDC (brown)
24 VDC
0 V (blue)
RY1 RY2
Test input (pink) *1
24 VDC
F3SS
13
12
24
0 V VDC
E3FS
E3ZS
11
AC
RY2
F3SN-A@SS
10
RY1
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
FB
24
0 V VDC
8
F3SP-T01
SSC AS3 AS2 AS1 SS1 SS2
24 0 V
VDC
7
F39-TC5
0V
6
F3SJ Ver.2
24 VDC
A2
9
COM
5
MS4800
24VDC
E1: 24 VDC
4
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
24 0 V
VDC
Control circuits
3
Product
Selection
2
Safety
Sensors
Fuses
1
F3SS
Y3
E3FS
E3ZS
Y2
F3SN-A@SS
Y1
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
T11 T12 T21 T22
F3SP-T01
E1
A1
F39-TC5
24 VDC
F3SJ Ver.2
22
MS4800
12
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
21
Product
Selection
S2
11
S1
Safety
Sensors
Single-beam Safety Sensor 2
E3ZS-T81A/E3FS-10B4@@@
Emitter
Receiver
E1
24 VDC (brown)
Mode selection input
(pink) *2
Control output
(black)
0 V (blue)
24 VDC (brown)
M
Test input (pink) *1
KM2
0 V (blue)
Emitter
Receiver
Single-beam Safety Sensor 4
E3ZS-T81A/E3FS-10B4@@@
KM1
Emitter
Receiver
Single-beam Safety Sensor 3
E3FS-10B4@@@
Timing Chart
Emergency stop switch S1
Reset switch S2
S1:
S2:
KM1, KM2:
RY1, RY2:
M:
E1:
Emergency stop switch with positive opening mechanism (A165E or A22E)
Reset switch
Magnetic contactor
Relay
Three-phase motor
24-VDC power supply (S82K)
Single-beam
Light incident
Safety Sensor 1 Light interrupted
Light incident
Single-beam
Safety Sensor 2 Light interrupted
Light incident
Single-beam
Safety Sensor 3 Light interrupted
Single-beam
Light incident
Safety Sensor 4 Light interrupted
DC Solid-state Safety Output
SS1, SS2
KM1, KM2 N.C. contacts
KM1, KM2 N.O. contacts
Note: 1. The above circuit diagram example conforms to Category 2.
2. The EN60204-1 stop function category is 0 (zero) for the example in
the above circuit diagram.
3. When the FB (feedback input) function of the F3SX is not used, make
setting changes with the F3SX function setup software
(F3SX-CD100-E1).
*1. The black wire is used when the Cable with Connector (Socket) on One
End (XS2F-D42@-@80-@) is connected to an E3FS-10B4-M1-M
Connector.
*2. The white wire is used when the Cable with Connector (Socket) on One
End (XS2F-D42@-@80-@) is connected to an E3FS-10B4-M1-M
Connector.
For connections, refer to the F3SX operation manual.
439
E3ZS_E3FS.fm Page 440 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:01 PM
E3ZS/E3FS
I/O Circuit Diagrams
E3ZS
Circuit Diagrams (E3ZS-T81A with PNP Output)
Timing Charts
Output mode: ON when light is incident (Light ON)
Output Modes and Timing Char
I/O circuit
Stability
indicator
Operation
indicator
Light incident
Light interrupted
Connects to the 24 VDC
terminal.
*2
*1
1
2
Green
Orange
Receiver
*1
Brown
Pink
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Main
circuit
Black
Connects to the 0 V
terminal.
3
Blue
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
Orange
Emitter
*1
Brown
Connects to the 24 VDC
terminal.
Pink
Main
circuit
4
*3
Blue
3
ON
OFF
Emitter Timing Chart
*1
1
Control
output
Connects to the control
output terminal.
4
Emission
indicator
Operation ON
indicator
OFF
(orange)
*1
Connects to the test input
terminal.
Test input ON
OFF
Emission ON
OFF
Operation ON
indicator
(orange) OFF
Note: The F3SX performs self-diagnosis
every 20 ms.
*1
Connects to the 0 VDC
terminal.
*1. When using in Safety Category 2 configurations, make sure all terminals on the
B1 Module of the F3SX are properly connected. Do not connect the terminals to
another module. See the F3SX operation manual for details.
*2. Make sure to connect the pink wire (mode selection input 2) to 24 VDC.
*3. Make sure to connect to the 0V terminal when the E3ZS is not connected to an
F3SX and the test input is not used.
E3FS
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
Circuit Diagrams (E3FS-10B4@@@ with PNP Output)
Timing Charts
Output mode: ON when light is incident (Light ON).
Output Modes and Timing Chart
I/O circuit
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
Lit when
ON
Lit when
OFF
Light incident
Light interrupted
*1
Brown
1
Green
*2
2
Red
Receiver
Main
circuit
Connects to the 24 VDC
terminal.
Pink
4
Black
*1
Connects to the control
output terminal.
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
Internal
resistance
of the output
Blue Connects to the 0 V
IC
3
*1
Emitter
Orange
*1
Brown
1
Connects to the 24 VDC
terminal.
*1
Main
circuit
Pink
4
*3
Connects to the test input
terminal.
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
*1
Blue
3
Connects to the 0 V
terminal.
F3SS
F3SS
*1. Make sure all terminals on the B1 Module of the F3SX are properly connected.
Do not connect the terminals to another Module. See the F3SX operation
manual for details.
*2. Make sure to connect the pink wire (mode selection input 2) to 24 VDC.
*3. Make sure to connect to the 0V terminal when the E3FS is not connected to an
F3SX and the test input is not used.
Note: The E3FS-10B4@@@ functions as a standalone Sensor when it is connected
as shown in the wiring diagram above. However, it is certified a Type 2 Safety
Sensor when it is properly connected to the B1 Module of the F3SX. This also
means it must be properly connected to an F3SX to use it as part of a safety
system.
440
Control
output
ON
OFF
Emitter Timing Chart
Test input ON
OFF
terminal.
Lit when
emitting
Operation Green
indicator Red
Emission ON
OFF
Operation ON
indicator
(orange) OFF
E3ZS_E3FS.fm Page 441 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:01 PM
E3ZS/E3FS
Engineering Data
Parallel Operating Range
Mutual Interference Range
Operating position Y (mm)
Mutual interference range Y (mm)
E3ZS
Emitter
Receiver
150
Y
X
100
50
0
Receiver
150
0
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
Distance (m)
Distance X (m)
Operating position Y (mm)
Mutual interference range Y (mm)
6
8
10
12
Distance X (m)
F3SS
4
E3FS
E3ZS
2
F3SN-A@SS
6
Excess Gain Ratio
Excess gain ratio (times)
800
Y
600
X
400 Receiver
Emitter
200
0
−800
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
−600
0
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
−600
F3SP-T01
5
−400
−400
F39-TC5
4
−200
−200
F3SJ Ver.2
0
MS4800
200
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
X
Receiver
Product
Selection
3
Mutual Interference Range
Y
Safety
Sensors
2
Parallel Operating Range
400
F3SS
1
E3FS
Emitter
E3FS
E3ZS
0.1
0
Distance X (m)
600
F3SN-A@SS
−200
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
6
F3SP-T01
5
F39-TC5
4
F3SJ Ver.2
3
MS4800
2
1
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
−150
10
Product
Selection
−50
−150
1
X
50
−100
0
Y
100
−100
−200
100
Emitter
Safety
Sensors
−50
200
Excess gain ratio (times)
200
Excess Gain Ratio
1
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
Distance X (m)
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
Distance (m)
441
E3ZS_E3FS.fm Page 442 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:01 PM
E3ZS/E3FS
Dimensions
(Unit: mm)
Sensors
Pre-wired Cable with ABS Resin Case
10.8 10.4 3.54
E3ZS-T81A
Operation indicator (Receiver only)
Emitting indicator (Emitter only)
Stability indicator (Receiver only)
2.1
6.7 dia.
8
20
17
Lens
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Beam
31 25.4
15.5
2-M3
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Vinyl-insulated round cord with four Receiver conductors and
three Emitter conductors, 4 dia. (cross sections of conductors:
0.2 mm2, insulation system: 1.1 mm dia.) Standard length: 2 m
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
Pre-wired Cable with ABS Resin Case
E3FS-10B4 2M
3.2
64.9
Lens surface
42.3
22
37
4.8 dia.
4 dia.
*
24
16.4 dia.
5
9 dia.
M18 × 1
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
* Vinyl-insulated round cord with four
Receiver conductors and three Emitter
conductors, 4 dia. (cross sections of
conductors: 0.2 mm2, insulation system:
1.1 mm dia.)
Operation indicator
4
8
Connector with Metal Case
E3FS-10B4-M1-M
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
76
65.5
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
42.3
Lens surface
24
37
4.8 dia.
M12 × 1
27.7
9 dia.
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
Safety Controller
F3SX
For details, refer to F3SX on page 652.
F3SS
F3SS
442
4
M18 × 1
Operation indicator
16.4 dia.
E3ZS_E3FS.fm Page 443 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:01 PM
E3ZS/E3FS
Accessories (Order Separately)
Branch Connector
50.6
F39-CN3
24.6
*
14 3
2
2
14
3
29
Wiring Diagram
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
26
Material: Plastic
18 dia. Hexagonal bolt: M5 x 32
R1.7 3.4
5.8
14°
R20
R3.5
E3FS
E3ZS
7
30
R1
F3SN-A@SS
47 max.
R1.7
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
32±0.2
17 max.
E39-L104
F3SP-T01
Y92E-B18
Sensor Mounting Bracket (for E3ZS)
F39-TC5
Sensor Mounting Bracket (for E3FS)
F39-CN4
15
F3SJ Ver.2
* The molded part B of the Connector is black.
Dummy Plug
20
MS4800
4
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
1
2 3
1 2 3 4
Product
Selection
4
3
2
1
Safety
Sensors
4
3
2
1
6
3.4
29
4.5
16
Two, 3.2 dia.
12.5 (13.7)
3.5
(39) 37.8
R25.4
3.2
Material: Stainless steel (SUS304)
8.8
R1
R1.6
10°
443
E3ZS_E3FS.fm Page 444 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:01 PM
E3ZS/E3FS
Cables with Connectors on Both Ends for Branch Connection
F39-JF1S
F39-JF2S
F39-JF5S
F39-JF10S
L*
30±10
26
14.9 dia.
Model
L (mm)
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
F39-JF1S
1,000
F39-JF2S
2,000
F39-JF5S
5,000
+150
0
+150
0
+300
0
+300
0
20
40.7
Vinyl-insulated round cord, 6 dia. (gray),
4 conductors (cross sections of conductors: 0.5 mm2,
insulation system: 1.70 mm dia.),
Standard length: L *
* Dimensions will vary with the model as shown in the table on the left.
15
F39-JF10S 10,000
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Cables with Connectors (Socket and Plug) on Both Ends
XS2W-D421-C81-A (L=1m)
XS2W-D421-D81-A (L=2m)
XS2W-D421-G81-A (L=5m)
XS2W-D421-J81-A (L=10m)
XS2W-D421-C81-R (L=1m)
XS2W-D421-D81-R (L=2m)
XS2W-D421-G81-R (L=5m)
XS2W-D421-J81-R (L=10m)
6 dia.
14.9 dia.
14.9 dia.
MS4800
MS4800
40.7
44.7
L
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
XS2W-D422-D81-A (L=2m)
XS2W-D422-G81-A (L=5m)
14.9 dia.
32.3
6 dia.
28.3
25.3
25.3
L
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
XS2W-D423-D81-A (L=2m)
XS2W-D423-G81-A (L=5m)
14.9 dia.
32.3
6 dia.
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
14.9 dia.
40.7
25.3
L
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
XS2W-D424-D81-A (L=2m)
XS2W-D424-G81-A (L=5m)
6 dia.
28.3
14.9 dia.
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
444
44.7
25.3
L
E3ZS_E3FS.fm Page 445 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:01 PM
E3ZS/E3FS
Cables with Connector (Socket) on One End
XS2F-D421-C80-A (L=1m)
XS2F-D421-D80-A (L=2m)
XS2F-D421-G80-A (L=5m)
XS2F-D421-J80-A (L=10m)
XS2F-D421-C80-R (L=1m)
XS2F-D421-D80-R (L=2m)
XS2F-D421-G80-R (L=5m)
XS2F-D421-J80-R (L=10m)
6 dia.
14.9 dia.
30
40.7
5
L
M12
45°
M12
45°
5 dia.
5 dia.
DC
AC
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
45°
45°
F3SN-A@SS
AC
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
DC
F3SP-T01
M12
5 dia.
F39-TC5
5
50
M12
5 dia.
F3SJ Ver.2
30
MS4800
28.3
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
6 dia.
Product
Selection
L
25.3
Safety
Sensors
XS2F-D422-C80-A (L=1m)
XS2F-D422-D80-A (L=2m)
XS2F-D422-G80-A (L=5m)
XS2F-D422-J80-A (L=10m)
XS2F-D422-C80-R (L=1m)
XS2F-D422-D80-R (L=2m)
XS2F-D422-G80-R (L=5m)
XS2F-D422-J80-R (L=10m)
50
Connector Plug Assemblies, Solder Type
XS2G-D425
45°
45°
5 dia.
M12
5 dia.
14.9 dia.
DC
XS2G-D426
45°
14.2 dia.
AC
47.1
35.7
5 dia.
14.9 dia. M12 × 1
23
DC
Connector Plug Assemblies, Screw-on Type
XS2G-D4S5
58.7
M12 × 1
20 dia. 14.9 dia.
14 dia.
XS2G-D4S6
39.7
M12 × 1
20 dia. 14.9 dia.
39.6
14 dia.
445
E3ZS_E3FS.fm Page 446 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:01 PM
E3ZS/E3FS
Safety Precautions
!WARNING
OMRON's Single-beam Safety Sensor Input Module (B1
Module) from the F3SX Series is the only Controller that
can be used for the E3ZS-T81A/E3FS-10B4@@@ (type
2). Normal operation may not be possible if another
Single-beam Sensor Controller is used.
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
The Sensor cannot be used as part of a safety system
when the mode selection input of the Single-beam Safety
Sensor Receiver is connected to 0 V because the Sensor
will turn ON when light is interrupted (Dark ON). Be sure
to connect the mode selection input to 24 VDC if you want
the Sensor to turn ON when light is incident (Light ON).
Refer to the “Precautions for All Safety Sensors” on page 242 for
calculating the Safety distance.
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
446
Preventing Mutual Interference
Observe the following items during installation to prevent
Single-beam Safety Sensors from interfering with each other or with
Safety Light Curtains.
• Leave adequate space between the Sensors during installation.
(Refer to the instruction manuals for the E3ZS/E3FS and the
F3SN/F3SH.)
• Use baffle plates to separate Sensors.
• Alternate Emitters and Receivers during installation. (See the
figure below.)
Emitter
Receiver
Receiver
Emitter
Emitter
Receiver
Receiver
Emitter
Check for mutual interference between Single-beam Safety Sensors
or Safety Light Curtains connected to the same or different Control
Units before finalizing placement and starting normal operation.
!WARNING
When installing multiple Safety Light Curtains,
Multi-beam Safety Sensors, and Single-beam Safety
Sensors, take necessary steps to prevent mutual
interference. Otherwise detection may fail and serious
injury may result.
E3ZS_E3FS.fm Page 447 Friday, October 31, 2008 3:01 PM
MEMO
447
F3SS.fm Page 448 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:40 PM
Single-beam Safety Sensor for Long Distance Detection
F3SS
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
60-m long-distance detection.
This transmissive-type photoelectric
sensor for human body detection (Type
4) is ideal for integrated protection of an
entire line or multi-sided detection of
intrusion into large machines.
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
• Mutual interference protection function for up to four sets.
• Complies with IEC standards and North American standards
(received IEC61496-1, -2, and UL/CSA certification). Can be
used as a safety guard for satisfaction of OSHA requirements for
on-site labor safety in North America.
• Special controller not needed. Detection of human body intrusion
is possible using just the sensor unit.
• Includes “Start/restart interlock function” to prevent automatic
reset of output.
• The projector lens and receiver lens are equipped with heaters
for worry-free operation even in environments where
condensation easily forms.
• Optional glass and stainless steel mirrors are available.
Be sure to read the “Safety Precautions” on page 455
and the “Precautions for All Safety Sensors” on page 242.
Ordering Information
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
Sensors
Sensor type
Infrared
Appearance
Through-beam
Case material
Aluminum
Connection
method
Sensing distance
Connected to
the terminal
block on the
internal board.
0.3 to 60 m
Output
PNP output
Note: F3SS-AT60P-L Emitter and F3SS-AT60P-D Receiver can also be ordered individually.
Accessories (Order Separately)
Item
Model
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
Laser Alignment Kit (for beam alignment)
F39-LLK
Glass Mirror
F39-MSG
Stainless Steel Mirror
F39-MSS
45° Mirror Clamp
F39-LM45
F3SS
F3SS
Mirror Clamp for Wall Mounting
F39-LA
Sensor Clamp for 42-mm-diameter Pipe Stand
F39-LSP
Note: Wiring is based on a built-in terminal block. Please purchase a 4-mm to 7-mm (dia.) cable separately.
448
Model
F3SS-AT60P
F3SS.fm Page 449 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:40 PM
F3SS
Specifications
Item
F3SS-AT60P
Model
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
4 s or less
Power supply voltage
24 VDC ±10% (ripple p-p: 5% max.)
(Vs)
F3SN-A@SS
Startup waiting time
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
35 ms max.
F3SP-T01
0.3 to 60 m
Response time
(under stable light
incident condition)
F39-TC5
Diameter 36 mm
Sensing distance
F3SJ Ver.2
Opaque objects, 31 mm in diameter or greater
Lens diameter
MS4800
Category 4, 3, 2, 1, or B
Detection capability
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Safety category
Product
Selection
Through-beam models
Safety
Sensors
Sensor type
Current consumption Emitter: 170 mA max.
(no load)
Receiver: 800 mA max.
Light source (emitted
Infrared LED (880 nm)
wavelength)
Effective aperture
angle (EAA)
±2.5° at 3 m
Control outputs
(OSSD)
Two PNP transistor outputs, load current 250 mA or less (residual voltage 1 V or less) (excluding voltage drop due to
cable extension)
Output operation
mode
Light-ON
Indicators
Emitter: Power indicator (orange), error mode indicator (red)
Receiver: Light intensity level indicator (orange), OFF-state indicator (red), ON-state indicator (green), interlock indicator
(yellow)
Mutual interference
prevention function
Emitter Frequency Switch
Safety functions
Auto start mode, start interlock mode, and start/restart interlock mode can all be selected using a switch in the receiver.
Connection method
Connected to the terminal block on the internal board.
Protective circuits
Output load short and power supply reverse connection protection
Ambient temperature Operating/Storage: 0 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient humidity
Operating/Storage: 35% to 95% (with no icing or condensation)
Degree of protection
IEC Standard IP65
Vibration resistance
Malfunction/destruction: 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 0.7 mm, 20 sweeps each in X, Y, and Z directions
Shock resistance
Malfunction/destruction: 100 m/s2, 1,000 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Material
Aluminum (case and cap)
Weight (packed state) Approx. 2.5 kg (1 set)
Accessories
Set of mounting clamps, operation manual, caps for conduits
Applicable standards IEC (EN) 61496-1 Type4 ESPE *1, IEC(prEN)61496-2 Type4 AOPD *2
*1. ESPE (Electro-Sensitive Protective Equipment)
*2. AOPD (Active Opto-electronic Protective Devices)
Connections
Wire the F3SS only after all power has been turned off.
Emitter
Terminal
block
number
Receiver
Terminal
name
Functions
+24 VDC
+24 VDC
RTN
0V (GND)
Terminal block
assignments
Terminal
Terminal
block
name
number
J3
1
Control output 1
(+)
2
For control
output 1/2 COM (-)
3
Control output 2
(+)
RTN +24VDC
J5
Terminal block
assignments
Functions
4
START(-)
5
START(+)
6
+24 VDC
7
0V (GND)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Note: Ground the projector and receiver to the ground terminal inside the case.
449
F3SS.fm Page 450 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:40 PM
F3SS
Start Interlock or Start/Reset Interlock Mode
Emitter
Timing Chart
Receiver
Light incident
Light interrupted
Start switch S1
Control output
KM1 or KM2 NO contact
Load
KM1
KM2
Control output 1/2 COM (−) [2]
Control output 2 (+) [3]
S1
Control output 1 (+) [1]
0 V (GND) [7]
+24 VDC [6]
START (−) [4]
START (+) [5]
Ground terminal
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
KM2
Ground terminal
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
KM1
0 V (GND) [RTN]
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
+24 VDC [24 VDC]
Safety
Sensors
KM1 or KM2 NC contact
E1
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
Terminal names or numbers are given in brackets [ ].
E1: 24-VDC power supply (recommended: S82K)
S1: Start switch (to release interlock): NC contact
KM1, KM2: DC-driven high-sensitivity contactors (e.g., J7AN)
Auto-start Mode
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
Emitter
Timing Chart
Receiver
Light incident
Light interrupted
Control output
F3SS
E1
Terminal names or numbers are given in brackets [ ].
E1: 24-VDC power supply (recommended: S82K)
KM1, KM2: DC-driven high-sensitivity contactors (e.g., J7AN)
450
Control output 2 (+) [3]
KM1
KM2
Control output 1/2 COM (−) [2]
Control output 1 (+) [1]
0 V (GND) [7]
+24 VDC [6]
START (−) [4]
START (+) [5]
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
Load
Ground terminal
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
KM2
Ground terminal
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
KM1
0 V (GND) [RTN]
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
KM1 or KM2 NC contact
+24 VDC [24 VDC]
F3SP-T01
KM1 or KM2 NO contact
F3SS.fm Page 451 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:40 PM
F3SS
Connection with OMRON G9SA-301 Safety Relay Unit (Category 4)
Emitter
Timing Chart
Receiver
Light incident
F3SS
Light interrupted
Reset Switch S1
K1 or K2 NO contact
K1 or K2 NC contact
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
KM1 or KM2 NC contact
Safety
Sensors
KM1 or KM2 NO contact
PLC input
Control output 1/2 COM (−) [2]
Control output 2 (+) [3]
Control output 1 (+) [1]
0 V (GND) [7]
+24 VDC [6]
START(−) [4]
START(+) [5]
0 V (GND) [RTN]
+24 VDC [24 VDC]
PLC output
KM3
Terminal names or numbers are given in brackets [ ].
S1: Start switch (to release interlock): NC contact
KM1, KM2:Magnetic contactors
KM3: Solid-state contactor (e.g., G3J)
M: Three-phase motor
E1, E2: 24-VDC power supply (recommended: S82K)
E1
PLC
IN
OUT
Feedback loop
KM3
KM1
S1
KM2
E2
A1
A2
T11
T12
T31
T32
1
TH
23
33
41
K1
K1 K2
a
13
3
4
SA
K2
K1
b
K2
a
b
Control
Circuit
JP
2
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
KM1
KM2
6
PE
T21
T23
T22
A
B
14
KM1
24
34
42
KM2
M
Note: When connecting the F3SS to the G9SA-301, disable the F3SS’s start/restart interlock function and use the interlock
function in the G9SA-301 instead.
Refer to the Instruction Manual included with the product for details.
451
F3SS.fm Page 452 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:40 PM
F3SS
Dimensions
(Unit: mm)
F3SS-AT60P
111.8
Open the back cover to access
the mode switch.
93.0
50.8
88.9
55.24
139.7
*
25.4
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Conduit, PG9
Mounting Bracket
* Receiver (Blowup)
Interlock indicator
OFF output indicator
(yellow) (red)
* Emitter (Blowup)
T-nut grooves
6.9
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
20.5
13.0
35.1
ON output indicator
(green)
Intensity indicator
(orange)
(Applicable cable dia.: 4 to 7)
32.4
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Operation
indicator
(orange)
Fault indicator
(red)
27.3
35°
47.6
50.8
6.9 dia.
MS4800
MS4800
Accessories (Order Separately)
Laser Alignment Kit (for Beam Alignment)
F39-LLK
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
The Laser Alignment Kit is used to align beams for long detection distances or when using Mirrors in the installation. A Level with a Visible Laser
Beam is mounted on top of the Emitter and an Alignment Plate is mounted on the Receiver. First, the built-in levels are used to level the Emitter
and Receiver and then the visible laser is turned ON. The heights and angles of the Emitter and Receiver are then adjusted so that the visible laser
beam strikes the cross marks on the alignment plate. (Power supply: Three AA batteries, included in the Kit.)
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
Not Using Mirrors or Using Mirror To Bend Beam
Horizontally
Using Two Mirrors to Bend Beam at a Right Angle
Level with visible laser
Level with visible laser
Alignment
plate
Mirror
Laser switch
Receiver
Emitter
Emitter
Mounting adapter
(included)
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS emitted
beams
(infrared)
Laser beam
(visible)
Receiver
Mirror
Alignment
plate
Note: The Laser Alignment Kit includes the alignment plate, level with visible laster, mounting attachment, and three AA batteries.
F3SS
F3SS
452
Mounting
adapter
(included)
F3SS.fm Page 453 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:40 PM
F3SS
Glass Mirror
Mirrored Surface
Mounting Surface
F39-MSG
Stainless Steel Mirror
#10-24 machine
screws (4)
#10 toothed
washers (4)
105
F39-MSS
These Mirrors are used to bend the beams at 90° angles. Multiple
Mirrors can be used to provide protection in two directions or to build
a detection system with a 2-beam configuration.
There are two types of Mirror: Glass and Stainless Steel. The
reflection rate of the Stainless Steel Mirror is lower, but there is no
change of breakage.
The rate of attenuation in the detection distance is 12% for each
F39-MSG Glass Mirror and 18% for each F39-MSS Stainless Steel
Mirror. The detection distances according to the number of Mirrors
used is given in the following table.
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
Mounting tabs
(4)
Product
Selection
Glass
Model
38.4
130
Safety
Sensors
Mirror
material
38.1
t=9
Detection distance (m) vs. No.of mirrors
1 Mirror 2 Mirrors 3 Mirrors 4 Mirrors
F39-MSG
52
46
40
35
Stainless
F39-MSS
steel
49
40
33
27
45° Mirror Clamp (for F39-MSG/-MSS)
F39-LM45
Use the F39-LM45 Mirror Clamp when mounting the F39-MSG/-MSS
Mirror to a wall or pipe (dia.: 42 ±1). This Clamp enables mounting the
Mirror at a 45° angle and bending the beam at a 90° angle.
1/4-20 × 1 3/4 hexagonal bolts (2)
F39-MSS/-MSG
#10-24 threaded hole
7 dia.
7
37.5
Clamp
Base
36
Mounting bracket
Flat washers (4)
Spring washers (4)
1/4-20 × 1/2 hexagonal bolts (2)
Assembled State
F39-LM45
453
F3SS.fm Page 454 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:40 PM
F3SS
Sensor Clamp for 42-mm-dia. Pipe Stand
Mirror Clamp for Wall Mounting
F39-LSP
F39-LA
This Clamp is used to mount the F3SS Sensor to a pipe with a
diameter of 42 ±1 mm.
This Clamp is used to mount the F39-LSP or F39-LM45 to a wall
without using a pipe.
F39-LSP (Two Sets of Following Parts)
F39-LA (Top and Bottom Brackets)
1/4-20 × 1 3/4 hexagonal bolts (2)
42 dia.
Safety
Sensors
Safety
Sensors
Base
51
F39-LA
(Top bracket)
Flat washers (4)
Spring
washers (4)
Clamp
Product
Selection
Product
Selection
1/4-20 × 1/2 hexagonal bolts (2)
F39-LSP
F39-LSP
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
Mountable pipe diameter:
42±1 mm
67.8
5
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
Mounting Method Using Bracket Included with F3SS
25.4
32.2
6.85 dia.
(center of tab)
F39-LA
(Bottom bracket)
Using the F39-LM45 and F39-LA to Mount
the F39-MSS/-MSG Mirror to a Wall
F39-MSS/-MSG
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
454
F39-LA
F39-LM45
F3SS.fm Page 455 Friday, October 31, 2008 12:40 PM
F3SS
Safety Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the F3SS.
Regulations and Standards
The F3SS has not received the type certification provided by Article
44-2 of the Industrial Safety and Health Law of Japan.
Therefore, it cannot be used in Japan as a safety device for pressing
or shearing machines provided by Article 42 of that law.
!WARNING
Safety Distance
Safety
Sensors
Product
Selection
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
MS4800
MS4800
F3SJ Ver.2
F3SJ Ver.2
F39-TC5
F39-TC5
F3SP-T01
F3SP-T01
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A
F3SN-B
F3SH-A
F3SN-A@SS
F3SN-A@SS
E3FS
E3ZS
E3FS
E3ZS
F3SS
F3SS
Do not used the product in atmospheres or environments that exceed
product ratings.
Refer to the Instruction Manual for details on installation, connections,
and operating methods.
Precautions
for All Safety
Sensors
Precautions for Safe Use
Product
Selection
Refer to the “Precautions for All Safety Sensors” on page 242 for
calculating the Safety distance.
Safety
Sensors
Always maintain a safety distance (S) between the F3SS
and a hazardous part of a machine.
Failure to do so causes the machine to fail to stop before
an operator reaches the dangerous area and may result
in serious injury.
455